28 PLC Quantum

<< Back
Quantum automation platform
Catalog Oct
01
Building a New Electric World
General contents
Modicon Telemecanique Quantum PLC platform
Quantum Automation platform Backplanes pages 1/8 and 1/9
Selection guide pages 1/2 and1/3
Selection guide pages 1/2 and 1/3
Quantum CPUs pages 1/10 to 1/13
Power supply pages 1/16 to 1/19
Discrete I/O
Selection guides pages 2/2 to 2/5 pages 2/6 to 2/11
2
Telefast 2 pre-wired system pages 2/40 to 2/49 Cable Fast pages 2/50 to 2/53
Discrete I/O pages 2/12 to 2/39
Application specific modules
Selection guide pages 3/34 and 3/35 pages 3/52 and 3/53
Analog I/O modules pages 3/4 to 3/19
Intrinsically safe I/O modules pages 3/22 to 3/33
Counter and motion control modules pages 3/36 to 3/51, 3/54 to 3/67
Selection guides pages 4/24 to 4/27 pages 4/42 and 4/43 pages 4/54 and 4/55 pages 4/60 to 4/63
I/O architectures, hot standby solution and Momentum I/O
I/O architectures pages 4/2 to 4/19
Hot standby solution pages 4/20 to 4/23
Momentum I/O pages 4/28 to 4/67
Communication
Selection guide pages 5/2 and 5/3 Selection guide pages 5/20 to 5/23
Ethernet network, Modbus Plus network, InterBus bus, Profibus bus, ASCII interface pages 5/4 to 5/19
Ethernet cable system pages 5/24 to 5/29
Programming software
6
Concept, ProWORX, OFS pages 6/2 to 6/9
Operator dialogue terminals
7
Magelis terminals and graphic screen pages 7/16 to 7/37
Magelis display units and terminals pages 7/6 and 7/15
Supervision
8
TC2000 industrial PC pages 8/2 to 8/7 Monitor Pro supervision software pages 8/8 to 8/25
Services
9
Technical information pages 9/2 to 9/5, 9/20 Partnership program pages 9/6 to 9/15 Addresses pages 9/16 to 9/19
1 Contents
Quantum Automation Platform

CPUs selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/2 and 1/3
b Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/4 to 1/7 b Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/8 and 1/9 b Quantum CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/10 to 1/13
Power supply selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/14 and 1/15

b Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/16 to 1/19
Schneider Electric
1/1

CPUs Selection guide
1
Native operating system 984 ladder logic (IEC languages require the 16 bit Concept loadable)
On-board communication ports
1 Modbus 1 Modbus Plus
On-board math coprocessor On-board processor clock speed
No
Intel 186 20 MHz
984 LL performance (logic solve time) IEC 1131-3 program memory (max)
0.31.4 ms/ K ladder logic instructions
109 Kbytes
368 Kbytes
Maximum number of option interfaces supported
Total memory RAM Flash 984 LL user logic Available registers Extended memory
256 K bytes 256 K bytes 8 K bytes 10 K None
512 K bytes 256 K bytes 16 K bytes 10 K None
Model
140 CPU 113 02

1/13
140 CPU 113 03
Page
1/2
1
Integrated 984 ladder logic and 32 bit Concept IEC
2 Modbus 1 Modbus Plus
Yes
Intel 486 DX 80 MHz
Intel 586 DX 133 MHz
0.1 ... 0.5 ms/K ladder logic instructions
0.09 ... 0.45 ms/K ladder logic instructions
896 Kbytes
2.5 Mbytes
2 M bytes 1 M bytes 64 Kbytes 57 K 96 Kbytes
4 M bytes 1 M bytes 64 K bytes 57 K 96 Kbytes
140 CPU 434 12A

1/13
140 CPU 534 14A
1/3
Performance, solutions

Introduction
Introduction
The Modicon Telemecanique Quantum Automation Series Platform provides the right solution for your control needs with a full range of high performance, compatible control products. Its architecture is modular and scaleable, so it can be configured to meet the highest performance requirements for mid-size to large control systems. Quantum systems combine a very small form factor with industrially rugged designs that ensure cost-effective and reliable installation in even the most difficult plant environments. The systems are simple to install and configure, and they cover a wide range of applications. Performance With a module depth of only 104 mm (4 inches), including the field wiring, the Quantum automation platform represents a major improvement in panel size requirements. It fits in a standard 156 mm (6 inch) electrical cabinet, saving you up to 50% over the cost of traditional control panels. It can be mounted easily on a backplane in an industry-standard panel or rack-mounted in a 500 mm (19 inch) installation. Within this small form factor, Quantum maintains Schneider's very high standards of product performance and integrity. The Quantum Platform features: b Increased system output based on very high scan rates with up to 486- and 586based processors b Tightly integrated automation technologies including motion, ASCII, communication and process control b Redundant power supply and I/O cabling options and true Hot Standby capabilities to provide the highest system availability for critical applications b Configurable output fail states for more predictable performance in critical applications b High levels of isolation for noise immunity in electrically severe environments b High-accuracy analog I/O for tighter process monitoring and control b High-speed on/off circuits and interrupt processing for higher system performance b Hot swapping (the ability to remove and insert I/O modules under power without disturbing other operating elements) for easier maintenance and increased system availability A wide range of solutions Quantum automation solutions can range from a single standalone control system of up to 448 I/O points to a multi-drop, redundantly serviced network with up to 64 000 I/O points. Connectivity to plant-level and fieldbus networks can be achieved with communication options that support over eight industry-standard networks, from Ethernet to ASCII. With advanced Intel-based CPUs, Quantum logic solve times and I/O throughput rates are fast enough to handle the high-speed demands of machine control and material handling. CPU memory sizes range from 256 K bytes to 4 M bytes. Some CPUs are equipped with floating-point coprocessor chips that solve process algorithms and math calculations at optimal speeds for process integrity and quality.
48200-EN_Ver3.2.fm/2
Schneider Electric

Introduction
Introduction
(continued)
Programming software Two popular Schneider Automation programming software packages can be used with Quantum Concept and ProWORX. Concept is a Microsoft Windows-based software that complies with all five programming languages specified in the IEC 1131-3 international standard. Concept provides a feature-rich environment where you can rapidly develop structured, reusable code. Overall design, startup and maintenance costs are significantly reduced. Concept also supports 984 Ladder Logic programming. You can easily import programs previously developed in a Modsoft environment. ProWORX programming software is a full-featured, Modicon PLC programming. ProWORX includes such features as the familiar Windows environment, an intuitive register editor, an I/O drawing generator, a network editor, real-time network status, and an advanced I/O management system. Modsoft is a field-proven DOS-based programming software for the 984 Ladder Logic language. Modsoft provides an easy step forward for users who want to step up to the improved performance of Quantum while retaining familiarity with the Ladder Logic environment .
IEC Languages Function Block Diagram Software Concept Features Math, bistables, comparators, counters/timers, logic,edge detection, communications, diagnostics State language approach using steps and transitions Boolean instruction set High-level text language with Pascal-level instructions Discrete contacts, coils and function blocks Features 984 ladder logic instruction set including contacts, coils, function blocks, process control, Equation Editor, and communications
Sequential Function Chart Concept Instruction List Concept Structured Text Concept Ladder Diagram Non-IEC Language Concept Software ProWORX or Concept
984 Ladder Logic
A simple integration path Ongoing support for our large installed customer base is a commitment we take seriously. The Quantum Automation Series provides a straightforward and costeffective integration path for existing 984 and Sy/Max users. The Quantum's enhanced 984 instruction set allows any Modsoft or translated Sy/Mate application to be executed. In fact, a 584 or 984 program written for existing Modicon controllers will run in a Quantum CPU without any translation required. Quantum is also backward-compatible with older I/O series that use the Modicon S908 remote I/O network. Our commitment to simple integration paths can reduce life cycle costs by protecting your investments in software, hardware and training. Integration of field-proven Ethernet, Modbus and Modbus Plus communication networks is available for both Quantum and Sy/Max controllers. Flexible system architectures No single control architecture can meet all the demands of today's automation market. Some systems are centralized with local I/O providing the solution. Other systems use a centralized controller with a few drops of remotely mounted I/O. Still others use many smaller distributed I/O drops along with peer-to-peer communications and integration of fieldbus data. Using a single I/O family, Quantum can be configured for all of these architectures. It is suitable for process control, material handling or distributed control. Quantum is unique in its ability to meet all your automation needs, whatever they may be.
Schneider Electric
48200-EN_Ver3.2.fm/3
Characteristics

Introduction
Mechanical characteristics
Weight/module kg lb Dimensions (H x D x W) mm 1.0 max. 2 max
250 x 103.85 x 40.34 9.84 x 4.09 x 1.59 0.5 2.0 one wire, 0.5 1.3 two wires 14 one wire, 16 two wires, 20 max Flame-retardant polycarbonate
inch
Wire size mm
AWG
Material (chassis and cover) Space in the backplane
slots
1/ module typical, 2 /module for the MMS modules
Electrical characteristics
Electrostatic discharge (IEC 801-2) air contact RFI immunity (IEC 801-3) Ground surge (IEC 801-5) kV 8 4
kV MHz kV
80 1000, 10 V/m 2, shield-to-ground
Environmental characteristics
Temperature operating storage Relative humidity Altitude
C C
% m
0 +60 -40 +85 0 95 non-condensing @ 60 C up to 5000, full operation. When the altitude exceeds 2000 m, the specified operating ambient temperature of 60 C should be reduced by 6 C per 1000 m of additional elevation. +/-15 peak for 11 ms, half-sine wave 94, connector and module
1 3
Shock Flammability Free fall
V-O
m ft
Agency approvals
UL 508 CSA 22.2-142 Factory Mutual, Class I, Div 2 CE
48200-EN_Ver3.2.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Optional conformal coating Quantum automation platform

Introduction
If your control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, Quantum modules can be ordered with a conformal coating applied to the cover and bezel. Conformal coating will extend its life and enhance its environmental performance capabilities. Mixed flowing gas (power on)
Standard EIA 364-65 levelIII Pollutant C I2 N O2 H2 S C I2 N O2 H2 S SO2 Parts/billion 20 (+/-5) 200 (+/-50) 100 (+/-20) 10 1250 50 300 Quantum's performance Meets the standard Exceeds standard (1250 parts/billion) Meets standard Exceeds standard (20 parts/billion) Meets standard Exceeds standard (100 parts/billion) Meets standard
ISA-S71.04 GXsevere
Humidity (operating)
Standard IEC-68-2-3 Concentration (%) 93 @ 60 C Quantum's performance Meets standard
Salt mist (non-operating)

Standard IEC 68-2-11 Concentration (%) 5 (+/-1) Quantum's performance Exceeds standard (5.7%)
Fungus resistance
Standard MIL-I-46058C Quantum's performance Designed to meet standard
Temperature cycling (operating)

Standard IEC 68-2-14 Cycles 100 @ 0 ... 60 C Quantum's performance Meets standard
Temperature cycling (operating)

Standard IEC 68-2-14 Cycles 100 @ 0 ... 60 C Quantum's performance Meets standard
Dust (non-operating)
Standard EIA 364-TP91 (pending) Pollutant silica calcite iron oxide alumina gypsom paper fiber cotton fiber polyester fiber carbon black human hair cigarette ash Weight (%) 36 29 12 8 5 3 3 2 1 0.5 0.5 Quantum's performance Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard
Availability All Quantum backplanes, power supplies, I/O modules, special-purpose modules and CPUs are available as conformally coated modules. Almost all the Quantum communication adapters are available as conformally coated modulesthe only exceptions are the Echelon 140 NOL 911 x0 LonWorks option modules. How to order conformally coated modules To order a Quantum module or backplane with conformal coating applied, simply append a C to the standard model number. For example, if you want to order a 140 CPS 114 00 Power Supply with conformal coating, the new model number is 140 CPS 114 00C. For more information about conformally coated Quantum modules, contact your distributor or regional sales office.
Schneider Electric
48200-EN_Ver3.2.fm/5
Presentation, description

Backplanes
Presentation
The Modicon Quantum modules mount easily into backplanes in industry-standard electrical cabinets or on 19-inch racks. Optional mounting brackets are available for rack-mounting. A backplane provides the control signals and distributes the power necessary to operate the installed modules.
Description
Six different backplane models are available(with 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, or 16 slots). Backplane slots are universal - in other words, any module may fit into any slot. Almost all Quantum modules are designed to fit into single slots on a Quantum backplane; the only exception is the MMS SERCOS motion module, which requires two contiguous slots. There are no slot dependencies in a Quantum system, although we do recommend that power supply modules use the outermost slot position for optimum heat dissipation. The only limits on the backplane are available module power and addressing space. Any backplane may be used in any of the three system architectures supported by Quantum (standalone with local I/O, remote I/O or distributed I/O). Your service inventory can be reduced because there are no special backplanes for different I/O architectures. In a Quantum system, module addressing and configuration is handled by panel software. There are no DIP switches or other hardware settings. 1 2 3 4 5 Metal frame Backplane connector Tapped holes for affixing modules Mounting holes Grounding terminals
4 2
Backplane Expander Module The 140 XBE 100 00 Quantum Backplane Expander module allows I/O in an adjacent, secondary backplane to communicate with the CPU or RIO drop adapter in the primary backplane over a custom communications cable. A Backplane Expander module must be installed in each backplane. The backplane expander cable transmits all the data communication signals between the two backplanes. Only a single Backplane Expander module can be added to each backplane. The Backplane Expander module features the following flexible characteristics: b The same 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander modules are used for the primary and secondary backplanes. A complete Backplane Expander system consists of two 140 XBE 100 00 modules and an expander cable, available in 3, 6, and 9-foot lengths. b The system can use any type of Quantum power supply. Each backplane can have a different type of power supply. b Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop. Only modules located in the secondary backplane will lose power. b Backplane Expander modules can be located in any slot in the backplane, and do not have to be placed in corresponding slots in the primary and secondary backplanes. b The Backplane Expander module is not recognized by the programming panel software. It appears as an unfilled slot in the I/O map. b All Quantum backplane sizes are supported. b The Backplane Expander system supports Local I/O, providing a low-cost way to expand to a second rack without moving to RIO. b The Backplane Expander system supports Remote I/O, including full 31 Remote I/O drop support. b The Backplane Expander module supports all existing Quantum digital and analog I/O modules, along with both Quantum high-speed counters.
Primary Backplane
SecondaryBackplane
48201-EN_Ver3.5.fm/2
Schneider Electric
References, dimensions

Backplanes
References
Description Number of slots References 140 XBP 002 00 140 XBP 003 00 140 XBP 004 00 140 XBP 006 00 140 XBP 010 00 140 XBP 016 00 Racks for: 2 Local I/O modules Remote I/O modules 3 Distributed I/O modules 4 6 10 16 Weight kg (lb) 0.230 (0.5) 0.340 (0.75) 0.450 (1.0) 0.640 (1.4) 1.000 (2.2) 1.600 (3.5)
Backplane accessories
Description Backplane expander Backplane expander cables Number of slots 1 m 2 m 3 m 19 in front rail mounting 125 mm (4.92 in) depth bracket for 140 XBP 010 00 19 in rear rail mounting 20 mm (0.79 in) depth bracket for 140 XBP 010 00 References 140 XBE 100 00 140 XCA 717 03 140 XCA 717 06 140 XCA 717 09 140 XCP 401 00 Weight kg (lb)
140 XCP 402 00
Dimensions
140 XBP 0 p0 00 3 slots 6 slots
2 slots
4 slots
10 slots
16 slots
Depth with modules : 104 mm
48201-EN_Ver3.5.fm/3
Schneider Electric
Presentations

CPUs
Presentation
The Quantum CPUs are single-slot programmable controllers with built-in executive memory, application memory and communication ports. With all memory components on-board, you do not need extra chips or cartridges for configuration. Flash-based executive memory Quantum CPUs use flash memory technology to support the CPU's executive memory and instruction set. Flash is a state-of-the-art, nonvolatile memory technology that enables field upgrades by downloading files over the Modbus or Modbus Plus port as new features and maintenance updates become available. Memory backup and protection The CPUs store the application program in battery-backed RAM. The battery is located on the front of the module and can be serviced while the CPU is running. To protect the application program from inadvertent changes during operation, the CPU 113 02 and CPU 113 03 CPUs feature a memory-protect slide switch. An LED goes on when this switch is activated. The other two Quantum CPUs, the CPU 434 12A and the CPU 534 14A offer protection in the form of a keyswitch. When the keyswitch is enabled, the application program is protected from inadvertent changes during operation. Math coprocessor hardware support For math-intensive applications, Quantum offers math coprocessor hardware on select CPU models. The coprocessor significantly improves execution times for the 984 Process Control Function Library (PCFL) and Equation Editor as well as math operations in the IEC languages. Improved floating point execution times mean more accurate performance for process algorithms and math calculations. Write protection Controller write protection minimizes the possibility of a programmer inadvertently writing from a source controller to a memory area in a destination controller that has been reserved for internal operations. The programming software sets up an enabled area in the CPU for coil access and data references from across the network. Whatever data is not enabled is prevented from writing references, both locally and over the network. This data fence option provides excellent security against data transfer errors, creating a simple and effective communications firewall. Communication ports All CPUs support Modbus and Modbus Plus networking strategies. Simple rotary switches on the back of the modules are used to set the network address of the Modbus Plus port(s). Each device on a Modbus Plus network must have a unique address in the range 1 ... 64. Modbus port settings include baud, parity, number of data bits, number of stop bits, protocol and drop address. By default, these settings are 9600 baud, even parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, RTU mode and address 1. A slide switch on the front of the CPU can reset the Modbus port parameters to an alternative power-up mode that supports modem communications2400 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, ASCII mode and address 1.
48202-EN_Ver4.1.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Description

CPUs
Description
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Model number and color code LED array Removable, hinged door and customer identification label Battery Micro switches Modbus port Modbus Plus port A Modbus Plus port B
3 4 5 6 7
Note : The 140 CPU 113 0x CPUs have one Modbus and one Modbus Plus Communications ports.
Slide switches Each of the two slide switches has three-position functionality: The left slide switch activates the memory write-protect. In the upper position, write protection is enabled; in the middle position, write protection is disabled. The right slide switch determines the startup communication parameters for the Modbus port. The middle position, RTU, is the factory-set default. The upper position, ASCII, is for modem communications. If you need to set special startup parameters for the Modbus portfor example, if your Modbus address is not 1you can set application-specific parameters in memory and set the slide switch in the bottom position.
Language choices Advanced IEC 61131-3 Languages Quantum's 5 IEC 61131-3 languages are: b Sequential Function Chart: provides overall structure and coordination for batch oriented process of machine control applications. b Function Block Diagram: particularly well suited for process control applications. b Ladder Diagram: excellent for discrete control and interlocking logic. b Structured Text: higher level language which is a terrific solution for complex algorithms and data manipulation. b Instruction List: low level language for optimized code performance. 984 Ladder Logic A high performance, low level language whose application source code resides in the controller. A full set of over 80 instructions are included with every Quantum CPU. The 984 instruction set ensures compatibility and easy integration paths for installed Modicon applications, including: b Immediate I/O and interrupt servicing to enhance system performance. b Equation editor for easier match capabilities.
Schneider Electric
48202-EN_Ver4.1.fm/3
Characteristics

CPUs
Characteristics
Model Processor Math coprocessor Clock speed User logic max. IEC program 984 ladder logic Reference capacity discretes registers extended memory Logic solve time (984 LL instructions) Watchdog timer TOD clock accuracy Local I/O Maximum I/O words MHz words words 140 CPU 113 02 80186 No 20 109 K 8K 140 CPU 113 03 80186 No 20 368 K 16 K 140 CPU 434 12A 80486 Yes 66 896 K 64 K 140 CPU 534 14A 80586 Yes 133 2.5 M 64 K
bits words words ms/k ms s/day
8192 in/8192 out 9999 max 0.3 ... 1.4
8192 in/8192 out 9999 max 0.3 ... 1.4
64 K any mix 57 K max 96 K 0.1 ... 0.5
64 K any mix 57 K max 96 K 0.9 ... 0.45
250 (software-adjustable) +/-8@ 060 C 64 I/64 O 64 I/64 O 31 1 45C
Remote I/O (RIO) I/O words/drop number of drops number of networks Distributed I/O (DIO) I/O words/drop I/O words/network drops/networks number of networks Battey type service life Lifetime load current, typical load current, max communication ports Modbus (RS 232) Modbus Plus Maximum number of NOM, NOE, CRP, MMS modules supported Key switch Required bus current mA mAh yrs A A
30 I/30 O 500 I/500 O 63 3 lithium 1200 10 5 110 7 210 7 210 14 420
1 1
1 1
2 1
2 1
2 No 780
2 No 790
6 Yes 1800
6 Yes 1800
48202-EN_Ver4.1.fm/4
Schneider Electric
References, Accesories

CPUs
References
Memory 256 K bytes 512 K bytes 2 M bytes 4 M bytes Co-processor No No integrated integrated Reference 140 CPU 113 02 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 113 12A 140 CPU 534 14A Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66) 0.850 (1.87) 0.850 (1.87)
Accessories
Description Programming cable for Modbus interface Length m (ft) 3.7 (12) 15 (50) Battery for CPU Quantum automation series hardware reference guide Reference 990 NAA 263 20 990 NAA 263 50 990 XCP 980 00 840 USE 100 0X Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66) 1.820 (4.0)
Schneider Electric
48202-EN_Ver4.1.fm/5
Selection guide

Power supply modules
Type
Standalone
Summable
Input voltage
a 100 ... 276 V
c 20 ... 30 V
c 100 ... 150 V
a 93 ... 132 V or a 170 ... 264 V
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
47 ... 63 Hz
Input current
0.4 A @ a 115 V 02 A @ a 230 V
1.6 A
0.4 A
1.3 A @ a 115 V 0.75A @ a 230 V Standalone: 11.0 A @ 60 C Summable: 20.0 A @ 60 C
Output current
3.0 A max. 0.3 A min.
External fusing
1.5 A slow-blow
2..5 A medium time lag
0.75 A slow-bow
2.0 A slow-blow
Maximum power interruption
8 ms
20 ms
1 ms
1/2 cycle at full load
Alarm relay contact
No
Model
140 CPS 111 00
140 CPS 211 00
140 CPS 511 00
140 CPS 114 20
.Page
48203/5
0479Q-EN_Ver3.0.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Summable
Redundant
c 20 ... 30 V
c 48 ... 60 V
a 93 ... 138 V or a 170 ... 276 V
c 20 ... 30 V
c 48 ... 60 V
c 100 ... 150 V
47 ... 63 Hz
3.8 A max.
1.1 A @ a 115 V 0.6 A @ a 230 V 8 A @ 60 C (124 00) 11A @ 60 C (124 20)
3.8 A max.
0.5 A @ c 125 V
8.0 A
8.0 A
5.0 A slow-blow
2.0 A medium time lag
2.0 A slow-blow
5.0 A slow-blow
2.0 A medium time lag
2.0 A slow-blow
1 ms
13 ms
8 ms
1 ms
13 ms
1 ms
Yes
CPS 124 00 - No CPS 124 20 - Yes
Yes
No
140 CPS 214 00
140 CPS 414 00
140 CPS 124 p0
140 CPS 224 00
140 CPS 424 00
140 CPS 524 00
Schneider Electric
Presentation, characteristics

Presentation
Quantum power supply modules serve two purposesthey provide power to the system backplane and protect the system from noise and nominal voltage swings. All power supplies feature over-current and over-voltage protection. They operate in most electrically noisy environments without the need for external isolation transformers. In the event of an unforseen loss of power, the power supplies ensure that the system has adequate time for a safe and orderly shutdown. A power supply converts the incoming power source to a regulated +5 V d.c. to support the CPU, the local I/O and any communication option modules mounted in the backplane. Power between the field sensors/actuators and the Quantum I/O points is not provided by these power supply modules. If your Quantum system is being used in a standalone (local I/O) or remote I/O control architecture, three types of power supplies are available: b Low-power standalone power supplies. b High-power summable power supplies. b High-power redundant power supplies. If your Quantum system is being used in a distributed I/O architecture, special low-power standalone power supplies, which are dedicated to distributed architectures and are integrated into distributed I/O adapter modules, are available. Distributed power supplies are described in the DIO architecture section of this catalog.
Characteristics of the power supply types

Standalone power supplies A standalone power supply delivers 3 A of power to a Quantum backplane.When your control system has low-power requirements, a standalone power supply is an economical choice. Standalone supplies are available for 115/230 V a.c., 24 V d.c. and 125 V d.c. source voltages. Summable power supplies A summable power supply delivers 8 A of power to a Quantum backplane. Summable supplies can operate in either a standalone or summable mode. Whenever two summable supplies are combined in the same backplane, they automatically operate in summable modedelivering 16 A of power to the backplane. In summable mode, the two supplies must be the same model and they should be placed in the left and right edge slots of the backplane for maximum life. If one of the two supplies fails, power is lost to the backplane. If only one summable power supply is placed in a backplane, it functions in standalone modedelivering 8 A to the backplane. Summable power supplies are available for 115/230 V a.c., 24 V d.c. and 48/60Vd.c. source voltages. Redundant power supplies A redundant power supply delivers 8 A of power to a Quantum backplane. For high-availability applications, two redundant power supplies in a backplane deliver 8 A of redundant power. In the event that one supply fails, the healthy one maintains the necessary power so that backplane processing and active communications are not affected. Each redundant supply has a status bit that can be monitored by the CPU's application program or by a supervisory system so that you can respond quickly in the event of a power supply failure. If additional power is required in a redundant power supply configuration, a third redundant supply module can be added to the backplaneincreasing the total redundant power capacity to 16 A. Should one of the three supplies fail, the two healthy modules will revert to the standard redundant modedelivering 8 A of redundant power to the backplane. A single redundant power supply module may be used as a standalone supply if you need to reduce your stockroom requirements. Redundant power supplies are available for 115/230 V a.c., 24 V d.c., 48/60 V d.c. and 125 V d.c. source voltages.
48203-EN_Ver5.0.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Description

1 2
Description
1 2 3 4 Model number and color code LED array Removable, hinged door and customer identification label Terminal block
Temperature range The bus current has a guaranteed minimum value valid for the entire temperature range (up to 60 C). This chart, for a 140 CPS 114 10 standalone V a.c. supply, shows that a power supply module can provide significantly more power at lower temperatures.
Ambient temperature (C)
Time ms
Capacitor size (mF)
Maximum power interruption The buffer processing times for the CPS 214 00, CPS 224 00, CPS 414 00, and the CPS 424 00 power supplies can be increased by adding V d.c. electrolytic capacitors at terminals 5 and 6. Respective capacitor ratings are shown in this diagram.
Input voltage (V)
Schneider Electric
48203-EN_Ver5.0.fm/3
Characteristics

Characteristics for V a.c and V d.c. source voltages

Model Input Requirements Input voltage Input frequency Input current @ c 230 V @ c 115 V Inrush current @ c 230 V @ c 115 V Rating External fusing Input power interruption Harmonic distortion Output-to-bus Voltage Current Protection General Internal power dissipation W a V Hz A A A A VA A % c V A 100 ... 276 47 ... 63 0.2 0.4 20 10 50 1.5 slow-blow 93 ... 13 2 or 170 ... 264 47 ... 63 0.75 1.3 19 38 130 2.0 slow-blow 93 ... 138 or 170 ... 276 47 ... 63 0.6 1.1 19 38 130 2.0 slow-blow 140 CPS 111 00 (1) 140 CPS 114 20 (2) 140 CPS 124 p 0 (3)
1/2 cycle @ full and minimum line voltage/frequency, and less than 1 s between interrupts Less than 10 of fundamental rms value 5.1 3 max, 0.3 min Over-current, over-range 5.1 Summable: 20 @ 6 0 C Standalone: 11 @ 60 C 5.1 8 @ 60 C (140 CPS 124 00) 11 @ 60 C (140 CPS 124 20)
2.0 + (3 x I in A
OUT
) where I OUT is
6.0 + (1.5 x I OUT ) where I OUT is 6.0 + (1.5 x I OUT ) where I O U T is in A in A
Module type Requirement Input voltage Input currrent Inrush current Input ripple Input power interruption External fusing (recommended) Output-to-bus Voltage Current Protection General Surge withstand Internal power dissipation Alarm relay c V A A c V ms A c V A
140 CPS 211 00 (1) 20 ... 30 1.6 30
140 CPS 114 00 (2) 20 ... 30 3.8 max 25 @ c 24 V, 14 @ c 20 V 94 ... 189 Hz 1.0 @ c 20 V
140 CPS 224 00 (3) 20 ... 30 3.8 max 25 @ c 24 V, 14 @ c 20 V 94 ... 189 Hz 1.0 @ c 20 V
1.0 @ c 20 V 20.0 @ c 25 V 2.5 slow-blow 5.1 3 max, 0.3 min Over-current, over-range
100 ms maxi with external condensator 5.0 slow-blow 5.1 8.0
c V W
2 + (3 x IO U T), where IOUT is A 6 + (1.8 x IOUT ), where I OUT is A

N Y
2.3 x max rated input voltage for 1.3 ms
Module type Requirement Input voltage Input currrent Inrush current Input power interruption External fusing (recommended) Output-to-bus Voltage Current Protection General Internal power dissipation Alarm relay W c V A A ms A c V A
140 CPS 414 00 (2) 48 ... 60 3.8 max 14 @ c 40 V 13.0 @ c 48 V 2.0, medium time lag 5.1 8.0
140 CPS 424 00 (3) 48 ... 60 3.8 max 14 @ c 40 V 13.0 @ c 48 V 2.0, medium time lag 5.1 8.0
140 CPS 511 00 (1) 100 ... 150 0.4 10 1.0 max 3/4 slow-blow 5.1 3 max, 0.3 min
140 CPS 524 00 (3) 100 ... 150 0.5 @ c 125 V 28 @ c 125 V 1.0 max 2 slow-blow 5.1 8.0
Over-current, over range 15.6 @ 8 A Y 17.2 @ 8 A Y 2 + (3 x I O U T) where IOUT 6 + (1.5 x IO U T) is A w h e r e IO U T is A N N
Device Type : (1) standalone, (2) summable, (3) redundant
48203-EN_Ver5.0.fm/4
Schneider Electric
References, wiring

References
Power supplies
Input Voltage/power Type Reference Weight kg (lb)
a 120/230 V, 3 A a 115/230 V, 11 A a 120/230 V, 8 A a 115/230 V, 11 A c 24 V, 3 A c 24 V, 8 A c 24 V, 8 A c 48 ... 60 V, 8 A c 48 ... 60 V, 8 A c 125 V, 3 A c 125 V, 8 A
Standalone Summable Redundant Redundant Standalone Summable Redundant Summable Redundant Standalone Redundant
140 CPS 111 00 140 CPS 114 10 140 CPS 124 00 140 CPS 124 20 140 CPS 211 00 140 CPS 214 00 140 CPS 224 00 140 CPS 414 00 140 CPS 424 00 140 CPS 511 00 140 CPS 524 00
0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43) 0.650 (1.43)
Accessories
Input Voltage/power Type Reference Weight kg (lb)
Power connector
IP 20 rated
140 XTS 001 00
0.150 (0.33)
External wiring
140 CPS 111 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X X X X X X a.c.L a.c.N 140 CPS 114 20 140 CPS 124 00/20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X X X X X X 140 CPS 211 00 1 Power loss alarm Install jumper (for a 115 V only) a.c.L a.c.N 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X X X X X X -24 V d.c. (common) +24 V d.c. 140 CPS 214/224 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X X X X X X +24 V d.c. + _
Power loss alarm
-24 V d.c. (common)
Capacitor (optional)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X X X X X X X
Power loss alarm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X X X X X X X + 125 V d.c.
1 2 3 4 5 - 125 V d.c. (common) 6 7
X X X X
-48 ...-60 V d.c. (common) +48 ... +60 V d.c. + _ Capacitor (optional)
Internally connected. Do not wire externally.
+ 125 V d.c. X X X - 125 V d.c. (common)
Schneider Electric
48203-EN_Ver5.0.fm/5
2 Contents
Discrete I/O
Discrete I/O
Discrete I/O selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/2 to 2/11
b Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/12 to 2/39
b Telefast 2 pre-wired system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/40 and 2/41 connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs b Telefast 2 pre-wired system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/42 to 2/47 passive connections and plug-in relay sub-bases b Telefast 2 pre-wired system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/48 and 2/49 cables connectors for 984-A120-Compact PLCs
b CableFast cabling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2/50 to 2/53
Schneider Electric
2/1

Discrete I/O V d.c. input modules Selection guide
Type
Input Voltage
5 V/TTL
24 V
Number of Points
32
Number of Groups
Points/Common
Isolation
by group
Addressing Requirements
2 input words
Bus Power Required
170 mA
330 mA
Logic
Source
Sink
Source
Model
140 DDI 153 10

2/26
140 DDI 353 00
140 DDI 353 10
Page
2/2
24 V
125 V
1060 V
2030 V
96
24
16
32
16
6 input words
2 input words
1 input word
2 input words
4 input words
270 mA
200 mA
300 mA
250 A
Sink
140 DDI 364 00
140 DDI 673 00
140 DDI 841 00
140 DDI 853 00
140 DSI 353 00
2/3

Discrete I/O V a.c. input modules Selection guide
Type
Input Voltage
24 V
48 V
Number of Points
16
32
16
32
Number of Groups
16
16
Points/Common
Isolation
individual points
by group
individual points
by group
Addressing Requirement
1 input word
2 input words
1 input word
2 input words
Bus Power Required
180 mA
250 mA
180 mA
250 mA
Model
140 DAI 340 00

2/26
140 DAI 353 00
140 DAI 440 00
140 DAI 453 00
Page
2/4
c 115 V 230 V
16
32
16
32
16 1
2 8
16 1
4 8
individual points
by group
individual points
by group
1 input word
2 input words
1 input word
2 input words
180 mA
250 mA
180 mA
250 mA
140 DAI 540 00
140 DAI 543 00
140 DAI 553 00
140 DAI 740 00
140 DAI 753 00
2/5
Selection guide

Discrete I/O
V.d.c. and relay output modules
Type
Output voltage/Relay type
5 V/TTL
24 V
19.230 V
Number of points
32
96
Number of groups
Points/common
16
Maximum load Current/point Current/group Current/module
25 mA 600 mA 2.4 A
0.25 A
Addressing requirement
2 output words
6 output words
Bus power required
350 mA
330 mA
250 mA
Logic
sink
source
sink
source
Module
140 DDO 153 10
140 DDO 353 0p
140 DDO 353 10
140 DDO 364 00
Page
48204/22
Schneider Electric
Relay
1060 V source
24125 V source
1030 V
Normally open
Normally open/Normally closed
16
12
32
16
16
2A 6A 12 A
0.75 A 3A 6A
0.5 A 4A 16 A
2A N/A N/A
5A N/A N/A
1 output word
1 input word 1 output word
2 input words 2 output words
1 output word
0.5 output word
160 mA
375 mA@ 6 points 650 mA @ 12 points
500 mA
1100 mA
560 mA
source
140 DDO 843 00
140 DDO 885 00
140 DVO 853 00
140 DRA 840 00
140 DRC 830 00
48204/16
48204/16
48204/22
Schneider Electric
Selection guide

Discrete I/O
V.a.c. output modules
Type
Output voltage
24 ... 230 V
24 V ... 115 V
Number of points
16
Number of groups
16
Points/common
4 A @ 20-132 VAC, 8 A @ 170-253 VAC N/A 16 A
4 A @ 20-132 VAC N/A 16 A
1 output word
Bus power required
350 mA
Module
140 DAO 840 00
140 DAO 840 10
Page
48204/22
Schneider Electric
100230 V
2448 V
24230 V
32
4 A @ 20-132 VAC, 8 A @ 170-253 VAC N/A 16 A
4 A @ 20-56 VAC N/A 16 A
1A 4A 16 A
2 output words
320 mA
140 DAO 842 10
140 DAO 842 20
140 DAO 853 00
Schneider Electric
Selection guide

Discrete I/O
V.a.c. input/output modules
Output voltage
a 85...132 V
c 19.2...30 V
Input voltage
a 132
c 30 V
Number of points
16 input / 8 output
Number of groups
Two 8-point inputs Two 4-point outputs
4A 4A 8A
15 A 2A 4A
1 input word 0.5 output word
Bus power required
250 mA
330 mA
Model
140 DAM 590 00
140 DDM 390 00
Page
48204/22
Schneider Electric
c 19.2...156.2 V
c 156.2 V
4 input, 4 isolated output
One 4 point inputs Four output points
4A N/A 16 A
1 input word 1 output word
350 mA
140 DDM 690 00
Schneider Electric
General, description

Discrete I/O
The Module Quantum Automation Series supports a full range of discrete I/O modules designed to interface with a wide variety of field devices. All modules meet internationally accepted IEC electrical standards that ensure reliability in harsh operating environments. For even better protection and extended life in extremely harsh environments, you can have your modules conformally coated. Fully software-configurable All Quantum I/O modules can be completely configured using Concept or Modsoft. The ability to specify an I/O address for each module in software makes it easy to add or change modules in your configuration without physically changing the application program. Defining the failure mode of an output module Quantum gives you the ability to predefine how a discrete output point will respond if for any reason the module stops being serviced. You can configure the module in software so that the outputs:
b Turn off. b Go to a predefined safe state. b Hold the last value they received before the watchdog timer expired.
Failure modes can be defined on a point-by-point basis. In the event of a complete module failure, the fail state settings you have specified can be sent to the replacement module. Mechanical keying for added securit Optionally, you can insert mechanical keys between the I/O module and the terminal strip to ensure that the field wiring and the module type are properly matched. Keying codes are unique for each module type. You can also implement mechanical keying for unique slot locations so that a rack full of similar modules with similar keying codes will not be incorrectly connected. Keys are shipped with the I/O modules. They do not need to be ordered separately. I/O connectors Each I/O module requires an I/O connector (P/N 140 XTS 002 00), which can be ordered separately. The same connector can be used with all modules.
Description 1
1 2 3 4 2 Model number and color code LED indicator panel Removable, hinged door and customer identification label Terminal block
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Sample LEDs

Discrete I/O
Visual status and diagnostic information Extensive LED information is available on each module. Information includes activity on the I/O points and specific module features such as field wiring fault indication and blown fuses. Visual indication of comunication health is provided on an Active display, which can be used for troubleshooting. 32-point discrete I/O modules LED Active F 132 Color green red green Indication when on Bus communication is present External fault detected The respective input/output is turned on
16-Point discrete I/O modules LED Active F 116 1 ... 16 Color green red green red Indication when on Bus communication is present been detected A fault (external to the module) has been detected The indicated point or channel is turned on There is a fault on the indicated point or channel
Discrete Bi-directional modules LED Active F 1 and 2 left row 1 and 2 middle row 14 right row Color green red green red red Indication when on Bus communication is present No voltage supply for outputs or inputs out of tolerance Output is turned on Fault detected on the output point Fault detected on the input point
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/3
Characteristics
0

Discrete I/O
V a.c. input specifications

Model Number of inputs Number of groups Inputs/group Input voltage LEDs Addressing requirements Operating input 50 Hz on off current impedance 60 Hz on off current impedance Frequency range Maximum leakage current Absolute maximum input continuous 10 s one cycle Response time Off - on minimum maximum On - off minimum maximum Isolation a ms 4.9 0.75 x line cycle 7.3 12.3 1780 V for 1 min input-to-input 1780 V for 1 min input-to-bus Bus current requirement Power dissipation Fusing internal external none user discretion mA W 180 5.5 max 1780 V for 1 min group-to-group 1780 V for 1 min group-to-bus 180 5.5 max 1780 V for 1 min group-to-group 1780 V for 1 min group-to-bus 250 10.9 max 1780 V for 1 min input-to-input 1780 V for 1 min input-to-bus 180 5.5 max 1780 V for 1 min group-to-group 1780 V for 1 min group-to-bus 250 5 max mA k? Hz mA a mA k? a words a a 140 DAI 540 00 16 16 1 115 V Active 116 (green) 1 input Active 116 (green) 1 input Active 132 (green) 2 input 140 DAI 543 00 16 2 8 140 DAI 553 00 32 4 8 140 DAI 740 00 16 16 1 230 V Active 116 (green) 1 input Active 1...32 (green) 2 input 140 DAI 753 00 32 4 8
85132 V 0...20 V 11.1 max 14.4 capacitive 79132 V 0...20 V 13.2 max 12 capacitive 4763 2.1
175264 V 0...40 V 9.7 max 31.8 capacitive 165...264 V 0...40 V 11.5 max 26.5 capacitive
170...264 V 0...40 V
32 158...264 V 0...40 V
27
2.6
132 V 156 V 200V
264 V 300 V 400 V
264 V 312 V 400 V
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Characteristics

Discrete I/O

Model Number of inputs Number of groups Points/group Input voltage LEDs a
140 DDI 364 00

96 6 16 24 Active 3264 132 (green) indicates input state 96 points or 6 words On voltage Off voltage On current Off current
140 DSI 353 00

32 4 8 24 Active 2 green, failure 1 red 132 (green) indicates input state 4 input words 11 min 5 max 2.5 min 1.2 max, 0.3 min 30 45 Vp for 10 ms @ - 330 2.2 3.3 Broken wire detection below 0.15 mA Off current Broken wire detection for each input No Yes
Addressing requirements Voltage
a a mA mA a a
ms ms
+ 15+ 30 3+ 5 2.5 min 0.7 max 30 50, dropping pulse 2 max 3 max
Absolute maximum input
Continuous Surge
Response time
Off - On On - Off
Fault sensing Fault status Insulation resistance Internal resistance Isolation Point to point Inputs to backplane Group to group Operating temperature Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power supply Agency approvals C (F) mA W a
c
k
500 rms for 1 minute 6.7
< 270 1.35 + (0.13 x nbr of ON inputs) 19.230
Yes 0 60 (32 140 ) 250 2030 at 20 mA per group UL, CSA, CE, FM class 1, div. 2
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/5
Characteristics (continued)

Discrete I/O
V d.c. input specifications

Model Number of inputs Number of groups Points/group Input voltage LEDs Addressing requirements On state current @ c 12 V @ c 24 V @ c 48 V @ c 60 V mA mA mA mA cV 140 DDI 841 00 16 8 2 10...60 Active 116 (green) 1 input word 5...10 6...30 2...15 1...5 Active 1.32 (green) 2 input words 140 DDI 853 00 32 4 8 140 DDI 673 00 24 3 8 88150 Active 1.24 (green) 1 input word 2.5 mini at c 125 V
Group supply/tolerance c 12 V / + / -5% c 24 V / -15...+20% c 48 V / -15...+20% c 60 V / -15...+20% Absolute maximum input Response time Off - on On - off Switching frequency Isolation Group-to-group Group-to-bus Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power (Us ) Fusing Internal External Logic
V V V V cV ms ms Hz c
on state 9...12 11...24 34...48 45...60 75 V 4 4 100 max 700 V for 1 min 2500 V for 1 min
off state 0...1.8 0...5 0...10 0...9
on state 9...12 11...24 34...48 45...60
off state 0...1.8 0...5 0...10 0...12.5
0,7 (defaults filter) 1,2 (optional filter) 0,7 (defaults filter) 1,2 (optional filter)
mA W c
200 1 + (0.25 x # of points on) 10...60 V (group supply) none user discretion sink
300
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/6
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O

Model Number of inputs Number of groups Points/group Input voltage LEDs Addressing requirements Operating input 50 Hz On Off Current Impedance 60 Hz On Off Current Impedance Frequency range Maximum leakage current Absolute maximum input continuous 10 s one cycle Response Time Off - On minimum maximum On - Off minimum maximum Isolation a ms mA k? Hz mA a a 1430 V 0...5 V mA k? a 3.1 capacitive 1230 V 0...5 V 13.2 max 2.6 capacitive 4763 1.9 30 V 32 V 50 V 4.9 0.75 x line cycle 7.3 12.3 1780 V for 1 min inputto-input 1780 V for 1 min inputto-bus 180 5.5 max none user discretion 1780 V for 1 min groupto-group 1780 V for 1 min groupto-bus 250 10.9 max 1780 V for 1 min inputto-input 1780 V for 1 min inputto-bus 180 5.5 max 1780 V for 1 min groupto-group 1780 V for 1 min groupto-bus 250 10.9 max 1.7 56 V 63 V 100 V 3456 V 0...10 V .8 max 6.8 capacitive 2956 V 0...10 V 11.7 max 5.6 capacitive words a 140 DAI 340 00 16 16 1 24 V Active 116 (green) 1 input 8 24 V Active 132 (green) 2 inputs 140 DAI 353 00 32 140 DAI 440 00 16 16 1 48 V Active 116 (green) 1 input 140 DAI 453 00 32 4 8 48 V Active 132 (green) 2 input
Bus current requirement Power dissipation Fusing internal external
mA W
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/7

Discrete I/O
V d.c. input specifications

Model Number of inputs Number of groups Points/group Input voltage LEDs Addressing requirements Operating input Voltage on
c c
140 DDI 153 10 32 4 8 5 V TTL Active 132 (green) 2 input words 0.8 V
140 DDI 353 00/140 DDI 353 01
140 DDI 353 10
24 V
+15...30 V
-15...30 V (reference from group supply) 0...-5 V (reference from group supply) 2.5 min 14 max 0.5 max 2.4
Voltage off
4 V min @ US = 5.5 V
-3...+5 V 3 V min @ U S = 4.5 V
Current on Current off Internal resistance Leakage current Absolute maximum input Continuous 1.0 ms 1.3 ms Response time Off - on On - off Input protection Isolation Group-to-group Group-to-bus Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power (US ) Fusing Internal External Logic
mA
4.0 @ U S = 5.5 V and U I N =0 -
2.0 min 0.5 max 2.5
k?
7.5 200 @ U S = 5.5 V and U I N =4 V 5.5 V 15 V decaying pulse
?A
c
30 V 56 V decaying pulse 1000 max 1000 max
30 V 50 V decaying pulse -
?s
250 max 500 max Resistor limited
500 V rms for 1 min 1780 V rms for 1 min
mA W c
170 5 4.5...5.5 V none user discretion source
330 1.7 + (0.36 x # of points on) none 1.5 + (0.26 x # of points on) 19.2...30 V
sink
source
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/8
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
V a.c. output modules specifications

Model Number of outputs Number of groups Points/group Voltage (rms) Working Frequency On state drop/point LEDs
a Hz a
140 DAO 840 00

16
140 DAO 842 10

16
140 DAO 842 20
140 DAO 853 00

32
16 1 20...253 V 47...63 1.5 V Active 1...16 (green) - indicates point status
4 4 85...253 V 20...56 V
4 8 20...253 V
Active F 1...16 (green) - indicates points status 1 - 4, 5 - 8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16 (red) - indicates group blew a fuse or no field power
Active 1...32 (green) - indicates point status
Addressing requirements Operating output (rms) On state drop/point Frequency range Absolute maximum output
a Hz a
1 output word 20...253 V 1.5 V 47...63 300 V for 10 s 400 V for 1 cycle 5 85...253 V 1.5 V 20...56 V 1.5 V
2 outputs words -
63 V for 10 s 100 V for 1 cycle 111 V peak for 1.3 ms
300 V for 10 s 400 V for 1 cycle
Minimum load current (rms) Maximum load current (rms) Per point
mA
4 continuous, 20...132V 3 continuous, 170...253 V 4 continuous 16 continuous 2.5 @ 230 V 2.0 @ 115 V 1.0 @ 48 V 1.0 @ 24 V per point 30 20 10 400 V/? s .50 max of one line cycle .50 max of one line cycle RC snubber suppression
4 continuous, 85...132 V 3 continuous, 170...253V 4 continuous 2.5 @ 230 V 2.0 @ 115 V
4 continuous, 20...56 V
1 continuous, 20...253 V
Four contiguous points Per group Per module* Off state leakage/ point (max)
A A A mA
1.0
Maximum surge current (rms) One cycle Two cycles Three cycles Applied DV/DT Response Time Off - on On - off Output protection (internal) Isolation (rms) Group-to-group Output-to-output Output-to-bus Fault detection Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power (rms) Fusing Internal External
A A A a ms ms
per group 45 30 25
0.88 @ 230 V 0.44 @ 115 V 0.18 @ 48 V 0.09 @ 24 V per point 15 12 8
a a a
1500 V for 1 min 1780 V for 1 min -
1000 V for 1 min, galvanically isolated -
1780 V for 1 min
blown fuse detect, loss of field power
320 1.60 W + 1.0 V x total module load current
mA W a
350 1.85 W + 1.1 V x total module load current not for this module none 85...253 V 20...56 V
not required 4 A, 250 V for each group
5 A fuse for each group (Part # 043 502405 or equivalent) user discretion
5/point recommended
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/9

Discrete I/O
V a.c. and TTL output modules specifications

Model Number of outputs LEDs 140 DAO 840 10 16 isolated Active 1...16 (green) - indicates point status 140 DDO 153 10 32 (four groups of 8) Active F 1...32 (green) - indicates point status 2 output words
Addressing requirements Voltage (rms) Working Absolute maximum Frequency On state drop/point Output ratings On level Off level Internal pullup resistor Minimum load current (rms) Maximum load current (rms) Each point Each group Any 4 contiguous pts Per module Off state leakage/ points a a Hz a c c ? mA
1 output word
20...132 V 156 V for 10 s 200 V for 1 cycle 47...63 1.5 V
.2 V (max) @75 mA sink

v out = u s - 1.25 V @ 1 mA source v out = u s - 3.2 V (min) @ 1 mA, u s = 4.5 V
440 -
mA mA A A mA
4 continuous, 20...132 V 4 max continuous for the sum of the four points 16 continuous 2 @ 115 V max 1 @ 48 V max 1 @ 24 V max per point 30 20 10 400 V/s
75 (sink) 600 2.4 -
Surge current maximum (rms) One cycle Two cycles Three cyclT Each point Applied DV/DT Response time Off - on On - off Output protection (internal) Isolation (rms)
A A A mA a
750 @ 500 s duration (no more than 6 per minute) -
0.50 of one line cycle max 0.50 of one line cycle max RC snubber suppression, varistor a a a
250 s (max) resistive loads 250 s (max) resistive loads transient voltage suppression
Output-to-output Group-to-group Output-to-bus
1500 Vfor 1 minute 1780 V for 1 minute -
500 V for 1 minute
Fault detection Bus current required Power dissipation External power (Us) Absolute voltage (Us ) max External power supply current Fusing Internal mA W c c mA
blown fuse detect, loss of field power
350 1.85 + 1.1 x total module load current not required for this module None 4 4.5...5.5 V continuous 15 V for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse 400 + load current per point (Modicon part # 043508953)
External
Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (part 043502405 or equivalent) or any other fuse with an I 2 T rating of less than 87.
none
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/10
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
V d.c. output module specifications

Model Number of outputs Number of groups Points/group LEDs 140 DDO 364 00 96 6 16 Active +32, +64 1...32 (green) indicates output state 140 DDO 885 00 12 2 6 Active failure 1 red 1...12 (green) - indicates point or channel is On 1...12 (red) - indicates output point has an over-current condition 1 output word and 1 input word 24125 19.2156.2 including ripple 0.75 @ 0.5 A 0.75 @ < 40 C 3.0 @ 060 C 6.0 @ 060 C 4 @ 1 ms pulse (no more than 6 per minute 1 1 Group varsitor and individual point overcurrent sense No limit (internal diode 140 DVO 853 00 32 4 8 Active 1 green, failure 1 red 1...32 (green) indicates output state
Addressing requirements Voltage Output Absolute (max) Working On state drop/point Maximum load current Each point Each group Per module Surge current maximum Response time (resistive loads Each point Off - on On - off Type of output Type of signal Leakage current Output protection (internal) Load inductance maximum Tungsten load maximum per point Henry W c c c c c A A A A ms ms
96 points or 6 words < 0.5 V @ 0.5 A 0.25 4.0 24.0 < 0.1 < 0.1 Electronic, protected against short circuit and overheating 24 true high, current source 1 mA @ a 24
2 input words and 2 output words 10....30 50 for 1.0 ms decaying voltage pulse 0.4 @ 0.5 A 0.5 4.0 16.0 2.5 @ 1 ms pulse (no more than 6 per minute) typical, 2 max typical, 2 max Transient voltage suppression short circuit protection 0.5 @ 4 Hz switching frequency 2.5 @ a 10 V 3 @ a 12 V 6 @ a 24 V 500 V for 1 minute 1780 RMS for 1 minute Blown fuse, loss of power
protected)
46 @ a 130 V 41 @ a 115 V 8 @ a 24 V 50 maximum 2500 V rms for 1 minute 1200 V rms for 1 minute Over current 375 (6 points On) 650 (12 points On) None 4.0 A Not required 500 10...30 V 5.0 A fuse per group Not required
Switching frequency Isolation Field-to-bus Group-to-group Group-to-bus Fault Detection Sensing Reporting Bus current requirement External power Fusing Internal External
Hz a a a
Yes Yes
incorrect output state
mA c A
< 250 19.2...30 V
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/11

Discrete I/O
V d.c. output module specification

Model Number of outputs LEDs 140 DDO 353 00 32 (4 groups of 8) Active F 1...32 (green) - indicates point status 140 DDO 353 10/140 DDO 35301 140 DDO 843 00 16 (2 groups of 8) Active 1...16 (green) - indicates point status
Addressing requirements Voltage Operating (max)
c c c c
2 output words 19.2...30 V 56 V for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse -
1 output word 10.2...72 V 72 V (continuous)
Absolute (max) 1.0 ms on state drop/point

Maximum load current
0.4 V @ 0.5 A
50 V decaying pulse
1 V max @ 2 A
Surge current maximum Response time Off - on (resistive loads)
Each point Each group Per module Off state leakage/point Each point
A A A mA A ms ms
0.5 4 16 0.4 @ 30 V 5 @ 500 s duration (no more than 6 per minute) 1 (max) 1 (max) transient voltage suppression DDO 353 10: transient voltage suppression DDO 353 01: Overload and shortcircuit-proof through temperature supervision 5 @ 1 ms duration (no more than 6 per minute)
2 6 12 1 @ 60 V max 7.5 @ 50 ms duration (no more than 20 per minute)
On - off
Output protection (internal)
over voltage (suppression diode)
Load inductance maximum
Hz
0.5 Henry @ 4 switch frequency or L = 0.5 where: L = Load Inductance (Henry) I 2F I = Load Current (A) F = Switching Frequency (Hz) 50 500 V rms for 1 minute 1780 V rms for 1 minute blown fuse detect, loss of field power 12 @ 24 V
Load capacitance maximum Tungsten load maximum Isolation
F W c c c
700 V for 1 minute 2500 V for 1 minute -
Group-to-group Output-to-bus Group-to-bus
Fault detection Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power Fusing mA W c
330
330 (max)
160 1 + 1 V x total module load current 10...60 V 8/group time-lag 8/group The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. 2 perpoint recommended Modicon fuse#: 57-0060-00 source
1.75 + 0.4 V x total module load current 2.0 + (0.4 V x total load current) 19.2...30 V 5.0/group 5/group The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. 3 perpoint recommended, (part # 57-0078-000)
Internal External
Logic
source
DDO 353 10: sink DDO 353 01: source
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/12
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
Relay output module specification

Model Number of outputs LEDs 140 DRA 840 00 16 normally open Active 1...16 (green) - indicates point status a c c A 1 output word 20...250 V 5...30 V 30...150 V (reduced load current) 2 max, at a 250 V or c 30 V @ 60C ambient resistive load 1 tungsten lamp load 1 @ a power factor of 0.4 1/8 hp @ a 125/250 V 300 mA (resistive load) 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec) 50 Note: Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated loads of c 5...30 V or a20...250V 2 max, at a 250 V or c 30 V @ 60C ambient resistive load 140 DRC 830 00 8 normally open/normally closed pairs Active 1...8 (green) - indicates point status 0.5 output word
Addressing requirements Voltage Working
Maximum load current
Each point
Each point (30...150V) Maximum module current Minimum load current
5 max, at a 250 V, c 30 V @ 60C ambient resistive load 2 tungsten lamp load 3 @ a power factor of 0.4 1/4 hp @ a 125/250 V 300 mA (resistive) 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec) 40
A mA
Per point Maximum frequency (F)
30 resistive loads or F= 0.5 where: L=Load Inductance (Henry) IL I=Load Current (A) 20 capacitive load @ = 10 ms 1250 resistive load
Hz
Surge current maximum Per point Switching capability Response time (resistive loads) Off - on On - off
A VA
10 capacitive load @ = 10 ms 500 resistive load
ms ms
10 (max) 20 (max)
Relay contact life Mechanical operations Electrical operations Electrical operations (c 30...150 V)*
10,000,000 200,000 (resistive load @ max voltage and current) 100,000 (resistive load @ max voltage and current) 100,000, 300 mA (resistive load) 50,000, 500 mA (resistive load) 100,000, 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec) 100,000 Interposing Relay (Westinghouse Style 606B, Westinghouse type SG, Struthers Dunn 21 x 13 x P) Form A Varistor, 275 V (internal) a a c mA W Form C, NO / NC contacts Over voltage (suppression diode)
Relay type Contact protection Isolation Channel-to-channel Field-to-bus
1780 V rms for 1 minute 1780 V rms for 1 minute 2500 V for one minute 1100 5.5 + 0.5 x N = Watts (where N = the number of points on) Not required for this module 560 2.75 W + 0.5 x N = Watts (where N = the number of points on)
Bus current requirement Power dissipation
External power Fusing Internal External
none user discretion
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/13

Discrete I/O
Combo module specification

Model Number of inputs Number of outputs LEDs 140 DAM 590 00 16 (2 groups of 8) 8 (2 groups of 4) Active F (red) - no power applied to the group(s) or blown fuse 116 (green - right two columns) - indicates input status 1...8 (green - left column) - indicates output status 1 in/0.5 out word 140 DDM 390 00 140 DDM 690 00 4 (1 group of 4) 4 isolated
Addressing requirements Inputs Operating voltage On Off Impedance Current On Off Leakage current from an external device recognized as an off condition Absolute maximum input voltage
Continuous
z z k? mA mA mA z a a c
a 85...132 V @ 50 Hz a 79...132 V @ 60 Hz a 0...20 V 14.4 capacitive 11.1 max @ 50 Hz 13.2 max @ 60 Hz 0.5 max. 2.1 a 132 V 156 V 200 V -
c +15...+30 V c -3...+5 V 2.5 2.0 min. 0.5 max c 30 V 56 V decaying pulse
c 88 ... 156,2 V, including ripple c 0 ... +36 V 2.0 min. 1.2 max. c 156.2 V, including ripple -
10 s 1 cycle 1.3 ms Response time Off - on On - off Outputs Voltage
ms
min 4.9 / max 0.75 line cycle min 7.3/ max 12.3 ms
0.5 or 1.5 depending on the filter 0.5 or 1.5 depending on the filter
Operating (max) Absolute (max) On state drop/point
c c c a a a a mA
19.2...30 V 56 V for 1.3 ms decaying pulse 0.4 V @ 0.5 A
19.2 ...156.2 V, including ripple 0.75 V @ 4A
Absolute maximum outputs Continuous 10 s 1 cycle On state drop/point Minimum load current (rms) Maximum load current (rms) Per point Per group Per module Off state leakage/point Surge current maximum (rms) One cycle Two cycles Three cycles Per point
85...132 V 156 200 1.5 V 5
A A A mA
4 continuous 4 continuous 8 continuous 2 @ a 115 V (max) /point /group 30 45 20 10 30 25
0.5 2 4 0.4 @ c 30 V
4 continuous 16 continuous 1.2 @ c 150 V
A A A A
5 for 500 s (no more than 6/ min)
30 for 500 ms
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/14
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
Combo module specifications

Model 140 DAM 590 00 140 DDM 390 00 140 DDM 690 00
Outputs (continued) Load inductance max
Henry
0.5 @ 4 Hz switch frequency or L = 0.5 IF where L = load inductance I = load current (A) F = switching frequency (Hz)
2
For switching intervals> 15 seconds per ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1978/ 1989): L<9

I
2
Load capacitance max Applied DV/DT Output protection Common I/O response time Frequency On-off Off-on Module protection Inputs Outputs Isolation Group-to-group Point-to-bus Group-to-bus
f V/us
400 RC snubber suppression (internal)
50 -
For repetitive switching: L <0.7 IF where L = load inductance (Henry) I = load current (A) F = switching frequency (Hz) 0.1 @ c150 V 0.6 @ c24 V -
Hz ms ms
47 ... 63 -
1 (max) resistive load output 1 (max) resistive load output
a a a
resistor-limited transient voltage suppression (internal) 500 V rms for 1 min 1780 V for 1 min -
resistor-limited transient voltage suppression (internal) 2500 V RMS for 1 min 1780 V RMS for 1 min 1780 V RMS for 1 min
1000 V for 1 min 1780 V for 1 min -
Input group-to-output a Output-to-output Fault detection Input Output Bus current required Power dissipation mA W a
none blown-fuse detect, loss of field power 250 5.5 + 1.1 x total module load current 330 1.75 + 0.36 x input points on + 1.1 V x total output load currents
over current-each point 350 0.4 W x (1.0) x number of input points ON + (0.75) x total module output current not required for this module
External power Fusing Input
85 ... 132 V for output groups
Internal External
none user discretion A A 5 fuse for each group user discretion 5 for each group to protect the module from catastrophic failure. Not guaranteed to protect each out-switch for all possible overload conditionswe recommend that each point be fused with a 1.25 A fuse. Each output is protected by an electronic shutdown: For current output surges between 4 A and 30 A, the input point will shut down after 0.5 s. For current surges greater than 30 A, the output will shut down immediately.
Output
Internal External
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/15
References

Discrete I/O
Discrete input modules

Voltage a 24 V Description 16 isolated inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs a 48 V 16 isolated inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs a 120 V 16 isolated inputs 2 groups of 8 inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs a 230 V 16 isolated inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs c 5 V TTL c 24 V 4 groups of 8 inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs Logic source sink source c 24 V c 125 V c 1060 V 6 groups of 16 inputs 3 groups of 8 inputs 8 groups of 2 inputs 4 groups of 8 inputs c 24 V 4 groups of 8 inputs sink sink sink sink sink References 140 DAI 340 00 140 DAI 353 00 140 DAI 440 00 140 DAI 453 00 140 DAI 540 00 140 DAI 543 00 140 DAI 553 00 140 DAI 740 00 140 DAI 753 00 140 DDI 153 10 140 DDI 353 00 140 DDI 353 10 140 DDI 364 00 140 DDI 673 00 140 DDI 841 00 140 DDI 853 00 140 DSI 353 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66) 0.340 (0.75) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66) 0.310 (0.68) 0.300 (0.66) 0.330 (0.73) 0.350 (0.77) 0.300 (0.66) 0.450 (0.99) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66) 0,300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66) 0.295 (0.65) 0.300 (0.66)
Discrete output modules

Voltage a 24230 V a 24115 V a 100230 V a 2448 V a 24230 V c 5 V TTL c 24 V Description 16 isolated outputs 16 isolated outputs 4 groups of 4 outputs 4 groups of 4 outputs 4 groups of 4 outputs 4 groups of 4 outputs 4 groups of 4 outputs Logic sink source source sink c 19.2...30V c 24...125V c 1060 V c 150 V/a 250V relay 6 groups of 16 outputs 2 groups of 6 outputs 1 group of 16 outputs 16 relay outputs 8 relay outputs c 1030 V 6 groups of 8 outputs source source source normally open normally closed/open source
References
140 DAO 840 00 140 DAO 840 10 140 DAO 842 10 140 DAO 842 20 140 DAO 853 00 140 DDO 153 10 140 DDO 353 00 140 DDO 353 01 140 DDO 353 10 140 DDO 364 00 140 DDO 885 00 140 DDO 843 00 140 DRA 840 00 140 DRC 830 00 140 DVO 853 00
Weight kg (lb) 0.485 (1.07) 0.485 (1.07) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.450 (0.99) 0.410 (0.90) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66)
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/16
Schneider Electric
References
(continued)

Discrete I/O
Discrete combination I/O modules

Number of input/output 24 Number of input 2 groups of 8 inputs a 125 V 2 groups of 8 inputs (1) c 24 V 8 1 group of 4 inputs (1) c 125 V Number of output 2 groups of 4 output a 125 V 2 groups of 4 output (1) c 24 V 1 group of 4 isolated outputs (2) c 125 V
References
140 DAM 590 00
Weight kg (lb) 0.450 (0.99)
140 DDM 390 00
0.300 (0.66)
140 DDM 690 00
0.300 (0.66)
Accessories
Description Terminal block, 40 points (required for all modules) Dummy module without terminal block Dummy module with cover Jumper kit for terminal block Quantity 12
References
140 XTS 002 00 140 XCP 500 00 140 XCP 510 00 140 XCP 600 00 140 XSM 002 00
Weight kg (lb) 0.150
Discrete input simulator, 16 switches or the DAI 540 00 and DAI 740 00
Connecting cables for I/O modules fitted with HE 10 connectors

Description Connecting cables Use 2 HE 10 connectors or Telefast 2 system Lenght 0.5 m 1m 2m 3m 5m Section 0.324 mm 0.324 mm 0.324 mm 0.324 mm 0.324 mm
References
TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503
Weight kg (lb 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670
Spare parts
Description Coding kit for terminal block Quantity 60 (1) Sink (2) Sink or source.
References
140 XCP 200 00
Weight kg (lb)
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/17

Discrete I/O
Input module wiring diagrams
140 DAI 340 00
140 DAI 353 00
L (1) N (1) L (2) N (2) L (3) N (3) L (4) N (4)
input 1 common 1 input 2 common 2 input 3 common 3 input 4 common 4
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4
input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 L (1) N (1) input 7 input 8 common input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 input 13 input 14 input 15 input 16 common input 17 input 18 input 19 input 20 input 21 input 22 input 23 input 24 common
group 1
group 2
group 3
L (13) N (13) L (14) N (14) L (15) N (15) L (16) N (16)
input 25 input 26 input 27 input 28 input 29 input 30 L (4) N (4) input 31 input 32 common
group 4
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/18
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
140 DAI 540 00
140 DAI 553 00
L (1) N (1) L (2) N (2) L (3) N (3) L (4) N (4)
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 L (1) N (1)
input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 input 7 input 8 common input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 input 13 input 14 input 15 input 16 common group 1
group 2
input 17 input 18 input 19 input 20 input 21 input 22 input 23 input 24 common input 25 input 26 input 27 input 28 input 29 input 30 L (4) N (4) input 31 input 32 common
group 3
L (13) N (13) L (14) N (14) L (15) N (15) L (16) N (16)
group 4
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/19

Discrete I/O
140 DDI 353 00
140 DDI 364 00
input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 UB (1) M (1) input 7 input 8 M1 input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 input 13 input 14 input 15 input 16 M2 input 17 input 18 input 19 input 20 input 21 input 22 input 23 input 24 M3 input 25 input 26 input 27 input 28 input 29 input 30 UB (4) M (4) input 31 input 32 M4
group 1
group 2
group 3
group 4
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/20
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
140 DDI 841 00
140 DSI 353 00
input 1 input 2 M (1) UB (1) M1 common 1 input 3 input 4 M2 common 2
- input 1 group 1 input 2 - input 3 input 4 - input 5 group 2 input 6 - input 7 input 8 group A ext. supply input 10 - input 11 input 12 - input 13 group 4 input 14 - input 15 input 16 group B ext. supply group B common - input 17 group 5 input 18 - input 19 input 20 - input 21 group 6 input 22 - input 23 input 24 group C ext. supply group C common - input 25 group 7 input 26 - input 27 input 28 - input 29 group 8 input 30 - input 31 input 32 group D ext. supply group D common group A common - input 9 group 3
M (2) UB (2)
input 5 input 6 M3 common 3 input 7 input 8 M4 common 4
M (7) UB (7)
M (8) UB (8)
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/21
Output module wiring diagrams

Discrete I/O
140 DAO 840 00
140 DAO 842 10
N (1) L (1) N (2) L (2) N (3) L (3) N (4) L (4)
output 1 L1 output 2 L2 output 3 L3 output 4 L4
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 N (1) L (1)
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 common L output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 common L
group 1
output 5 L5 output 6 L6 output 7 L7 output 8 L8
group 2
output 9 L9 output 10 L 10 output 11 L 11 output 12 L 12
output 9 output 10 output 11 output 12 common L
group 3
N (13) L (13) N (14) L (14) N (15) L (15) N (16) L (16)
output 13 L 13 output 14 L 14 output 15 L 15 output 16 L 16
group 13 group 14 group 15 group 16 N (4) L (4)
output 13 output 14 output 15 output 16 common L
group 4
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/22
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
140 DDO 353 00
140 DDO 353 01
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 M1 US output 9 output 10 output 11 output 12 output 13 output 14 output 15 output 16 M2 US output 17 output 18 output 19 output 20 output 21 output 22 output 23 output 24 M3 US output 25 output 26 output 27 output 28 output 29 output 30 output 31 output 32 M (4) US (4) M4 US M (4) US (4)
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 M1 US output 9 output 10 output 11 output 12 output 13 output 14 output 15 output 16 M2 US output 17 output 18 output 19 output 20 output 21 output 22 output 23 output 24 M3 US output 25 output 26 output 27 output 28 output 29 output 30 output 31 output 32 M4 US
group 1
group 1
M (1) US (1)
M (1) US (1)
group 2
group 2
M (2) US (2)
M (2) US (2)
group 3
group 3
M (3) US (3)
M (3) US (3)
group 4
group 4
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/23

Discrete I/O
140 DDO 364 00
140 DDO 843 00
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 US (1) US group 1 output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 M (1) M1 output 9 output 10 output 11 output 12 US (2) US 2 group 2 output 13 output 14 output 15 output 16 M2 M2
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/24
Schneider Electric

Discrete I/O
140 DDO 885 00
output 1 N/C N/C N/C output 2 N/C output 3 N/C group A return group A supply N/C N/C N/C N/C output 5 N/C output 6 N/C Group A Group B N/C N/C output 8 N/C output 9 N/C group B return group B supply output 10 N/C N/C N/C output 11 N/C output 12 N/C N/C N/C Field device N/C output 7 N/C output 4
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/25
Relay output module wiring Quantum automation platform Discrete I/O diagrams
140 DRA 840 00
140 DRC 830 00
M1/N (1) US/L (1) M1/N (2) US/L (2) M1/N (3) US/L (3) M1/N (4) US/L (4)
NO 1 COM 1 NO 2 COM 2 NO 3 COM 3 NO 4 COM 4
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4
M1/N (1) M1/N (1) US/L (1) M1/N (2) M1/N (2) US/L (2)
NO 1 NO 1 COM 1 NO 2 NO 2 COM 2
output 1
output 2
output 3
output 4
output 5
output 6
M1/N (13) US/L (13) M1/N (14) US/L (14) M1/N (15) US/L (15) M1/N (16) US/L (16)
M1/N (7) M1/N (7) US/L (7) M1/N (8) M1/N (8) US/L (8)
output 7
output 8
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/26
Schneider Electric
Relay output module wiring Quantum automation platform Discrete I/O diagrams
140 DVO 853 00
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 group A common group A supply output 9 output 10 output 11 output 12 output 13 output 14 output 15 output 16 group B common group B supply output 17 output 18 output 19 output 20 output 21 output 22 output 23 output 24 group C common group C supply output 25 output 26 output 27 output 28 output 29 output 30 output 31 output 32 group D common group D supply output 3 0.75 A output 1 0.75 A
Note: When driving a load from different points, a blocking diode is required for each point. These diode (shown above) will prevent f alse fault reporting when only one of the points is commanded ON.
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/27
Combo module wiring diagrams

Discrete I/O
140 DDM 390 00
140 DAM 590 00
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 M1 (1) US (1) output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 M1 (2) US (2) input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 UB (3) M (3) input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 input 13 input 14 UB (4) M (4) input 15 input 16 input 7 input 8 N (2) L (2) N (1) L (1)
output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 common L output 5 output 6 output 7 output 8 common L input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 L (3) N (3) input 7 input 8 common input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 input 13 input 14 L (4) N (4) input 15 input 16 common
group 1
group 1
group 2
group 2
group 3
group 3
group 4
group 4
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/28
Schneider Electric
Combo module wiring diagram

Discrete I/O
140 DDM 690 00
output 1 (-) output 1 (+) output 1 (-) output 1 (+) N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C output 2 (-) output 2 (+) output 2 (-) output 2 (+) output 3 (-) output 3 (+) output 3 (-) output 3 (+) N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C output 4 (-) output 4 (+) output 4 (+) N/C N/C c 125 input 1 c 125 input 2 c 125 input 4 N/C N/C N/C N/C input group B common N/C c 125 input 3 output 4 (-) N/C output Sinking output Sourcing
Caution: The output points are not protected against reverse polarity. Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON. Note 1: Each output has terminals for multiple wire connections. Note 2: N/C = Not Connected.
Schneider Electric
48204-EN_Ver4.1.fm/29
Presentation

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Connector cables for Quantum PLCs
816575
1 0
2
2 1 5
1 1 1 2 1 13 0 1 14 1 1 15 2 1 3 1 4
1 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
5 4 3
1-2 Cabled connectors combine a standard terminal block equipped with screw terminals, two multicore (AWG 22) cables and two 20-way HE 10 connectors. Two cabled connectors are available for the Quantum range and two others for the 984-A120-Compact range. The 4 products have the following functions : - ABF-M32Hpp0 1 for Quantum relay inputs or outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16 channels. - ABF-M32Hpp1 2 for outputs directly connected to the Quantum, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16 channels and an external power supply with a direct connection to the output terminal marked 1. - ABF-M16Hpp0 for 984-A120-Compact inputs or relay outputs, with 1 x HE 10 connector each integrating 16 channels. - ABF-M16Hpp1 for 984-A120-Compact directly connected outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 8 channels.
2 3
The splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 may be used to connect sub-bases with 8-channel modularity. A single type of cable equipped with 20-way HE 10 connectors irrespective of the 8, 12 or 16-channel modularity. The HE 10 connectors may be moulded (TSX-CDPppp) or self-perforating (ABF-H20Hppp).
5 8 and 16-channel sub-bases from the Telefast 2 range. (1) The c 24 V power supply is connected using Telefast 2 sub-bases only. The c 0 V connections must be equipotential.
2/40
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
Compatibility
Telefast 2 pre-wired system Quantum PLC and NUM numeric control I/O modules with interface sub-bases
I/O modules
Modicon PLCs 984-A120-Compact Inputs 16 E

DEP 220 DEO 216 DEP 216 DEP 217
Quantum TOR InOutputs put 32 E 32 S

DAP 217 DDI 353 DDI 853 DDO 353
Outputs 16 S
DAO 216 DAP 216 DAO 216 DAP 216
TOR Analogue InOut- Inputs Outputs put put 96 E 96 S 8 E 16E 4 S

DDI 364 DDO 364
NUM numerical controllers NUM 1050/ NUM 1020 1060 Inputs/ Inputs/ Outputs Outputs 8S 64 E + 48 S 32 E + 24 S
48 O 32 I 24 O
140 140 140 140 140 64 I AVI ACI AVO ACO ACO 03000 04000 02000 02000 13000 140 ACI 03000
Connection terminal blocks Cabled connectors Splitter sub-bases Connection sub-bases p 8 channels ABE-7H08Rpp ABE-7H08S21 p 12 channels ABE-7H12Rpp ABE-7H12S21
Included ABF- M16 p Hpp0 ABE-7 (1) (5)
M16 p Hpp1
M32 p Hpp0
NUM cables not supplied M08 M16 M04 M04 M08 M32 p Hpp1 S201 S201 S200 S201 S202 p ACC04 ACC05 ACC04 ACC05 CDPppp3
(5) (5)
(1)
(2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
p p 16 channels ABE-7H16Rpp/H16Cpp ABE-7H16S21 ABE-7H16R23 ABE-7H16F43 ABE-7H16S43 Input adaptor sub-bases p p 16 channels ABE-7S16E2pp/7P16F3pp ABE-7P08T330 Output adaptor sub-bases
8 channels ABE-7S08S2pp
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(2) (2) (2)
ABE-7R08Sppp/7P08T330
16 channels ABE-7R16Sppp
ABE-7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp ABE-7S16Sppp Sub-bases for analogue/counter I/O ABE-7CPA01 ABE-7CPA02 ABE-7CPA03 ABE-7CPA21 ABE-7CPA31 (6) (1) With Telefast 2 sub-bases with no channel LED. (2) With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02. (3) Only with module DDI 853. (4) Only with module DDI 353. (5) With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 or with a cabled connector ABF-M16Hpp1 directly. (6) 2 sub-bases are required. Pre-wired cabled connectors (6) (6)
2/41
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals

"Low cost" sub-bases No. of terminals For PLCs Function No. of per on chan- chan- row nels nel number Length Type Reference of PLC of connection connection cable m 1 Screw
ABE-7H20E100
Weight
kg 0.330
2
ABE-7H20Eppp
Input or Output
16
Modicon Micro/Premium
Screw
ABE-7H20E200
0.410
Screw
ABE-7H20E300
0.480
Siemens S7
1.5
Screw
ABE-7H32E150
0.360
Screw
ABE-7H32E300
0.460
"Miniature" sub-bases Function No. No. of terminals of per on chan- chan- row nels nel number Input or Output 16 1 1
LED per channel No
Polarity distribution
Reference Type of connection
Weight kg
No
Screw
ABE-7H16C10
0.160
Yes
No
Screw
ABE-7H16C11
0.160
816462
Yes
0 or 24 V
Screw
ABE-7H16C21
0.205
ABE-7H16C21
Yes
0 and 24 V
Screw
ABE-7H16C31
0.260
816463
Input 16 and Output (1) ABE-7H16CM21
Yes
No
Screw
ABE-7H16CM11
0.160
Yes
0 or 24 V
Screw
ABE-7H16CM21
0.200
(1) 8 I + 8 Q : these products have 2 commons connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time.
2/42
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals (continued)

816464
Function
No. of channels 8
No. of terminals LED Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference per on per distribution Fuse (F) connection chan- row chanper nel number nel channel 1 1 No Yes 2 2 Yes No No Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Spring
ABE-7H08R10 ABE-7H08R11 ABE-7H08R21 ABE-7H08S21 ABE-7H12R10 ABE-7H12R11 ABE-7H12R50 ABE-7H12R20 ABE-7H12R21 ABE-7H12S21 ABE-7H16R10 ABE-7H16R11 ABE-7H16R11E ABE-7H16R50 ABE-7H16R50E ABE-7H16R20 ABE-7H16R21 ABE-7H16R21E ABE-7H16S21 ABE-7H16S21E ABE-7H16R30 ABE-7H16R31 ABE-7H16R23 ABE-7H16S43 ABE-7H16F43
Weight kg 0.187 0.187 0.218 0.245 0.274 0.274 0.196 0.300 0.300 0.375 0.274 0.274 0.274 0.196 0.196 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.375 0.375 0.346 0.346 0.320 0.640 0.640
ABE-7H16R50
Input or Output
0 or 24 V I
12
No Yes
No No No
2 2 2
No No Yes
0 or 24 V 0 or 24 V I
816465
16
No Yes
No No
ABE-7H16R31 2 No No Screw Spring 2 2 No Yes 0 or 24 V 0 or 24 V Screw Screw Spring I Screw Spring 3 3 No Yes Type 2 16 input (1) Input Output
ABE-7H16p43
0 and 24 V 0 and 24 V 0 and 24 V 24 V 0V I, F (2) I, F (2)
Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw
2 2 2
2 1 1
Yes Yes Yes
816466
16 16
(1) For Modicon TSX Micro, Premium and Numerical Controller NUM 1020/1060. (2) With LED to indicate blown fuse.
2/43
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases with soldered relays and plug-in terminal blocks
Sub-bases with soldered solid state inputs, plug-in terminal blocks

Number No. of Isolation of terminals PLC/application channels per channel 16 2 Yes Voltage V c 24 Type of connection Screw Spring
Reference
Weight kg
ABE-7S16E2B1 ABE-7S16E2B1E ABE-7S16E2E1 ABE-7S16E2E1E ABE-7S16E2E0 ABE-7S16E2E0E ABE-7S16E2F0 ABE-7S16E2F0E ABE-7S16E2M0 ABE-7S16E2M0E
0.370 0.370 0.370 0.370 0.386 0.386 0.397 0.397 0.407 0.407
ABE-7S16E2pp
c 48
Screw Spring
a 48
Screw Spring
a 110
Screw Spring
a 230
Screw Spring
Sub-bases with soldered solid state outputs, plug-in terminal blocks

No. of Isolation Output channels PLC/ voltage application V 8 No c 24 Output current A 0.5 Fault detection signal (1) Yes (2) Type of connection Screw Spring 2 Yes (2) Screw Spring 16 No c 24 0.5 Yes (2) Screw Spring No Screw Spring Reference Weight kg
ABE-7S08S2B0 ABE-7S08S2B0E ABE-7S08S2B1 ABE-7S08S2B1E ABE-7S16S2B0 ABE-7S16S2B0E ABE-7S16S1B2 ABE-7S16S1B2E
0.252 0.252 0.448 0.448 0.405 0.405 0.400 0.400
Sub-bases with soldered electromechanical relays, plug-in terminal blocks

No. of Relay channels width mm 8 5 No. of Output contacts current A 1 N/O 2 Polarity distribution/ application Type of connection
Reference
Weight kg
Contact common Screw per group of 4 channels Spring Volt-free Screw Spring
ABE-7R08S111 ABE-7R08S111E ABE-7R08S216 ABE-7R08S216E ABE-7R08S210 ABE-7R08S210E ABE-7R16S11 ABE-7R16S111E ABE-7R16S210 ABE-7R16S210E
0.244 0.244 0.250 0.250 0.352 0.352 0.352 0.352 0.547 0.547 0.547 0.547
Bistable
ABE-7R08S216
10
1 N/O
Volt-free
Screw Spring
16
1 N/O
Contact common Screw per group of 8 channels Spring Volt-free Screw Spring
10
1 N/O
Common per Screw ABE-7R16S212 ABE-7R16S212E group of 8 chan. Spring on both poles (1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode which will be detected by the PLC. (2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs.
2/44
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases
Sub-bases for plug-in solid state input relays (1)

816469
No. of Term- For chan- inals/ relay nels channel type 16 ABE-7R16T210 2
Isolation Input PLC/ connection application Volt-free
Type of connection Screw
Reference
Weight kg
ABS-7E Yes ABR-7 (2)
ABE-7P16F310
0.850
Spring
ABE-7P16F310E
0.850
Polarity distribution
Screw
ABE-7P16F312
0.850
Output sub-bases, equipped with plug-in electromechanical relays (3)

No. of Relay Type chan- width of nels mm relay
816471
No. and type of contacts
Polarity distribution/ application Contact common per group of 4 channels
Reference
Weight kg
16
ABR-7S11 1 N/O
ABE-7R16T111
0.600
ABE-7R16M111 10 ABR-7S21 1 N/O
Contact common per group of 4 output channels + 2 input common terminals Volt-free
ABE-7R16M111 (4)
0.600
ABE-7R16T210
0.735
Common on both poles (5)
ABE-7R16T212
0.730
ABR-7S23 1 C/O
Contact common (5)
ABE-7R16T231
0.730
Volt-free
ABE-7R16T230
0.775
12
ABR-7S33 1 C/O
Volt-free
ABE-7R16T330
1.300
ABE-7R16T332
1.200
ABR-7S37 2 C/O
Volt-free
ABE-7R16T370
1.300
(1) Not equipped with relays (2) Sub-bases may be equipped with electromechanical relays (please consult your Regional Sales Ofce). (3) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) may be combined on the same sub-base. (4) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (5) Per group of 8 channels. (6) Per group of 4 channels.
2/45
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases
Sub-bases for solid state and/or electromechanical output relays, plug-in (1)
No. of Relay For chan- width relay nels type mm 16 5 Isolator per channel Fuse per channel No Polarity Type distribution/ of application connection Contact common per group of 4 channels Contact common per group of 4 output channels and 2 common input terminals 10
ABR-7S2p No ABS-7SA2p ABS-7SC2p ABE-7ACC20 Reference
Weight kg
ABR-7S11 No ABS-7SC1B
ABE-7P16T111
0.550
ABE-7P16M111 (2)
0.550
No
Volt-free
Screw
ABE-7P16T210 (3) ABE-7P16T230 (3)
0.615 0.655 0.655
Spring
ABE-7P16T230E (3)
Yes
Volt-free
Screw
ABE-7P16T214
0.675
816473
No
Common on both poles (4) Common on both poles (4) Volt-free
Screw
ABE-7P16T212
0.615
p ABE-7P16T2pp
Yes
Screw
ABE-7P16T215
0.670
12
ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3p ABS-7SC3pp ABE-7ACC21
No
Screw
ABE-7P08T330
0.450
Spring
ABE-7P08T330E
0.450
16
12
ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3p ABS-7SC3pp ABE-7ACC21
No
Volt-free
Screw
ABE-7P16T330
0.900
Spring
ABE-7P16T330E
0.900

ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3M ABS-7SC3E ABE-7ACC21 Yes
Screw
ABE-7P16T332
0.900
Yes
Volt-free
Screw
ABE-7P16T334
0.900
Yes
Screw
ABE-7P16T318
1.000
Spring
ABE-7P16T318E
1.000
(1) Not equipped with relays (2) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (3) With relay ABR-7S21 for sub-base ABE-7P16T210, with relay ABR-7S23 for sub-base ABE-7P16T230p. (4) Per group of 8 channels. (5) Per group of 4 channels.
2/46
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Plug-in relays
Plug-in solid state relays (Order in multiples of 4)

Relay Funcwidth tions mm
816475
Input circuit Current
Nominal voltage V 24
Output circuit Current (1) Nominal voltage A V 2 c 24
Unit reference
Weight kg
5 ABS-7SC1B 10
Output
ABS-7SC1B
0.010
Output
24
0.5
c 548 a 24240
ABS-7SC2E ABS-7SA2M ABS-7EC3AL ABS-7EC3B2 ABS-7EC3E2 ABS-7EA3E5 ABS-7EA3F5 ABS-7EA3M5 ABS-7SC3BA ABS-7SC3E ABS-7SA3M
0.016 0.016 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.016 0.016 0.016
12
Input
5 TTL 24 Type 2 48 Type 2
c 24 c 24 c 24 c 24 c 24 c 24
a 50 Hz a 60 Hz
48 110130 230240
Output
24
2 c 24 Self-protected 1.5 1.5 c 548 a 24240
Plug-in electromechanical relays

Relay width mm 5 10 Control voltage V c 24 c 24 Output current (1) A (Ith) 5 5
816476
No. of contacts 1 N/O 1 N/O 1 C/O
Order in multiples of 4 4 4 4 4 4
Unit reference ABR-7S11 ABR-7S21 ABR-7S23 ABR-7S33 ABR-7S37 ABR-7S33E
Weight kg 0.005 0.008 0.008 0.017 0.017 0.017
ABR-7S2p
12
816474
c 24
10 8
1 C/O 2 C/O 1 C/O
c 48
ABR-7S3p
Accessory
Description Extractor for 5 mm miniature relays (1) See characterics table for specications of relays in the sub-bases Reference
ABE-7ACC12
Weight kg 0.010
2/47
References
Telefast 2 pre-wired system Cabled connectors for Modicon 984-A120-Compact PLCs
Cabled connectors for Modicon 984-A120-Compact PLCs (1)

Type of signal Input and relay output Type of connection 1 x 20-way HE 10 2 x 20-way HE 10 Gauge AWG 22 Crosssection mm2 0.324 Length m 1.5 3 16 16 2x8
ABF-M16H150 ABF-M16H300 ABF-M16H151
Modularity
Reference
Weight kg 0.300 0.550 0.500
0.5 A output
22
0.324
1.5
ABF-M16H301 1.000 3 2x8 (1) Specic lengths available (m) : 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 8 -10 -15 - 20 - 25 and 30; please consult your Regional Sales Ofce.
Correspondence tables
816498
Cabled connectors for Modicon 984-A120-Compact PLCs ABF-M16Hpp0 ABF-M16Hpp1

20-way HE 10 Terminal no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 984-A120 Compact Term. blk. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 11 12 22 20-way HE 10 1 Terminal no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-10-11-12 13-15-17 14-16-19 18-20 984-A120 Compact Term. blk. 3 14 4 15 5 16 6 17 7 18 8 19 9 20 10 21 1 2 11 12 13 22 20-way HE 10 2 Channels 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NC c 24 V c 24 V c 0V
Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 c 24 V c 0V c 24 V c 0V
Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC c 24 V c 24 V c 0V
Terminal no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-10-11-12 13-15-17 14-16-19 18-20
p ABF-M16Hpp0
2/48
References

Telefast 2 pre-wired system Cabled connectors for Modicon Quantum PLCs
Cabled connectors for Modicon Quantum PLCs (1)

816500
Type of signal
I/O module
Type of Gauge Crossconnection section AWG mm2 2 x 20-way 22 HE 10 2 x HE 10 22 20-way+ ext. supply 1 x 25-way 24 SUB-D 2 x 25-way 24 SUB-D 1 x 25-way 24 SUB-D 1 x 25-way 24 SUB-D 0,324
Length Modularity m 1,5 3 2 x 16 2 x 16 2 x 16 2 x 16 8 16 4 4
Reference
Weight kg
Input and relay output 0.5 A output
BF-M32H150 ABF-M32H300 ABF-M32H151 ABF-M32H301 ABF-M08S201 ABF-M16S201 ABF-M04S200 ABF-M04S201
0,650 1,150 0,650 1,150 0,600 0,620 0,450 0,450
0,324
1,5 3
Analogue 140 AVI/ACI input 03000 140 ACI 04000 Analogue 140 AVO output 02000 140 ACO 02000
0,22 0,22 0,22 0,22
2 2 2 2
p ABF-M32Hpp1
ABF-M08S202 0,450 140 ACO 1 x 25-way 24 0,22 2 8 13000 SUB-D (1) Specic lengths available (m) : 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 8 -10 -15 - 20 - 25 and 30; please consult your Regional Sales Ofce.
Correspondence tables
Cabled connectors for Modicon Quantum PLCs ABF-M32Hpp0
20-way 1 HE 10 Terminal no. Channels 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 c 24 V 18 c 0V 19 c 24 V 20 c 0V Quantum Term. blk 1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 10 30 9 29 20 40 19 39 20-way HE 10 Channels 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 c 24 V c 0V c 24 V c 0V
ABF-M32Hpp1
20-way HE 10 1 Channel Term. blk Channels 1 1 21 17 2 2 22 18 3 3 23 19 4 4 24 20 5 5 25 21 6 6 26 22 7 7 27 23 8 8 28 24 9 11 31 25 10 12 32 26 11 13 33 27 12 14 34 28 13 15 35 29 14 16 36 30 15 17 37 31 16 18 38 32 NC NC c 0V 9/19 29/39 c 0 V shunt shunt NC NC NC NC c 24 V 10/20 30/40 c 24 V shunt shunt Quantum
ABF-MO8S202
Pair SUB D Modicon Term. blk 2 2 4 Terminal no. 1 2 16 8 1 3 5 14 2 4 19 18 3 5 8 24 4 6 22 28 5 7 11 34 36 6 8 25 38 7 8 ABF-M16S201 9 10 Pair SUB D Modicon 11 Term. blk 12 1 14 2 1 13 2 3 4 3 14 3 17 6 5 15 4 6 8 7 16 5 20 12 11 17 6 9 14 13 18 7 23 16 15 8 12 18 17 19 1 14 22 21 20 2 3 24 23 Power supply 3 17 26 25 cable 4 6 28 27 5 20 32 31 6 9 34 33 7 23 36 35 8 12 38 37
SUB D Pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20-way 2 HE 10 Terminal no. Terminal no. 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 19 20 Power supply cable
13
SUB D Pair 2 16 5 19 8 22 11 25 2 16 5 19 8 22 11 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ABF-M08S201
Pair
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SUB D 1 3 15 4 17 18 7 20 21 10 23 24 Quantum Term. blk 1 3 6 2 5 7 11 13 12 16 15 17 21 23 22 26 25 27 31 33 32 36 35 37 SUB D 2 14 16 5 6 19 8 9 22 11 12-13 25 Pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ABF-M04S200
Pair
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 SUB D 14 2 3 16 17 5 6 19 Quantum Term. blk 2 1 8 12 11 18 22 21 28 32 31 38 SUB D Pair 1 15 4 18 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
ABF-M04S201
Pair
5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 SUB D 14 14 3 3 17 17 6 6 Quantum Term. blk 2 1 10 9 12 11 20 19 22 21 30 29 32 31 40 39 SUB D Pair 2 1 16 15 5 4 19 18 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4
2/49

CableFast cabling System General
General
The CableFast wiring system eliminates wiring between the I/O module and field wiring terminal blocks. The CableFast system reduces wiring time, lowers installation cost, and eliminates wiring errors. The CableFast system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips, available in various cable lengths that are terminated with "D" type connectors. The "D" connectors plug into DIN rail mounted terminal blocks offered in straight through or special application versions. Cables and terminal blocks are ordered separately and all terminal blocks may be used with any cable length. Pigtail cable versions are also available. i 140 CFA 040 00 i 140 CFB 032 00 The A block is a straight through point to point connection on the terminal block. Wiring of this block is identical to wiring the Quantum I/O connector (140 XTS 002 00). The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs. It is not recommended for sourced 1-wire inputs (powered from the field). The C block provides connection for 32 group fused input or output points. The block may be used for 1- or 2-wire inputs or outputs, and features a fuse per group, four groups total. Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module. (The default is input mode.) The D block is used for sensors requiring either 2- or 3-wire electrical interface. A fuse per group is supplied to accomodate the I/O module (4) groups. The E block provides connection for 32 individually fused 24 Vdc outputs. 1- and 2-wire interfacing may be selected. Field power must be supplied to the four groups. The G block is a high power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A. Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1- and 2-wire installations. It is also used for isolated AC modules. The H block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations. The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations. The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations. The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.
i 140 CFC 032 00
i 140 CFD 032 00 i 140 CFE 032 00 i 140 CFG 016 00
i 140 CFH 008 00
i 140 CFI 008 00 i 140 CFJ 004 00
i 140 CFK 004 00
2/50

CableFast cabling System Selection guide
Association
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast terminal blocks.
Terminal Blocks
140 CFA 040 00 140 CFB 032 00 140 CFC 032 00 140 CFD 032 00 140 CFE 032 00 140 CFG 016 00 140 CFH 008 00 140 CFI 008 00 140 CFJ 004 00 140 CFK 004 00
140 ACI 030 00 140 ACO 020 00 140 ARI 030 10 140 AMM 090 00 140 AVI 030 00 140 AVO 020 00 140 DAI 340 00 140 DAI 353 00 140 DAI 440 00 140 DAI 453 00 140 DAI 540 00 140 DAI 543 00 140 DAI 553 00 140 DAM 590 00 140 DDI 153 10 140 DDI 353 00 140 DDI 353 10 140 DDI 673 00 140 DDI 841 00 140 DDI 853 00 140 DDM 390 00 140 DDO 153 10 140 DDO 353 00 140 DDO 353 10 140 DDO 885 00 140 DAO 840 00 140 DAO 840 10 140 DAO 842 10 140 DAO 842 20 140 DDO 843 00 140 DAO 853 00 140 DRA 840 00 i 140 DRC 830 00 i = Valid Selections = Limited to 0.5 A per point
Quantum Modules
WARNING: The shaded rows indicate the following: 1. When using the 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block, the indicated module outputs are limited to 0.5 A per point, c150V maximum. 2. When using the 140 CFG 016 00 terminal block and the 140 XTS 012 xx high power cable, the indicated module output ratings are 2 A per point, c150V maximum and 2 A per point, a150V maximum.
i = Limited to 0.5 A per point, c 150V/ a 150V maximum
2/51

CableFast cabling System Specifications
Specifications
Power ratings
2
Dielectric withstanding voltage Creepage and clearance Terminal block wire Sizes per terminal
150 Vac/Vdc @ 0.5 A per point 150 Vac/Vdc @ 2.0 A per point *Requires the 140 CFG 016 00 terminal block and the 140 XTS 012 XX cable c1060 V and a1500 V per IEC 1131, UL 508, CSA 22.2 #142-1987 One wire - #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Two wires - #16 AWG (1.0 mm2) and above (See below for the maximum number of wires allowed per terminal.) Note: It is recommended that no more than two wires be used at one time. Wire Size #24 #22 #18 #16 #14 #12 Number of Wires 4 4 3 2 1 1
Terminal screw size Screwdriver head size type finish tightening torque System flammability rating Temperature operating storage Humidity Altitude Shock Vibration Mounting configuration Standard power cable diameter number of conductors bend radius (I.D.) High power cable diameter number of conductors bend radius (I.D.) Common specifications cable jacket wire strip length wire marking wire rating cable rating shielding agency approval jacket color: black, 0.040 in wall min, flexible PVC 0.32 in (8 mm) See the wire color coding table 300 V, 105C UL rated 2517, CSA Type AWM 1/2 FT 1 300 V, 105 C rated Aluminum/polyester tape (aluminum side out) attached at connector body (360) #22 AWG, 7/30 drain wire Shield resistance 16.55 Ohms/Mft nominal UL-758; AWM style 2517 VW-1 and CSA C22:210.2; AWM I/II A/B FT1 0.55 in nominal (14.0 mm) 8-#18 AWG (1.0 mm), 16/30 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC 32-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 10/30 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC 1.50 in min (38.1 mm) 0.43 in nominal (10.9 mm) 8-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 7/28 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC 32-#26 AWG (0.4 mm), 7/34 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC 0.75 in min (19.0 mm) 0 ... 60 C (32 ... 140 F) -40 ... +65 C (-40 ... +149 F) 0 ... 95% RH noncondensing 6,666 ft (2000 m) full operation +/- 15 g peak, 11 ms, half sine wave 10 ... 57 Hz @ 0.075 mm displacement 57 ... 150 Hz @ 1 g, total 10 sweeps DIN rail mount, NS35/7.5 and NS32 M3 0.13" (3.3 mm) flat head min captive tin plate (197 in min) 7.2 lb-in (0.8 Nm) 94 V-2
2/52

CableFast cabling System References
References
Description System cable Power type Standard Connector type I/O, SUB-D Cable type Terminated Length 0.9 m (3 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.7 m (9 ft) Order No. 140 XTS 002 03 140 XTS 002 06 140 XTS 002 09 Weight kg (lb)
3.7 m (12 ft) 140 XTS 002 12 High I/O, SUB-D Terminated 0.9 m (3 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.7 m (9 ft) 140 XTS 012 03 140 XTS 012 06 140 XTS 012 09
3.7 m (12 ft) 140 XTS 012 12 SUB-D Pigtail 1.8 m (6 ft) 140 XCA 102 06
4.6 m (15 ft) 140 XCA 102 15 I/O Pigtail 1.8 m (6 ft) 140 XTS 102 06
4.6 m (15 ft) 140 XTS 102 15
Accessories
Description Fuse kit Type Wickmann 4 A Wickmann 0.8 A Wickmann 0.063 A Terminal block Jumper 10-position common stip Quantity 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. 140 CFU 400 00 140 CFU 080 00 140 CFU 006 00 140 CFX 001 10 140 CFX 002 10 Weight kg (lb)
Terminal blocks
Description Terminal blocks Characteristics Point-to-point connection Used for 2-wire inputs 1- or 2- wire inputs or outputs 2- or 3- wire electrical interfaces Connection for 32 outputs 1- or 2- wire installations Provides plus, minus, shield and power supply interfaces I/O type All Digital inputs Input/output Sensors 24 VDC outputs High power output AC isolation Analog inputs Fuse None Individually fuse 1 fuse per group 1 fuse per group Individually fuse Individually fuse Individually fuse None Analog ouputs Individually fuse None Order No. 140 CFA 040 00 140 CFB 032 00 140 CFC 032 00 140 CFD 032 00 140 CFE 032 00 140 CFG 016 00 Weight kg (lb)
140 CFH 008 00 140 CFI 008 00 140 CFJ 004 00 140 CFK 004 00
2/53
3 Contents
Application-specific modules
Application-specific modules
Analog I/O selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/2 and 3/3
b Analog I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/4 to 3/19
Intrinsically safe I/O selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/20 and 3/21

b Intrinsically safe I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/22 to 3/33
Counter and special purpose modules selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 03/34 and 3/35
b High-speed counter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/36 to 3/39 b Latch/interrupt module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/40 to 3/43 b AS-i bus master module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/44 and 3/45 b Lon Works communications module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/46 and 3/47 b Quantum-Sy/Max integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/48 to 3/51
Quantum motion control modules selection guide . . . . . . pages 3/52 and 3/53
b Quantum 140 MSB 101 00 single-axis motion module for servomotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/54 to 3/57 b Quantum SERCOS 141 MMS motion control modules . . . . . . pages 3/58 to 3/65
b Lexium motion control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/66 and 3/67
Schneider Electric
3/1
Selection guide

Analog I/O
Type
Input Modules
Number of channels
16 differential or 16 externally tied single
Operating range
4 ... 20mA/ 1 ... 5V
0.0 ... 25 mA 0.0 ... 20 mA 4.0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20mA, +/-20 mA/ 0 ... 10V, +/-10V, 0 ... 5V, +/-5V
RTD (2-, 3-, or 4-wire), PT, NI
Interfaces
Resolution
12 bits
0 ... 25,000 counts 0 ... 20,000 counts 0 ... 16,000 counts(default) 0 ... 4,095 counts
up to 16 bits
12 bits + sign
Isolation (channel-to-channel)
30 V
30 V
200 V
9 input words
17 input words
9 input words
Bus power required
240 mA
360 mA
280 mA
200 mA
Module
140 ACI 030 00
140 ACI 040 00
140 AVI 030 00
140 ARI 030 10
Page
48205/17
Schneider Electric
Output Modules
Combined I/O
4 in/2 out
Thermocouple (Type B, E, J, K, R, S, T,mV)
4 ... 20 mA
0.0 ... 25 mA 0.0 ... 20 mA 4.0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 V, +/-10V, 0 ... 5 V, +/-5V
Multi-range in/Current out
4 in/1 out
16 bits
12 bits
0 ... 25,000 counts 0 ... 20,000 counts 0 ... 16,000 counts (default) 0 ... 4,095 counts
12 bits
16 in/12 out
500 V
None
500 V
40 V in/500 V out
4 output words
8 output words
4 output words
5 input words/2 output words
280 mA
480 mA
550 mA
700 mA
350 mA
140 ATI 030 00
140 ACO 020 00
140 ACO 130 00
140 AVO 020 00
140 AMM 090 00
Schneider Electric

Analog I/O Presentation
The Modicon Quantum Automation Series supports a full range of analog I/O modules designed to interface with a wide variety of field devices. All modules meet internationally accepted IEC electrical standards that ensure reliability in harsh operating environments. For even better protection and extended life in extremely harsh environments, you can have your modules conformally coated. Fully software-configurable All Quantum I/O modules can be completely configured using Concept or Modsoft. The ability to specify an I/O address for each module in software makes it easy to add or change modules in your configuration without physically changing the application program. I/O Map zooming Analog and special-purpose modules frequently require that you specify particular modal or operational parameters for different functions in addition to the standard I/O addressing requirements. Quantum's ability to configure multi-function modules via software eliminates the need for traditional hardware DIP switches or complex application programming. A software capability called I/O Map zooming allows you to zoom into a setup screen where you can initialize or change the module's operating parameters. This I/O Map zoom technique is used on multi-function analog input modules, highspeed counters, single-axis motion modules and temperature-sensing modules such as thermocouples and RTDs. Defining the failure mode of an output module Quantum gives you the ability to predefine how an analog output channel will respond if for any reason the module stops being serviced. You can configure the module in software so that the output channels: i Go to zero i Go to a predefined safe state i Hold the last value they received before the watchdog timer expired Failure modes can be defined on a channel-by-channel basis. In the event of a complete module failure, the fail state settings you have specified can be sent to the replacement module. Mechanical keying for added security Optionally, you can insert mechanical keys between the I/O module and the terminal strip to ensure that the field wiring and the module type are properly matched. Keying codes are unique for each module type. You can also implement mechanical keying for unique slot locations so that a rack full of similar modules with similar keying codes will not be incorrectly connected. Keys are shipped with the I/O modules. They do not need to be ordered separately. I/O connectors Each I/O module requires an I/O connector (P/N 140 XTS 002 00), which can be ordered separately. The same connector can be used with all modules.
3/4

Analog I/O Description
Description
The front panel of 140 AiI/AiO/AMM analog input or output modules comprises: 1 2 1 Model number and color code. 2 LED indicator panel Active (green): bus communication is present been detected, F (red): a fault (external to the module) has been detected, 1 ... 16 (green): the indicated point or channel is turned on, 1 ... 16 (red): there is a fault on the indicated point or channel. 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label. 4 Terminal block. 4
3/5

Analog I/O Characteristics
Input module characteristics

Model Number of channels Addressing requirements Input ranges (selectable on a per channel basis) bipolar unipolar 140 ACI 030 00 8 differential 9 input words 140 AVI 030 00
a 1...5 V a M 50 V > 20 4...20 25 250 + 0.03% + 0.05% of full scale + 0.1% of full scale + 0.04% % % dB + 0.0025 of full scale/ C + 0.005 of full scale/ C > -72 @ 60 Hz Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, + 20%
a + 10 V a 0...10 V a 1... 5 V
a+5V a 0... 5 V 4...20 mA
+ 20 mA 0...20 mA
3
Voltage input
unipolar w/offset linear measuring range absolute maximum impedance Current input
(input range) x 1.024
linear measuring range mA absolute maximum impedance mA
(input range) x 1.024
Absolute accuracy error @ 25 C (voltage mode) typical maximum Linearity Accuracy drift w/temperature typical maximum Common mode rejection Input filter Isolation channel-to-bus z z ms
+ 0.03% + 0.05% of full scale + 0.008% + 0.0015 of full scale/ C + 0.004 of full scale/ C > -80 @ 60 Hz Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 847 Hz, + 20% a 750 V, c 500 V rms, for 1 minute a 200 V, c 135 V rms max 10 for a all channels Broken wire in 4...20 mA mode Out of range 280 2.2
a 1000 V, 3000 Vpp, for 1 minute a 30 V max 5 for a all channels Broken wire (4...20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1...5 V)
Operating voltage channel-to-channel Update time Fault detection Bus current requirement Power dissipation External power
mA W
240 2 Not required
3/6

(continued)

Model Number of channels Addressing requirements RTD types (configurable) IEC platinum American platinum Nickel PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000 PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000 N100, N200, N500, N1000 140 ARI 030 10 8 10 input words 140 ACI 040 00 16 differential or 16 externally tied single ended 17 input words
C C C
- 200 ... + 850 - 100 ... + 450 - 60 ... + 180
Measurement current PT100, PT200, N100, N200 PT500, PT1000 N500, N1000 Input impedance Module ranges and resolution
mA mA M
2.5 0.5 >10
250 Nominal 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 ... ... ... ... 25 20 20 20 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts mA, 0 ... 16,000 counts (default range) mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts
Accuracy error @ 25 C Linearity (0 ... 60 C)
+ 0.01% of full scale
+ 0.125% of full scale + + + + 12 A max. 4 ... 20 mA range, 0 ... 4,095 6 A max. 0 ... 25 mA range, 0 ... 25,000 6 A max. 0 ... 20 mA range, 0 ... 20,000 6 A max. 4 ... 20 mA range, 0 ... 16,000 counts counts counts counts
Absolute maximum input Absolute drift w/temperature
mA
+ 0.5 (25 C) + 0.9 (0 ... 60 C)
30 Typical: 0.0025% of full scale Maximum: 0.0050% of full scale
C
Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus field-to-bus Working voltage channel-to-channel Input filter Common mode rejection Update time (all channels) 2-wire/4-wire 3-wire Fault detection ms s a
300 V peak-to-peak c 1780 V @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute or a a 2500 V for 1 minute
c 1780 V for 1 minute 30 V Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 34 Hz, + 25% > -90 dB @ 60 Hz 15 for all 16 channels Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected and is reported back to the controller in the 17th input Word. 360 5.0
640 1.2 Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire conditions
Bus current requirement Power dissipation
mA W
200 1
3/7

(continued)

Model Number of channels Addressing requirements TC types and ranges J K E T S R B Millivolt ranges TC resistance / Max Source Resistance Input impedance Input filter Normal noise rejection Cold junction compensation (CJC) C 140 ATI 030 00 8 10 input words 210+760 270+1370 270+1000 270+ 400 50+1665 50+1665 130+1820
mV
- 100+100 (1) - 25+ 25 (1) 200 max for rated accuracy >1 Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz, plus notch filter at 50/60 Hz 120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz Internal CJC operates 060 C (errors are included in the accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed. Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting a TC (which monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are recommended for remote CJC.
Resolution
TC ranges Millivolt ranges
Choice of:
1 C (default), 0.1 C, 1 F, 0.1 F
100 mV range, 3.05 V (16 bits) 25 mV range, 0.76 V (16 bits)
TC absolute accuracy Types J, K, E, T Types S, R, B Millivolt absolute accuracy @ 25 C accuracy drift w/temperature Operating voltage channel-to-channel Isolation channel-to-bus Update time (all channels) Fault detection Bus current requirement Power dissipation mA s c 1780 V @ 4763 Hz for 1 minute or a 2500 V for 1 minute 1 8 red LEDs to indicate out of range or broken wire conditions 280 c 220 V @ 4763 Hz or a 300 V max + 20 V + 0.1% of reading 0.15 V / C + 0.0015% of reading/ C max + 2 C plus + 0.1% of reading + 4 C plus + 0.1% of reading
W 1.5 (1) Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges.
3/8

(continued)
Output module characteristics

Model Number of channels Addressing requirements Loop voltage Loop resistance a 140 ACO 020 00 4 4 out words 12...30 V RMIN* = VLoop - 30 Vdc 0.02A RMax = VLoop - 7 Vdc 0.02A * For a loop supply less than 30 volts, RMIN is zero ohms. 140 AVO 020 00
3
+ 10 V (min load resistance = 1 k) (Jumper between reference - control terminals) + 5 V (min load resistance = 500 ) (Jumper between reference control and output - R terminals) 0...10 V (min load resistance = 1 k) (Jumper between output - R terminals) 0...5 V (min load resistance = 500 ) (Jumper between output - R and control R terminals) + 10 mA max any range (outputs are short circuit-proof) 0.1
No external resistor is required for loop voltage supply < a 30 V. Internal voltage drop Voltage output ranges bipolar a a 7 V min, 30 V max @ 20 mA
unipolar
Output current Source resistance Resolution Accuracy error @ 25 C Linearity Accuracy drift w/temperature typical maximum unipolar ranges bipolar ranges Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus Update time Settling time Fault detection ms
420 mA 12 bits + 0.20% of full scale +1 LSB + 0.004% of full scale/C + 0.007% of full scale/C
+ 0.15% of full scale
0.003% of full scale/C typical 0.005% of full scale/C max 0.004% of full scale/C typical 0.007% of full scale/C max c 500 V @ 47...63 Hz for 1 minute c 1780 V @ 47...63 Hz for 1 minute 3 for all channels 700 to + 0.1% of the final value (max) None
c 500 V @ 47...63 Hz or a 750 V for 1 minute c 1780 V @ 47...63 Hz or a 2500 V for 1 minute 3 for all channels (simultaneous update) 900 to + 0.1% of the final value Open circuit in 4...20 mA mode. Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected through the red channel LED. m (1) Up to 60 V with an external loop resistor.
Wire length
400 max
3/9

(continued)
Output module characteristics

Model Number of channels Addressing requirements Module ranges and resolution 140 ACO 020 00 See page 3/9 words See page 3/9 See page 3/9 140 AVO 020 00 140 ACO 130 00 8 8 output 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 ... ... ... ... 25 20 20 20 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts mA, 0 ... 16,000 counts mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts
(default range)
Loop voltage
a a
See page 3/9 See page 3/9 See page 3/9 See page 3/9
6 ... 30 V max 6 V min, 30 V max @ 25 mA + 0.2% of full scale + 4 A 0.0 ... 25.0 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts + 4 A 4.0 ... 20.0 mA, 0 ... 16,000 counts + 12 A 4.0 ... 20.0 mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts + 4 A 0.0 ... 20.0 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts Typical: 0.004% of full scale Maximum: 0.007% of full scale
Internal voltage drop Accuracy error @ 25 C Linearity
Absolute drift w/temperature Isolation channel-to-channel field-to-bus Update time Settling time full scale step change Fault detection
See page 3/9
See page 3/9 See page 3/9 ms ms See page 3/9 See page 3/9 See page 3/9
None c 1780 V for 1 minute 5 for all 8 channels 1.6 to 5% of the final value 3.2 to 0.1% of the final value Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. Specific channel is identified by the red channel LED. Also reported back to the controller in the I/O MAP status byte. 700 4.5 max Not required for this module 550 5.0 See loop voltage above
Bus current required Power dissipation External power Fusing internal external Voltmeter Monitor range scaling output impedance wire length
mA W
480 5.3 max See loop voltage on previous page None
None 0.063 A, 250 V (1) Fuse type: 3 AG fast acting
None None
1...5 V (main current loop must be active)
VOUT (Volts) = ILOOP (mA) x 0.25
300 typical
m 1 max (1) An external fuse is required on the master override signal when it is connected to an external source.
3/10

(continued)
Combo module characteristics

Model Number of input channels Inputs Operating ranges bipolar unipolar unipolar w/offset Resolution Voltage linear measuring range absolute maximum impedance in range a M 2.4% over and under range + 50 V > 10 > 0.5 + 2.4% over range, and -.6% under range + 25 250 a a a bytes + 10 V 0...10 V 16 + 5 V, + 20 mA 0...5 V, 0...20 mA 15 1...5 V, 4...20 mA 14 140 AMM 090 00 4 input/2 isolated output
impedance over range M Current linear measuring range a absolute maximum impedance Absolute accuracy error @ 25 C (voltage mode) typical maximum Linearity Offset Gain shift 0...60 C 0...60 C dB dB a z z ms %/C mA
% %
+ 0.03 + 0.05 of full scale Monotonic +1 LSB + 0.0014 of full scale max + 0.002 of full scale max > 80 @ 50 or 60 Hz - 3 @ 21 Hz (+ 20%), single-pole low-pass + 40 V max c 500 V, a 750 V, for 1 minute c 500 V, a 750 V, for 1 minute 320 for 4 channels Open circuit in 4...20 mA range, or over range, or under range in bipolar modes only.
Common mode rejection Input filter Operating voltage channel-to-channel Isolation channel-to-bus input channel-to-output channel Update time Fault detection
3/11

Combo module characteristics

Model Outputs loop voltage loop resistance a 140 AMM 090 00 7...30 V; up to 60 V with an external resistor RMIN* = VLoop - 30 Vdc 0.020 A *No RMIN is required for loop voltage less than c 30 V RMax = VLoop - 7 Vdc 0.020 A Internal voltage drop
a bits %
7 V min, 30 V max @ 20 mA 12 + 0.20 of full scale @ 25 C monotonic +1 LSB
Resolution Accuracy error Linearity Accuracy error 0...60 C typical maximum Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus output channel-toinput channel Update time Settling time Fault detection External power Voltmeter monitor range scaling output impedance max wire length Common addressing requirements bus current required Fusing internal external
%/C %/C z z z ms
+ 0.004 of full scale + 0.007 of full scale c 500 V, a 750 V, for 1 minute c 500 V, a 750 V, for 1 minute c 500 V, a 750 V, for 1 minute 15 for 2 channels 900 to + 0.1% of the final value open circuit indicator light and status byte see loop voltage above 1...5 V (main current loop must be active) IOUT(mA) x 0.250 = VOUT (volts)
300 typical 1
words 5 in/2 out mA 350 none required user discretion
3/12

Analog I/O References
Analog input modules

Description 8 channels, 12-bit, single-pole Range 4 ... 20 mA or c 1 ... 5 V Reference 140 ACI 030 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66)
16 channels, 025,000 counts
0...20 mA 025 mA 020 mA Ni or PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 Type J, K, E, T, S, R, B and mV
140 ACI 040 00
0.300 (0.66)
8 channels, 13-bit, RTD
140 ARI 030 10
0.300 (0.66)
3
140 ATI 030 00 0.300 (0.66) 140 AVI 030 00 0.300 (0.66)
8 channels, 16-bit, thermocouple
8 channels, 16-bit, two-pole
a 10 V or 20 mA
Analog output modules

Description 4 channels, 12-bit 4...20 mA Reference 140 ACO 020 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66)
8 channels, 025,000 counts
0...20 mA 025 mA 420 mA a 5 V, 10 V 05 V, or 010 V
140 ACO 130 00
0.300 (0.66)
4 channels, 12-bit
140 AVO 020 00
0.450 (0.99)
Analog I/O modules

Description 4 inputs, 2 outputs 20 mA; a 5 V, 10 V 05 V, or 010 V; 4 20 mA Reference 140 AMM 090 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.900 (1.98)
Accessories
Description Terminal block, 40 points (required for all modules) Quantity Reference 140 XTS 002 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.150 (0.33)
Coding kit for terminal block
60 each
140 XCP 200 00
Field I/O power connector (IP20 rated)
140 XTS 005 00
0.150 (0.33)
Cablefast Cabling Systems
See page 9/4
3/13

Analog I/O Connections
Wiring diagrams
140 ACI 030 00 140 ACO 020 00
input 1+ input 1sense 1 input 2+ input 2sense 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
input 1
monitor 1 source 1source 1-
1 2 3 4 5
U = 15 V
output 1
input 2 max. 60 V
+ + -
6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
load 1 input 3
sink 1+ source 1monitor 2 source 2source 2-
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
output 2
input 4
16 17 18
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
input 5
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
output 3
input 6
26 27 28
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
input 7
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
U = 15 V
output 4
input 8 max. 60 V
+ + -
36 37 38
sink 4+ source 4-
39 40
load 4
3/14

Analog I/O Connections
(continued)
Wiring diagrams
140 AVI 030 00 140 AVO 020 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 + -
input 1
output 1 common 1 R1 common 1 control 1 reference 1 master 1 common 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
output 1
input 2
input 3+ input 3sense 3 Input 4+ Input 4Sense 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 + -
input 3
output 2 common 2 R2 common 2 control 2 reference 2 master 2 Ret 2 common 2 output 3 common 3 R3 common 3 control 3 reference 3 master 3 common 3 Output 4 Comon 4 R4 shield 4 control 4 reference 4 master 4 common 4
output 2
input 4 max. 10 V
+ -
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
input 5+ input 5sense 5 Iinput 6+ Iinput 6sense 6
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 + -
input 5
output 3
input 6
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 + -
input 7
output 4
input 8 max. 10 V
+ -
37 38 39 40
The various wiring options are: channel 1 for 0+5 V d.c., channel 2 for 0+10 V d.c., channel 3 for -5+5 V d.c., channel 4 for -10+10 V d.c.
3/15

Special-purpose modules Connections
(continued)
High-speed counter modules wiring diagram

140 AMM 090 00 Output section 2 channels Typical Wiring Outputs Current Source (-) 1
2 3 1
Monitor 1
+
V
Channel 1 - The output shows a connection to an external field device and optional monitor. Channel 2 - The output shows a connection to an external field device and the input of channel 1.
Current Source (-) 1

4 5
N/C N/C
7
N/C
Optional Monitor Voltmeter 1V = 4 mA a 24 5 V = 20 mA Field Supply +
N/C
8
N/C
9

10
Current Sink (+) 1 Monitor 2
11

12 13
Field Device 4 - 20 mA Current

14
N/C N/C N/C Current Sink (+) 2 IN (+) 1 Sense 1 IN (+) 2 Sense 2 N/C IN (+) 3 Sense 3 IN (+) 4 Sense 4 N/C Sensor 0 - 10 V Output + 4 - 20 mA Current Field Device Input section 4 channels Typical Wiring Inputs Channel 1 - Channel 1 shows 4 - 20 mA current input controlled by output section channel 2. Channel 4 - The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor.
N/C
16
15
17
N/C Current Source (-) 2
18 19 20
IN (-) 1
22
21
23
N/C IN (-) 2
24 25 26 27
N/C
28 29
N/C IN (-) 3
30 31 32 33
N/C IN (-) 4 N/C N/C
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
i i i i
Pins 1...20 are outputs Pins 21...40 are inputs N / C = Not Connected Jumpers are required between IN (+) and SENSE terminals for all current input ranges.
3/16

(continued)

140 ARI 030 10 4-Wire RTD 140 ATI 030 00
I Source 1 (+)
2
I Source 1 (-) V Sense 1 (-) Not used Not used Not used Not used 2-Wire RTD Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 3-Wire RTD Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
2
+ +
V Sense 1 (+)
4
I Source 2 (-)
5
4 5
I Source 2 (+)
6
V Sense 2 (-)
7
6 7
3
Not used
V Sense 2 (+)
8
Shield 1
9
8 9
Shield 2
10
I Source 3 (+)
12
11
I Source 3 (-) V Sense 3 (-)
10 11 12 13
+ +
V Sense 3 (+)
14
13
I Source 4 (-)
15
14 15
I Source 4 (+)
16
V Sense 4 (-)
17
16 17
V Sense 4 (+)
18
Shield 3
19
18 19
Shield 4
20
Not used
+ +
I Source 5 (-)
21
20 21
I Source 5 (+)
22
V Sense 5 (-)
23
22 23
V Sense 5 (+)
24
I Source 6 (-)
25
24 25
I Source 6 (+)
26
V Sense 6 (-)
27
26 27
V Sense 6 (+)
28
Shield 5
29
28 29
Shield 6
30
Not used
+ +
I Source 7 (-)
31
30 31
I Source 7 (+) V Sense 7 (+)
32 33 34
V Sense 7 (-) I Source 8 (-)

35
32 33 34 35
I Source 8 (+)
36
V Sense 8 (-)
37
36 37
V Sense 8 (+)
38
39
Shield 7 Not used
38 39 40
Shield 8
Not used
40
i The module is calibrated per: IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs: 100 @ 0 C, TCR(a) = 0.00385//C DIN 43760 for nickel RTDs American Platinum RTDs: 100 @ 0 C, TCR(a) = 0.00392//C i Terminals labeled shield are not connected internally; shields should be grounded at the field device end. i When using 2-wire configurations, the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading.
i Either shielded or unshielded TCs may be used. (The user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment.) Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. i Connections marked Not used are not electrically connected within the module. These points are used as a thermal link to ambient air. They are not recommended as electrical tie points as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation.
3/17

(continued)
Analog current input module wiring diagram

140 ACI 040 00 Differential Input Current Source (1)
Input 1 (+) Input 2 (+) Input 3 (+) Input 4 (+)
Input 1 (-) Input 2 (-) Input 3 (-)
2 3 4 5 6 7
Single Ended Input
Input 4 (-) N/C Input 5 (-)
Current Source (1)
8 9 10 11 12 13
N/C Input 5 (+) Input 6 (+) Input 7 (+)
Input 6 (-)
14
Input 7 (-)
16
15
Input 8 (+)
17
Input 8 (-)
18
19
N/C Input 9 (+) Input 10 (+) Input 11 (+) Input 12 (+)
N/C Input 9 (-) Input 10 (-)
20 21 22 23 24
Input 11 (-)
26
25
Input 12 (-)
28
27
29
N/C Input 13 (+) Input 14 (+) Input 15 (+) Input 16 (+)
N/C Input 13 (-)
30 31 32 33
Input 14 (-) Input 15 (-) Input 16 (-)
34 35 36 37 38 39
N/C
N/C
40
i Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used. In noisy environments, twisted sheilded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. i Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurance, the unused channels should be configured in the 0 to 25 mA range. i The maximum channel-to-channel working voltage cannot exceed a 30 V. i N / C = Not Connected.
(1) The current sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the discretion of the user). 3/18

Special-purpose modules Connections (continued)
Analog current output module wiring diagram

140 ACO 130 00
VM
1
Monitor 1 N/C Monitor 2 N/C N/C Monitor 3 N/C Monitor 4
Return Field Device Output 1 Sink Return Field Device Output 2 Sink N/C Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Field Device
Output 3 Sink
14
13
Return
16
15
N/C
17
Field Device
Output 4 Sink
18
19
N/C Monitor 5 N/C Monitor 6
N/C
20
Return
22
21
Field Device
Output 5 Sink
24
23
Return
26
25
Field Device
Output 6 Sink
28
27
N/C N/C Monitor 7 N/C Monitor 8 N/C N/C

VM VM
29
N/C Return Field Device Output 7 Sink
30 31 32 33 34 35
Return Field Device + a 24 Loop Supply Output 8 Sink N/C
36 37 38 39 40
i VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum. i Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used. In noisy environments, twisted sheilded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. i Unused outputs may cause the activation of the F (fault) LED. To avoid this occurance, it is recommended that the unused channels be configured in the 0 to 25 mA range. i All terminals labeled "Return" are common inside the module. i N / C = Not Connected i At power up, the channel outputs are all at 0 (zero) current.
3/19

Intrinsically Safe I/O Selection guide
Type
Analog input Modules
Number of channels
Operating range
RTD: Platinum -200C to +850 C Nickel -60 C to +180 C Thermocouple: Types J,K,E,T,S,R,B, mV
Current Input 4 ... 20mA 0 ... 20mA 0 ... 25mA
Resolution
RTD-12 bits plus sign (0.1 C) TC-1 C (default) 0.1 C, 1 F, 0.1 F 1780 Vac @47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min. RTD- 0.5 C TC - (Types J,K,E,T) 2 C, 0.1 % of reading (types J,R,B) 4 C, 0.1 % of reading 400 mA
up to 25,000 counts
Isolation (channel-to-bus) Accuracy error at 25 C
Typical: 0.05 % of full scale Maximum: 0.1 % of full scale
Bus power required
1.5 A
10 input words
9 input words
Model
140 AII 330 00

3/27
140 AII 330 10
Page
3/20
Intrinsically safe Analog output module
Intrinsically safe Discrete input module
Intrinsically safe Discrete output module
4 ... 210mA (0 to 4095) 4 ... 20mA (0 to 16,000) 0 ... 20mA 0 ... 25mA
No load voltage: 8 Vdc Short circuit current: 8 mA Switching point: 1.2 mA ... 2.1 mA Switching hysteresis: 0.2 mA
Load current max: each point: 45 mA @ 11 Vdc each module: 360 mA off state leakage per point: 0.4 mA
15 bits within 4 ... 20mA
0.2% of full scale
2.5 A
400 mA
2.2 A, full load
8 output words
.5 input words
.5 output words
140 AIO 330 00
140 DII 330 00
140 DIO 330 00
3/21

Intrinsically safe I/O Presentation, description
Presentation
The Quantum Automation Platform supports a full range of intrinsically safe I/O modules designed to interface with a wide variety of field devices. Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or by thermal means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy-limiting devices, known as intrinsically safe barriers, to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical equipment located in the hazardous area. These galvanically isolated barriers prevent the module from releasing sufficient energy to ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation, in the form of opto-isolators and DC/DC converters, is provided between the field side output circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converters provide intrinsically safe power to field devices located in hazardous areas. No external field power is required where these modules are installed. Quantum intrinsically safe modules are designed to fit into a standard Quantum backplane. They can be mounted in any slot position in any slot size (316 slots) Quantum 140 XBP 0ii 00 backplane. I/O connectors Each intrinsically safe I/O module requires an I/O connector (P/N 140 XTS 332 00). The connector's field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector. The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module.
Wiring considerations Intrinsically safe wiring between the Quantum intrinsically safe modules and the field devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This can be accomplished by any one of the following methods: i Separate blue wire ducts, raceways, or conduits i Grounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wiring i A separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wires must be tied in separate bundles to maintain the required separation.
Description
The intrinsically safe modules comprise in front panel: 1 2 1 Model number and color code. 2 LED indicator panel. 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label. 4 Terminal block.
3/22

Intrinsically safe I/O
Characteristics
RTD/resistance and thermocouple/millivolt Input module

Model Number of channels LEDs 140 All 330 00 (RTD) 8 Active-1 (Green) F-1 (Red) 1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range (includes broken wire & short circuit conditions.) 140 AII 330 00 (Thermocouple)
RTD types (configurable) Platinum (American & European) PT 100, PT200, PT500, PT1000 Nickel Ranges TC J K E T S R B Millivolt Measurement current PT100, PT200, N100, N200 mA PT500, PT1000, N500, N1000 TC circuit resistance/max source resistance Input impedance Input filter Normal noise rejection Cold junction compensation (CJC) in mA 2.5 0.5 > 10 c 1780V @ 47-63 Hz or a 2500V for 1 min 200 max for rated accuracy >1 Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz. Plus notch filter at 50/60 Hz 120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60 C (errors are included the accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed. Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting the TC (which monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are recommended for best accuracy. Linearity Resolution RTD TC Millivolt 12 bits plus sign (0.1 C) Choice of: 1 C (default), 0.1 C, 1 F, 0.1 F + 0.003% of full scale (0 to 60 C) C C C C C C C mV N100, N200, N500, N1000 C C - 200 to + 850 - 60 to + 180 (1) - 210+ 760 - 270+ 1370 - 270+ 1000 - 270+ 400 - 50+ 1665 - 50+ 1665 - 130+ 1820 - 100+ 100 (2) - 25+ 25
+ 100 mV range, 3.05 V (16 bits) + 25 mV range, 0.76 V (16 bits) (1) All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale. This results in a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected. (2) Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges. 3/23

Intrinsically safe I/O Characteristics
(continued)
RTD/resistance and thermocouple/millivolt Input module

Model Absolute accuracy RTD TC C + 0.5 (25 C) + 0.9 (060 C) Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC curvature, offset plus gain, for module temperature of 060 C. User supplied TC errors not included. For type J and K, add 1.5 C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100 C. Type B cannot be used below 130 C. + 2 C + 0.1% of reading + 4 C + 0.1% of reading + 20V + 0.1% of reading 0.15V/ C + 0.0015% of reading/ C maximum 140 All 330 00 (RTD) 140 AII 330 00 (Thermocouple)
3
Types J, K, E, T Types S, R, B Millivolt @ 25 C Accuracy error @ 25 C typical maximum Accuracy drift w/temperature Update Time (all channels) 3-wire 2 or 4-wire TC/millivolt Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus Bus current required Fault detection External power Power dissipation Hot swap Fusing Programming software W mA 1.35 Sec 750 mSec None >100 dB @ 50/60 Hz 400 Out of range or broken wire conditions Not required for this module 2 Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Internal-not user accessible Modsoft, version 2.61 or higher + 0.05% of full scale + 0.1% of full scale
1 Sec
c 1780V @ 47-63 Hz or a 2500V for 1 min.
Modsoft, version 2.6 or higher or Concept, version 2.2 or higher
3/24

Intrinsically safe I/O Characteristics
(continued)
Current input and analog output modules

Model Number of channels Linear measuring range mA 140 All 330 10 8 420 020 025 25 internally limited 100 + 0.1% between V+ and signal terminals 420 420 020 025 W mA mA, mA, mA, mA, 0 0 0 0 to to to to 4,095 counts 16,000 counts 20,000 counts 25,000 counts 140 AIO 330 00
Absolute maximum input Input impedance Resolution
mA
15 bits within 420 mA
Loop resistance Ranges
500 maximum 420 (0 to 4095) 420 (0 to 16000) 020 025
Available voltage Accuracy error @ 25 C typical maximum Accuracy drift w/temperature typical maximum Linearity Common mode rejection Input filter Update time (for all channels) Settling time Voltmeter monitor specifications range scaling output impedance wire length Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus Bus current required Fault detection External power Power dissipation Hot swap Fusing Programming software W Amp W m V ms
Terminals V+, V-, :~ a14.5 V at 25 mA Terminals V+, signal :~ a13.6 V at 20 mA + 0.05% of full scale + 0.1% of full scale + 0.0025% of full scale / C + 0.005% of full scale / C +0.003% of full scale >100 dB @ 50/60 Hz Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, + 20% 750 None c 1780V @ 47-63 Hz or a 2500V for 1 min 1.5 Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) Not required for this module 7.5 Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Internal-not user accessible Modsoft, version 2.61 or higher, ProWORX Concept, version 2.2 or higher
+ 0.2% of full scale 40 PPM/ C 70 PPM/ C + 1 LSB 4 1 ms to + 0.1% of the final value 0.250 ... 1.250 Vout (Volts) = Iloop (mA) x 0.0625 62.5 typical 1 maximum
c 1780V RMS for 1 minute 2.5 Open circuit in 420 mA range
12.5
3/25

Intrinsically safe I/O Charcteristics
(continued)
Digital input and output module

Model Number of points Output voltage Operating voltages & currents no load voltage (between input + and input -) aV mA mA mA Hz 8 1.22.1 0.2 100 maximum V 140 Dll 330 00 8 input 140 DIO 330 00 8 output 24 (open)
short circuit current switching point switching hysteresis Switching frequency Maximum load current each point per module off state leakage/point Response (resistive loads) off-on on-off output protection (internal) Internal resistance Input protection Isolation channel-to-channel channel-to-bus Bus current required Fault detection External power Power dissipation Hot swap Fusing Programming software
mA mA mA
45 360 0.4
ms ms
1 1 Transient voltage suppression
Kohm
2.5 Resistor limited None c1780V, 47-63 Hz or a2500V for 1 min
Amp
400 Resistor limited Not required
2.2 (full load) None
2 Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Internal-not user accessible Modsoft, version 2.61 or higher, ProWORX Concept, version 2.2 or higher
5 (full load)
3/26

Intrinsically safe I/O References
Intrinsically safe input modules

Description 8 channels, up to 25,000 counts 8 channels, 12-bits plus sign, RTD Range Reference Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66) 0.300 (0.66)
4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA 140 AII 330 10 Ni or PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 Types J, K, E, T, S, R, B and mV 140 AII 330 00
8 channels, 12-bits plus sign, thermocouple 8 channels
140 AII 330 00
0.300 (0.66)
1.2 mA ... 2.1 mA switch pt. current 140 DII 330 00
0.300 (0.66)
Intrinsically safe output modules

Description 8 channels, 15-bit 4 channels, 12-bit Reference 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA 140 AIO 330 00 a 5 V, 10 V 05 V, or 010 V 140 DIO 330 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.300 (0.66) 0.450 (0.99)
Accessories
Description Field I/O power connector; blue color (IP20 rated) User Documentation (contained in Quantum Hardware Reference Guide) Reference 140 XTS 332 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.150 (0.33)
840 USE 100 00
3/27

Instrinsically safe modules Wiring
Thermocouple/millivolt input module wiring diagram

140 All 330 00 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D (1)
I Source 1 (-) V Sense 1 (-) N/C I Source 2 (-) V Sense 2 (-) Chassis Ground
4-wire RTD/resistor connection
I Source 1 (+) V Sense 1 (+) N/C I Source 2 (+) V Sense 2 (+)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I Source 3 (-) V Sense 3 (-)

13
I Source 3 (+)
12
V Sense 3 (+)
14
N/C
15
N/C
16
I Source 4 (-)
17
(1)
I Source 4 (+)
18
V Sense 4 (-)
19
V Sense 4 (+)
20
I Source 5 (-)
21
2-wire RTD/resistor connection Chassis Ground
I Source 5 (+)
22
V Sense 5 (-)
23
V Sense 5 (+)
24
N/C
25
N/C
26
I Source 6 (-)
27
I Source 6 (+)
28
V Sense 6 (-)
29
V Sense 6 (+)
30
I Source 7 (-)
31
I Source 7 (+)
32 33
V Sense 7 (-) N/C I Source 8 (-) V Sense 8 (-) 3-wire RTD/resistor connection Chassis Ground (1)
V Sense 7 (+) N/C I Source 8 (+) V Sense 8 (+)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
I.S. Module Blue Terminal Strip
(1) Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane. 3/28

Instrinsically safe modules Wiring
(continued)
RTD/resistance input module wiring diagram

140 All 330 00 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D (1) Thermocouple Type J, K, E, T, R, S, B (2) Chassis Ground
I Source 1 (+) V Sense 1 (+)
I Source 1 (-) V Sense 1 (-) N/C I Source 2 (-) V Sense 2 (-) I Source 3 (-) V Sense 3 (-) N/C I Source 4 (-)
2 3 4
N/C I Source 2 (+)
5 6 7 8
V Sense 2 (+)
10
I Source 3 (+)
12
11
V Sense 3 (+)
14
13
N/C
16
15
I Source 4 (+)
18
17
V Sense 4 (+)
20
19
V Sense 4 (-) I Source 5 (-) V Sense 5 (-) N/C (1)
I Source 5 (+)
22
21
V Sense 5 (+)
24
23
(+)
25
N/C
26
Source mV
I Source 6 (+)
28
27
I Source 6 (-) V Sense 6 (-) I Source 7 (-) V Sense 7 (-) N/C I Source 8 (-) V Sense 8 (-) Chassis Ground
()
V Sense 6 (+)
30
29
I Source 7 (+)
32
31
V Sense 7 (+)
34
33
N/C
36
35
I Source 8 (+)
38
37
V Sense 8 (+)
40
39
(1) Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane. (2) Pins marked "N/C" (Not Connected) are not electronically connected to the module. 3/29

Intrinsically safe modules Wiring
(continued)
Digital input module wiring diagram

140 All 330 10 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D (1) I.S 3 Wire Transmitter (3) Chassis Ground (1)
V1 (+) Signal 1 V2 (+) Signal 2 N/C V3 (+) Signal 3
I.S. +14.5 Vdc
V1 (-)
2
(2)
N/C V2 (-) N/C N/C V3 (-)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
N/C
14
(1) V4 (+) Signal 4 I.S 2 Wire Transmitter
V4 (-)
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C
19
N/C
20
V5 (-)
22
21
V5 (+) Signal 5 V6 (+) Signal 6 N/C V7 (+) Signal 7 V8 (+) Signal 8 N/C
Chassis Ground (1)
N/C
24
23
V6 (-)
26
25
N/C
28
27
29
N/C V7 (-)
30 31 32 33
N/C
34 35
V8 (-)
36 37
N/C N/C
38 39 40
Module Blue Terminal Strip
(1) Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane. (2) A dropping resistor of 100 Ohms is across the Signal and V (-) pins of each channel. V(-) is internally connected to I.S. ground. (3) Three (3) wire transmitters should be provided power only from the module. An external power supply should not be used. 3/30

(continued)
Analog output module wiring diagram

140 AIO 330 00 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D (1) I.S Field Device R = 500 ohms Max (2) Chassis Ground
Output 1 (-)
2
Monitor 1 (-) Output 1 (+) Monitor 2 (-) Output 2 (+) Monitor 3 (-) Output 3 (+) Monitor 4 (-) Output 4 (+)
N/C Output 2 (-)
4 5 6
N/C
8
Output 3 (-)
10
N/C
12
11
Output 4 (-)
14
13
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C N/C N/C Monitor 5 (-)

V
N/C
20
19
N/C
22
21
Output 5 (-)
24
23
+ (3)
Output 5 (+)
25
N/C
26
Output 6 (-)
28
27
Monitor 6 (-) Output 6 (+)
29
N/C
30
Output 7 (-)
32
31
Monitor 7 (-) Output 7 (+) Monitor 8 (-) Output 8 (+) N/C (4)
33
N/C
34
Output 8 (-)
36
35
37
N/C
38 39
N/C
40
(1) Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end. (2) More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms. (3) The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current. Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter. (4) Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8. 3/31

(continued)
Digital input module wiring diagram

140 Dll 330 00 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D
(1) Intrinsically Safe Field Device Chassis Ground (1)
Input 1 (-) N/C Input 2 (-) N/C Input 3 (-) N/C Input 4 (-) N/C (2)
Input 1 (+) N/C Input 2 (+) N/C Input 3 (+) N/C Input 4 (+)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C N/C N/C N/C Input 5 (-) N/C Input 6 (-) N/C Input 7 (-) N/C Input 8 (-) N/C
19
N/C N/C N/C Input 5 (+)
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
N/C Input 6 (+) N/C Input 7 (+) N/C Input 8 (+) N/C
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
(1) Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane. (2) All "Input" (-)s" are connected together internally. 3/32

(continued)
Digital output module wiring diagram

140 DIO 330 00 Non-hazardous Location Hazardous Location Class 1, Division 1 Group A, B, C, D
(1) Intrinsically Safe Field Device Chassis Ground (1)
Output 1 (-) N/C Output 2 (-) N/C Output 3 (-) N/C Output 4 (-) N/C (2)
Output 1 (+)
2 3
N/C Output 2 (+) N/C Output 3 (+)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
N/C Output 4 (+)
12 13 14
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C N/C N/C Output 5 (-) N/C Output 6 (-) N/C Output 7 (-) N/C Output 8 (-) N/C N/C
19
N/C
20 21
N/C
22
Output 5 (+)
24
23
25
N/C Output 6 (+)
26 27 28 29
N/C Output 7 (+)
30 31 32 33
N/C Output 8 (+) N/C N/C
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
(1) Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane. (2) All "Output" (-)s" are connected together internally. 3/33
Selection guide

Counter and special purpose modules
Type
Hot standby
High-speed counter modules
Addressing requirement (words)
13 in/13 out
6 in/6 out
Comm ports
Two connectors (transmit and receive) for fiber optic link
Compatibility of software and CPUs
ProWORX Nxt version 2.0, Concept version 2.0 or higher All CPUs version 2.0 or higher
Bus current required
700 mA
250 mA
650 mA
Model
140 CHS 110 00
140 EHC 105 00
140 EHC 202 00
Page
48209/5
48206/3
Schneider Electric
AS-i bus module
ASCII interface
Latch/interrupt
Lon works module
13 in/9 out
12 in/12 out
16 input
16 in/16 out
1 AS-i port per module
Two RS232 serial ports per DIN 66020, non-isolated
1 RS232 serial port 2 LON works communications ports (1 primary, 1 auxillary)
60 mA typical, 100 mA max
300 mA
400 mA
250 mA, typical 400 mA maximum
140 EIA 921 00
140 ESI 062 10
140 HLI 340 00
140 NOL 911 10
48189/3
48210/3
48199/4
48193/3
Schneider Electric

High-speed counter modules Presentation, description
Presentation
The Quantum Automation Series offers two processor-controlled high-speed counter modulesthe 140 EHC 105 00 and the 140 EHC 202 00. These modules independently count pulses at speeds much faster than a Quantum CPU alone can handle. They automatically report the count to the CPU on every scan, and, if the counter is placed in the local backplane,they can update the CPU asynchronous to the scan (via the IMOD instruction in 984 ladder logic). 140 EHC 105 00 The 140 EHC 105 00 is a five -channel counter, with four operating modes that can be configured for the channels. The module is best suited for the incremental high-speed counting of pulses up to 100 kHz at 5 V d.c. or 20 kHz at 24 V d.c. The operating mode for each channel can be configured easily via the I/O Map zoom screen in Modsoft or Concept. Operating modes can be set on the channels as follows:
i 32-bit event counters on any or all channels, with a latched or timed output modes specified. i A 32-bit difference counter that uses two channels/functionthe difference between the counts on each channels is reported to the CPU. A module can be set to handle two difference counters, two channels/function. i 16-bit repeat counters on any or all channels; the counter repeats the count after it hits a setpoint. i 32-bit rate counters on any or all channels; the rate is sampled over a time interval specified as either 1 s or 100 ms. The counter configuration also includes eight outputs, each of which can be triggered by a setpoint or by a programmable count prior to the setpoint in up-count/down-count operations. Each of the outputs can be configured as follows: i i i i Output Output Output Output turns on turns on inverted turns on at setpoint, either latched or as a one-shot at a terminal count, either latched or as a one-shot for leading edge/trailing edge applications after a specified time delay from a terminal count, with a time range up to 16 383 ms
140 EHC 202 00 The 140 EHC 202 00 is a two-channel module best suited for high-speed counting applications up to 500 kHz or for applications that require a quadrature counter interface. The operating mode for each channel can be configured easily via the I/O Map zoom screen in Modsoft or Concept. Operating modes can be set on the channels as follows: i i i i 16-bit counters on one or both channels with two outputs, configurable for incremental or quadrature mode A 32-bit counter that uses both channels with two outputs, configurable for incremental or quadrature mode 32-bit counters on one or both channels with no outputs, configurable for incremental or quadrature mode 16-bit counters on one or both channels with no outputs, in rate-sample mode for incremental or quadrature encoders
When the counter configuration includes outputs, each can be triggered by a setpoint or by a programmable count prior to the setpoint in up-count/down-count operations. Each of the outputs can be configured as follows: i Output latched on at setpoint i Output latched on at a terminal count i Output timed on at setpoint, with a time range of 0 ... 16 383 ms (only one of the four possible outputs can be configured for this mode) i Output timed on at a terminal count, with a time range of 0 ... 16 383 ms (only one of the four possible outputs can be configured for this mode)
Description
1 2 1 Model number and color code 2 LED indicator panel 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label 4 Terminal block
3/36

High-speed counter modules Characteristics, references
Characteristics
Model Number of channels Number of inputs Number of outputs Addressing requirement Data Formats 16-bit counter 32-bit counter Counter inputs input current duty cycle operating mode input voltage Discrete inputs operating modes input voltage input current input resistance Input threshold single-ended mode a 5 VREF a 12 VREF a 24 VREF differential mode Discrete outputs FET switch on FET switch off load current off state leakage on state voltage drop output levels output protection Miscellaneous isolation fault detection power dissipation bus current required external power supply fusing compatibliity Backplane support c W mA a A 500 V rms channel-to-bus for 1 min loss of output field power; output short circuit greater than or equal to 6 250 19. 230 V, 24 V nominal, 60 mA + load current for each output internal: none external:user discretion software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 minimum Quantum CPU: All, V2.0 minimum Local, remote and distributed 1780 V rms channel-to-bus for 1 min blown fuse detect; loss of 1A, 1B 2A, 2B output field power 4 + (0.4 x total module load current) 650 19. 230 V, 24 V nominal, 50 mA + load current for each output Internal: 2.5 (P/N 043503948 or equivalent) External: user discretion software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 minimum Quantum CPU: All, V2.0 minimum a mA kW 5 incremental or quadrature 30 V max continuous 10 mA a 7 1:1 discrete incremental counter 30 V max continuous incremental or quadrature 30 V max continuous dec dec 65 535 2 147 483 647 65 535 2 147 483 647 140 EHC 105 00 5 8 8 12 in/12 out words 140 EHC 202 00 2 4 (2/channel) 6 in/6 out words
a a a a a a mA mA a
- 3.05.0 V on state/15.030.0 V off state 20 ... 30 V 0 V (ground reference) 210/output max 0.1 max @ a 30 V 1.25 V @ 0.5 A
020 V on state/3.55.0 off state 05.0 V on state/7.012.0 V off state 011.0 V on state/13.024.0 V off state 1.8 minimum supply - 0.4 V 0 V (ground reference) 0.5/output max 0.4 max @ a 30 V 0.4 V @ 0.5 A 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B 36 V transorb for transient voltage suppression
References
Description Counter module, 5 channels Counter frequency, max. 100 kHz Counter module, 2 channels Max. counter frequency, 500 kHz 140 EHC 105 00 High-speed counter user guide 140 EHC 202 00 Contained in Quantum Hardware Reference Guide Reference 140 EHC 105 00 140 EHC 202 00 840 USE 443 00 840 USE 100 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.350 (0.75) 0.350 (0.75)
3/37

High-speed counter modules Connections

140 EHC 105 00 a 5 Counter Input Signals (C1C5) a 5 +
5 Vdc C1 5 Vdc C2 5 Vdc C3 5 Vdc C4
N/C N/C N/C
2 3 4 5 6 7
N/C N/C M11 M12 M13
To M11 5 Vdc C5 24 Vdc C1 24 Vdc C2 a 24 Counter Input Signals (C1C5) a 24 +
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
24 Vdc C3 24 Vdc C4
M14 M15 IN2 IN4 IN6 IN8 Common OUT2 OUT4 OUT6 OUT8
To M11 24 Vdc C5 IN1 IN3 IN5 IN7 Common OUT1 OUT3 OUT5 OUT7 Return a 24 Output Signals (OUT1OUT8) a 24 Input Signals (IN1IN8) a 24 +
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
a 24 External Power Supply
i N / C = Not Connected i Terminals 29 and 30 are common and are jumpered together.
3/38

High-speed counter modules wiring diagram Connections

140 EHC 202 00 ... Input 1A 2 1
Input 1A + Input 1B +
- VRef - 0V
Input 1B 4
Pulse
5
Preset 1C 6
Preset 1C + Output Reset 10 + N/C Enable 1 + N/C Output 1B
+ +
Output Reset 10 8
VRef
N/C
10
Enable 1 12
11
N/C
14
13
Output 1A
16
15
Lo Filter Sel 1
18
17
VRef1 N/C Input 2A + Input 2B + Preset 2C + Output Reset 20 + N/C
N/C
20
19
Input 2A 22
21
Input 2B 24
23
Preset 2C 26
25
Output Reset 20 N/C
27 28 29 30 31
Enable 2 + N/C Output 2B VRef2 Return a 24 +
Enable 2 32 33
N/C
34 35
Output 2A
36
Lo Filter Sel 2
38
37
39
Power Supply
40
Basic wiring diagram showing single ended connections for: Terminal 1 Pulse encoder input (sinking device) Terminal 3 Input 1B count UP direction Terminal 5 Unused hardwire Preset tied high Terminal 7 Output Reset tied high, not required; outputs not used Terminal 11 Hardware enabled (software enable also required using predefined Modzoom or 4X register Terminal 17 Required VRef+ connection Terminals 21, 23, 25, 27, 31, 37 Counter 2 not used. These terminals must be connected VRef+ Terminal 39 Required Output Supply Return Terminal 40 Required Output Supply See Appendix E for both differential pulse encoder input and single ended or differential quadrature encoder input wiring diagrams. 3/39

Latch/interrupt module Presentation, functions
Presentation
The Quantum 140 HLI 340 00 module is a multipurpose, high-performance device that combines hardware/latch/interrupt capabilities for use in time-critical applications. It can be used only in the local backplane, not in remote or distributed drops. The module has 16 independently programmable 24 V d.c. inputs that can be used with source or sink field devices. When it is programmed via 984 ladder logic, the module takes advantage of several special interrupt-handling instructions (IMOD, ITMR, IE, ID and BMDI) and an immmediate I/O (IMIO) instruction to update its inputs asynchronously with respect to normal I/O scanning. The inputs are also updated at the end of the logic segment as part of the normal logic solving process. The 140 HLI 340 00 module is point-configurable to any of three operating modes: i IMOD interrupt handling mode. i Automatic latch/unlatch mode. i High-speed input mode.
Functions
IMOD interrupt mode In IMOD interrupt mode, a physical real-world interrupt signal will stop the CPU from solving the main application program and force a jump to a subroutine called an interrupt handler. Interrupt data coming to the CPU is serviced nearly instantaneously. Handshaking on the local backplane guarantees that the interrupt data will be solved. Each input can be configured to cause an interrupt whenever it is turned on, off or both. Multiple interrupts on the same local backplane are priority-handled in the following manner: i If two interrupts on two different 140 HLI 340 00 modules in the same backplane generate interrupts simultaneously, the slot position in the backplane determines its priority. An interrupt from the module in slot #3 has priority over an interrupt generated by the module in slot #4 ... 16. i If two interrupts from the same 140 HLI 340 00 module are generated simultaneously, the number of the inputs generating the interrupts determines their priority. An interrupt generated by input #1 would have priority over all other interrupts. i If an interrupt occurs while another interrupt handler is being serviced, the CPU will read the new interrupt, finish servicing the current interrupt handler, then service the next-priority interrupt.
Latch mode A latch signal is guaranteed to be read by the CPU, at which time it automatically unlatches the input signal. In latch mode, the 140 HLI 340 00 module can latch/unlatch inputs. The inputs cannot generate interrupts in latch mode. The latching feature is used in applications where the input signal pulse is shorter than the CPU's scan time. Without the latch capability, the input signal can be missed by the application program. Data from latch inputs is serviced using the normal I/O update method with no special user programming required. If a 140 HLI 340 00 module is configured in split mode (where some inputs are latched and others are used for interrupts), any latch input data is read and cleared at the interrupt service time and may not be valid at the end of scan. In order to latch an input on, the signal pulse must be at least 30 s long. To latch an input off, the signal pulse width must be at least 130 s long.
High-speed input mode When an input point on the 140 HLI 340 00 module is not configured for an interrupt or for latching, it can operate as a normal high-speed input. This is the default operating mode for all input points on the module. Data from high-speed inputs is serviced via normal I/O updating methods and is updated at the end of a segment. These inputs are often considered auxiliary process inputs to an interrupt operation that requires some combination of interrupts, latches and normal inputs. Response times for high-speed inputs are as fast as 30 s from off to on and 130 s from on to off.
3/40

Latch/interrupt module Functions
(continued),
performance
Interrupts
Timer-based interrupts Another major form of interrupt processing available in the Quantum Automation Series can be accomplished by using the CPU's internal clock to generate interrupt signals based on timing. This method of interrupt generation does not require the presence of additional hardware such as the 140 HLI 340 00 module, and the interrupt timing is userprogrammable. Timer interrupts can be used when the application program needs to see or update data points at extremely predictable or regular intervals and when the servicing period is faster than the CPU's scan time. Timer interrupts can be programmed down to 1 ms (the resolution of the CPU clock). Be aware, however, that if your interrupt handler is longer than 1 ms and you ask the CPU to generate an interrupt that calls this routine every 1 ms, you will overrun the watchdog timer and stop the controller. Built-in 984LL interrupt logic instructions The Quantum CPU handles both timer interupts and interrupts generated by the 140 HLI 340 00 module in the same mannerby executing the interrupt handler in the subroutine segment of the 984 ladder logic application. The logic in the interrupt handler determines what steps need to occur to handle the interrupt. The IMIO (immediate I/O) instruction can be used to read additional inputs or write additional outputs in the interupt handler. IMIO instructions can read or write real-world I/O information from the local backplane. For example, if an interrupt has been generated and the interrupt handler logic needs to know the current position in a high-speed counter module, the IMIO instruction can be activated to read the position asynchronous to the scan. This information could then be used by the interrupt handler to make a logical decision based on position. At the end of the interrupt handler routine, the information can be used to update a local output module. Ladder logic is broken down into sections called segments. Real-world inputs are read just prior to segments being solved, and real-world outputs are written just after the segment is solved. This happens in a parallel process where I/O is updated during the scan of the Quantum CPU. Within a Quantum CPU, there can be up to 32 segments of ladder logic that form the boundaries for logic and create the triggers for logic solving during normal I/O servicing. Interrupts allow I/O to be updated within a segment, not at the end of the segment as is normally done. When an interrupt occurs, an ITMR or IMOD instruction provides the CPU with a pointer to a specific subroutine designed to service that interrupt.Subroutines reside in separate segments of ladder logic, and individual subroutines may be called into service multiple times in a single scan or only once over many scans. To ensure rapid execution of interrupt handler subroutines, certain ladder logic instruction must not be used within them. The following instructions inside an interrupt handler will cause the subroutine to abort: i MSTR (for reading and writing over a Modbus Plus network). i ASCII READ/WRIT strings. i PCFL (floating point process control library). i Equation networks. i T1.0, T0.1 and T.01 timers. i User loadables.
Performance
How interrupts impact scan time For most applications, the impact of interrupt handlers on scan time is minimal even when interupts are generated multiple times per scan. Interrupt handlers allow critical part of the application to be serviced faster than the overall application. However, be aware that you can overtax the CPU's ability to service interrupts. We recommend that you create a timing diagram to ensure that interrupts do not consume more than 40% of the CPU's processing time. The duty cycle (the amount of time an interrupt requires for servicing) is critical to analyzing scan time impact. The amount of time it takes to solve an interrupt handler subroutine can be calculated by adding the instruction execution times for the logic in the subroutine. The overhead for adding an IMOD or ITMR instruction to the CPU is 60 s/scan; this is the amount of time it takes the CPU to constantly check to see if a timer has been triggered or if a hardware interrupt needs processing time. There is no incremental overhead for adding a second IMOD or ITMR instruction to the CPU. General performance Interrupt handler performance is measured from the time the input signal arrives at the input module to the time an output point is commanded to change state. The measurement takes into consideration module latency times, CPU overhead for servicing interrupts, and the size of the interrupt handler.
3/41

Latch/interrupt module Characteristics, references
Characteristics
Model Number of input points Operating voltages on off Operating currents on a a mA mA a 140 HLI 340 00 16 isolated 1530 V - 3+ 5 V 2.08.0 00.5 30 V continuous 30 max 130 max 30 V reverse polarity 500 V rms for 1 min 1780 V rms for 1 min 400 2.0 +(0.3 x number of points on) None User discretion Local only
3
Response
off Absolute maximum input on-off off-on Input protection Isolation point-to-point point-to-bus Bus current requirement Power dissipation Fusing internal external Backplane support
s s
a c c mA W
References
Description Latch/interrupt module Nr. of channels Functions 16 Interrupt Mmorisation d'tat Entres rapides Reference 140 HLI 340 00 Weight kg (lb)
140 HLI 340 00 Interrupt module user guide
840 USE 112 00
3/42

Latch/interrupt module Connections
Latch/interrupt module wiring diagram

140 HLI 340 00
+
1
INPUT 1 (-) INPUT 2 (-) INPUT 3 (-) INPUT 4 (-) N/C INPUT 5 (-) INPUT 6 (-) INPUT 7 (-) INPUT 8 (-) N/C a 24
a 24 Sourcing Field Device
INPUT 1 (+) INPUT 2 (+) INPUT 3 (+) INPUT 4 (+) N/C INPUT 5 (+) INPUT 6 (+) INPUT 7 (+) INPUT 8 (+) N/C INPUT 9 (+) INPUT 10 (+) INPUT 11 (+) INPUT 12 (+) N/C INPUT 13 (+) INPUT 14 (+) INPUT 15 (+) INPUT 16 (+) N/C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Sinking Field Device
INPUT 9 (-) INPUT 10 (-) INPUT 11 (-) INPUT 12 (-) N/C INPUT 13 (-) INPUT 14 (-) INPUT 15 (-) INPUT 16 (-)
N/C
Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used (the user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment). Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 3/43

AS-i bus master module Presentation, description
Presentation
The Actuator Sensor Interface (AS-i) is used in low-level automation systems as a digital replacement for conventional parallel wiring. This digital serial interface is comprised of a single, unshielded two-wire cable permitting communications to field-level devices (sensors and actuators) with internal intelligence. The technology is compatible with any fieldbus or device network including CAN, Profibus, Interbus, FIP, LON, RS 485 and RS 232. The 140 EIA 921 00 Quantum AS-i module is a single-slot module with one AS-i channel per module. The Quantum I/O map interface makes the module useable in local, remote and distributed Quantum I/O drops. This module supports immediate I/O servicing from Quantum CPU for high speed applications such as grain handling, conveyors, press control, weld control, and PC board manufacture. Network media and topology
AS-i uses an unshielded 2-wire cable for data and energy. The protocol is based on a master/slave hierarchy and allows up to 31 slave devices to be connected on a single network. This bus operates up to 100 meters, although additional distances can be achieved through the use of repeaters. AS-i is less complex than many of the other open digital communication protocols in the market, since it is tailored to the needs of the devices such as actuators and sensors where connection cost is of greater importance than complexity of the data to be handled. The topology of the AS-i bus is totally flexible and can be adapted to users requirements (point-to-point, line, and tree structure topology). In all cases, the total length of all the branches of the bus must not exceed 100 meters without using repeaters. The AS-i cable is a two-wire link on which communication and power are transmitted to the connected devices. It is not necessary for the link to be twisted, and the wire cross-section can be 2 X 0.75 mm2, 2 X 1.5 mm2, or 2 X 2.5 mm2, depending on the current consumption of the devices. Benefits of the Quantum As-i module i i i i i i i i Useable with all Quantum CPUs. Module parameter setup through Concept 2.5, Modsoft 2.61, and ProWorx 2.1. Quantum I/O map interface allows 4 modules per local drop, 4 per remote drop, and 2 per distributed I/O drop. Enhanced LED Matrix of 32 LEDs displays slave addresses and state of slave input/output bits. Hot swap function available without damage for all Quantum I/O racks. Protected against reverse polarity of AS-i bus inputs. Less commissioning time and increased diagnostic capability reduces the overall cost of an automated system. Automated device reconfiguration (addresses and parameters).
Description
The 140 EIA 921 00 AS-i bus module is comprised of the following: 1 Model number and color code. 1 2 LED indicators. 2 3 Removable clear hinged door. 4 AS-i bus communication port. 3
3/44

AS-i bus master modules Characteristics, references
Characteristics
Model AS-i Bus As-i master profile Maximum bus cycle time Maximum bus length Maximum no. of I/O points Maximum no. of slaves on the bus Nominal supply bus voltage AS-i scan time for n slaves Transmission rate Quantum AS-i Module Number of modules per local drop remote drop distributed drop Bus current consumption at 30V Degree of protection Polarity reversal protection Operating temperature Agency approvals C (F) mA 4 4 2 60 typical, 100 max IP20 Yes 0 to 60 (32 to 140 ) UL, CSA, CE a ms m M2 5 100 124 inputs, 124 outputs 31 30 156 s x (n+2) ifn <31 156 s x (n+1) ifn = 31 kbits/s 167 approx. 140 EIA 921 00
References
Description Quantum AS-i Master Module Reference 140 EIA 921 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.450 (1)
AS-I Bus Master Module User Guide
840 USE 117 00
3/45

Lon Works communications module Presentation, description
Presentation
Quantum Automation Series provides support for LonWorks by means of its NOL option module, the 140 NOL 911 10. LonWorks technology is a local operating network developed by Echelon Corporation as an open control architecture that follows the seven-layer collision avoidance OSI model for networking. As an OSI compliant device, communication messaging is very open. It is also non-deterministic by design. As such, LonWorks has been well received within the building automation business, which is compatible with over 2,500 vendors, primarily building automation devices and products. Both Motorola and Toshiba support LonWorks chip technology, which gets embedded within the device. This network itself is made up of nodes that can talk to each other on a peer-to-peer network. Within each node there exists all the necessary elements needed to make that node operate and talk: i a processor called a Neuron, i transceiver, i I/O interface, i communication interface, i complete user program. Each node manages a small number of local I/O points, and contains the necessary Neuron program to support that device, from I/O management to event processing, message passing, and distributed data objects. The end devices which contain the Neuron chip normally come to the user already programmed with an industry standard program for that device type. This standard program is called an SNVT or Standard Network Variable Type. Users or OEMs can customize the device's Neuron program by creating a CNVT, or Custom Network Variable Type, using Neuron C programming language and tools. The Quantum control system can utilize the LonWorks technology to enable customers to tie the industrial process, normally controlled by Quantum, to the building automation system. Such tight cooperation between the process and plant allow for tighter overall control and integration of all aspects of the industrial process, now inclusive of the plant itself. The large number of vendors who support the LonWorks technology within their devices ensures simple and cost effective connectivity. The NOL module supports up to 240 SNVTs, as well as user-defined CNVTs, which are mapped to native Quantum variables providing transparent integration of LonWorks data with the Quantum application program. Multiple modules may be present in the same Quantum controller for highly flexible architecture choices.
Description
The front panel of 140 NOL 911 10 Lon Works communications module comprises: 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 LED display RS-232 serial configuration port Service pin Reset button Auxilliary LonWorks communications port (1) Primary LonWorks communications port
(1) Not intended to be connected to any public telecommunications network.
2 3 4 5 6
3/46

Lon Works communications module Characteristics, references
Characteristics
Model Temperature Range operating storage Operating Humidity Range Ventilation Shock Vibration Flammability Emissions radiated conducted ESD Immunity Susceptibility radiated RF conducted RF fast transient electrical surge Voltage dips, interruptions, and voltage variations Input voltage Power consumption CE compliance Compliance to IEC 1000-4-3, 80MHz to 1,000MHz: 10V/m test level, 80% AM @ 1kHz. Also 1.89 GHz PM @ 100 Hz, 50% duty cycle Compliance to IEC 1000-4-6, table 1, test level 3. Use of ferrite clamp preferred. Compliance to IEC 1000-4-4, table 1, test level 3. Capacitive clamp preferred for use on communications ports. Compliance to IEC 1000-4-5, table 1, installation class 3.5 surges each line, line-line and line-earth. Use of capacitive test clamp preferred. Compliance to IEC 1000-4-11. Voltage deviations to be applied to system AC mains input line. Module draws power from the Quantum backplane for operation. No external power required. Module will consume 250 milliamps typical, with 400 milliamps maximum (surge at power up) from the Quantum backplane. When installed in any specified, fully compliant system, the complete system will meet the requirements of the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC, EN55011, EN50082-1, EN50082-2, and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). Compliance to EN55011, class A all systems AC mains tested per EN55011, class A, group 1 Compliance to IEC 1000-4-2, 8kV air discharge, 4kV contact discharge, both polarities C C 140 NOL 911 10 0+ 60 - 40+ 85 2095% (validated at 2095%) non-condensing at 060 C Convection only 15g half sine, 11 millisecond duration IEC68-2-6, sinusoidal 10Hz to 150Hz (operating) .075mm amplitude, 1.0g 10 sweeps PCB material UL-94V0. UL recognized components
References
Transceiver type TP/XF-78 Configuration Linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated User Guide (including 984 ladder logic NOL loadable) Rate 78,000 bits per second Reference 140 NOL 911 10 Weight kg (lb) 0,900 (2)
140 NOL 911 10
840 USE 109 00
0,900 (2)
3/47
Presentation

Quantum-Sy/Max integration
Presentation
Integration solutions Quantum-Sy/Max integration products are designed to help Sy/Max users gradually upgrade their installations to Quantum control systems at a comfortable and costeffective pace. These products allow users to protect their investments in communication networks, application programs, I/O installations and training.They allow Sy/Max users to move gradually toward Quantum where they can take advantage of: b Structured programming with Concept's IEC 1131 languages b Faster logic-solve times and larger CPU memory sizes b More flexibility in terms of network choices, including Modbus, Modbus Plus, TCP/IP Ethernet, Quantum remote I/O (RIO), InterBus and SERCOS b The high availability of hot standby control b A wide variety of choices from our ModConnect Partners Upgrading strategies Upgrading Sy/Max processors Modicon's Ladder Translation Service takes existing Sy/Max application programs and converts them into 984 ladder logic. The translations include comments and rung and ladder header files as well as fully functioning application logic. Contact your local sales office to inquire about the availability of this service. Upgrading Sy/Max I/O networks A Class 8030 Type CRM931 remote I/O adapter can be placed in slot #1 of a Sy/Max remote I/O drop. This adapter enables Class 8030 discrete and intelligent I/O in that drop to operate under the control of a Quantum CPU over a Quantum RIO coaxial cable network. The 8030 CRM931 adapter can reside in any Class 8030 Type RRK100, -200 or -300 register rack or any Class 8030 Type HRK-100, -150, or -200 digital rack.
Quantum head-end with CPU and RIO adapter
Sy/Max I/O with CRM931 adapter at RIO drop #1
The original Sy/Max I/O wiring remains intact. Because the I/O is now on a Quantum RIO network, it can take advantage of the 1.544 Mbit/s data transfer rate with 16-bit CRC. Each drop now has 128 addressable registers (64 in and 64 out).
48194-EN_Ver2.1.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Presentation (continued), characteristics, references

Quantum-Sy/Max integration
Presentation
(continued) Upgrading strategies (continued) Sy/Max communication networks The NW-BM85Y422 Modbus Plus-to-Sy/Max gateway provides a bridge for information exchange between Sy/Max or PowerLogic systems and a Modbus Plus local area network. Modbus Plus gives the system connectivity to many HMI, motion and Schneider Alliance products as well as small distributed PLCs. The NWBM85Y422 gateway supports the following protocols: b Sy/Max point-to-point b Sy/Max net-to-net b PowerLogic NIM The gateway has one Modbus Plus port and four configurable (RS-422) ports for direct pinout to Sy/Max devices. Each RS-422 port supports communications from 300 ... 14.4 Kbaud. DIP-switch settings determine the gateway's mode of operationconfiguration mode or protocol conversion mode. Configuration mode allows you to program communication parameters (baud and time-out values, for example) and store them in the gateway's Flash memory. Gateway parameters can be set in any of three ways: b with an ASCII panel or a PC that has a terminal emulation program on serial port#1 b with MSTR ladder logic instructions b with Sy/Max TREAD or TWRTE instructions via serial ports # 2, 3 or 4 An MEB Modbus Plus-to-Sy/Max NIM module is also available from Schneider Alliance partner Niobrara R&D Corporation. This module fits in a Sy/Max RRK rack. It exchanges data between the existing Sy/Max network and a Modbus Plus network. Visit Niobraras web site (www.niobrara.com) for more information.
Characteristics
Model Electrical current draw on Sy/Max power supply m A undervoltage lockout circuit 8030CRM931 750 typical, 900 max Halts and resets the module and removes it from the RIO network when d.c. supply falls below aproximately c 4.6 V NW-BM85Y422
power source Ambient temperature operational storage humidity Agency compliance C (F) C (F) %
a 115/230 V or c 24 V
0 ... 60 (32 ... 140) -25 ... 80 (13 ... 176) 5 ... 95 noncondensing UL 508, CSA C22-2, FM Class 1 div. 2
0 ... 60 (32 ... 140) -40 ... 80 (40 ...212) 0 ... 95 noncondensing UL ML file number 532F (industrial control equipment), CSA ML file number LR326 CE
References
Description Quantum RIO adapter module (1) Connection type References 8030CRM931 Weight kg (lb)
Modbus Plus-to-Sy/Max NIM gateway Niobrara Modbus Plus-to-Sy/Max NIM brige module Niobrara Modbus Plus-to-Sy/Max NIM brige module (1) Consult your local sales office for pricing and availability BNC Ethernet 2 RS-485 ports
NW-BM85Y422
MEB-TCP-D
MEB-TCP-T
Schneider Electric
48194-EN_Ver2.1.fm/3

0
Quantum-Sy/Max-Ethernet Integration
General
The Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet (QSE) Module is a Quantum CPU network option module that can be placed in a Quantum rack, or backplane, to connect Quantum controllers to SY/MAX devices and applications. The QSE Module provides a 10Base-T compatible port for connecting to Ethernet twisted pair networks. The module is also available with a 10Base-FL port that connects to fiber optic networks. SY/MAX devices provide 10Base-2 Thin Wire compatible ports. Users must provide 10Base-2/10Base-T converters for SY/MAX communication with Quantum controllers through a QSE Module. Users must provide 10Base-FL/10Base-2 converters for SY/MAX communication with Quantum controllers via QSE 10Base-FL modules. Users can also purchase inexpensive hubs which convert the two media types to 10Base-2. The QSE Module contains a special FLASH memory area for non-volatile storage of the QSE executive software. Modsoft software (Rev. 2.3 or higher) is used to configure the QSE Module, and if necessary, to download the executive software if an upgrade needs to be performed.
Description
1 2 1 Model number, module description, color code 2 LED display 3 Global address label 3 4 Transmit cable connector 5 Receive cable connector 4 The front panel of Quantm-SY/MAX-Ethernet (QSE) Module 140 NOE 3p 100 comprises:
48194-EN_Ver2.1.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Character, references

Quantum-Sy/Max Integration
Specifications
Model Communication Ports 140 NOE 311 00 one 10Base-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port 140 NOE 351 00 two 10Base-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports
Cable Type
10Base-2 or Thinwire Ethernet 10Base-T (twisted pair)
2, 3, 4, or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core RG58a/u or RG58C/U coaxial (Belden 9907/82907 or equivalent) AWG AWG 20 22, 24, 26 Bus Star BNC (UG-274) Modular RJ-45 (4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base-T) 3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 position backplanes Models 450 and 650 Power Logic SFI160 SFW390-VAX Streamline Version 1.3 A 1
Wire size
Topology
Connector
Backplane Compatibility (Requires Quantum CPU) Compatible SY/MAX 802.3 Devices and Software
Bus Current Required
References
Description Communications module, Quantum-Sy/Max-Ethernet Cable type Twisted pair cable References 140 NOE 311 00 Weight kg (lb) 1.06 (2.33)
Fiber optic cable
140 NOE 351 00
1.06 (2.33)
Quantum-Sy/Max-Ethernet User Guide
840 USE 111 00
Schneider Electric
48194-EN_Ver2.1.fm/5
Selection guide
Motion control
Quantum motion control modules
Application
Single-axis Motion module for servomotors. Compatible with Lexium servodrive through an analog interface.
Drive interface
Counter inputs: incremental encoder, c 5 V, (RS 422) 2 channels Encoder feedback : 10 V, 12 bits
Programming Methodology
Using MMDS motion configuration software, with Ladder Logic (for Modbus) or with pick list programming (for Modbus Plus)
Features
Multiplication of counter frequency (x4) Automatic brake control Configurable discrete I/O inputs (including one high-speed input) Configurable discrete/analog I/O outputs
Axis Count
1 real axis 1 remote axis (for master signal)
Special Functions
Master/Slave position capture Synchronization of master/slave axes Point lock
Model
140 MSB 101 00
Page
48208/4
0456Q_Ver2.10-EN/2
Schneider Electric
Multi-axis Motion control modules for servomotors. Compatible with Lexium servodrive via SERCOS link
Via SERCOS link
Library of Motion Function Block under Concept software The development of all other special functions are possible by using the MMF C++ Developer 's kit requiring the assistance of our application services (see page 48198/6)
Electronic gearing Multi-axis interpolation CAM profiles execution from Register Table
With MMF Start programmer's kit - 8 real axes - 4 imaginary axes - 4 remote axes - 4 coordinate sets (with linear interpolation of 8 axes maximum) - 4 follower sets - Cam profiles The evolution, up to - 16 real axes - 22 axes/axis sets is possible with MMF C++ developer's kit. The assistance of our application services is required for use with this developer's kit.
With MMF Start programmer's kit - 8 real axes - 4 imaginary axes - 4 remote axes - 4 coordinate sets (with linear interpolation of 8 axes maximum) - 4 follower sets - Cam profiles The evolution, up to - 22 real axes - 32 axes/axis sets is possible with MMF C++ developer's kit. The assistance of our application services is required for use with this developer's kit.
Point lock position and point lock time Measure part Count probe Fast index Registration move Rotary knife
141MMS 425 01
141 MMS 535 02
48198/8
48198/8
Schneider Electric
0456Q_Ver2.10-EN/3
Motion control
140 MSB 101 00 Quantum single-axis motion module for servomotors
Presentation
The 140 MSB 101 00 single-axis motion module is designed for applications with one axis requiring a strong integration with the sequential program of the machine. The analog output of this module can drive the speed reference of the LexiumMHDA servodrive, or any other servodrive with an analog interface. See characteristics on page 48208/3. The MSB 101 00 module, using encoder feedback input, receives a signal from an incremental encoder which represents the position of the machine axis. After calculation, this information, depending on the movement driven by the application program, delivers a speed reference of + 10 V to the servodrive. The 140 MSB 101 00 is designed as follows : p 8 digital inputs of 24 VDC, configurable in stops or in motion-specific functions. The inputs not used in the axis control application can be used as standard inputs for the application program. p 3 24VDC outputs and one + 10V analog output, which can be programmed as a real-time image of the internal parameters of the axis under control. These inputs and outputs require an external 24 V power supply. The module includes a +10 V analog input. The incremental encoder's multiplication of impulses is integrated in the 140 MSB 101 00 module, which accepts a second auxiliary encoder feedback signal as an image of the master axis. The 690 MCB 000 00 breakout box allows connection between the 141 MSB 101 00 motion module and the Lexium MHDA servodrive, to simplify the system cabling.
Description
The 140 MSB 101 00 is comprised of : 1 2 1 A rugged outer rugged shell ensures the following: - PCB card support. - closing and locking of module into position. 2 Module diagnostic LEDs, including a digital Modbus Plus status indicator. 3 A SUB-D 9 connector for RS232 Modbus link. 4 A SUB-D 50 port for connection to the servodrive. 5 A clear access door to hold the user label.
5 3
Characteristics: page 48208/3
References: page 48208/4
Connections: page 48208/5 Schneider Electric
48208_Ver4.10-EN/2
Characteristics
Motion control
Operating characteristics
Axes Type Number Positioning Range Speed Maximum Units Range Units Position loop Speed loop ms ms Automatic control of linear, rotary, or continuous axis Synchronization of Master/Slave speed and position 1 real axis, 1 remote axis 4 294 967 296 bits inches, mm or other units 1...4 294 967 296 bits counts/s, inches/s, mm/s, rpm, etc 1 0,5 Point of origin; absolute, relative, or continuous movement 28 traversing programs 650 flash memory commands
Update
Motion
Controls Environment Motion
Encoder interface, position captures (stops) Logical stops, loop position control, point window
Electrical characteritics
Encoder feedback (2 channels) Incremental encoder Type Voltage Impedance Frequency x 1 Frequency x 4 Maximum system accuracy Servo interface Analog outputs Type Range Resolution Drive-enable output Voltage Current Drive-fault input I/O Discrete inputs Number Voltage Discrete outputs Number Voltage Current Analog inputs Voltage Resolution Impedance Analog outputs Voltage Maximum current Resolution High-speed input Position capture time Pulse width Time between two captures OT inputs Communication Ports Serial ports Type Protocol Baud rate Power requirements From the backplane External a V a V mA V k? V mA 7 24 + 20 % 3 24 + 20 % 150 maximum + 10,24 9 bits + sign 30 + 10,24 3 11 bits + sign 250 25 20 minimum Motor thermal overload (dry contact)
cV ? kHz kHz
Differential 5 + 20 % > 500 at 5 V nominal 200 nominal, 500 maximum 2000 maximum (internal counting) 0,5 arc/minute, encoder-dependent
Bipolar + 10,24 11 bits + sign 24 nominal, 30 maximum 500 (resistive maximum under 30 V) True high, 5 V TTL-compatible
V mA
s s ms
Bits/s
RS 232 D Modbus slave 300...9600, software selectable c 5 V - 1000 mA c 24 V 20 % at 500 mA max (for I/O only)
References: page 48208/4 Schneider Electric
Connections: page 48208/5
48208_Ver4.10-EN/3
References
Motion control
References
All types of Quantum CPUs support the 140 MSB 101 00 single-axis motion module. The module performs the same regardless of rack selected (primary, RI/O, or DI/O).
Description For Encoder inputs Functions Reference Weight kg 0.450
Motion module Servodrive via for one analog controlled axis
reference
2 encoder inputsc5 Closed-loop V, 500 kHz control of linear, rotary, and continuous axes. Synchronization of Master-Slave axes.
140 MSB 101 00
Connection accessories
Designation Use No. (1) Reference Weight kg
140 MSB 101 00
Breakout box Connection between the (2) 141MSB101 00 module and the servodrive: speed reference, auxiliary I/O, and simulated encoder feedback
690 MCB 000 00
Connector cables
Designation Use No. (1) Length Reference Weight kg
Required cables
Connection between the 140MSB10100 module and the 690MCB 000 00 breakout box. Cable comes with SUB-D 50 connectors on each end.
0,3 m (1 ft)
690 MCI 000 01
0,9 m (3 ft) 1,8 m (6 ft)
690 MCI 000 03
690 MCI 000 06
Connection between the breakout 5 box 690 MCB 000 00 and Lexium MHDA servodrive (simulated encoder feedback). Cable comes with SUB-D 9 connector on one end
6m (20 ft)
690 MCI 002 06
Configuration software
Designation Description
Reference
SW-MMDS-1DB
Weight kg 0.525
MMDS configuration and programming software
Configuration and programming software for the 140 MSB 101 00 motion module Use with Modsoft or Concept
(1) See page 48208/5 for key. (2) For e conformity, you must order the breakout box field wiring kit (690 MCB 101 00).
Connections: page 48208/5 Schneider Electric
48208_Ver4.10-EN/4
Connections
Motion control
Connections
4 3 5 6
1 140 MSB 101 00 : single-axis motion module 140 MSB 101 00 2 MHDA 10ppN00 : Lexium servodrive for Lexium BPH motor 3 690 MCB 000 00 : breakout box (speed reference, auxiliary I/O, and simulated encoder feedback) 4 690 MCI 000 0p : breakout box cable (0 p indicates cable length) 5 690 MCI 002 06 : cable with connector for simulated encoder feedback 6 Cable (not included; flying lead cable with connections to terminal strips on each end)
Characteristics: page 48208/3 Schneider Electric
References : page 48208/4
48208_Ver4.10-EN/5
Presentation
Motion control
SERCOS 141 MMS Quantum motion control modules
Presentation
The SERCOS MMS motion modules are used to build a distributed automation solution, tightly integrating motion applications with control applications, based on Quantum PLCs. The axis module and Quantum CPU communicate either through the Qunatum backplane or by using the Modbus Plus network. The data transfer is transparent, and does not need any additional application program. The physical interface between the SERCOS module and the servodrive is done by the SERCOS network, using fiber optic cable. This optic link is entirely digital, and provides communication parameters for the tuning, diagnostics, and operation of both the motion control module and the servo drives.
SERCOS Offer The SERCOS offer, based on the Quantum platform, contains: p Two multi-axis modules, 41 MMS 425 01/535 02, that can drive up to 8 real axes (1), each one connected to a Lexium servodrive using the SERCOS ring network; All these modules deliver calculation of trajectories, synchronization, or interpolation of several axes. p Lexium servodrives with a digital link from 1.5 A to 70 A. These drives manage positioning, speed and torque loops, and ensure the power conversion to drive the motor. Information from motor sensors or external encoders (such as position, and actual speed) are sent to the servodrive. p Lexium BPH brushless servomotors. These devices are equipped with cobalt samarium magnets, which deliver a high power-to-weight ratio, resulting in a wide range of speed in a minimum of space. The SERCOS offer includes all necessary accessories (filters, braking resistance), along with all necessary connectors.
Quantum motion modules The 141 MMS SERCOS motion modules are double-wide Quantum modules. This ensures high-performance motion functions using the multi-tasking, real-time operating system of the Quantum CPU. In addition to communicating with the Quantum CPU using the internal bus, each 141 MMS module has a Modbus Plus communications port. The function block library simplifies configuration of the motion commands for industrial applications.
SERCOS motion control integrated with Quantum automation This integration is the answer for motion control applications that require large numbers and a great diversity of inputs and outputs. The solution allows them to share a unique database between the Quantum CPU and the SERCOS motion control module. The SERCOS ring network is a well-known standard used in closed-loop position and speed applications. It is part of the European standard EN 61491. The SERCOS solution, compared to the analog interface solution, has the following benefits: p Efficient diagnostics, supplied in the motion control modules and the Quantum CPU, can send analytical information to the upper levels of the control hierarchy for action. This minimizes machine downtime. p The distributed architecture significantly reduces cabling costs and simplifies the installation. p The SERCOS digital network eliminates the low-resolution analog interface (12 or 14-bits) between the servodrive and the motion control module. p Fiber optic connections increase immunity from electromagnetic interference found in harsh industrial environments. p It is easy to expand the number of axes in one machine using the ring network.
(1) The MMF C++ developer 's kit (requiring the assistance of our application services) is used to increase the characteristics of these modules (141 MMS 425 01, up to 16 real axes and 141 MMS 535 02, up to 22 real axes.
Characteristics: pages 48198/6 and 48198/7
References: pages 48198/8 and 48198/9
Connections : pages 48198/9 Schneider Electric
48198_Ver4.00-EN/2
SERCOS architecture, system overview
Motion control
SERCOS architecture
Fiber Optic Cables SERCOS Ring Network
Quantum
Lexium MHDS Drives
Lexium BPH Motors SERCOS (SERiaI COmmunication System) is a communication standard defining the digital link (medium and exchange protocol) between the motion control module and intelligent servo drives. It is defined by European standard EN 61491. The use of SERCOS architecture enables the connection of input/output devices (position encoder, emergency stop, etc.) directly with the intelligent servo drives, thereby reducing connection costs. The fiber optic digital medium enables highspeed exchange (2 or 4 M bauds), yet assures a high level of noise immunity in industrial environments.
System overview
The system overview presents the diverse functions performed by the different parts of the multiaxial control system. Concept software UniLink software
Quantum PLC CPU
Application Program
PLC backplane or Modbus Plus
SERCOS Modules 141 MMS 425 01/ 141 MMS 535 02 Independant or continuous axes Interpolation Follower sets by ratio or Cam profiles
Lexium MDHS Drives
Interpretation of commands Position loop Speed loop Current loop Power conversion
Lexium BPH motor
Position speed and switching SERCOS Bus ring (to drives network)
Characteristics : pages 48198/6 and 48198/7 Schneider Electric
References : pages 48198/8 and 48198/9
Connections : pages 48198/9
48198_Ver4.00-EN/3
System overview (continued) description
Motion control
System overview
(continued)
The Concept software (via the Modbus Plus connection) enables you to: p register the SERCOS 141 MMS module(s) in the Quantum module configuration table p configure functions and parameterize used axes p program activities in the automated application p adjust parameters through control codes (parameters, 141 MMS module, and Lexium MHDS drives) p test and update the application The UniLink software via the PC/CAN connector of the Lexium MHDS servo drive allows you to: p define the Lexium MHDS drive and Lexium motor types p adjust the Lexium MHDS drive parameters, save them into the drive's EEprom memory and save them on the PC.
Description
The SERCOS 141 MMS pp5 0p multi-axis motion control module includes: 1 an SMA-type, TX-marked connector for connecting drives by fiber optic cable, for transmission to the SERCOS ring. 2 an SMA-type, RX-marked connector for connecting drives by fiber optic cable, for reception from the SERCOS ring. 3 hard outer casing allowing the following functions: p electronic card support p closing and locking of module into position 4 module diagnostic indicator lights: p READY - when lit, indicates the module has successfully passed power-up tests. p RUN light: - S teady, indicates the motion controller is in run mode, the SERCOS ring is complete, and the motion controller is accepting commands from the PLC to control the servo drives. - Blinking, indicates that the motion controller is attempting to go into run mode, but the SERCOS ring has not been established due to a physical disconnection or an incorrect address setting. - Off,indicates the motion controller is stopped. p MODBUS PLUS: normal Modbus Plus indicator codes 5 a RUN/ RESET keyswitch 6 COM 1 port with SUB-D 9 connectors - a special diagnostic port for Schneider Electric 7 COM 2 port with SUB-D 9 connectors - a port for user diagnostics and firmware upgrades 8 Modbus Plus port with SUB-D 9 connectors - a port for Modbus Plus communications.
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8
Connections : pages 48198/9 Schneider Electric
48198_Ver4.00-EN/4
Software setup
Motion control
Software setup
The configuration of the multi-axis motion modules are carried out by Concept software, and the MMF Start Programmer's Kit, 396 MMC 500 04. They are used to configure the multi-axis applications by the creation of a common database (between the Quantum PLC and the 141 MMS motion control modules). It simplifies the access to a library of motion-specific function blocks.
Programming movements and special functions used by the MMF Programmer's Kit Movements are initiated by the use of function blocks in the Concept application program. The function blocks can be written in IEC ladder or Function Block Diagrams.
Function blocks are available for each specific move type: incremental, absolute, or continuous. In addition , function blocks are available to set parameters and configure objects (axes, sets, cam profiles, and special application functions). The sequence of events or movements can be controlled by using the Sequential Function Chart according to IEC standard 1131-3. Application-specific functions, such as Continuous Registration, are set up using the MMF_SUB block (see screen, opposite).
Connections : pages 48198/9
48198_Ver4.00-EN/5
Characteristics
Motion control
Functional characteristics of modules 141 MMS 425 01/535 02

Module Software kit 141 MMS 425 01 396 MMC 500 04 396 MMC 500 00 With the assistance of our application services (3) 22 max 141 MMS 535 02 396 MMC 500 04 396 MMC 500 00 With the assistance of our application services (3) 32 max
Total motion devices
16 max
16 max
Type of axes Actual axes (connected to Lexium drives) Imaginary axes Remote axes
16
22
4 4, for interpreting position of external encoder
Up to 16 axes/sets Up to 16 axes/sets
4 4, for interpreting position of external encoder
Up to 16 axes/sets Up to 16 axes/sets
Groupes of axes (sets) Coordinate
4 allowed in each group for Up to 16 axes/sets linear interpolation up to 8 axes maximum 4 groups up to 8 axes maximum 8 profiles which can be changed from PLC registers Up to 16 axes/sets
4 allowed in each group for Up to 16 axes/sets linear interpolation up to 8 axes maximum 4 groups up to 8 axes maximum Up to 16 axes/sets
Followers
Cam profile
Any number up to the memory limitation of 64K points
8 profiles which can be changed from PLC registers
Any number up to the memory limitation of 64K points
Main functions
Programming Movements b Point of origin, absolute, relative, or continuous b Immediate movement, or queued, toward a given position b Modulation of speed b Point lock position and point lock time: synchronizes a Slave axis with a Slave position target and a Master position target using parameters. b Measure part: measures the distance between two edges on a discrete input on the drive, can be applied to a real axis or an auxiliary axis) position measurement via external encoder. b Count probe: counts the edges on a discrete input on the drive within a period of time. b Fast index: starts a movement on an event. b Registration move: position sensor on an edge of the discrete input on the drive. b Rotary knife: cuts using a rotary knife. Synchronizes a circular axis on a linear axis and controls a discrete output on the dri ve. The development of all other special functions is possible with the use of MMF C++ Developer's kit requiring the assistance of our application services. Please consult us. b Rapid stop, stop following configured deceleration profile b Temporary stop b Restart of stopped activity
Special functions
Other special functions
Stop/start functions
Configuration/adjustment SERCOS Function Acceleration/deceleration Speed Other adjustments Groups of slave axes Bus cycle time, traffic on the bus, optical power on the fiber, SERCOS loop diagnostics Ramp values, ramp type (rectangular, triangular, and trapezoidal), unit choices, maximum acceleration adjustment Speed units, default speed, maximum speed, speed modulation coefficient Update screen, axis position, verification Tracking of master axis by ratio or by cam (cam profile), threshold position of tracking master, value of the Bias during synchronization of an axis, monitoring of Master/Slave positions, master offset for a slave axis Interpolation type: linear Values of a point existing from a cam profile, number of points (5000 maximum), type of interpolation, table addresses Movement in acceleration, in deceleration, in homing, speed drive fault Drive fault, axis currently reading data, tracking error, overvoltage, undervoltage, current overload, power supply fault (3) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Groups of coordinate axes Cam profile State of an activity or of an axis Diagnostic
Connections: pages 48198/9 Schneider Electric
48198_Ver4.00-EN/6
Motion control
Electrical characteristics of the 141 MMS 425 01/535 02 modules

Model Processor Internal data words Memory Application Static RAM Dynamic RAM SERCOS Network Nature Topology Medium Bit rate Cycle time Maximum number of segments Length of segment m M bauds ms Industrial support conforming to EN 61491 norm Ring Fiber optic cable 4 2 typical, 4 maximum 9 38 max with plastic fiber optic cable 150 max with glass fiber optic cable (230 m) 23 Mb Mb Mb 2 2 8 4 4 8 MHz 141 MMS 425 01 66 10 000 141 MMS 535 02 133 60 000
C ommunication ports Number Protocol Baud rate Backplane power required Bits/s mA 2 RS 232 Modbus slave 3009600 2000 at c 5 V 2500 at c 5 V
References: pages 48198/8 and 48198/9 Schneider Electric
Connections: pages 48198/9
48198_Ver4.00-EN/7
References
Motion control
References
Any of the Quantum PLC processors can be used with the SERCOS 141 MMS motion modules. For best performance, the Quantum PLC scan time should be kept under 10 ms. When more than one multi-axis control module141 MMS is used, the following limitations on processor choice are imposed:
Type of processors Maximum number of MMS, NOE or NOM Designation Functions 140 CPU 113 02 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A
6 Reference
6 Weight kg
Number of channels with MMF: Programmer's kit C++ Developer 's 396 MMC 500 04 kit (1)
Multiaxial control modules
SERCOS digital variable-speed drive control
8 actual axes 4 imaginary axes 8 sets
16 actual axes 22 total axes/sets
141 MMS 425 01
0,520
8 actual axes 8 imaginary axes 8 sets
22 actual axes 32 total axes/sets
141 MMS 535 02
0,520
141 MMS 425 01
Connection accessories
Description Connection Length Reference Weight kg
Plastic fiber optic cables fitted with SMA-type connectors (radius of curve: 25 mm minimum)
Lexium MHDS10ppN00 variable speed drives
0.3 m (1 ft)
990 MCO 000 01
0.45 (0.99)
0.9 m (3 ft)
990 MCO 000 03
0.180 (0.99)
1.5 m (5 ft)
990 MCO 000 05
0.260 (0.99)
4.5 m (15 ft)
990 MCO 000 15
0.770 (1.98)
16.5 m (55 ft)
990 MCO 000 55
1.35 (2.97)
22,5 m (75ft)
141 MMS 535 02
990 MCO 000 75
1.85 (4.07)
37,5 m (125 ft)
990 MCO 000 125
2.7 (5.94)
Sets of plastic fiber optic connection

Designation Composition Reference Weight kg
Set of fiber optic cable and SMA connectors (2)
12 SMA-type connectors 12 insulating sleeves 30 m of plastic fiber optic cable
990 MCO KIT 01
Equipment for installation of fiber optic cables
Tools for constructing cables to required 990 MCO KIT 00 length from a 990MCOKIT01 Includes stripping tool, crimping pliers, 25W soldering iron, and instructions for use
(1) MMF C++ Developer' s kit requires the assistance of our application services. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Connectors to be used exclusively for connecting SERCOS motion modules in the same electrical cabinet.
Connections: pages 48198/9 Schneider Electric
48198_Ver4.00-EN/8
References (continued), connections
Motion control
Reference
(continued)
Concept programming and configuration software

Description User license type Reference Weight kg
Concept Packages Concept XL version 2.5
Single-user license Three-user license 10-user license Network license
372 SPU 474 01 V25 372 SPU 474 11 V25 372 SPU 474 21 V25 372 SPU 474 31 V25
SERCOS multi-axis motion control software

Designation Description Reference Weight kg
Multi-Axis Motion Framework Programmer's Kit (MMF Start)
Concept Library and MMFStart Shared data base creation Backup/restore functions for Motion maintenance personnel Configuration software
396 MMC 500 04
Connections
SERCOS Ring Network
Drive 1
Drive 3
Drive 5
Drive 2
Drive 4
1 141 MMS 425 01/535 02: multiaxial control module for Quantum 2 MHDS 10ppN00: Lexium drives for Lexium BPH motor 3 990 MCO 000pp: plastic fiber optic cables pre-fitted with SMA-type connectors TX/RX fiber optic transmission/reception
48198_Ver4.00-EN/9
4 Contents
I/O architectures, hot standby solution and Momentum I/O
I/O architectures
b Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Local I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/3 b Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/4 to 4/9 b Distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/10 to 4/19
Hot standby solution

b Hot standby modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/20 to 4/23
Momentum I/O
Distributed discrete I/O bases selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/24 to 4/27
b Momentum I/O bases introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/28 and 4/29 b Momentum discrete I/O bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/30 to 4/41
Analog I/O bases selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/42 and 4/43

b Momentum analog I/O bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/44 to 4/53
Specialty module I/O bases selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/54 and 4/55
b Momentum specialty module I/O bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/56 to 4/59
Communication adapters selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/60 to 4/63

b Ethernet TCP/IP communication adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/64 and 4/65 b Momentum Modbus Plus communication adapters . . . . . . . . pages 4/66 and 4/67
M1 processor adapters selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/68 and 4/69 Option adapters selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/70 and 4/71
Schneider Electric
4/1

I/O architectures Overview
Overview
The Modicon Quantum Automation Series provides a highly flexible architecture that ensures a cost-effective and high performance control solution, regardless of the configuration. From centralized systems to highly distributed systems to networked distributed control schemes, Quantum provides the right solution. Quantum I/O can be used in three major architectures to meet control system requirements: i local I/O i remote I/O (RIO) i distributed I/O (DIO) Whether your requirments are for improved space utilization, reduced installation costs, high performance, or connectivity to HMIs and host computers, Quantum I/O has an architecture that fits. Combining these different I/O architectures with Quantum's wide range of communication options, an optimal control system can be configured and installed to meet the most challenging control requirements.
Modbus Plus Local I/O Modbus Plus E/S locales
RIO
DIO
RIO
DIO
RIO
Momentum I/O
Quantum remote I/O
Quantum distributed I/O on Modbus Plus
I/O architecture selection Media
Local I/O
Remote I/O Coax 15,000 ft (4,572 m) 1.5 MHz Yes Yes No No 31 1,984 in / 1,984 out 64 in / 64 out 31,744 in / 31,744 out 1024 1,736 in / 868 out 64 in / 64 out 1 10, 16 slots
Distributed I/O Twisted pair 1,500 ft (457 m) 1 MHz No No Yes Yes 63 500 in / 500 out 30 in / 32 out 7,840 in / 7,840 out 480 in / 512 out 500 in / 500 out 30 in / 32 out 3 2, 3, 4 slots
Maximum distance without repeaters Speed Scan synched I/O servicing Hot standby support Momentum I/O support Modbus Plus compatible Maximum drops per network I/O words per network I/O words per drop discretes per network discretes per drop analogs per network analogs per drop Networks per controller Typical backplanes 4/2 No 64 in / 64 out 1024 / any mix 64 in / 64 out 6, 10, 16 slots

I/O architectures
Local I/O
Local I/O
The Quantum Automation Platform provides local I/O support for control systems where the wiring is most effectively brought from the field to the main control cabinet. Local I/O can comprise as few as one I/O module or as many as 14 modules along with a programmable logic controller (a Quantum CPU) and a power supply module in a single backplane. Local I/O can support up to 1344 I/O points in a 1845 cm2 (286 in2) panel space. Local I/O can also be expanded to a second backplane with the use of a Backplane Expander. If required for the application, system option modules can also be installed in the local backplane. Available system option modules include RIO processors (one/CPU supported) or Modbus Plus network interfaces (two/CPU supported). All other available modules are considered and configured as I/O modules. Selection of the appropriate backplane depends on the required number of modules for the system. Backplanes are available in 2-, 3-, 4-, 6-, 10-, and 16-slot versions. If required, communications and networking modules can also be installed in the local backplane. Most communication and networking modules require the local CPU to be present; the exception is the 141 MMS 425 01 multi-axis SERCOS motion module, which can operate as a standalone. Available Quantum communications and network modules include: i i i i i i i i i Modbus Plus and Modbus modules Ethernet modules for TCP/IP, SY/MAX and MMS Remote I/O modules Hot Standby modules SERCOS multi-axis servo motion control modules InterBus modules Lonworks modules ProfiBus modules As-iBus modules
High performance interrupt functions In certain applications, I/O needs to be updated faster than the normally scheduled scan time. Quantum provides interrupt I/O services for high-speed applications. These services include time interrupt processing, interrupt input, and immediate I/O updates that support high-speed throughput of critical I/O located in the local backplane. The services are driven by instructions embedded in Quantum's 984 ladder logic language. The instructions can be programmed via Modsoft or Concept programming software; they update the I/O immediately within the CPU. Utilizing a subroutine section in the CPU, the updated I/O table can be used to update logic only, or write to any local output module. Interrupt services increase machine productivity, yielding higher throughput and better utilization of capital equipment. Local I/O configuration rules When you configure a local I/O sytstem, consider the following four characteristics: i i i i Available Available Available Available backplane slots for modules power for the installed modules addressing words to configure the modules option module slots
A local I/O system can support up to 14 slots for option processors and I/O modules in a 16-slot backplane. If fewer I/O modules are required, smaller backplanes can be used. For applications requiring more than14 slots, a backplane expander can be used, and RIO and/or DIO can be added to the system. Empty modules (140 XCP 500 00) are available to occupy unused slots. Every CPU, option module and I/O module requires power from the backplane. This power is provided by the system power supply. To ensure a valid configuration, simply add up the required backplane current (in mA) for all modules in the local backplane, and ensure that the total current is less than that provided by the selected power supply. A Quantum CPU in a local I/O drop can handle up to 64 input words and 64 output words of I/O addressing. A 16-bit input or output module is equal to one word. Simply add up the addressing requirements for each module to ensure that the limit is not exceeded.
4/3
Remote I/O Presentation

I/O architectures
Presentation
For applications that require large I/O drops remotely mounted, highest I/O performance, and/or connectivity to existing Modicon remote I/O installations, the Quantum Automation Series provides a remote I/O (RIO) architecture solution. Based on the S908 remote I/O network technology, this network is compatible with existing installations of Modicon I/O products, including the 800 and 200 Series I/O modules and Sy/Max I/O. New installations can incorporate an installed base of these devices for reduced installation costs.
Quantum head-end with CPU and 140 CRP 931 adapter
Quantum RIO drop with 140 CRA 931 adapter
800 series RIO drop with AS-J890-101 adapter
200 series RIO drop with AS-P453 adapter
Sy/Max I/O
RIO is based on a coaxial cabling scheme that provides long-distance capability, up to 5 km (16 400 ft) with CATV cable or longer with optional fiber optic cable. It is a highperformance network operating at 1.544 Mbits/s for high I/O data throughput. The RIO cable system consists of a linear trunk line, with line taps and drop cables running to each remote drop. Up to 31 remote drops are configurable. Each drop can support up to 128 I/O words (64 words in/64 words out). Modicon segment scheduler The Modicon segment scheduler complements the high performance of the RIO network by interleaving I/O servicing and logic solving to create the fastest system throughput available. The segment scheduler breaks application programs into logical segments, then schedules I/O servicing to occur in conjunction with the segment's associated logic solving. Inputs are read prior to logic being solved and outputs are written after logic is solved. This eliminates the need to wait for an entire scan before outputs are set, giving a faster system response than comparable control systems. As a result, there is no performance penalty for using RIOit is as fast as local I/O. For most systems, throughput of local or remote I/O can be estimated at no less than two times scan (assumes measurement of input and output times through 24 V d.c. modules). In addition, all analog and register values are updated automatically, as fast as discrete I/O, without user programming. Compatibility with the 800 and 200 Series I/O products For forward integration from existing Modicon systems, the Quantum Automation Series is compatible with the 800 and 200 Series I/O products. Using the same RIO head end interface, it connects to 800 Series I/O via the J890, J892, P890, or P892 RIO adapters, and to 200 Series I/O via the P453/J290 and P451/J291 RIO adapters. Other standard Modicon components are also compatible with this system, including network taps (MA-0185-100) and splitters (MA-0186-100). Quantum remote I/O also supports drops of Sy/Max I/O. Rules of configuration To ensure a valid configuration, add up the required backplane current (in mA) for all modules at each I/O remote location, and ensure the total is less than the available power in the selected power supply.
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Remote I/O Topologies

I/O architectures
RIO cable topologies

A single-cable RIO topology Quantum CPU with 140 CRP 931 00 adapter
Local I/O 52-0401-000 F connector 97-5951-000 RG-11 trunk cable RIO drop 1, with a 140 CRA 931 00 adapter RIO drop 2, with a 140 CRA 931 00 adapter unconfigured expansion drop location 97-5750-000 RG-6 drop cables MA-0185-100 tap MA-0185-100 tap MA-0185-100 tap with 52-0402-000 port terminator MA-0185-100 tap with 52-0422-000 trunk terminator last RIO drop, with a 140 CRA 931 00 adapter
An MA-0185-100 tap is required for every drop on the system to electrically isolate the drop from the trunk and protect the system from impedance mismatches and cable disconnections. A minimum signal strength of 14dB is required between the trunk and each drop to ensure correct operation. The signal loss on the trunk cable as it crosses the tap is less than 1dB. A total of 35 dB is available from the head-end RIO processor. The entire cabling architecture must not exceed this system limit. For systems that require high availability, a redundant-cable option is available to protect the system from cable breaks and damaged connectors. With two cables connected between the host and each drop, a single cable break does not disrupt communications. If a cable break occurs, a health bit is set to indicate the problem node and faulty cable. For preventative maintenance, the system also provides retry counters for all communication transactions to all nodes. High retry counts on a cable in a specific node could indicate connection problems that can be scheduled and corrected prior to unwanted downtime. A redundant-cable RIO topology Quantum CPU with 140 CRP 932 00 adapter
Local I/O two F connectors RIO drop 1, with a 140 RIO drop 2, with a 140 CRA 932 00 adapter CRA 932 00 adapter last RIO drop, with a 140 CRA 932 00 adapter
two trunk cables two drop cables per drop
two taps per drop
both sets of taps correctly terminated
Schneider Electric
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/3
Remote I/O Fiber optic repeaters

I/O architectures
Point-to-point RIO communications with fiber optic repeaters Fiber optic repeaters are available to enhance network noise immunity and increase cable distance to as much as 15 km (9.3 miles). Repeaters convert the twisted-pair cable to standard 62.5/125 ? m fiber while maintaining the full dynamic range of the network.
Quantum head-end CPU with 140 CRP 931 00 adapter
tap with 52-0422-000 trunk terminator 490 NRP 954 00 fiber optic drop
RG-11 coax trunk cable RG-6 coax drop cable
fiber optic Rx and Tx cables 490 NRP 954 00 fiber optic drop RIO drop 1 RIO drop 2 last RIO drop
RG-11 coax trunk cable RG-6 coax drop cable
tap
tap tap with 52-0422-000 trunk terminator
A self-healing ring topology Multiple 490 NRP 954 00 fiber optic repeaters can be interconnected in a closed loop ring so that if a break occurs anywhere in the ring the network can reconfigure itself. The RIO signal is sent down both legs of the ring by the drop repeater to the head repeaters. When a signal is received on one Rx line, the other Rx channel is blankedthis prevents the same signal from being transmitted twice in the ring. The maximum length of fiber cable allowed in a self-healing ring is 10 km (32 000 ft). Quantum head-end
terminated tap RIO drop 1 repeater terminated tap repeaters RIO drop 2
RIO drop 4 drop repeater repeater
terminated tap terminated tap terminated tap
RIO drop 3
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Remote I/O Characteristics

I/O architectures
Head-end adapter and drop adapter characteristics

Model Drop type 140 CRP 931 00 140 CRP 932 00 140 CRA 931 00 140 CRA 932 00 Quantum, 200 series, 500 series, 800 series, or Symax (any mix) 31 max 64 in /64 out words 2 ports per drop, 32 ports (16 drops), max. (Requires use of AS-P892-000, AS-J892-101/ 102, or AS-J290-0X0 at the RIO drops). W Internal 75 Tied to chassis ground mb dB c Single cable Redundant cable General Holdup time 1.544 35 500 V coaxial cable, center conductor to ground One "F" type female connector with a right angle adapter Two "F" type female connectors with a right angle adapter Software configurable NOTE: In the event of a communication loss with the remote processor, output modules during this time will retain their last operating state. Input module data will be held in the system controlling CPU. After this time, output modules will assume their predefined timeout states and inputs will be zeroed by the CPU. Power Up and Runtime Executive checksum RAM address/data Capacitor to ground
I/O type Modules/drop Words/drop ASCII
Quantum 28 max
Coax termination Coax shield Data transfer rate Dynamic range Isolation Cable connections
Diagnostics
Power Up Dual port memory check LAN controller check 1
Maximum number of CPRs supported by the controller Bus current requirement mA mA W W
Single channel: 600 Dual channel:750 Single channe: 3 Dual channel: 3.8
Power dissipation
Fiber optic cable considerations

If you are using a fiber optic link in your RIO network, consider the following when selecting fiber optic cable from a vendor: For most applications, 62.5/125 ? m cable is recommended because of its relatively low loss and low signal distortion. However, in high optical power applications, such as those that use splitters or star couplers, the 100/140 ? m cable should be used. Wherever possible, select a multiconductor cable. It is inexpensive; it provides a backup path in case a cable gets cut in the process of pulling it; and you can use the extra path for voice, video, or other communications
Schneider Electric
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/5
Remote I/O References

I/O architectures
Modules
Description Quantum RIO head-end adapter Cable Single-cable Redundantcable Quantum RIO drop adapter Single-cable Redundantcable RIO fiber optic drop Reference 140 CRP 931 00 140 CRP 932 00 Weight kg (lb)
140 CRA 931 00 140 CRA 932 00
490 NRP 954 00
Cables
Description RG-6 coaxial quad shield cable (sold by the roll) RG-11 coaxial quad shield cable (sold by the roll) Length Reference 320 m (1000ft)/ 97 5750 000 roll 320 m (1000ft)/ 97 5951 000 roll AS MBII 003 AS MBII 004 Weight kg (lb)
Preassembled drop cable (with F 15 m (50 ft) connectors, self-terminating F adapter, and quad shield RG-6 cable) 42 m (140 ft)
Accessories
Description Backplane expander Expander cables Length 1m 2m 3m Reference 140 XBE 100 00 140 XCA 717 03 140 XCA 717 06 140 XCA 717 09 Weight kg (lb)
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/6
Schneider Electric
Remote I/O References

I/O architectures
Accessories
Description
(continued) Quantity Reference MA 0185 100 Weight kg (lb)
Tap (connects a drop cable to the 1 tap trunk cable) Splitter (splits a signal from a single cable for two-cable use) Tap terminator (for unused drop locations) 1 terminator
MA 0186 100
52 0402 000
Trunk terminator (for last tap on the 1 terminator network) F connector cassette for RG-6 quad-shield cable 10 connectors for RG-6 cable, with silicon 12 connectors rubber boots for RG-11 cable 6 connectors
52 0422 000
MA 0329 001 52 0400 000
490 RIO 002 11 52 0480 000 043509446 52 0614 000 52 0724 000 MA 9002 780 60 0513 000 490 RIO 004 00
Right-angle F adapter for semi1 adapter rigid cable BNC connector for RG-6 quad1 connector shield cable F-to-BNC adapter for RG-11 cable 1 adapter BNC jack to male F connector (with 1 jack J890/J892 drop adapters) BNC angle adapter 1 adapter BNC in-line terminator Coaxial cable stripping tool for RG-6 and RG-11 Replacement blade pack RG-6 RG-11 Connector installation tool Cable installation tool Ground block Crimping tools F connector on RG-6 BNC connector on RG-6 Cable cutter 1 terminator 1 tool
2 blades 2 blades 1 tool 1 tool 1 block
490 RIO 004 06 490 RIO 004 11 490 RIO 0C4 11 490 RIO 0S4 11 60 0545 000
1 tool 1 tool 1 tool
60 0544 000 043509432 60 0558 000
Schneider Electric
48215-EN_Ver4.0.fm/7
Presentation

I/O architectures
Distributed I/O, Modbus Plus
Presentation
The Modicon Quantum automation platform delivers a distributed I/O (DIO) architecture that provides cost-effective and flexible solutions for controling and monitoring I/O signals over a wide area. The Quantum DIO architecture uses the same I/O modules as a local or remote I/O (RIO) subsystem, and reduces installation costs by using low-cost, twisted-pair cables. A special DIO drop adapter with a built-in power supply is used at each drop. Quantum DIO drop adapters are specifically designed to link Quantum I/O modules to the head via twisted-pair shielded cable. A drop adapter also provides the I/O with power (maximum 3A) from a 24 V d.c. or 115/230 V a.c. source. DIO drops may also be powered by standard Quantum 8 A power supply modules, in which case the 3 A supply built into the drop adapter is not used. A DIO drop is smaller than an RIO drop, but more drops can be supported and they can be spread over a wider area than an RIO network. RIO supports a linear configuration up to 4500 m (15 000 ft) long, while the DIO architecture supports up to three network heads per CPU and up to 1800 m (6000 ft) per network (using RR85 repeaters). Even greater distances can be achieved using fiber optic repeaters. The DIO architecture is based on Modbus Plus technology. A DIO network can support 32 nodes over 500 m (1500 ft); by using repeaters, the DIO network length can be extended to 2000 m ( 6000 ft) and can support up to 64 nodes. Up to three DIO networks are supported one is native to the CPU itself, and the other two are available by adding optional 140 NOM 211 x0 or 140 NOM 212 x0 network interface modules into the Quantum backplane. With three DIO networks, a single CPU can support 189 drops of I/O. DIO can be combined with RIO in the same CPU system for significantly larger I/O counts. All products that currently support Modbus Plus can coexist on the DIO network. For example, a programming panel can be connected to the DIO network to monitor and troubleshoot an operating control system from the remote site, without running a separate communication link. In addition, HMI devices like a PanelMate Plus or FactoryMate Plus can participate on the network to reduce the number of networks required for a system. Distributed systems can have HMI devices at remote stations without either a separate communications link or a local controller present, which significantly reduces hardware and installation costs. Typical Multi-Network Distributed I/O System
Modbus Plus to host interface
DIO
DIO
Momentum
I/O only DIO network #1 - to 63 drops w/repeater
Multifunction DIO network #2 - to 63 nodes w/repeater
DIO
Momentum
Altivar 66 Variable speed AC drive
PC
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Description

I/O architectures
Using Modbus Plus for distributed I/O

Modbus Plus can be used as the fieldbus for a distributed I/O network under the control of a Quantum CPU. A Modbus Plus master needs to reside at the head end of the network (as either a 140 NOM 21p module or Quantum CPU with a built-in Modbus Plus interface). A 140 CRA 211 pp module must reside in each distributed I/O drop on the network. A CRA module acts as both a distributed I/O adapter and a power supply for the drop; no additional power supply modules are required. Each DIO drop can address up to 30 input words and 32 output words. A single or redundant cable topology may be employed in the distributed I/O system. Depending on your system's requirements, one of the following module combinations can be used to set up a Modbus Plus-based DIO system: At the head CPU with MBP or 140 NOM 211 00 CPU with MBP or 140 NOM 211 00 140 NOM 212 00 140 NOM 212 00 At the drop 140 CRA 211 10 Type of system single cable witha 115/230V power source at the drop single cable withc 24V power source at the drop redundant cable with a 115/230 V power source at the drop redundant cable with c 24 V power source at the drop
140 CRA 211 20 140 CRA 211 10 140 CRA 211 20
Description
The Modbus Plus 140 NOM pp00 modules at the end of the network comprise on the front panel: 1 Model number and color code 2 LED Status indicators comprising: - Ready (green) - Fault (red) - Pwr ok (green) - Modbus + (green) - Error A (red) - Error B (red) 3 Removable, hinged door with customer identification label 4 Microswitch 5 Modbus port 6 Modbus Plus
Schneider Electric
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/3
Characteristics

I/O architectures
Drop interface characteristics

Model Function 140 CRA 211 10 140 CRA 212 10 140 CRA 211 20 140 CRA 212 20 DIO drop interfacea DIO drop interfacea DIO drop interface c DIO drop interface c source voltage source voltage source voltage source voltage single a85 276V Hz A 47 63 0.4 @ a 115 V 0.2 @ a 230 V 10 @ a 115 V 20 @ a 230 V 50 redundant a 85 276 V 47 63 0.4 @ a 115 V 0.2 @a 230 V 10 @ a 115 V 20 @ a 230 V 50 single c 20 30 V 1.6 redundant
Cable connections Input voltage Frequency range Input current
Startup current
30
Power input Buffer time
VA cycle
0.5 @ full load and minimum line max. 1.0 ms voltage/frequency and less than 1 s between interrupts 1.5 external 5.1 V 3 0 over-current, over-voltage 30 I / 32 O (two additional input words are reserved for I/O drop status) yes yes yes yes yes yes terminal block, 7-pole 1.5 external 2.5 external
Fusing Bus output Voltage Current Minimum load Protection Words Diagnostics startup RAM RAM Address Checksum Processor Run time RAM RAM Address Checksum Processor Field wiring Power dissipation
A c A A
11
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/4
Schneider Electric

I/O architectures
DIO drop adapters/power supplies/cables characteristics

Model Input requirements Voltage Frequency Voltage total harmonic distortion Current A Hz 140 CRA 211 10 a 85...276 V 47...63 less than 10% of the fundamental rms value 0.4 @ a 115 V 0.2 @ a 230 V 10 @ a 115 V 20 @ a 230 V 50 1/2 cycle @ full load & minimum rated line voltage/frequency. no less than 1 between interruptions 1.5 (Part # 043502515 or equivalent) standalone or not powered c A A 5.1 V 3 0 over current, over voltage 1 port (single cable) 2 ports (dual cable) I/O type : Quantum modules/drop : depends on bus current loading and word count words : 30 in / 32 out (two additional input words are reserved for drop status) power-up runtime RAM data/address executive checksum 7-point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)
2.0 V + 3.0 V x I B U S = Watts, where I B U S is in A)
140 CRA 212 10
140 CRA 211 20 c 20...30 V -
140 CRA 212 20
1.6
Inrush current VA rating Power interruption
A VA s
30 1.0 ms max
Fusing (external) Operating mode Output-to-bus Voltage Current Minimum load Protection Communication Modbus Plus
2.5 (Part # 04350348 or equivalent) standalone
General
Specifications
Diagnostics
Field wiring connector Internal power dissipation
7-point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)
Schneider Electric
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/5

I/O architectures
Head-end module characteristics

Model Function 140 NOM 211 00 140 NOM 212 00 140 NOM 252 00 DIO head-end interface for DIO head-end interface for DIO head-end interface for twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable single 1 Modbus (RS 232) 1 Modbus Plus (RS 485) redundant 1 Modbus (RS 232) 2 Modbus Plus (RS 485) 2 (transmit and receive pairs) 1 Modbus (RJ 45) 2 Modbus Plus (fiber optic cable)
Cable connections Communication ports
Words Diagnostics startup RAM RAM Address Checksum Processor Run time RAM RAM Address Checksum Processor Bus current required Power dissipation Data rate Pulse width distortion/jitter Wavelength Power loss 50/125 mm fiber budget (including 3 dB 62.5/125 mm fiber margin) 100/140 mm fiber Optical transmission 50/125 mm fiber 62.5/125 mm fiber 100/140 mm fiber Rise/fall time Optical receiver sensitivity dynamic range detected silence mA W
30 I / 32 O (two additional input words are reserved for I/O drop status) yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 780 4 780 4 1 750 4 1 5 or better 820 6.5 11 16.5 -12.8 ... -19.8 -9 ... -16 -3.5 ... 110.5 20 or better 30 or better 20 -36
MBPS 1 ns nm dB dB dB dBm dBm dBm ns dBm dB dBm -
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/6
Schneider Electric
Networks

I/O architectures
Modbus Plus network, network layout with components
Quantum redundant Modbus Plus network
Network with PC cards for Modbus Plus
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
140 NOM 212 00Quantum Modbus Plus Head-end Interface, redundant support, twisted pair cable. 140 NOM 252 00Quantum Modbus Plus Head-end Interface, single-cable support, fiber optic cable. 140 NOM 211 00Quantum Modbus Plus Head-end Interface, single-cable support, twisted pair cable. 140 CRA 212 10Quantum Modbus Plus Drop Interface and power supply, redundant support, 115/230 VAC. 140 CRA 211 10Quantum Modbus Plus Drop Interface and power supply, single-cable support, 115/230 VAC. 170 PNT 160 20Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, redundant network, IEC support. 170 NEF 160 21Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, redundant network, 984 support. 170 NEF 110 21Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, non-redundant network, 984 support. 170 PNT 110 20Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, non-redundant network, IEC support. 490 NRP 254 00Modbus Plus Repeater, line/drop, fiber optic support. 490 NRP 253 00Modbus Plus Repeater, point-to-point, fiber optic support. NW-BM85C-002Modbus Plus Bridge/Multiplexer, panel or shelf mount, 4 Modbus Plus ports. NW-RR85-001Modbus Plus Repeater, coaxial cable. AM-SA85-030Modbus Plus ISA PC Adapter Card, single port. 416 NHM 300 30Modbus Plus PCI PC Adapter Card, single port. SW-MXDS-001 Modbus Plus Driver Suite.
Schneider Electric
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/7
Network

I/O architectures
Modbus Plus network, network layout with components
Modbus Plus network for Quantum and Momentum
Modbus Plus bridges, repeaters and taps
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
990 NAD 230 11Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Terminators 174 CEV 300 20 Modbus Plus-to-Ethernet Bridge 416 NHM 212 33 Modbus Plus Type III PCMCIA Card, single port 416 NHM 212 34 Modbus Plus Type III PCMCIA Card, single port with Plug-and-Play capability 990 NAD 230 00Modbus Plus Tap, IP20 990 NAD 230 10Modbus Plus Tap, IP65 AS-MBKT-085Modbus Plus Inline Connector AS-MBKT-185Modbus Plus Terminating Connector 990 NAD 211 10Modbus Plus Drop Cable, 2.4 m (8 ft) 990 NAD 215 10Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Programming Cable, 3.05 m (10 ft) 170 MCI 021 20Modbus Plus RJ45 cable, 3.05 m (10 ft) 170 XTS 020 00 Modbus Plus T Connector (DB9 base) 170 MCI 020 10Modbus Plus RS 485 cable, 25 cm (10 in) 170 MCI 020 80Modbus Plus RJ45 cable, double-ended, 10 m (30 ft) 170 XTS 021 00 Modbus Plus RJ45 Terminator 416 NHM 300 32 Modbus Plus PCI PC Adapter Card, dual ports NW-BP85-002Modbus Plus Bridge Plus, 4 Modbus Plus ports
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/8
Schneider Electric
References

I/O architectures
Modbus Plus products, cables and accessories

Modbus Plus bridges and repeaters
Description Modbus Plus Bridge multiplexer Support Panel or shelf Panel or shelf Rack-mount Modbus Plus programmable bridge/multiplexers Rack-mount Panel or shelf Panel or shelf Modbus Plus bridge Plus Modbus Plus repeater Point-to-point Line/drop Coaxial cable Fiber optic Fiber optic No and type of ports 4 Modbus Plus 1 Modbus Plus 4 Modbus Plus 4 RS 232 4 RS 232 4 RS 485 4 Modbus Plus References NW-BM85C002 NW-BM85-000 NW-BM85D008 NW-BM85D002 NW-BM85S232 NW-BM85S485 NW-BP85-002 NW-RR85-001 490 NRP 253 00 490 NRP 254 00 Weight kg (Ib)
Modbus Plus communication devices

Description Quantum Modbus Plus Drop interface and power supply Support Single-cable No and type of ports a 115/230 c 28 Redundant a 115/230 c 28 Head-end interface Single-cable Redundant Single-cable Momentum Modbus Plus Communication adapter Non-redundant Network Redundant Network Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Fiber optic cable IEC support 984 support IEC support 984 support References 140 CRA 211 10 140 CRA 211 20 140 CRA 212 10 140 CRA 212 20 140 NOM 211 00 140 NOM 212 00 140 NOM 252 00 170 PNT 110 20 170 NEF 110 21 170 PNT 160 20 170 NEF 160 21 Weight kg (Ib)
Schneider Electric
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/9
References (continued)

I/O architectures

Connectors
Description Modbus Plus inline Modbus Plus terminating Modbus Plus network cable installation tool Modbus Plus T connector (DB9 base) RJ 45 terminator RS 485 (DB9 base) cable connector T for RJ 45 RJ 45 shielded connectors RS 485 (RJ485) cable connector T for RJ 45 RS 485 multi-master RJ 45 shunt plugs
(continued) References AS-MBKT-085 AS-MBKT-185 AS-MBPL-001 170 XTS 020 00 170 XTS 021 00 170 XTS 040 00 170 XTS 022 00 170 XTS 041 00 170 XTS 042 00 Weight kg (Ib)
Quantity 1 per kit 2 per kit 1 2 per kit 20 per kit 1 2
Taps
Description Modbus Plus tap, IP 20 Modbus Plus ruggedized tap, IP 65 Modbus Plus ruggedized tap terminators Modbus Plus ruggedized tap DIN rail mounting bracket assembly Modbus Plus lightning arrestor Quantity 1 1 2 per kit 1 1 References 990 NAD 230 00 990 NAD 230 10 990 NAD 230 11 990 NAD 230 12 490 NAC 721 00 Weight kg (Ib)
Host Adapters - PC Interface Kits

Description Modbus Plus ISA PC Adapter Card Quantity 1 2 Modbus Plus PCI PC Adapter Card 1 2 Modbus Plus Type II PCMCIA Card Modbus Plus Type III PCMCIA Card Modbus Plus Type III PnP PCMCIA Card 1 1 1 References AM-SA85-030 AM-SA85-032 416 NHM 300 30 416 NHM 300 32 416 NHM 212 30 416 NHM 212 33 416 NHM 212 34 Weight kg (Ib)
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/10
Schneider Electric
References
(continued)

I/O architectures

Cables
Description Standard Modbus Plus Cable
(continued) References 490 NAA 271 01 490 NAA 271 02 490 NAA 271 03 490 NAA 271 04 490 NAA 271 06 990 NAA 263 20 990 NAA 263 50 990 NAA 215 10 990 NAD 211 10 990 NAD 211 30 170 MCI 020 10 170 MCI 020 36 170 MCI 041 10 170 MCI 021 20 170 MCI 021 80 170 MCI 020 80 110 XCA 282 01 110 XCA 282 02 110 XCA 282 03 Weight kg (Ib)
Lenght in m (ft) 30.5 (100) 152.5 (500) 305 (1000) 457 (1500) 1525 (5000)
Modbus Plus Programming Cable
3.7 (12) 15 (50)
Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Programming Cable Modbus Plus Drop Cable
3.05 (10) 2.4 (8) 6 (20)
Modbus Plus RS 485 cable
25 cm (10 in) 1 (3)
Modbus Plus RS 485 master Communication Cable (RJ45/RJ45) Modbus Plus RJ45 cable Modbus Plus RJ45 cable, double-ended
0.3 (1) 3 (10) 3 (10) 10 (30)
Modbus Plus RS 232 Communication Cable (RJ45/RJ45)
1 (3) 3 (10) 6 (20)
Accessories
Description Modbus Plus wiring terminal insertion tool Modbus Plus Field I/O Power Connector Modbus Plus Field I/O Power Connector Modbus Plus D-shell Adapter for AT serial port Modbus Plus D-shell Adapter for XT serial port RJ crimping tool Ground Clamp Type Base unit IP 20 rated RJ45 to 9-pin RJ45 to 12-pin References 043 509 383 140 XTS 002 00 140 XTS 005 00 110 XCA 203 00 110 XCA 204 00 170 XTS 023 00 424 244 739 Weight kg (Ib)
Schneider Electric
48196-EN_Ver3.1.fm/11

Hot standby modules
Presentation
The hot standby option provides Quantum series CPUs with the high dependability that security-critical applications demand. Central to the system is a standby controllera second Quantum system configured identically with the primary control system with special hot standby modules mounted in both backplanes. The standby controller uses a high-speed fiber optic link to constantly maintain the current system status of the primary controller. In the event of an unexpected failure in the primary controller, system control automatically switches over to the standby controller. Critical processes running on a remote I/O network remain intact, unaffected by controller hardware failures. The result is higher productivity with reduced down-time. At the beginning of every primary controller scan, the current register and I/O state table is transferred to the standby controller across a secure, high-speed fiber optic link. If switchover is triggered, the standby controller takes control of the system with up-to-date I/O and register status for a bumpless, controlled transfer with minimal process impact. At switchover, the standby controller becomes the primary controller and, when the downed controller is restored to good health, it becomes the standby. Most applications demand that identical logic programs reside in the two controllers. User logic comparisons between the two controllers are performed at startup and during runtime. By default, the standby controller is taken offline if a logic mismatch is detected. You have the option to allow logic mismatches to coexist for high availability during maintenance periods. If minor process changes are required, you can make them without disturbing standby operations. In the event that the standby controller does not have the application program, it can be copied from the primary controller. Copying the program is a simple two-step procedure that uses the keyswitch and update button on the front of the standby controller. This task can be accomplished by a maintenance person without the use of a programming panel. For ease of ordering and installation, Schneider offers three preconfigured kits for hot standby applications. The 140 CHS 210 00 kit for open configuration includes all the products necessary to add the hot standby to an existing system. The other two kits, 140 CHS 410 10 and 140 CHS 410 20, contain hot standby, backplanes, power supplies, and Quantum controllers, so you can easily build a hot standby system from the ground up.
Description
1 The Hot Standby module 140 CHS 110 00 comprises on the front panel : 1 Model number and color code 2 LED array Ready (green) - module has completed start-up diagnostics (blinks to indicate transmission errors) Com Act (green) - communicating with I/O bus (blinks to indicate transmission errors) Primary (green) - module controls the process Com Err (red) - indicates transmission errors, or connection interrupted Standby (amber) - module in standby mode; blinks during the update process. 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label 4 Selector switches 7 8 5 Micro switch 6 Update pushbutton 7 Fiber optic transmit cable connector 8 Fiber optic receive cable connector
3 4 5 6
48209-EN_Ver4.0.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Topologies

Hot standby modules
Hot standby cable topologies

A hot standby system controls the I/O drops on a remote I/O (RIO) network. The local backplanes for the primary and standby controllers each require a Quantum CPU, an RIO head-end adapter module and a 140 CHS 110 00 Hot Standby module. Critical I/O should never be used in the local backplane because it will not be switched over when primary control shifts from one controller to the other. The two 140 CHS 110 00 Hot Standby modules are connected to each other by a special fiber optic cable. This link allows the standby controller to maintain the current system status of the primary controller. The two RIO head-end adapter modules connect to the RIO trunk cable via an MA-0186-100 splitter.
Primary PLC
Standby PLC
Fiber optic cable Self-terminating F-adapter Self-terminating F-adapter RIO drop 1 Coaxial cable RIO drop 2 Last RIO drop
Splitter
Tap
Tap
Terminated tap
A hot standby system can also support a redundant RIO cable topology. The coaxial cables running from the two cable ports on the 140 CRP 932 00 head-end adapters in the two controllers are connected to the redundant RIO cable by separate MA-0186-100 splitters.
Primary PLC
Standby PLC
Fiber optic cable Splitter
Splitter
RIO drop 1
RIO drop 2
Last RIO drop
Schneider Electric
48209-EN_Ver4.0.fm/3
Characteristics

Hot standby modules
Characteristics
Model Comm ports RFI immunity (per IEC 801-3) Bus current Electrostatic discharge (per IEC 801-2) Compatibility MHz mA kV 140 CHS 110 00 2 connectors (transmit and receive) for fiber optic link 27 ... 1000, 10 V/m 700 (typical) 8 air, 4 contact ProWORX NxT V2.0 or Concept Version 2.0 and or greater Version 2.0 or higher Quantum, 800 Series, and Sy/Max (remote I/O only) 1 Transmit 1 Receive ProWORX NxT V2.0 or Concept Version 2.0 and or greater All, 984 ladder logic; IEC, 140 CPU 434 12A and 534 14A Version 2.0 minimum CHS block (Included with kit) ms ms 13 to 48 for hot standby to assume control after primary fault detected 3 + 6 per kB of configured state RAM 10 megabaud m mA 3 fiber optic 700
Software Quantum CPUs
Input/output type Fiber optic ports
Programming software Quantum controllers CHS loadable software requirements Loadable function block performance Switchover time Scan impact communications CHS communications rate Cable between Quantum systems Current requirements
48209-EN_Ver4.0.fm/4
Schneider Electric
References

Hot standby modules
References
Description Hot Standby module Hot Standby kit for open configuration Components Reference 140 CHS 110 00 Weight kg (lb) 1.06 (2.33)
2 CHS hot standby 140 CHS 210 00 processors 1 fiber optic (3m) hot standby cable 1 CHS loadable software package 1 S908 terminator kit CHS installation manual 2 CHS hot standby 140 CHS 410 10 processors 1 fiber optic (3m) hot standby cable 1 CHS loadable software package 1 S908 terminator kit CHS installation manual 2 140 XBP 006 00 backplanes 2 140 CPS 111 00 power supplies 2 140 CRP 931 01 remote I/O processors 2 Quantum CPUs, 140 CPU 113 02 2 CHS hot standby 140 CHS 410 20 processors 1 fiber optic (3m) hot standby cable 1 CHS loadable software package 1 S908 terminator kit CHS installation manual 2 140 XBP 006 00 backplanes 2 140 CPS 111 00 power supplies 2 140 CRP 931 01 remote I/O processors 2 Quantum CPUs, 140 CPU 113 03
Hot Standby kit for Quantum CPU 113 02
Hot Standby kit for Quantum CPU 113 03
User documentation
Quantum Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide
840 USE 106 00
Schneider Electric
48209-EN_Ver4.0.fm/5
Selection guide
Momentum automation platform

Discrete I/O bases
Product type
Input modules for direct current
Input modules for alternating current
Type of signal
True high
Operating voltage and Input voltage
24 VDC
120 VAC
230 VAC
Current consumption
max. 250 mA
max. 125 mA
Input type
IEC 1131 Type 1+
IEC 1131 Type 2
IEC 1131 Type 1+
Output voltage
Output type
Number of points
1 x 16 In
2 x 16 In
2 x 8 In
Potential isolation Point to point group to group Field to adapter
None None 500 VAC
None 1780 VAC 1780 VAC
Current capacity Per output Per group Per module
Response time OFF-ON ON-OFF
2.2 ms 3.3 ms
10 ms @ 60 Hz 35 ms @ 60 Hz
13.3 ms @ 60 Hz 13.3 ms @ 60 Hz
Protection against short circuit and overload
Fault reporting Output fault I/O error Blown fuse
Type of module
170 ADI 340 00
170 ADI 350 00
170 ADI 540 50
170 ADI 740 50
Pages
48237/7
0489Q-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Output modules for diarect current
Output modules for alternating current
24 VDC
120 VAC
230 VAC
max. 250 mA
max. 125 mA
max. 65 mA
24 VDC
120 VAC
230 VAC
Solid state switch
Triac
2 x 8 out
2 x 16 out
2 x 4 out
2 x 8 out
2 x 4 out
2 x 8 out
None None 500 VAC
None None 1780 VAC
0.5 A 4A 8A
0.5 A 8A 16 A
2A 4A 8A
0.5 A 4A 8A
2A 4A 8A
0.5 A 4A 8A
< 0.1 ms < 0.1 ms
max. 1/2 x 1/f max. 1/2 x 1/f
Electronically safeguarded
1 fuse per group
1 LED/Out to adapter
1 LED/4 Out to adapter
None None 1 LED
170 ADO 340 00
170 ADO 350 00
170 ADO 530 50
170 ADO 540 50
170 ADO 730 50
170 ADO 740 50
48237/7
Schneider Electric
0489Q-EN.fm/3
Selection guide (continued)

Discrete I/O bases
Product type
I/O modules for direct current
Type of signal
True high
True low
True high
Input voltage
24 VDC
Operating voltage
24 VDC
Current consumption
max. 250 mA
max. 250 mA + sensor current
Input type
IEC 1131 Type 1+
Output voltage
24 VDC
Output type
Solid state switch
Number of points
1 x 16 In, 2 x 8 Out
1 x 16 In, 2 x 4 Out
Potential isolation Point to point group to group Field to adapter Current capacity Per output Per group Per module
None None 500 VAC
None None 500 VAC
0.5 A 4A 8A
2A 8A 16 A
Response time OFF-ON ON-OFF
2.2 ms In, < 1 ms Out 3.3 ms In, < 1 ms Out
60 s in, < 1 ms Out 80 s in, < 1 ms Out
Protection against short circuit and overload
Electrically safeguarded outputs
Electrically safeguarded outputs and 4 electronically safeguarded sensor supply group
Fault reporting Output fault I/O error Blown fuse
1 LED/Out to adapter
Type of module
170 ADM 350 10
170 ADM 350 11
170 ADM 350 15
170 ADM 370 10
Pages
48237/7
0489Q-EN.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Output modules for direct current
Output modules for alternating current
True high
24230 VAC 20115 VDC 120 VAC
120 VAC
max. 180 mA
max. 250 mA
max. 160 mA
IEC 1131 Type 1+, monitored
IEC 1131 Type 1+
IEC 1131 Type 2
24230 VAC or 20115 VDC
120132 VAC
Relay (normally open)
Triac
1 x 16 In, 1 x 8 Out and 1 x 4 Out
1 x 10 In, 2 x 4 Out
1 x 10 In, 1 x 8 Out
None None 500 VAC
None None 500 VAC
1780 VAC 1780 VAC 500 VAC
None None 1780 VAC
0.5 A 4 A group 1, 2 A group 2 6A
2 A ohmic load 8 A ohmic load 16 A ohmic load
0.5 A 4A 4A
max 1/2 x 1/f max 1/2 x 1/f
Electronically safeguarded outputs
None
Varistor in parallel with each contact
1 internal fuse per group (not against overload)
1 LED/In, 1 LED/Out to adapter
None None
None None 1 LED/fuse
170 ADM 390 10
170 ADM 390 30
170 ARM 370 30
170 ADM 690 51
48237/7
Schneider Electric
0489Q-EN.fm/5

Introduction
A modular concept with four easy pieces

The Momentum system comprises 4 fundamental components that easily snap together in various combinations to form versatile control systems or sub-systems. The four pieces are:

Communication Adapters I/O Bases Processor Adapters Option Adapters

I/O Base
Communication Adapter
Processor Adapter Option Adapter
Momentum communication adapters Momentums design separates the communications from the I/O base, thus creating a truly open I/O system that can be easily adapted to any fieldbus network. When a Momentum I/O is coupled with a Communication Adapter, the two form a remote I/O drop that connects directly to virtually any standard fieldbus I/O network. Together, Momentum I/O supports control systems based on personal computers, distributed control systems, programmable controllers and Momentum processors.
48220-EN/2

Introduction
Momentum I/O bases Specialized Momentum I/O Bases support the rest of the control system. The Communication Adapters, Processor Adapters and Option Adapters all snap onto the I/O Bases. A selection of I/O base modules are available, including analog I/O, discrete I/O, multi-function analog and bi-directional discrete bases. In addition, Momentum I/O bases offer simple plug-in terminal strips, as well as standard 35 mm DIN rail or panel mounting for ease of maintenance and installation.
Momentum processors and option adapters When local distributed intelligence is required at the point of control, Momentum has the answer. Momentum M1 processor Adapters are full fledged PLCs containing a CPU, RAM and Flash memory. They are based on the popular Modicon family of PLCs (i.e., directly compatible with Quantum, Compact and 984 PLCs), and snap onto the Momentum I/O Bases, just like the communication adapters. The Option Adapter provides the Processor Adapters with additional networking capabilities, a time-of-day clock, and a battery back-up. The Option Adapters also snap onto the I/O Base; in the figure below,the Processor Adapter is stacked on top.
48220-EN/3

Discrete I/O Bases
Presentation
The Momentum Automation Platform products are modular. Communication Adapters and Processor Adapters are designed to work as functional modules when they are snapped onto a Momentum I/O base. An I/O base requires some type of Momentum Adapter assembled on it before it can be functional. The I/O bases fit into compact standard housings that can be mounted on a DIN rail or on panels in a cabinet. They read information from field sensing devices and control discrete and analog field actuating devices. Terminal blocks and bus bars are available for use with the bases so that they can be used to support 2-, 3-, and 4-wire field devices. The I/O field devices and the power supply to the module are connected via three 18-pin terminal blocks and an optional 1-, 2-, or 3-row busbar. The terminal connectors are electrically connected to the module; the optional busbars not. Busbars provide a common connection for the field devices and serve as protective distribution connectors. Depending on the I/O base and the type and number of field devices to which it is connected, a 1-, 2-, or 3-row busbar may be used. Terminal blocks and busbars are ordered separately, and are not shipped with the Momentum I/O bases. They are available in either screw-in or spring-clip versions.
Description
1
170 ADp discrete I/O base units comprise on the front panel : 1 An internal interface connector for the communication module or processor module. 2 A locking and earth contact for the communication module or processor module. 3 LED status indicators (the number of indicators will depend on the number of channels). 4 Three connectors for the removable terminal blocks. 5 An earthing screw. 6 A slot for the power strip. 7 Two holes for panel mounting. Connectors to be ordered separately :
b removable screw or spring terminals 170 XTS 00p 00 b 1 to 3-row screw or spring bus bar 170 XTS 00p 01.
2 3 4 7 4 5 4
Characteristics : pages 48237/3 to 48237/6
References : pages 48237/7 to 48237/8
Connections : pages 48237/9 to 48237/13
48237-EN/2
Characteristics

Discrete I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete input bases

Type of input base unit Number of inputs Input voltage Operating voltage Internal current Input voltage range ON voltage OFF voltage ON OFF Input resistance Type of signal Response time On-off maximum Off-on maximum Potential isolation Group to group Field to communication interface Power dissipation Agency approvals 170 ADI 340 00 1 x 16 170 ADI 350 00 2 x 16
170 ADI 540 50 2x8 120 AC 85132 AC (@ 4763 Hz) 125 (@ 120 VAC) 0132 AC 74 AC minimum 20 AC maximum 10.0 minimum 2.0 maximum 9.5 @ 50 Hz 7.5 @ 60 Hz
170 ADI 740 50
V V mA V V V mA mA k
24 DC 24 DC 250 (@ 24 VDC) - 330 DC + 1130 DC - 3+ 5 DC 2.5 minimum 1.2 maximum 4 True High
230 AC 164253 AC (@ 4763 Hz) 163253 AC 164 AC minimum 40 AC maximum 315 015 9 @ 50 Hz 7.5 @ 60 Hz
Input current
ms ms V V W
3.3 2.2 500 AC
35.0 @ 60 Hz 10.0 @ 60 Hz 1780 AC

1780 AC
13.3 @ 60 Hz 13.3 @ 60 Hz
3 typical, 5 maximum UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II 170 ADO 340 00
5.5 typical, 8.5 maximum UL, CE, CSA
UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II 170 ADO 540 50 UL, CE, CSA
Characteristics of discrete output bases

Type of output base unit Number of outputs Type of output Output voltage Operating voltage Internal current Current Point maximum Group Module 170 ADO 350 00 170 ADO 530 50 170 ADO 730 50 170 ADO 740 50
2x8
2 x 16
2x4 Triac 120 AC
2x8
2x4
2x8
Solid state switch V V mA A A A mA mA A V 24 DC 24 DC 250 (@ 24 VDC) 0.5 4 8 < 1 @ 24 VDC 5 for 1 ms < 0.5 DC @ 0.5 A Outputs electronically protected < 0.1 < 0.1 None V 500 AC
230 AC
120 AC 230 AC (300 for 10 s, 400 for 1 cycle) (300 for 10 s, 400 for 1 cycle) 125 65
2 4 8
0.5
0.5
Min. output current Leakage current Surge current On StateVoltage drop Protection (short-circuits, overloads) Response time On-off maximum Off-on maximum Potential Isolation Output group to output group Field to communication interface
30
30
1.9 @ 120 VAC
2.5 @ 2.4 @ 230 VAC 230 VAC Point: 15 (1 cycle), 10 (2 cycles), 5 (3 cycles) < 1.5 AC @ < 1.5 AC @ < 1.5 AC @ 2A 0.5 A 2A Via internal 5 A slow-blow fuse 1/2 x 1/f (= 0,5 of one line cycle) 1/2 x 1/f (= 0,5 of one line cycle) None 1780 AC < 1.5 AC @ 0.5 A
ms ms
Power dissipation Agency approvals
3.5 typical 6.0 typical 6.0 typical 7.5 maximum 4.5 maximum 7.5 maximum
UL, CE, CSA UL, CE, CSA UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II
48237-EN/3

Discrete I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete I/O bases

Type of base unit Number of inputs Number of outputs Operating voltage Internal current VDC mA 170 ADM 350 10 170 ADM 350 11 170 ADM 350 15 170 ADM 370 10 170 ADM 390 10 1 x 16 2x8 24 250 @ 24 VDC 250 @ 24 VDC (plus current for sensors) 180 @ 24 VDC 4x4 2x4 1 x 16 1 x 8 and 1 x 4
Inputs
Voltage Type of signal Voltage at 1 Voltage at 0 Input current Input voltage range Input resistance Response time Fault sensing
VDC
24 True high True low - 3+ 5 + 4+ 30 True high + 11+ 30 - 3+ 5
VDC VDC mA VDC k ms
+ 11+ 30 - 3+ 5
2.5 min. at state 1 (6 mA at c 24 V),1.2 max. at state 0 - 3+ 30 4 2.2 Off to on 3.3 On to off 24, 30 maximum Solid state switch True high True low True high 2 per point 8 per group 16 per module 0.5 per point 4 per group 1, 2 group 2 6 per module < 1 @ 24 VDC 0.06 Off to on 0.08 On to off 2.2 ms In, < 1 ms Out 3.3 ms In, < 1 ms Out Broken wire detection
Outputs
Voltage Type Type of signal Current capacity
VDC
0.5 per point 4 per group 8 per module
Leakage current Peak current On state voltage drop Error indication
mA A VDC
< 1 @ 24 VDC 5 for 1 ms < 0.5 @ 0.5 A
< 1 @ 24 VDC 2.8 for 1 ms Output overload for at least one output or short-
Output overload for at least one output to communication adapter
Output overload for at least one output to communication circuit or overload on one adapter of the 4 encoder supply groups, to
communication adapter
Response time Potential isolation Input to input Output to output group Input to output group Field to communication interface Power dissipation Typical Maximum Agency approvals W W V ms < 0.1 Off to On, < 0.1 On to Off None None None 500 VAC None None
6.0 8.0 UL, CE, CSA
6.5 10.0 UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II
48237-EN/4

Discrete I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete I/O bases (continued)

Type of base unit Number of inputs Number of outputs Operating voltage Internal current Inputs Voltage Signal type On voltage minimum Off voltage maximum Input current Input voltage range Input resistance Response time Outputs Voltage Type Current capacity 24 VDC Current capacity 115 VDC A A VDC VDC mA VDC k ms V V mA VDC 170 ADM 390 30 1 x 10 2x4 24 DC 250 (@ 24 VDC) 24 True High + 11+ 30 - 3+ 5 2.5 minimum On, 1.2 maximum Off - 3+ 30 4 2.2 Off to On, 3.3 On to Off 24 230 AC, 20120 DC Relay normally open > 0.005 (new contacts), ohmic load 2 A maximum, inductive load 1 A maximum (LR 40 ms) Ohmic load 0.5 A maximum (switching current 1.5 A), inductive load 0.15 A maximum (LR 40 ms) 2 A maximum (switching current 1.5 A) cos 2 A per point, 8 A per group, 16 A per module = 1 , 1 A maximum cos = 0.5 < 1 @ 230 VAC None ms 10 @ 60 Hz Off to On, 10 @ 60 Hz On to Off > 30 x 106 (mechanical), > 1 x 105 (inductive load with external protection circuit) 120 AC (4763Hz) 5 minimum load current 170 ARM 370 30
Current capacity VAC
Leakage current Error indication Response time Max. number of switching circuits Protection against short circuit and overload Potential isolation Input to Input Output group to output Group Input to output group Field to communication interface Fusing Internal External operating voltage External input voltage External output voltage
mA
None
Varistor in parallel with each contact
None V rms None
1780 AC
V rms V rms
None 500 AC
1780 AC
500 AC
None 315 mA fast-blow max. 4 A fast-blow According to the supply of the connected actuators not to exceed 8 A slow-blow/group W W 5.5 8.5 UL, CE, CSA 4 A fast blow None None
Power dissipation
Typical Maximum
Agency approvals
48237-EN/5

Discrete I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete I/O bases (continued)

Type of base unit Number of inputs Number of outputs Operating voltage Internal current Inputs Voltage Signal type On voltage minimum Off voltage maximum Input current Input voltage range Input resistance Response time Outputs Voltage Type Current capacity Leakage current Signal type On state voltage drop Error indication Response time Maximum switching cycles Potential Isolation Input to input Output group to output group Input to output group Field to communication interface Power dissipation Typical Maximum Protection Agency approvals Internal fuses VAC VAC ms VAC mA VAC VAC mA VAC k ms VAC VAC mA VAC 170 ADM 690 51 1 x 10 1x8 120 (4763 Hz) 160 (@ 120 VAC) 120 True high 74 20 6.0 minimum at state 1, 2.6 maximum at state 0 74...132 4 Maximum 1/2 x 1/f Off to On, maximum 1/2 x 1/f On to Off 120132 (@ 4763 Hz) Triac 0.5 A per point maximum, 30 mA per point minimum, 2 A per group, 4 A per module < 1.3 (@ 120 VAC) True High < 1.5 (@ 0.5 A) None 1/2 x 1/f maximum from state 0 to state 1, 1/2 x 1/f maximum from state 1 to state 0 3000/hr for 0.5 A inductive load None None
None 1780
W W A
6 8 2 x 2.5 slow-blow fuses UL, CE, CSA
48237-EN/6
References

Discrete I/O Bases
Discrete input bases

Type of current Input voltage Modularity (no. of points) 16 (1 x 16) Conformity EC 1131-2 Reference Weight kg 0.190
DC
24 V
Type 1
170 ADI 340 00
32 (2 x 16)
Type 1
170 ADI 350 00
0.200
AC
100120 V
16 (2 x 8)
Type 2
170 ADI 540 50
0.284
170 ADI pp0 p0
200240 V
16 (2 x 8)
Type 2
170 ADI 740 50
0.284
Discrete output bases

Type of current Output voltage Modularity (no. of points) 16 (2 x 8) Current per output Reference Weight kg 0.210
DC solid state, protected
24 V
0.5 A
170 ADO 340 00
32 (2 x 16) AC triac, protected, 1 fuse per group 100120 V 8 (2 x 4)
0.5 A 2A
170 ADO 350 00 170 ADO 530 50
0.210 0.320
16 (2 x 8) 170 ADO pp0 p0 200240 V 8 (2 x 4) 16 (2 x 8)
0.5 A 2A 0.5 A
170 ADO 540 50 170 ADO 730 50 170 ADO 740 50
0.284 0.320 0.284
Discrete I/O bases

Type of current Input voltage Output voltage 24 VDC protected Modularity Inputs 16 I (1 x 16) Reference Outputs, current Weight kg 0.200
DC solid state
24 VDC Type 1
16 O (2 x 8) 0.5 A 170 ADM 350 10
16 I, fast (1 x 16) 16 O (2 x 8) 0.5 A 170 ADM 350 11 16 I (1 x 16) 16 I (4 x 4)
0.200 0.200 0.220
16 O (2 x 8) 0.5 A 170 ADM 350 15 8 O (2 x 4) 2A 170 ADM 370 10
170 ADM pp0 pp AC or DC relay
16 I, wiring check (1 x 16)
12 O (1 x 8 and 1 170 ADM 390 10 x 4) 0.5 A 8 O (2 x 4) 2 A 170 ADM 390 30

(1)
0.260
24 VDC Type 1
24/230 VAC 20/115 VDC
10 I (1 x 10)
0.260
170 ARM 370 30

(2) AC triac
0.260
100120 120 VAC VAC Type 2
10 I (1 x 10)
8 O 0.5 A protected by 1 fuse
170 ADM 690 51
0.220
(1) Operating voltage 24 VDC. (2) Operating voltage 120 VAC.
48237-EN/7
References (continued), dimensions, mounting

Discrete I/O Bases
References
Accessories
Description 170 XTS 001 00 Composition Type of connection Reference 170 XTS 001 00 Weight kg
170 XTS 002 00
170 XTS 004 01
170 XTS 005 01
Terminal blocks for Set of 3 connectors 1 Screw I/O base row connection Spring Bus Bar 3 rows Screw Spring 2 rows Screw Spring 1 row Screw Spring Cable grounding Used to connect rail the cable shielding High vibration Kit containing 5 sets environment clips of clips Dummy base unit Used to prewire the I/O base units Requires screw or spring connection terminals Discrete input simulator, 16 channels, 24 VDC Replacement parts Description Use Sheets of labels Cable coding part kit 10 front labels for Momentum modules For screw or spring connection terminals
170 XTS 002 00 170 XTS 004 01 170 XTS 003 01 170 XTS 005 01 170 XTS 008 01 170 XTS 006 01 170 XTS 007 01 CER 001 170 XTS 120 00 170 BDM 090 00
170 BSM 016 00
Reference 170 XTS 100 00 170 XCP 200 00
Weight kg
170 XTS 008 01
Dimensions, mounting
170 XTS 006 01
170 ADp, rail or panel mounting
62
141,5
CER 001
47,5
107 125 125
(1) 2 holes for M4 screws, for panel mounting

170 BSM 016 00
(1) Equipment or enclosure
Characteristics: pages 48237/3 to 48237/6
48237-EN/8
60
(1)
93
(1)
Connections
0

Discrete I/O Bases
170 ADI 340 00 Example of external wiring of 2, 3 and 4-wire sensors
170 ADI 350 00 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire sensors
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L +
315 mA fast-blow fuse Return
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L +
315 mA fast-blow fuse
24 V Return
1L+ 4 A max.
fast-blow fuse
1L+2 L+ 4 A max. fast-blow fuse 1L+ M M
2L+ 2L+
Option
PE
M M
Option 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
M M
IN + PE
IN +
2-wire sensor
IN +
IN +
2-wire sensor
4-wire sensor
3-wire sensor
3-wire sensor
3-wire sensor
Group of channels Internal wiring 170 ADI 540 50 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire sensors
120 V 120 V 200 mA slow-blow Return Return fuse
Group of channels Internal wiring 170 ADI 740 50 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire sensors
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 N L1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 N L1
200 mA slow-blow Return Return fuse
1 L1 2L1
1 L1 2L1
1N 2N
1N 2N
I N + - PE
2-wire sensor 4-wire sensor 2-wire sensor 2-wire sensor
I N + - PE
2-wire sensor 4-wire sensor
Group of channels Internal wiring
48237-EN/9
Connections (continued)
0

Discrete I/O Bases
170 ADO 340 00 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire actuators
170 ADO 350 00 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire actuators

24 V
1 24 V 2
4 A max. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L+2L+ fast-blow fuse
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
24 V Retour
24 V Return
4 A max. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 161L+ 2L+ fast-blow fuse
M L+
4 A max. fast-blow fuse 315 mA fast-blow fuse
M M 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
M PE PE PE
Option
PE
Option
Ou t
PE
Ou t PE Ou t PE
2-wire actuator 3-wire actuator
2-wire actuator 3-wire actuator 3-wire actuator
Group of channels Internal wiring 170 ADO 530 50/540 50 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire actuator
120 V 1
Fuse 1(5 A slow-blow) Fuse 2 (5 A slow-blow) Return
Group of channels Internal wiring 170 ADO 730 50/740 50 Example of external wiring of 2 and 3-wire actuators
230 V Return 230 V Return
1 120 V Return
Fuse 1(5 A slow-blow) Fuse 2 (5 A slow-blow)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1N 1L1
10 A fast-blow fuse
10 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1N 1L1 fast-blow fuse
N L1
N L1 200 mA fast-blow fuse
Option
PE
Option
PE
Ou t
- PE
Out L N
2-wire actuator
PE
2-wire actuator 3-wire actuator
3-wire actuator
48237-EN/10

Discrete I/O Bases
170 ADM 350 10/350 11/350 15 Example of external wiring of a 2-wire sensor/actuator
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
Example of external wiring of a 3-wire actuator with wiring check

24 V
24 V
Retour
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
24 V Retour
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L1 2 L+ 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L1 2 L+ 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
PE
Option
3 L+
4 A max. fast-blow fuse
Option
I6
2-wire sensor
O6
2-wire actuator
Ou t PE
3-wire actuator
Group of channels Internal wiring Example of external wiring of a 4-wire sensor activated by an output
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
Group of channels Internal wiring Example of external wiring of a 4-wire sensor/2-wire actuator
24 V
24 V
Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
24 V Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L1 2 L+ 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
4 A max. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L1 2 L+ fast-blow fuse

Option
PE
3 L+ M PE
I N + PE
2-wire sensor 4-wire sensor
Option
I N + PE
2-wire actuator 4-wire sensor
48237-EN/11

Discrete I/O Bases
170 ADM 370 10 Example of external wiring of 2 and 4-wire sensors/2-wire actuator
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
4 A max. fast-blow fuse 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
Example of external wiring of 3-wire actuator with wiring check

24 V
24 V Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L +
24 V
Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L+ 2L+
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 161L+ 2L+ 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
L+
L+
L+
L+
1M 2M 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
L+
L+
L+
L+
1M 2M
8 A max. slow-blow fuse
M
Option Option
PE M
PE
Out PE
IN + PE +
2-wire sensor 4-wire sensor 2-wire actuator 3-wire actuator

Special external wiring, the output activates the sensor
24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L +
24 V Return
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1L+ 2L+ 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
L+
L+
L+
L+
1M 2M 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
Option
PE M
I N + PE
4-wire sensor
48237-EN/12

Discrete I/O Bases
170 ADM 390 10 Example of external wiring of 2-wire sensor/actuator

24 V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 M L+
170 ADM 390 30 Example of external wiring of 3 or 4 sensor/3-wire/actuator

24 V 24 V Return 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1L+ M M 1L+ M L+
L N
8 9
12
4 A max. 1L+ 2L+ fast-blow fuse
1L+ 9 10
161L+ 2L1 4 A max. fast-blow fuse
56 k 3
4 A max. M M fast-blow fuse
1N 2N
1N 2N
Option
3L+
Option
PE
I6 56 k
(connected directly to sensor)
(1)
I N L - PE O6
2-wire actuator 3-wire sensor
(2)
L PE
2-wire actuator

(1) For 4-wire sensor (2) For 3-wire actuator
170 ADM 690 51 Example of external wiring of 4-wire sensor/2 and 3-wire actuators
a 115 V Return a 20132 V Return a 115 V 315 mA fast-blow Return fuse
170 ARM 370 30 Example of external wiring of 4-wire sensor/3-wire actuator

a 120 V 4 A max. fast-blow Return fuse N
Fuse 1 (2,5 A slow-blow)
Fuse 2 (2,5 A slow-blow)
10
N L1
9 10
NC
2N N L1
L+
12 13
1N
1N
1N
1N 1N 1L1
161L+ 2L1 8 A max. slow-blow fuse
1N
1N 2N
4 5 6
2L1
2N
PE
PE
PE
PE
2-wire sensor L -
PE IN
Out
PE + -
I N + PE
IN
PE
2-wire actuator 4-wire sensor 3-wire actuator
4-wire sensor
3-wire actuator
48237-EN/13
Selection guide

Analog I/O bases
Application
24 VDC ananlog input bases
Operating voltage
24 VDC
Measurement range
Inputs 5 V, 10 V, 20 mA 1-5 V, 4-20 mA
Inputs 5 V, 10 V, 4-20 mA
Inputs 25 mV, 100 mV, Temperature probe Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 Thermocouple B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
Modularity Input channels Output channels Discrete I/O
8 differential inputs
16 single ended inputs
4 differential inputs
Resolution
14 bits + sign bipolar 15 bits unipolar
12 bits + sign
15 bits + sign
Update time
1.33 + 1.33 x no. of declared channels (ms)
1 + 1.5 x no. of declared channels (ms)
500 ms
Potential isolation Between channels Base and ground Channels and ground Protection
200 VDC, 1 min 500 VDC, 1 min 500 VDC, 1 min Polarity inversion
None 500 VDC, 1 min 1780 VAC, 1 min
400 VDC 500 VDC, 1 min 1780 VAC, 1 min
Number in words In Out
8 words in 2 words out
Fail states
Type of module
170 AAI 030 00
170 AAI 140 00
170 AAI 520 40
Pages
48238/8
0491Q-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
24 VDC analog output bases
24 VDC mixed I/O bases (analog/discrete)
Outputs 10 V, 0-20 mA
Outputs 10 V, 4-20 mA
Inputs 5 V, 10 V, 20 mA 1-5 V, 4-20 mA Outputs 10 V, 0-20 mA
Inputs 010 V Outputs 010 V
Inputs - 10+ 10 V Outputs - 10+ 10 V
4 outputs
4 differential inputs 2 outputs 4 inputs 24 VDC 2 outputs 24 VDC/0.5 A Inputs: 1214 bits (dep. on range) Outputs: 12 bits
6 inputs with common point 4 outputs with common point 8 inputs 24 VDC 8 outputs 24 VDC/0.25 A Inputs: 14 bits Outputs: 14 bits
12 bits + sign
2 ms
Inputs: 10 ms Outputs: 1 ms
Inputs: 0.75 ms (for 6 inputs) Outputs: 1.2 ms (for 4 inputs)
No 500 VDC, 1 min 1780 VAC, 1 min
No 500 VAC, 1 min 500 VAC, 1 min Short-circuits and overloads (for discrete outputs)
5 words out
Hold, reset to zero, reset to full scale
Hold or reset to zero
170 AAO 120 00
170 AAO 921 00
170 AMM 090 00
170 ANR 120 90
170 ANR 120 91
48238/8
Schneider Electric
0491Q-EN.fm/3

Analog I/O Bases
Presentation
The Momentum analog input bases enable acquisition of various analog values encountered in industrial applications, including: b b b b Standard high level (1-5 V, 4-20 mA, + 5 V, +10 V, + 20 mA). Low level (+ 25 mV, + 100 mV). Thermocouples (B, E, J, ...). Temperature probes (Ni ..., Pt ...).
The analog output bases are used to control analog field devices such as various speed drives, proportional control valves, etc. The current or the voltage is proportional to the digital value defined by the user program. The outputs can be configured so that when the program stops the outputs either reset to zero or hold the last value received. This feature is useful during debugging since, if the outputs are set to "Hold", the operation of the analog field devices is not disturbed every time the program stops. In order to cover a wide range of applications, Momentum I/O bases offer the following functions in addition to A/D or D/A conversion: b Choice of input/output ranges (voltage, current, thermocouple, temperature probes). b Selection of number of channels used. b Cold junction compensation for thermocouple modules. b Broken wire detection (170 AAI 030 00, 170 AAI 140 00, 170 AAI 520 40).
Description
2 3 8 7 4 5 4
170 App analog I/O base units comprise on the front panel: 1 Internal interface connector for the communication module or processor module. 2 A locking and earth contact for the communication module or processor module. 3 LED status indicators (the number of indicators will depend on the number of channels). 4 Two connectors for the removable terminal blocks. 5 An earthing screw. 6 A slot for the power strip 7 Two screw holes for panel mounting. 8 A protective cover. Connectors to be ordered separately :
b removable screw or spring terminal blocks 170 XTS 00p 00. b 1 to 3-row screw or spring bus bar 170 XTS 00p 01.
Dimensions : page 48238/9
Connections : pages 48238/10 and 48238/11
48238-EN/2
Characteristics

Analog I/O Bases
Characteristics of analog input bases

Type of base units Number of inputs LEDs Format of data 170 AAI 030 00 1x8 Ready (green) Full 16 bits signed (two's complement) Differential Ranges Input impedance Error at 25 C Error at 60 C Resolution Conversion times Error indication Isolation Channel to channel Field to ground Comm adapter to ground Common mode rejection Channel to ground Crosstalk between channels External power requirement Range Current EMC for industrial environment Immunity Emissions Approvals dB VDC VDC VDC VAC ms k 10 VDC > .1000 0.27 % 0.32 % 15 bits 12 ms max. for 8 input channels (1.33 ms per input channel + 1.33 ms) None 200 500 500 250 VAC @ 4763 Hz or 100 VDC 80 24 20.4 to 28.8 VDC < 382 mA @ 24 VDC IEC 1131 surge on auxiliary power supply 2 kV EN 50081-2 UL, CSA, CE 5 VDC > .1000 0.21 % 0.26 % 420 mA 250 0.27 % 0.38 % 20 mA 250 0.32 % 0.41 % 1 to 5 VDC >.1000 0.13 % 0.19 %
48238-EN/3

Analog I/O Bases
Characteristics of analog input bases

Type of base units Number of inputs Format of data Protection Error indication Ranges Input impedance Error at 25 C Error at 60 C Temperature drift (60 C) PE (Full scale) Resolution Filtering Current source Pt100 Ni100 Pt1000 Ni1000 Update time mA mA mA mA ms k Base and actuators 170 AAI 140 00 1 x 16 Full 16 bits signed (2's complement) Polarity inversion None 10 V > 2200 0.15 % FS 0.25 % FS 30 PE / C 10 V 12 bits + sign 5V > 2200 0.15 % FS 0.25 % FS 30 PE / C 5V 12 bits + sign 420 mA < 0.250 0.25 % FS 0.45 % FS 60 PE / C 16 mA 12 bits 25 mV > 10000 21 V 46 V 15 bits + sign 0.125 0.125 500 100 mV > 10000 27 V 94 V 15 bits + sign 0.125 0.125 170 AAI 520 40 1 x 4 differential inputs
Low pass with cut-off frequency 10 kHz 1 + 1.5 x n n = number of declared channels None
Error indication Potential isolation Channel to channel Base power supply and Ground Channels to ground Base power Common mode Channel to ground Common mode Voltage betw.channels Common mode rejection Channel to ground VDC VDC
400 500, 1 min
None 500, 1 min
VAC V V
1780, 1 min 30 (voltage or current output)
1780, 1 min 30 (voltage or current output) 100 VDC, 250 VAC
200 VDC, 115 VAC single phase or 3-phase or 250 VAC single phase 135 dB DC, 145 dB AC 50 Hz, 155 dB AC 60 Hz 120 dB DC, 130 dB AC 50 Hz, 140 dB AC 60 Hz 35 dB AC 50 Hz, 45 dB AC 60 Hz
250 VAC at 4763 Hz or 100 VDC
Between channels
Serial mode rejection Input protection Operating voltage Internal current Power dissipation Typical Maximum Fusing Internal External Agency approvals VDC mA W W
Polarity inversion 24 305 @ 24 VDC 4.95 5.55 2 A slow-blow 500 mA fast-blow UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II
3.5 5.5 2 A slow-blow 500 mA fast-blow
48238-EN/4

Analog I/O Bases
Characteristics of analog output bases

Type of base units Number of outputs Format of data Protection Ranges Load impedance Capacitive load Error at 25 C Error at 60 C Temperature drift (60 C) Resolution Update time Full scale Potential isolation Channel to channel Base power supply and Ground Channels to ground Output protections Base power Common mode rejection Operating voltage Internal current Base Actuators Power dissipation Typical Maximum Internal fusing Agency approvals VDC mA mA W W A V V ms k F % % Base and actuators 170 AAO 120 00 1x4 Full 16 bits signed (2's complement) Polarity inversion 10 V 1 minimum <1 0.2 PE 0.25 PE 10 PE / C 12 bits + sign <2 10 V in the range of 10V 2 mA in the range of 020 mA None 500 VDC, 1 min 0.3 PE 0.4 PE 30 PE / C 0.2 PE 0.25 PE 10 PE / C 0.4 PE 0.5 PE 30 PE / C 020 mA 0.6 maximum 10 V 1 minimum 420 mA 0.6 maximum 170 AAO 921 00
1780 VAC, 1 min Short-circuits in the voltage circuits, open in current polarity inversion 30 (voltage or current output) 250 VAC @ 4763 Hz or 250 VDC channel to ground 24 530 @ 24 VDC 150 @ 24 VDC 5.6 8.5 2, slow-blow UL, CE, CSA
48238-EN/5
Momentum Automation Platform

Analog I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete and analog I/O bases

Type of base unit Number of inputs and outputs 170 AMM 090 00 1 x 4 differential inputs 1 x 4 discrete inputs 1 x 2 analog outputs 1 x 2 discrete outputs 24 200 typical (at 24 VDC), 350 maximum (at 24 VDC) 10 ms for all channels 10 V 5V 15 V 0.08 0.16 0.16 0.15 0.3 0.3 14 bits 13 bits 12 bits 0.02 0.04 0.04 Input voltage starting at Ag 11 V > 54 30 solid state if voltage is 24 V 50 dynamic max. 100 ms Input current > 48 Voltage ranges > 1M, current ranges 250 20 mA 0.16 0.3 13 bits 0.04 420 mA 0.16 0.3 12 bits 0.04
Operating voltage Internal current Differential inputs Conversion time Conversion error 25 C 60 C Resolution Conversion consistency Common mode voltage Common mode suppression Overvoltage voltage ranges Overvoltage current ranges Input resistance Discrete inputs Voltage Signal Type On Voltage Off Voltage Input current Input resistance Response time Resolution Conversion time Conversion error 25 C 60 C Output load Discrete outputs Voltage Type Signal Type Current capacity Leakage current On State Voltage drop Response time Output protection Output indicator Error message Max. Switching cycles Potential isolation Discrete input and output Analog input to output Analog input and output and to operating voltage Operating voltage and all inputs and outputs from ground Power dissipation Typical Maximum Agency approvals
VDC mA
% % % dB V mA VDC VDC VDC mA k ms
Analog outputs
24 typical, 30 maximum True high + 11+ 30 - 3+ 5 2.5 minimum at state 1 (6 mA at 24 VDC), 1.2 maximum at state 0 4 2.2 from 0 to state 1 3.3 from 1 to state 0 12 bits for single-phase measuring range 020 mA, 12 bits for 2-phase measuring range 10 V 1 for all channels
ms
max. 0.35 % of upper measuring range value max. 0.70 % of upper measuring range value 3 k on voltage output, 6 on current output VDC 24 typical, 30 maximum Semiconductor True high 1 per channel, 2 / group, 2 / module mA VDC ms < 1 @ 24 VDC < 0.5 @ 1 A < 0.1 Off to On < 0.1 On to Off The outputs are protected against overload and short-circuit-circuiting 1 red LED per Onoutput in the event of an overload or short-circuit-circuiting Message I/O error on bus adapter if module is defective 1000/hr (inductive load 1 A), 100/s (resistive load 1 A), 8/s (filament load 2.4 W) None None VAC 500 for 1 min
VAC
500 for 1 min
W W
4.0 6.0 UL, CE, CSA, FM Class 1, Div. 2
48238-EN/6

Analog I/O Bases
Characteristics of discrete and analog I/O bases (continued)

Type of base units Number of inputs and outputs 170 ANR 120 90 1 x 6 analog inputs 2 x 4 discrete inputs 1 x 4 analog outputs 1 x 8 discrete outputs VDC mA Resolution Input range Input type Conversion time Conversion error Max input signal Max temperature drift Input resistance Voltage Configuration Signal Type Minimum on voltage Maximum off voltage Input current Input voltage range Input voltage surge Response time Resolution Output range Conversion time Conversion error Output load Discrete out Voltage Type Signal type Current capacity Leakage current Surge current On state voltage drop Response time Output protection Output indicator Potential isolation Discrete input to output Analog input to output Analog input and output to operating voltage Operating voltage and all inputs and outputs from ground Power dissipation Typical Maximum Agency approvals W W A mA A VDC ms VDC VDC ms 24, range 19.2 to 30 VDC 400 @ 24 VDC 14 bit 0 - 10 VDC Single-ended 0.75 ms maximum for 6 input channels 0.2 % @ 25 C for 0 - 10 VDC inputs 15 VDC for voltage input 10 VDC inputs >1M for voltage inputs 24 2 groups of 4 inputs True high > 11 <5 6 minimum On, 2 maximum Off + 3 to + 32 VDC 45 Volt peak for 10 ms 1.2 Off to On, 1.2 On to Off 14 bit 0 to 10 1.20 for all four channels max. + 0.4 % of upper measuring range value @ 25 C > 2 kOhm minimum @ 0 to 10 VDC 10-30 operating, 50 for 1 ms maximum Solid State Switch True high 0.25 per point, 2 per group, 2 per module 0.4 @ 30 VDC 2.5 for 1 ms < 0.4 @ 0.25 amp current 1.2 Off to On, 1.05 On to Off The Outputs are protected against overload and short-circuiting 1 LED per point None None 500 VAC for 1 min. - 10 + 10 VDC 170 ANR 120 91
Operating voltage Internal current Analog inputs
- 10 + 10 VDC
W VDC
Discrete inputs
VDC VDC mA
ms
Analog outputs
500 VAC for 1 min.
4.0 6.0 UL, CE, CSA
48238-EN/7
References

Analog I/O Bases
Analog input bases

Type of inputs 12 bits + sign Number of channels 16 Ranges 5 V, 10 V, 4-20 mA Reference 170 AAI 140 00 Weight kg 0.215
15 bits + sign
4, differential
Pt 100, Pt 1000, NI 100 170 AAI 520 40 thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T 5 V, 10 V, 1-5 V 20 mA, 170 AAI 030 00 4-20 mA
0.215
8, differential 170 AAI pp0 p0
0.215
Analog output bases

Type of inputs/ outputs 12 bits + sign Number of channels 4 Ranges 10 V, 0-20 mA Reference 170 AAO 120 00 Weight kg 0.215
10 V, 4-20 mA
170 AAO 921 00
0.215
Discrete and analog I/O bases

Type Inputs 4 differential analog 13 bits + sign Outputs 2 analog 12 bits Ranges Inputs Outputs 5 V, 10 V 0-20 mA 1-5 V 10 V 20 mA, 4-20 mA 24 VDC 24 VDC Reference 170 AMM 090 00 Weight kg 0.240
170 AAO p2p 00
4 discretes
2 discretes 0.5 A 4 analogs 14 bits 8 discretes
6 analog 14 bits 8 discretes 170 AAM 090 00 6 analog 14 bits 8 discretes
0-10 V
0-10 V
170 ANR 120 90
0.240
24 VDC
4 analogs
10 V
10 V
170 ANR 120 91
24 VDC
24 VDC
48238-EN/8

Analog I/O Bases
Accessories
Description Terminal blocks 170 XTS 001 00 Bus Bar 3 rows Composition Set of 3 connectors 1 row Type of connection Reference Screw Spring Screw Spring 170 XTS 002 00 2 rows Screw Spring 1 row Screw Spring 170 XTS 004 01 Cable Grounding Rail High vibration environment clips Dummy base unit 170 XTS 005 01 Used to connect the cable shielding 170 XTS 001 00 170 XTS 002 00 170 XTS 004 01 170 XTS 003 01 170 XTS 005 01 170 XTS 008 01 170 XTS 006 01 170 XTS 007 01 CER 001 Weight kg
Kit contains 5 sets of Mechanical clips Used to prewire the I/O base units. Requires screw or spring connection terminals
170 XTS 120 00
170 BDM 090 00
Replacement parts
Description Sheets of labels Set of codingand locating devices Use 10 front labels for Momentum modules For screw or spring connection terminals Reference 170 XTS 100 00 170 XCP 200 00 Weight kg
170 XTS 008 01
170 App Rail or panel mounting
170 XTS 006 01
62
141,5
CER 001
47,5
(1) 2 holes for M4 screws, for panel mounting
(1) Equipment or enclosure
48238-EN/9
125
107 125
60
(1)
93
(1)
Connections

Analog I/O Bases
170 AAI 140 00

Example of external wiring of 2-wire sensor
Inl10+ Inl11+ Inl12+ Inl13+ Inl14+ Inl15+ Inl16+
170 AAI 520 40

Example of external wiring of sensor
24 V 1 24 V AGND RTD1+ RTD2+ RTD3+ RTD4+ RTD1 IS1 RTD2 IS2 RTD3 IS3
Inl1+ Inl2+ Inl3+ Inl4+ Inl5+ Inl6+ Inl7+ Inl8+ Inl9+
L+
RTD4 IS4 InU4+ InU4
Return
IS1+
IS2+
IS3+
IS4+
500 mA M L+ fast-blow fuse
InU10+ InU11+ InU12+
InU13+ InU14+ InU15+
InU16+
InU1+ InU2+ InU3+ InU4+ InU5+ InU6+ InU7+
InU8+ InU9+
InU1+
InU2+
InU3+
InU1
InU2
InU3
M L+
+ U
+ I + U + U
+ U
170 AAI 030 00

Example of external wiring of 2-wire sensor
170 AAO 120/921 00

Example of external wiring of 2-wire actuator
Fuse 1 (2 A slow-blow) Fuse 2 (2 A slow-blow)
24 V
Return
1
+ 24 VDC
1L+1 1M1 1M1
1L+2 1M2 1M2
1L+3 1M3 1M3
2
1 2 InI1 3 4 InI2 5 6 InI3 7 8 InI4 9 10 InI5 11 12 InI6 13 14 InI7 15 16 InI8 17 18
1L+4 1M4 1M4 OutU4+ OutI4+ OutI4
InU1
InU2
InU3
InU4
InU5
InU6
InU7
InU8
M-
L+
Return
M- L+ 630 mA fast-blow fuse
OutU1+
OutU2+
Agnd1
Agnd2 2 InI1 3 4 InI2
Agnd3 5 6 InI3
Agnd4 7 8 InI4
Agnd5 9
Agnd6
Agnd7
Agnd8 14 15 16 17 InI7 InI8 18
3
1 10 11 12 13 InI5 InI6
OutU3+
OutI1+
OutI2+
OutI3+
OutI1
OutI2
OutI3
250 mA M - L+ fast-blow fuse
U
+
+ 24 VDC
I
+
Voltage input
Current input
48238-EN/10

Analog I/O Bases
170 AMM 090 00

Example of external wiring of 2-wire sensor Example of external wiring of 2-wire actuator
24 V QV1 QI1 QV1 QI1 QV2 QI2 I1 U1+ IS1 U2+ IS2 U3+ IS3 U4+ IS4 QV2 QI2 I1 U1+ IS1 U2+ IS2 U3+ IS3 U4+ IS4 I2 I3 I2 I3 I4 I4 2
24 V 24 V Return 2
24 V Return
AGND
I4+ AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND O1
UI1 I1+
UI2 I2+
UI3 I3+
UI1
UI2
UI3 I3+
UI4
UI4 I4+
AGND AGND AGND O1
I1+
I2+
5A M 1L+ fast-blow fuse
O2
O2
M 1L+
5A fast-blow fuse
+ I
+ U + I
2-wire actuator
+ U
2-wire actuator
External bridge
170 ANR 120 90/91

Example of external wiring of digital sensor/actuator Example of mixed discrete and analog I/O sensor/actuator field wiring
24 V U1+ U2+ IS2 U3+ U4+ IS4 QV1 QI1 QV2 QI2 I1 24 V
I1
I2 2
I3 3
I4 4 5
I5 6
I6 7
I7 8
I8 9
AI1 AI2 AI3 10 11 12 13
AI4 AI5 AI6 M14 15 16 17
L+ 18
+ 24 VDC Fuse - Return
IS1
IS3
2
1
I2
I3
I4
DGnd
AGnd
07 8 08 A01 9 10 11 A02 12 13 A03 14 15 A04 1M- 1L+ 16 17 18
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND O1
UI1 I1+
UI2 I2+
UI3 I3+
UI4 I4+
01
02 2
03 3
04 4 5
05 6
06 7
+ 24 VDC Fuse - Return
O2
M 1L+
3
5A fast-blow fuse 1A fast-blow fuse Discrete input Nr.1
1
1L+ M 1M PE
Discrete output Nr.5
Analog input Nr.1
Analog output Nr.4
- Return + 24 VDC Fuse
I N + PE
Ou t
PE
4-wire sensor
3-wire actuator
(1) Depending on application, max 5A
48238-EN/11
Selection guide

Specialty module I/O bases
Product type
High-speed counter
Operating voltage
24 VDC
Unique features
2 independent, high-speed (10 kHz-200 kHz) counters
Modularity Input channels Output channels
6 (3 per counter) True High Inputs 4 (2 per counter) True High Outputs
Input characteristics Counter inputs Discrete inputs
5 VDC differential input, 200 kHz counter; 24 VDC single-end input, 10 kHz counter 6 (2 x 3) 24 VDC inputs: - voltage range, - 3 to + 30 VDC - response time, 3 ms Off to On or On to Off
Output characteristics Counter outputs Discrete outputs
Two 5 VDC differential outputs min 20 mA @ 24 VDC 4 (2 per counter) 24 VDC outputs: - on current, 0.5 A per point, 1 A per counter - response time, < 0.1 ms Off to On; < 0.1 ms On to Off
Protection
Surge Input voltage Output current
45 V peak for 10 ms 5 A for 1 ms
Type of module
170 AEC 920 00
Pages
48248/4
0495Q-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
I/O with Modbus Master Base
SERIPLEX Bus Interface
120 VAC
24 VDC
RS 485 2- or 4-wire Modbus port
SERIPLEX bus connection
6 True High Inputs 3 True High Outputs
Interface to bus input Interface to bus output
1 group of 6 inputs (120 VAC @47 to 63 Hz): - voltage range, 0 to 132 VAC - response time, < 12.3 ms @ 60 Hz On to Off, < 12.5 ms @ 60 Hz Off to On
SERIPLEX version 2 bus input devices supported @ 24 VDC bus voltage
3 solid state switching outputs: - on current, 0.5 A continuous per point, 1.5 A continuous per module - response time, < 12.3 ms @ 60 Hz On to Off < 12.5 ms @ 60 Hz Off to On
SERIPLEX version 2 bus output devices supported @ 24 VDC bus voltage
Short circuit and overload for discrete outputs
500 V @ 2 , power to common
170 ADM 540 80
170 ANM 050 10
48248/4
Schneider Electric
0495Q-EN.fm/3

Momentum specialty module I/O bases
Presentation
The Momentum specialty module I/O bases provide support for unique applications that broaden the range of the Momentum offering. The specialty modules are : b a 2-channel, High-Speed Counter Module Base - 170 AEC 920 00. b a 120 VAC, 6-point Input/3-point Output Module Base with a Modbus Communication Port - 170 ADM 540 80. b a Base Module that provides an interface between Momentum and the SERIPLEX Component Network - 170 ANM 050 10. High-Speed Counter The 170 AEC 920 00 High-Speed Counter Module Base features 2 independent counters, along with 6 discrete inputs and 4 discrete outputs.This base can connect directly to either 5 VDC differential or 24 VDC single-ended encoders. The base supports two operating modes: incremental (up counter, down counter, and quadrature); and absolute (SSI up/down counter). The high-speed counter module can be connected directly to many standard communication networks, for communicating with programmable controllers, industrial computers, and other controllers, by installing one of the snap-on Momentum Comm Adapters onto the base.
Input-Output Module with Modbus Comm Port
The 170 ADM 540 80 input/output module base has 6 discrete inputs and 3 discrete outputs for direct connection to 2- and 3-wire sensors and actuators, plus a Modbus Communication Port for connection to serial devices. This module can also be used as the I/O base for a programmable controller, in either a standalone or distributed I/O configuration, by installing one of the snap-on Momentum M1 Processor Adapters.
SERIPLEX Module
The 170 ANM 050 10 SERIPLEX interface for Momentum controllers allows the exchange of I/O data over the SERIPLEX Component Network. SERIPLEX, from Square D, is a device-level control network with over 3 million installed I/O points worldwide. The interface acts as a slave to its host controller, and as a master for the SERIPLEX bus. The SERIPLEX base unit may have a Momentum processor adapter or communications adapter mounted on it, thus supporting three powerful control architectures : b Standalone Momentum controllers with SERIPLEX I/O devices. b Networked, distributed Momentum controllers, some or all of which may connect to SERIPLEX I/O devices. b A centralized control processor connecting to SERIPLEX bus devices and/or other types of I/O devices through a higher-level control network, such as Ethernet, Modbus Plus, DeviceNet, Interbus, or Profibu.
Description
A specialty module I/O bases consists of the following components : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Internal interface connectorfor the communication module. Locking and earth contact for the adapter. LED status display. Two connectors for the removable terminal blocks. Earthing screw. Grounding busbar mounting slot. Mounting holes for a panel mount. Protective cover for fuses (170 ADM 54080) or connector for the removable terminal block.
Characteristics : pages 48248/3 and 48248/4
Connections : page 48248/5
48248-EN/2
Characteristics

Characteristics
Model No. Number of I/O Counter Inputs Outputs Discrete inputs Operating voltage Input range Input surge Inputcurrent On Off Switching level V V V mA mA V 170 AEC 920 00 2 independant 2 x 3 discrete 2 x 2 discrete 24 DC - 3 to +30 DC 45 peak for 10 ms 2.5 minimum 1.2 maximum 11 DC minimum on voltage 5 DC maximum off voltage 3 Off to on 3 On to off True High V 24 DC True High V < 0.5 DC at 0.5 amp current Overload and short circuit A 0.5 per point 1 per counter 2 per module < 1 @ 24 VDC 5 A for 1 ms < 1.5 AC at 0.5 amp current 1 fuse, 2.5 amps at 250 VAC 120 AC at 47 to 63 Hz 170 ADM 540 80 1 x 6 discrete 1 x 3 discrete 120 AC @ 47 to 63 Hz 0-132 AC 200 AC for 1 cycle 5.5 minimum 1.9 maximum 79 AC minimum on voltage 20 AC maximum off voltage < 12.5 at 60 Hz Off to on < 12.3 at 60 Hz On to off
Response time
ms
Signal type Discrete outputs Operating voltage Signal type On state voltage drop Fault sensing Current capacity
0.5 continuous per point
1.5 continuous per module

1.9 @ 120 VAC 30 minimum
Current
Leakage Surge
mA mA ms ms
Response time
Off to on On to off
< 0.1
< 0.1 Up counter, down counter, quadrature Up/down counter with 4 sub-modes
< 12.5 @ 60 Hz
< 12.3 @ 60 Hz RS-485, 2- or 4-wire 19,200 and 9600 8-bit RTU / 7-bit ASCII 0 to 247 150 after transmission 125 @ 120 VAC
Counter inputs
Incremental counters Absolute SSI counter Input signals Counter speed (max) Counter capacity Counter configuration VDC kHz
5 differential input 24 single-ended input 200, differential inputs 10, single-ended inputs 24 bits plus sign per counter Via comm adapter (8 input words, 8 output words)
Modbus port
Type Communication rates Format Modbus address range Timeout ms mA bits/s
280 UL, CE, CSA
Current consumption Agency approvals
48248-EN/3
Characteristics (continued), references

Characteristics
Model No. Communication type Operating voltage Modularity Input characteristic Output characteristic Input voltage surge Current consumption Protection Agency approvals V mA VDC 170 ANM 050 10 SERIPLEX bus connection 24 Interfaces to bus input and bus output SERIPLEX version 2 bus input devices supported at 24 VDC bus voltage SERIPLEX version 2 bus output devices supported at 24 VDC bus voltage 500 at 2 Ohms, power to common Max. 450 @ 24 VDC Short circuit and overload for discrete outputs UL, CE, CSA
References
Modules
Description High-speed counter Module Base I/O module base with modbus comm port Characteristics 2 independent counters Reference 170 AEC 920 00 Weight kg 0.070
6 inputs, 3 outputs
170 ADM 540 80
0.070
SERIPLEX bus interface Interfaces to bus input and bus output Accessories (1) Replacement parts Description 170 AEC 920 00 Sheets of labels 10 front labels for Momentum modules
170 ANM 050 10
0.070
Use
Reference 170 XTS 100 00
Weight kg
Documentation Description Momentum I/O bases
Use User guide for: 170 AEC 920 00 170 ADM 540 80
Reference
Weight kg
870 USE 008 00 870 USE 002 00
SERIPLEX
Module Instruction Bulletin
30298 086 01
170 ADM 540 80
Module Installation "Mini- 30298 085 01 book" Installation and Troubleshooting Guide 30298 035 01A
(1) Terminal blocks, bus bar, cable grounding rail and discrete input simulator, see page 48237/8.
48248-EN/4
Connections

170 AEC 920 00
A 2-encoder and input/output field wiring example Counter 1

A1+ B1+ Z1+ 01+
Counter 2
A2+ B2+ Z2+ 02+ 5 6 7 8 9 10
Counter control inputs

I1 11 I2 12 I3 I4 I5 15 I6 16 M17 L+ 18
Fuse + 24 VDC Power for module - Return for module
1
1 2 3 4 13 14
Counter control outputs

A1- B1- Z1- 01A2- B2- Z2- 025 6 7 8 9 10 1L+ 1L+ Q1 Q2 11 12 13 14 Q3 Q+ 1M- 1L+ 15 16 17 18
Fuse + 24 VDC Power for inputs and outputs - Return for inputs and outputs
2
1 2 3 4
A1* B1* Z1* ZM- ZL+ A2* B2* Z2* ZM- ZL+ 1M-
1M- ZM- ZL+ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Fuse + 5 to 30 VDC power for encoders - Return for encoders
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Encoder with differential input
Encoder with single ended input
Discrete output Number 1
Discrete input Number 6
170 ADM 540 80
A Modbus device and input/output field wiring example a 120 V Fuse 1 Option
1
Return a 120 V Return

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 2N 2N 2N 2N N L1
a 120 V Return
Rx Lo
Tx Lo
Rx Hi
Tx Hi
GND
200 mA slow-blow fuse
Q1
Q2
Q3
1N 1L1
2A slow-blow fuse
PE
Tx Hi
Tx Lo
GND
PE
IN
PE
Modbus Device RS485
3-wire actuators
3-wire sensors
48248-EN/5
Selection guide

Communication Adapters
Applications
Communication Adapters for Ethernet
Communication Adapter for InterBus
Bus and network type
Ethernet
InterBus-S Generation 3
Generation 4
Generation 4
Topology Physical interfce Method of access Bit rate
IEEE 802.3 standard CSMA-CD 10 M bps 10/100 M bps
DIN 19 258 standard Master/Slave 500 K bps
Medium Type Topology Redundancy
Twisted pair CAT5 Star No
Twisted pair Ring No
Fibre optic
Maximum number of Momentum devices
40 per installation remote bus module (up to 256 bus terminal modules)
Maximum length
1000 m per segment
Up to 12800 m
Type of communicating module
170 ENT 110 00

48249/3
170 ENT 110 01
170 INT 110 00

48230/3
170 INT 110 03
170 INT 120 00
Pages
0488Q-EN.FM/2
Schneider Electric
Momentum I/O modules on Profibus DP bus
Momentum I/O modules on DeviceNet network
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
EN 50170 standard Master/Slave 12 M bps9.6 K bps depending on length
CSMA-CD 500 K bps
Twisted pair Multidrop, ring No
Multidrop Multidrop No
32 without repeater 126 with repeaters
64
1200 m
500 m with repeaters
170 DNT 110 00
170 LNT 710 00
48231/3
48233/3
Schneider Electric
0488Q-EN.FM/3

Communication Adapters
Applications
Communication Adapter for Modbus Plus
Bus and network type
Modbus Plus
Topology Physical interfce Method of access Bit rate
Mobus Plus standard Rotating token 1 M bps
Medium Type Topology Redundancy
Twisted pair Multidrop No Yes No
Maximum number of Momentum devices Per segment Overwall
32 64 (without repeaters)
Maximum length
5 000 m with repeaters
Type of communicating module
170 PNT 110 20
170 PNT 160 20
170 NEF 110 21
Pages
48232/5
0488Q-EN.FM/4
Schneider Electric
Momentum distributed I/O modules on Fipio bus for TSX Series 7 and April 5000 PLCs
Momentum distributed I/O modules on Fipio bus for Premium PLCs
Fipio
Fip standard Bus managed by bus arbitrator 1 M bps
Twisted pair Multidrop Yes No
128
Up to 5 000 m with repeater
Up to 15 000 m with repeaters
170 NEF 160 21
170 FNT 110 00
170 FNT 110 01
48236/3
Schneider Electric
0488Q-EN.FM/5

Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Adapters
Presentation
The Model 170 ENT 110 00 and 170 ENT 110 01 Ethernet Communication Adapters for the Momentum I/O product line provide a direct connection to Ethernet-based networks for the entire family of Momentum I/O modules. This connectivity enables communications with a full range of Ethernet TCP/IP compatible control products that includes programmable controllers, industrial computers, motion controllers, operator control stations, host computers, and other controls. This communication network provides a flexible, cost-effective solution for communicating factory floor information to various layers of an integrated manufacturing facility. The 100Base-TX Ethernet Communication Adapter, the 170 ENT 110 01 (and the 10Base-T adapter, the 170 ENT 110 00) are single adapters designed to plug on to any of the Momentum Input/Output module bases, and conforms to the requirements of the Ethernet Communication Network. The Ethernet IP addressing scheme allows an unlimited number of Momentum I/O modules or connections on the network. Using standard Ethernet hubs, routers, and bridges, the performance and distance capability of the Ethernet network can be tailored to meet the requirements of almost any control application. The Ethernet Communication Adapter uses the standard Modbus message structure and control commands over the TCP/IP protocol, which simplifies implementation by control engineers while providing information that can be communicated over standard network media to all enterprise applications. Since Modbus on TCP/IP over Ethernet is supported by Schneider's Quantum and Premium controller families, Momentum I/O can be added to existing control systems where additional I/O capacity of a distributed I/O sub-network is needed. The Ethernet Communication Adapter requires connection to a BOOTP server for setting the module's IP parameters, including its own unique IP address, default gateway, and sub-net mask, all of which is stored in the communication adapter's flash memory. Schneider Electric's automation business offers BOOTP Lite Ethernet software as a free download from the automation Internet web site, www.schneiderautomation.com.
Description
1
The 170 ENT 110 0p Ethernet Communication Adapters comprises on the front panel: 1 Ethernet connector for 100Base-TX interface (170 ENT 110 01) or 10Base-T interface (170 ENT 110 00) interface (RJ45),
2
2 Area for Label (label shipped with I/O base), 3 LED Status Indicators comprising for the 170 ENT 110 00:
- Run (green), module health, - LAN Active (green), Ethernet network status.
LED Status Indicators comprising for the 170 ENT 110 01:
Run (green), module health, 10T (green), 10 Mbps network activity, 100T (amber), 100 Mbps network activity, ST (green), Ethernet network status.
48249-EN/2
Characteristics, references

Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Adapters
Characteristics
Model No
Communication network Communication rate Number of nodes (devices) Media Flash memory Distance Connectors Error checking Error and fail states Addressing Adapter configuration Mode of operation Topology Packaging Indicator lights Power source Hot swapping of modules Agency approvals m (ft) 170 ENT 110 00 170 ENT 110 01
Ethernet TCP/IP
M bits/s 10 10 / 100
Unlimited with hubs and routers; 32 units point-to-point Twisted pair cable, 10Base-T 128 K for IP parameter storage 100 (328) twisted pair cable without repeaters; unlimited distance with repeaters RJ-45 10 base-T CRC-32 error check Fail safe Unique IEEE global address, IP address user assigned BOOTP server to assign IP parameters Master slave, peer-to-peer Multi-drop bus, star Standard momentum communications adapter enclosure - IP20 environment Run and activity lights Power supply on-board the I/O base Yes UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II UL, CE, CSA Run, 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and status lights RJ-45 100base-TX Twisted pair cable, 100Base-TX
References
Module
Description Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Adapter Reference Weight kg 0.070
170 ENT 110 00
Accessories
170 ENT 110 00 BOOTP Lite Ethernet Software Download from www.schneiderautomation.com
Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Adapter User Guide
870 USE 112 00
48249-EN/3

Momentum Modbus Plus communication adapters
Presentation
Modbus Plus Communication Adapters for the Momentum I/O product line can be plugged into any Momentum I/O base to create a functional I/O unit on the Modbus Plus bus, and to provide a direct connection to the Modbus Plus Network for the full family of Momentum I/O modules. This connectivity enables communications with all of the Modbus Plus compatible control products - including programmable controllers, industrial computers, operator control stations, drive systems, and other controls - to provide a flexible, cost-effective solution for distributing I/O modules throughout a large area. To expand the capabilities of the Modbus Plus Network for distributed I/O applications, the communication adapters have been designed to permit up to 64 Momentum I/O modules to be connected to the network without the need for signal repeaters. Each Momentum I/O module is an individual node on the Modbus Plus network with its address user-selected on the dual rotary switch on the front of the communication adapter. The Momentum I/O modules can be configured for the network, and assigned program reference numbers, by using either the Peer Cop function or the MSTR function block instruction in the programmable controller or the Modbus Plus configuration in an industrial computer. There are four types of Communication Adapters available : b b b b 170 PNT 110 20, Single Port, IEC Data Format. 170 PNT 160 20, Redundant Port, IEC Data Format. 170 NEF 110 21, Single Port, 984 Data Format. 170 NEF 160 21, Redundant Port, 984 Data Format.
IEC Data Format
This version of the Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter communicates I/O data to the programmable controller in the IEC data format, which has bit numbering 0 through 15, right to left, within the data word (i.e., input or output number 1 is bit number 0).
984 Data Format
This version of the Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter communicates I/O data to the programmable controller in the traditional 984 data format, which has bit numbering 1 through 16, left to right, within the register (i.e., input or output number 1 is bit number 1). Since Modbus Plus is supported by the Quantum and 984 controller families, Momentum I/O can be added to existing control systems where additional I/O capacity or a distributed I/O sub-network is needed, because of requirements for the control system. The figures below illustrate typical control systems using Momentum I/O modules on the Modbus Plus network with programmable controllers and industrial computer systems.
Characteristics : page 48232/3
48232-EN/2

Momentum Modbus Plus communication adapters
Network topology
Momentum I/O modules in a distributed control system
10
11
12
5 3
19
Momentum I/O modules with Modbus Plus double cable in a distributed and redundant control system
DIO
13 14 15 16 17 18
4 9 7
1 140 NOM 212 00Quantum Modbus Plus Head-end Interface, redundant support, twisted pair cable 2 140 NOM 252 00Quantum Modbus Plus Head-end Interface, single-cable support, fiber optic cable 3 140 CRA 212 10Quantum Modbus Plus Drop Interface and power supply, redundant support, 115/230 VAC 4 140 CRA 211 10Quantum Modbus Plus Drop Interface and power supply, single-cable support, 115/230 VAC 5 170 PNT 160 20Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, redundant network, IEC support 6 170 NEF 160 21Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, redundant network, 984 support 7 170 PNT 110 20Momentum Modbus Plus Communication Adapter, non-redundant network, IEC support 8 990 NAD 230 11Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Terminators 9 416 NHM 212 33Modbus Plus Type III PCMCIA Card, single port 10 990 NAD 230 00Modbus Plus Tap, IP20 11 990 NAD 230 10Modbus Plus Tap, IP65 12 990 NAD 211 10Modbus Plus Drop Cable, 2.4 m (8 ft) 13 990 NAD 215 10Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Programming Cable, 3.05 m (10 ft) 14 170 MCI 021 20Modbus Plus RJ45 cable, 3.05 m (10 ft) 15 170 XTS 020 00Modbus Plus T Connector (DB9 base) 16 170 MCI 020 10Modbus Plus RS 485 cable, 25 cm (10 in) 17 170 MCI 020 80Modbus Plus RJ45 cable, double-ended, 10 m (30 ft) 18 170 XTS 021 00Modbus Plus RJ45 Terminator 19 416 NHM 300 32Modbus Plus PCI PC Adapter Card, dual ports.
References : page48232/5
48232-EN/3
Description, characteristics

Modbus Plus communication adapters
Description
3 1 2
Each 170 PNT/NEF communication module comprises : 1 Three indicator lights (LEDs) : - MB + ACT indicator light (green) : module powered up or communicating. - ERR A indicator light (red) : communication error network A. - ERR B indicator light (red) : communication error network B. (for redundant model).
2 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connecting to the Modbus Plus network. 3 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for a redundant Modbus Plus network. 4 A slot for an identification label (supplied with all I/O sub-bases). 5 Two switches for coding the slave address on the bus.
Characteristics
Type of module
Master PLC on the network Structure Type Topology Length Access method Transmission Bit rate Medium Data Format Number of Momentum devices Per segment Maximum Power source Behaviour in the event of a communication error Services Agency approvals 170 PNT 110 20/160 20 Quantum, Premium Industrial Multi-drop, devices connected using extension cable or tap-off cable 5,000 m (6000 ft) maximum with repeater Token bus 1 Mbps Twisted pairs IEC Data format 31 connection points per segment 63 for all segments Power supply on-board the I/O base Discrete I/O : forcing to state 0 Analogue I/O : configurable (maintain value, fallback to 0 or full scale value) Configuration : Peer cop and MSTR function block, peer-to-peer mode UL, CE, CSA, FM Class I, Div. II 984 Data Format 31 connection points per segment 97 for all segments 170 NEF 110 21/160 21 Compact 984
48232-EN/4

Modbus Plus communication adapters
References
Description Communi cation modules for Momentum I/O subbases 170 PNT 110 20/NEF 110 21 Redundant Modbus Plus network Bus master PLC Non-redundant Premium Modbus Plus network Quantum Connection Reference
170 PNT 110 20
Weight kg
Compact 984 170 NEF 110 21 Quantum 170 PNT 160 20 Premium Compact 984 170 NEF 160 21 Reference
Weight kg 0.230
Description
Use
Modbus Plus IP 20 junction box for tap-off tap connection (T) IP 65 junction box for tap-off connection (T) 170 PNT 160 20/NEF 160 21 9-way female Communication SUB-D module connection connector Terminator 2 impedance adaptors for box connector kit (IP 20) 990 NAD 230 00 (set of 2) 2 impedance adaptors for box (IP 65) 990 NAD 230 10
990 NAD 230 00
990 NAD 230 10
0.230
AS MBKT 085
AS MBKT 185
990 NAD 230 11
Connection cables
AS MBKT 085 Use Length From To Standard T-junction T-junction 30 m Modbus Plus box box cables 150 m 300 m 450 m 1500 m Modbus Plus Commu- T- junction 2.4 m Drop cables nication box modules 990 NAD for 230 00 Momen -tum I/O sub-bases 990 NAD 6 m 230 10 Other connection accessories Description Reference Weight kg
490 NAA 271 01
490 NAA 271 02 490 NAA 271 03 490 NAA 271 04 490 NAA 271 06 990 NAD 211 10
0.530
990 NAD 211 30
0.530
See page 48247/5
48232-EN/5
Selection guide

M1/M1E processor adapters
Type
M1 processor adapters
RAM memory
64 K
256 K
Flash memory
256 K
984 LL program memory
2.4 K
12 K
IEC program memory
160 K
Data memory
2K
4K
Scan time
1 ms/K
0.63 ms/K
1 ms/K
0.63 ms/K
Clock speed
20 MHz
32 MHz
20 MHz
32 MHz
I/O points
2048
4096
I/O drops
Up to 2048 I/O points with Modbus Plus option adapter
80 with ProWORX 128 with Concept
Power source
Power supply on-board the I/O bases
Communication ports
1 RS 232 Modbus
1 RS 232 Modbus 1 RS 485 Modbus
1 RS 232 Modbus 1 I/O bus
IEC executive
Compatible
Type of module
171 CCS 700 00
171 CCS 700 10
171 CCS 780 00
171 CCS 760 00
Page
48245/8
0492Q_EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
512 K
512 K
512 K for 171 CCC 980 20 1 MB for 171 CCC 980 30
512 K
512 Ko for 171 CCC 960 20 1 Mo for 171 CCC 960 30
18 K
240 K
/200 K
240 K
/200 K
24 K
1 ms/K
0.3 ms/K
1 ms/K
0.3 ms/K
32 MHz
50 MHz
32 MHz
50 MHz
8192
Up to 2048 I/O points with Modbus Plus option adapter
80 with ProWORX 128 with Concept
1 RS 232 Modbus 1 RS 485 Modbus
1 Ethernet 1 RS 485 Modbus
1 RS 232 Modbus 1 I/O bus
1 Ethernet 1 I/O bus
Supplied with 171 CCC 980 30
Compatible
Supplied with 171 CCC 960 30
171 CCC 780 10
171 CCC 980 20/30
171 CCC 760 10
171 CCC 960 20/30
Schneider Electric
0492Q_EN.fm/3
Selection guide

Option adapters
Configuration
Modbus Plus option adapters
Communication network
Modbus Plus
Communication port(s)
1 Modbus Plus
2 redundant Modbus Plus
Comm port connector
9-pin D-shell
Time-of-day clock
On-board, + 13 sec/day accuracy
Back-up batteries
2 user-replaceable AAA alkaline
Voltage
5 VDC supplied by I/O base
Operating temperature
0 ... 60C
Humidity
5 ... 95%, relative noncondensing
Shock
+ 15 g peak, 11 ms, half-sine wave
Vibration
10 ... 57 Hz @ 0,075 mm d.a.
Type of module
172 PNN 210 22
172 PNN 260 22
Page
48247/5
0494Q-FR.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Serial option adapter
General-purpose serial communications
1 software-selectable RS 232/RS 485 serial port
172 JNN 210 32
Schneider Electric
0494Q-FR.fm/3
5 Contents
Communication
Communication
Communication modules selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/2 and 5/3
b TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/4 to 5/9 b Communication Modbus Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/10 and 5/13 b InterBus master module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/14 and 5/15 b Communications module for Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/16 and 5/17 b ASCII interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/18 and 5/19
Ethernet cabling system selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/20 to 5/23

b Ethernet cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/24 to 5/29
Schneider Electric
5/1
Selection guide

Communications modules
Types
TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet
Module function
NOE 771 00 - I/O scanner, Embedded Web Server NOE 771 01 - I/O scanner, Embedded Web Server, FDR Server One RJ45 for twisted-pair cable
NOE 771 10 - Embedded WebServer, FactoryCast NOE 771 11 -I/O Scanner, Embedded WebServer, FactoryCast, FDR Server One ST for fiber optic cable
Cable Port
Quantum CPU types
All Quantum CPUs , controller, executive 2.0 or greater
Data transfer frequency
10/100 M bits/s base T: twisted pair cable 100 M bits/s base FX: fiber optic cable
Bus current required
1000 mA
Compatibility
NOE 771 00 - Concept version 2.0 or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or higher NOE 771 01 - Concept version 2.5 SR2 + MDC file or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.2 SR6 or higher
NOE 771 10 - Concept version 2.0 or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or higher NOE 771 11 - Concept version 2.5 SR2 + MDC file or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.2 SR6 or higher
Model
140 NOE 771 0 p
140 NOE 771 1p
Page
48216/5
Schneider Electric
Interbus
Profibus-DP
140 NOA 611 10 - Interbus Generation 3 140 NOA 622 00 - Interbus Generation 4
Profibus fieldbus module
One RS-232C One RS-485 for Interbus
One RS-232C One RS-485 for Profibus PCMCIA card interface
All CPUs, version 2.0 or higher, except the 140 CPU 113 02
All Quantum CPUs, controller executive 2.0 or greater
500 K bits/s
19.2 K bits/s
700 mA
Concept version 2.0 or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or higher
140 NOA 611 10 / 622 00
140 CRP 811 00
48212/3
48213/5
Schneider Electric
Presentation

Communications TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet modules
Presentation
The Quantum TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet modules combine three open networking standardsEthernet, TCP/IP and Modbus. Ethernet is a worldwide standard with a wide variety of third-party products and services. TCP/IP is the de facto standard protocol for Ethernet and the underlying protocol for the ongoing Internet technology revolution. Ethernet combined with the widely accepted Modbus protocol provides unparalleled openness, flexibility and performance. There are no proprietary chip sets or licensing fees for developing a product that conforms to this standard. The standard is available free to the public at our web site, www.modicon.com. A TCP/IP Ethernet network system can: b Perform peer-to-peer communications between controllers. b Enable standard PC servers to be used for simple, centralized program archiving. b Allow you the freedom and convenience to go to your local computer superstore for components. b Allow you to communicate to your controllers over your in-house Intranet, your corporate WAN, or even the Internet. b Program your Quantum controller. b Integrate communications between controllers and host systems. b Allow the use of a standard PC Web browser to obtain system status and diagnostic information. b Communicate over media that can be supported by either the Control or IT/MIS department, or both. Many TCP/IP Ethernet models are available, as MT-RJ twisted-pair with RJ-45 connectors and as fiber optic with ST connectors. They are pre-loaded with TCP/IP stack and Modbus protocol application support in upgradeable Flash memory. These modules use the option module interface and are supported only in the local CPU backplane. Up to two TCP/IP Ethernet modules are supported by the 186 CPUs; up to six modules are supported by the 486/586 CPUs. Because the TCP/IP Ethernet modules have on-board processors, there is negligible impact on the CPU scan. Actual data exchange with the CPU takes place at the end of scan. The TCP/IP Ethernet modules have standard diagnostic LEDs to aid in troubleshooting, and they are hot-swappable to minimize control system downtime. These modules allow the user to program a Quantum automation controller over TCP/IP Ethernet. TCP/IP makes it easy to support network drives on PCs or hosts, and to use standard servers to centralize the archiving of your application programs. If an Ethernet network is already installed in your plant or facility, you can reduce costs by taking advantage of existing spare parts, expertise and pre-existing cabling. You can use commercially available products such as cabling, hubs, switches, routers, media converters and PC cards to construct your network. Schneider Automation recommends the use of Category 5 shielded twisted-pair cable for noise immunity in 10BaseT installations. Popular operating systems such as Windows95 and WindowsNT currently provide TCP/IP drivers, further reducing costs and simplifying support efforts. The modules support both Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 framing. IP addressing can be generated either automatically from the module's MAC address or assigned by the TCP/IP network administrator, depending on the type of network you are using (public or private). To provide the required determinism on Ethernet, it is recommended that the control network and normal IT/MIS traffic be segragated from one another. The best segmentation to use is separate networks for control purposes. However, standard Ethernet routers or switches can be used to either isolate or improve network performance. Quantum Ethernet modules are connected via twisted pair or fiber optic cabling to hubs. Hubs may be free-standing or connected to one another via 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseT, or 100 Base FX backbones to form a network. Network distances can be extended by repeaters; different networks can be connected within a facility over bridges. Facilities can be connected to other facilities by routers into wide area networks (WANs). Quantum CPUs can also be connected as nodes to the worldwide web. The Quantum Ethernet modules can plug-and-play in all of these network architectures. You can establish peer-to-peer communications between two Quantum CPUs over TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet by: b Plugging the Ethernet modules into a local Quantum backplane with a CPU and a power supply. b Configuring the TCP/IP Ethernet modules with an IP address and associated parameters. b Connecting the TCP/IP Ethernet modules together by means of a 10/100BaseT or 10/100BaseFX Ethernet hub. b Programming an MSTR ladder logic instruction to read or write controller information Peer-to-peer messages can be sent from CPU to CPU or from CPU to a host. TCP/IP communication uses the same MSTR communication instruction as Modbus Plus. The MSTR instruction allows the CPU to support report-by-exception, polled-read or continual-write messaging. Up to four MSTR instructions per scan can be serviced for each NOE module. A TCP/IP Ethernet module has a built-in, predefined web server that allows you to view specific troubleshooting oriented pages with a browser such as Netscape Navigator 4 or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or greater. You can: b View the Ethernet module's network statistics. b View the Quantum CPU's configuration. b Read 4x registers. b Read the CPU's personality. b Check remote I/O status. b View configured drops. b View configured DIO. Schneider Automation's FactoryLink ECS graphical interface software supports communications to the TCP/IP Ethernet modules. Other industry packages with drivers under include Wonderware's InTouch and Intellution's FIX.
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/2
Schneider Electric
General
(countinued)

Embedded Web Server and I/O Scanner
Factory or Inter-factory level (Intranet) Intranet Compatible PC+ Internet Browser Ethernet TCP/IP Plant floor/machines level
Router
Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server
The Quantum TCP/IP Ethernet modules are the 140 NOE 771 10 (an I/O Scanning module), and the 140 NOE 771 10 (the Embedded Web Server module). Both modules contain an RJ45 and an ST cable port, and can be used with both twisted pair and fiber optic cable. The 140 NOE 771 00 provides real-time control services using peer-to-peer messaging and I/O Scanning. The peer-to-peer function uses the existing Modbus Peer Cop configuration extension. The Ethernet I/O Scanner supports 4000 words in and out, along with the full IP adfress settings The 140 NOE 771 10 Embedded Web Server is a real-time PLC data server. All the supported datas in the Quantum processor are presented by the 140 NOE 77110 module as standard Web pages in HTML format, and thus are accessible using all standard Internet web browsers enabling Java code.(e.g. Internet Explorer 4 or Netscape navigator 4.0.5).All the functions of this Web Serveur do not require any particular configuration or programming, either at the PLC or Internet browser level. This module can also be used in an existing configuration without any modification of the PLC program. System diagnostic function The hardware PLC system diagnostic function is a predefined, password-protected function. Through the use of any commercially available Internet browser, this function enables the real-time display of such data as: b PLC configuration. b Detailed diagnostic information about each module included in the configuration, whether the modules are local or remote. b The state of all inputs and outputs.
PLC variables access The access to PLC variables is a predefined, password-protected function, which enables realtime read/write access to all PLC data. These variables can be effectively entered and displayed in symbolic or physical reference formats. It is also possible to access to unlocated variables (Quantum). To be able to be modified, these variables have to be declared authorized by the configuration software included with the Web Server module (Web Utility). To modify the values of these authorized variables, you have to enter an additional password. Dynamic animation tables, containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified, can be created by the user and saved in the module.
Schneider Electric
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/3
General (countinued)

User defined Web pages display The Quantum 140 NOE 771 10 Ethernet Embedded Web Server module includes RAM flash accessible memory space (like on a hard disk), in order to store user defined Web pages. These Web pages can be created with any standard tool designed to create HTML pages (FrontPage, Word 97, PowerPoint, etc.). Web pages created in this manner allow the user to : b Display all PLC variables in real time. b Create hyperlinks with external servers (documentation creators, suppliers, etc.). This feature is particularly suited to the creation of graphics and pictures for the eventual purposes of : b Display, control, and diagnosis. b Development of production reports in real time. b Maintenance or operator guides. b
Embedded Web Server configuration tools : Web Utility The software supplied on CD-ROM with the 140 NOE 771 10 module is the tool that enables the configuration and administration of the Embedded Web server in the module. It is common to both Quantum and Quantum PLC platforms, and is compatible with both Windows 95/98 and Windows NT. This tool offers the following features: b Definition of user names and associated passwords. b Definition of the variables to be modified by the user. b Save/restore of the whole Web site. b Transfer of user defined Web pages from a compatible PC to the 140 NOE 771 10 module.
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Description, characteristics, references

Description
The module 140 NOE 771 pp comprises on the front panel: 1 Model number and color code 2 LED array 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label 4 Fiber optic transmit cable port 5 Fiber optic receive cable port
4 5
Characteristics
Model Module Type Cable port Data transfer frequency Bus current required Power dissipation Compatibility Model Module Type mA W 140 NOE 771 00 I/O Scanner, Embedded Web Server RJ45 for twisted-pair cable 10/100 M bits/s base T (twisted pair); 1000 5 Concept Version 2.0 or higher; ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or higher 140 NOE 771 01 I/O Scanner, Embedded Web Server, FDR
Server
140 NOE 771 10 Embedded Web Server, FactoryCast ST for fiber optic cable 100 M bits/s base FX (fiber optic)
140 NOE 771 11 I/O Scanner, Embedded Web Server, FactoryCast, FDR Server ST for fiber optic cable 100 M bits/s base FX (fiber optic)
Cable port Data transfer frequency Bus current required Power dissipation Compatibility mA W
RJ45 for twisted-pair cable 10/100 M bits/s base T (twisted pair); 1000 5
Concept Version 2.5, SR2 + MDC file or higher; ProWORX NxT version 2.2 SR6 or higher
References
Description Module type Reference Weight kg (Ib) 0.345 (0.76) 0.345 (0.76) 0.345 (0.76) 0.345 (0.76)
Communicationsmodule, Ethernet TCP/IP Communicationsmodule, Ethernet TCP/IP Communications module, Ethernet TCP/IP Communications module, Ethernet TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP User Guide
I/O Scanner , Embedded Web Server

Embedded Web Server, FactoryCast I/O Scanner, Embedded Web Server, FDR Server I/O Scanner, Embedded Web Server, FactoryCast,
140 NOE 771 00 140 NOE 771 10 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 840 USE 116 00
FDR Server
Schneider Electric
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/5
Topologies

Topologies
Minimum configuration
Can connect to other 10BASE-2 10BASE-5 10BASE-FL ou 10BASE-T
b Connection made through an Ethernet hub. b The hub provides star connections. b Twisted pair hubs and fiber hubs are readly available with between 4 to 24 connections.
Readily available hub
b Fiber and twisted pair topology is identical.
twisted pair cables
Quantum Ethernet
Quantum Ethernet
Ethernet topology example PC b A more typical configuration. b Ethernet nodes are connected via Ethernet hubs to the backbone. Ethernet TCP/IP Hub b Backbone is typically coax or fiber covering the larger distance.
Ethernet Backbowe 10Base 2 or 10Base 5 Hub Ethernet TCP/IP
Quantum Ethernet
Laptop
Quantum Ethernet Ethernet multiple backbone example b Use within plants or plant-to-plant. Routing Example Bridge Repeater
Network B Network A Hub
Hub
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/6
Schneider Electric
Topologies (continued), characteristics, references
TCP/IP Modbus Ethernet modules, developers kit (EDK)
Topologies
PC software rack
(continued)
Designed for professional Ethernet application developers. Here is the tool kit that allows connectivity to the world's most popular high end controller, the Quantum automation platform from Schneider Automation. Now you can quickly build applications that harness the power of Quantum using standard TCP/IP Ethernet. And with the industry standard Modbus protocol, users get the benefits of a proven, easy to understand technology. For little more than the price of a Quantum Ethernet module, you get lots of valuable information and tools in one easy to use development kit. What's included: b One Quantum twisted pair Ethernet module for connection to your Ethernet network.
Supplied Quantum Ethernet module
PC or compatible
b One Quantum Ethernet user guide with programming reference, error code sections, and developer's guide section. b One Modbus protocol reference manual with detailed reference information. b One Quantum automation hardware reference guide. b Sample language source code for a Windows Winsoc TCP/IP Ethernet driver utilizing ModBus protocol. b Error log software tool. b ModLink DDE Server, Windows 3.11 host application and documentation.
Characteristics
Part number Hardware 140 EDK 711 00
802.3 10BaseT networks via RJ45 twisted pair connection (Quantum power supplies and
backplanes sold separately)
Compatibility
All Quantum controllers; controller executive required is version 2.0. (Not compatible with existing Modicon Decnet bridge) Identical Modbus services from 984 controllers ModLink version 2.0 P/N 352SMD49300 Sample source code for Windows Ethernet driver utilizing Modbus protocol 3 1/2" diskette (1.44 Mb)
Modbus services supported Host application software Development software Disk format supported Programming panel software compatibility
ProWORX NxT 2.0

Concept version 2.0 [Panel software sold separately]
References
Description Developers kit TCP/IP Ethernet Supports operation on IEEE Reference 140 EDK 771 00 Weight
kg (lb)
Schneider Electric
48216-EN_Ver3.5.fm/7

Communications Modbus Plus Programming
Communication programming
Your application program can initiate event-driven communications and integrate network diagnostics using either the MSTR ladder logic instruction or an equivalent IEC 1131 function. A host computer can implement Modbus Plus with NetBios-compatible software libraries that are called from the host application program. Appropriate libraries are provided for each host computer interface, which are offered for all major platforms and operating systems. A standard Modbus Plus network based on twisted-pair cable supports up to 32 peer processors and can communicate over distances up to 450 m. If an applications requires more drops or longer distances, an RR85 Modbus Plus Repeater between network links allows 64 addresses and a distances up to 900 m. As many as three repeaters can be used, supporting distances of up to 1800 m. The maximum number of network addresses support is 64.
450 m 32 nodes terminal terminal
RR85
RR85
RR85
1800 m, 64 drops max.
If an application requires more than 64 drops, a BP85 Modbus Plus Bridge can be used to connect two Modbus Plus networks. Bridge devices allow many small networks to be connected in order to achieve maximum performance.
node
node
node
network A
BP85
network B node node node
If your application requires that a Modbus device, such as a programming panel, operator interface or third-party computer, needs access to data from a Modbus Plus network, you can accomplish this with a BM85 Modbus Plus bridge/ MUX. The BM85 offers four Modbus-compatible serial RS-232 ports, which allow Modbus master or Modbus slave devices to tie into a Modbus Plus network. The bridge/MUX connections enable data exchange between the Modbus devices as well as over the Modbus Plus network.
984-685 node
Quantum node
Quantum node
Modbus Plus
BM85
Modbus
programming third-party PC
Modbus drop Micro
Modbus drop Compact
Modbus drop E984-381
5/10

Communications Modbus Plus Installation, redundant cables
All Quantum CPUs contain a Modbus Plus port. Modbus Plus combines high-speed peer-to-peer communication with easy implementation to simplify data sharing by nodes across a network. It is a local area network that facilitates communications between CPUs, host computers and other data sources via twisted-pair cable or optional fiber optic cable. Communications happen at up to 1 Mbaud. Typical applications include interlocking on control networks, data acquisition, uploading/downloading software, remote on-line programming, connecting to operator interfaces and host computer data collection. Modbus Plus is able to handle communications for real-time control devices like I/O and drives, and its performance is not degraded due to loading or traffic.
Installation
Modbus Plus is a self-establishing network that establishes communication over inexpensive twisted-pair cables. It is a genuinely plug-and-play network. Modbus Plus connectivity is available across many Modicon controlller families, with additional connectivity provided through our ModConnect Partners program. Modbus Plus delivers up to 20 000 registers/second in a predictable, deterministic manner. Special features include global data and a peer-to-peer data table for easy setup and initialization. Diagnostic programs and visual LED indicators help you troubleshoot the network.
Redundant cables
For high-availability applications, Schneider Automation offers a series of Modbus Plus network components and options for redundant operation. Redundant cabling enables Modbus Plus communication over two independent cable systems, with cable health being checked and validated on every message transfer. If one cable fails, the system automatically switches to the other cable. The defective cable is identified in the network statistics. If, for any reason, a cable stops functioning, the network continues operation on the second cable while the defective cable is being repaired.
Monitor-Pro
PC
VME-Bus
SA85
SA85
SV85 Cable A Cable B
S986
NOM212
685/785
Quantum
5/11

Modbus Plus Global data, peer cop
Global data
Global data allows you to share global variables across a Modbus Plus network of programmable logic controllers. It is an easy way for CPUs to keep track of process-sensitive information, and because the global database is broadcast, updating of global information happens extremely fast. Each CPU has as many as 32 registers of global data; Modbus Plus nodes can support 2048 registers (32 registers x 64 CPUs) of global data. Each of up to 64 CPUs on the network is responsible for updating its own 32 registers of global data using an MSTR instruction. Each CPU also has the ability to read the 32 global registers from all the other CPUs on the network. When a CPU updates its global data, this information is broadcast automatically to all other CPUs on the network. Each receiving controller collects the new global data and stores it in its network interface memory. A CPU looking to read another peer's global data is actually pulling the information out of its own network interface. Global data works only within a single layer of the Modbus Plus network. It cannot be transmitted through a BM85 bridge MUX or BP85 bridge plus device.
Global data structure

Modbus Plus Network
Controller 1
Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Global Data Global Data Global Data
Controller 2
Controller 3
Data Controller 1 (4xxxxx) (6xxxxx) Application Controller 1
Automatic "Broadcast Method" Updates
Peer cop
Peer cop is a software utility in Modsoft and Concept that enables you to define point-to-point data transactions between a CPU and other nodes across a Modbus Plus network. Peer cop uses defined data references (such as discretes or registers) as sources and destinations. A block of registers could constitute the data source for the transmitting node, and another block of registers could be the destination for the receiving device. A maximum of 32 words can be addressed in a CPU via peer cop, where a 16-point discrete module equals one word. Peer cop offers two methods of data transactionglobal and specific. Because all Modbus Plus nodes monitor the network, any one device can extract the data addressed specifically to it. Likewise, all nodes can extract global data. Peer cop enables the Modbus Plus device currently holding the token to direct specific data to individual nodes and broadcast global data to all nodes as part of its token frame. Each sending node can specify unique references as data sources, and each receiving node can specify the same or different references as data definitions. When nodes receive global data, each node can index to specific locations in the incoming data and extract specific lengths of data from those points. Data transactions can therefore happen quickly as part of the token rotation and can be directly mapped between data references in the sending and receiving nodes. Network and data security are obtained with the CPU's write-protect feature. You can configure sections of references within the CPU as read-only so that those references cannot be corrupted over the network. Peer cop, like global data, works only within a single layer of the Modbus Plus network. It cannot be configured to operate through a BM85 bridge MUX or BP85 bridge plus device.
5/12

Modbus Plus Fiber optics
Fiber optic network

Optional fiber optic cabling is available for a Modbus Plus network. With fiber optics, the total length of the network can be increased to as much as 3 km. The fiber optic medium provides intrinsically safe links, which may be required in certain hazardous environments. Fiber cabling is not susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic interference, RF interference or lightning. It also provides total isolation between terminal points on the link. A point-to-point configuration A point-to-point link between CPUs on a Modbus Plus network allows safe communications in a harsh environment over distances up to 3 km. Node # 1 Up to 3 km Node # 2
CPU
NOM
NOM
CPU
P/S
I/O
I/O
A self-healing ring You can create a self-healing ring in a mixed fiber/twisted pair network by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the first and last 140 NOM 252 00 modules, either directly or through the fiber optic repeater. This type of configuration maintains all the advantages previously described including built-in redundancy. A broken connection between any two Quantum modules in the ring will automatically reconfigure the network to the bus configuration and continue communicating.
PS
Fiber optic cables
140 NOM 252 00
Node # 1
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Legend MB+ Cable Fiber optic Cable MB+ Tap w/Terminator MB+ Tap 490 NRP 254 Fiber Optic Repeater
Node # 3
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Node # 4
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Node # 5
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
5/13

Communications
Interbus master modules
Presentation
Interbus is a field bus designed for distributing sensor and actuator devices in a master/slave topology. The I/O slaves are serviced in a deterministic manner over a twisted-pair network. Interbus is best suited for talking to groups of I/O rather than individual I/O points. As such, Interbus slaves are typically available in 8-, 16- or 32point blocks. Schneider Automation provides Interbus slave I/O as part of its Momentum product offering. In the Quantum Automation Series, two Interbus master modules are available, one each supporting Interbus Generation 3 (140 NOA 611 10) and Interbus Generation 4 (140 NOA 622 00). The Quantum Interbus master can control Momentum slave devices as well as third-party products designed to operate on the fieldbus. Over 300 industrial vendors provide Interbus-compatible products, assuring open, cost-effective and wide-ranging connectivity. The Quantum Interbus master modules interface with up to 4096 input and output points distributed over as many as 512 slave devices on the fieldbus. The Interbus data rate is 500 kbits/s, with data transferred to the Quantum CPU for logic processing on every scan. Up to six 140 NOA 622 00 Interbus master modules can be supported in a local Quantum backplane. All of Modicon's Interbus products use the remote bus technique, which enables data transfers over 12.8 km (8 mi) across all 512 devices. Electrical voltage levels on the Quantum remote bus are RS-485, with full-duplex mode communications. Interbus command words are pre-programmed in the Interbus master module. This is an Interbus standard that supports 16-function programmability. Four pre-programmed bits are defined: b Startup with configuration check b Start network b Stop network b Clear display An additional Interbus feature provided in the Quantum master is the peripheral communications protocol (PCP), which supports limited data communications to intelligent devices. PCP version 1.5 allows word communications to intelligent slaves for advanced functions such as drive setup, parameterization or non-I/O data transfer. Many third-party slave devices available today do not support PCP capability, but it is supported in the Quantum master modules.
Description
The Interbus module comprises on the front panel: 1 1 Model number and color code 2 LED array R (green) Ready. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for service. Active (green) Communication with the Quantum CPU is active. F (red) A fault occurred on the module. IB-S Run (green) The Interbus is functioning normally and carrying data. BS Off (yellow) One or more bus segments are shut down. Master (red) Processor fault. Fault on the Interbus processor or the communications processor has failed. RBUS (red) Remote bus fault. The remote bus has been diagnosed as defective . LBUS (red) Peripheral bus fault. The peripheral bus has been diagnosed as defective. Slave (red) An Interbus node has reported a (module) fault. DEA202 (red) Initialization fault with the DEA 202. Memory (red) Memory fault. Start Up (red) The Interbus master is not operational. 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label 4 RS232C port 5 Interbus port
4 5
48212-EN_Ver4.0.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Software, characteristics, references

Communications
Interbus master modules
Special software considerations

The 140 NOA 611 10 Generation 3 module requires a loadable called ULEX, an intelligent module driver that provides 256 input data registers and 256 output data registers per logic scan. One ULEX instruction can support up to three NOA 611 10 modules. ULEX is provided with the Quantum Interbus user manual (840 USE 419 00). The 140 NOA 611 10 module can take advantage of various software packages for full-feature performance. PCP communications utilize two other ladder logic loadable instructionsICNT and ICOM. ICNT establisheds a connection link to the slave device; ICOM communicates with the slave device. The 140 NOA 622 00 Generation 4 module is configured with the Schneider Fieldbus Configurator, TLX LFBC 10M, which can be launched from within Concept software.
Characteristics
Model Interbus compatibility Data interface Interbus RS 232C Cable length Data transfer frequency Memory RAM m bits byte 140 NOA 611 10 Generation 3 RS-485, isolated (500 V test voltage) per DIN 66 020, non-isolated 20 (65) max. (shielded) 500 M 256 K + 32 for data 2 K dual-port RAM 64 K multi-port RAM 128 K + 256 K firmware 64 K Interbus command sequence 700 3 2 with 140 CPU 113 03 6 with 140 CPU 434 12A and CPU 534 14A 140 NOA 622 00 Generation 4
EPROM EEPROM Bus current required Max number of Interbus modules/local backplane Power disspation Typical Max. Compatibility CPUs Software
byte byte mA
W W
2.5 3.7 All CPUs, version 2.0 or higher, except the 140 CPU 113 02 Concept version 2.1 or higher, Concept version 2.5 SR2 or higher ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or higher
References
Description InterBus master module References 140 NOA 611 10 Weight kg (lb) 0.9 (2.0)
Accessories
Description Length m (ft) Interbus cable, preconnected 0.25 (0.8) References 170 MCI 025 00 Weight kg (lb)
1.0 (3.3)
170 MCI 100 00
Interbus connector set, female / pin 9-pin, D-shell, cut clamping technology Schneider Fieldbus software for Interbus network configuration. Single-user license, for Concept 2.2 or greater. 140 NOA 611 10 user guide 140 NOA 622 00 user guide
170 XTS 009 00
TLX LFBC 10M
840 USE 419 00 840 USE 497 00
Schneider Electric
48212-EN_Ver4.0.fm/3

Communications Module for Profibus
Presentation
Profibus-DP (CRP 811 00) The Profibus-DP (Distributed Process Periphery) is an enhanced, high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial communication requirements. Profibus-DP combines two media access methods: b the decentralized method, which uses the token-passing principle; b the centralized method, which uses the Master-Slave principle. Only Master Stations, called active stations, have access rights to the bus. The Slave, or passive stations, can only respond to prompts. Profibus-DP is an optimum alternative for cost-intensive parallel signal transfers at 24 V and measurement value transfers in 4 (0) ... 20mA technology. It is designed for a fast data exchange on the sensor/actuator level. The physical connection is single-shielded twisted pair cable, but fiber optic interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures.
DP-Master Quantum with CRP 811
DP-Slave Compact with DEA 203
Profibus-DP
Actuators, Sensors DP-Slaves
Distributed inputs/outputs (DIOs) DP-Slaves
Descritption
1 2 The Profibus-DP modules comprise in front panel: 1 Model Number and Color Code 2 LED Indicator Panel 3 RS-232C Port 4 PCMCIA Card (467 NHP 911) The Profibus modules include a TAP connection. The TAP can be positioned at distances of up to 20 cm on a DIN-rail. 3
48213-EN_Ver3.2.fm/2
Schneider Electric

Communications Module for Profibus
Characteristics
Module Type PROFIBUS LEDs 140 CRP 811 00 DP Active (green) Ready (green) Fault (red) Backplane (green) Profibus (green) DP S/R (green) FMS S/R (green) - not used) Load (yellow) all CPUs decendent on CPU design and other communication modules (see CPU)
Suitable CPU Types Number of Quantum CRP Update Time with 32 Slaves (per 16 bit inputs, 16 bit outputs) Configuration Software Data Interface Profibus RS 232C Baud Rate Max. Cable Length Power Output m W
ms
12 332 SPU 833 01, Profibus-DP RS 485 at bus tap up to 12 MBit/s per DIN 66020, non-isolated 19.2 k B i t / s 3 (shielded) 6.5
References
Module for profibus
Description Communication Modules, Profibus DP, including Tap (490 NAE 911 00) and PCMCIA Card (467 NHP 811 00) Reference 140 CRP 811 00 Weight kg
Accessories
Description Reference Weight kg
Configuration Package for 140 CRP 811 00 for Profibus DP 332 SPU 833 01 Network Configuration Single Workstation license, runs with Windows 3.x in combination with ProWORX NxT for Quantum Configuration Package for 140 CRP 811 00 for Profibus DP TLX LFBC 10M Network Configuration Single Workstation license, for Concept 2.2 or greater Profibus Cable, O2Y(ST)CY 2 x 0.64 mm 2 KAB PROFIB
Programming Cable, 3 m, 9-pin, male/female
990 NAM 263 30
Description Profibus connector
Type Terminated end connector Inline connector
Color Yellow
Reference 490 NAD 911 03
Weigth kg
Gray
490 NAD 911 04
Inline connector with service port Profibus tap (1)
Gray
490 NAD 911 05
490 NAE 911 00
PCMCIA card (1)
467 NHP 811 00
(1) Spare prt only; this product is included with the 140 CRP 811 00
Schneider Electric
48213-EN_Ver3.2.fm/3

Special-purpose modules ASCII interface module Presentation, description
Presentation
The Quantum 140 ESI 062 10 ASCII module is a general purpose ASCII interface that provides the ability to communicate and exchange data with third party devices. These devices are typically found in industries which do not utilize a standard communication. The majority of these applications are for communicating directly to printers, bar code readers and scanners, along with serial devices such as weigh scales, meters and other measurement devices. This module is designed for relatively simple point to point ASCII communications, with ASCII messages contained within the ESI module triggered by the logic within the Quantum controller. Messages are developed off-line and downloaded to the ESI module, with the message itself being able to communicate to an ASCII compatible serial device. The optional 984 ladder logic ESI loadable function block, greatly simplifies the command/response data communications with the ESI module. This instruction can be used in either Modsoft or Concept 984 Ladder Logic environments. The development environment for this module consists of a PC running Modsoft or Concept connected to the Quantum controller, with or without the optional ESI loadable function block, along with a PC running a terminal emulation program for development of the ASCII messages within the ESI module. The module provides interfaces for report generation (printers & terminals); time stamping of messages; supports printer and device control codes; interface to serial devices; data storage; two (2) RS232C Ports - 9 Pin D Sub; ASCII messages stored in non-volatile flash for data integrity; flash based ESI module firmware for simple field upgrades; no limit on installed units to capacity of I/O system; better performance from separate ESI processor, supports up to 19.2Kbaud; bidirectional register transfer, (12) input and (12) output registers; uses command register instructions, supports leading spaces or zeros, ASCII, octal, hex, decimal, integer binary, fixed decimal point, time and date formats for data; repeat, new-line, control code, space and nested formats available for text messages; monitor and flush buffer commands for monitoring port performance; Get and Put commands for data transfer between controller and module.
Description
The Quantum 140 ESI 062 10 ASCII module comprises in front panel: 1 2 1 Model number and color code. 2 LED array. 3 Removable, hinged door and customer identification label. 4 RS-232 comm port 1. 5 Reset button. 6 RS-232 comm port 2. 6
3 4 5
5/18

Special-purpose modules ASCII interface module Characteristics, references
Characteristics
Model Data interface serial ports burst speed continuous speed cable Firmware message nesting buffer size number of messages message length Memory RAM flash Power dissipation Bus current required Addressing requirement Fusing internal external Compatibility software Quantum CPU kbyte kbyte W mA m (ft) 140 ESI 062 10 two RS232 per DIN 66 020, 9-pin D-shell, nonisolated kbaud 19.2 each port application-dependent 20 (65.6) shielded 8 levels 255 in / 255 out 255 127 characters + 1 checksum max. 256 for data and program +2 for dual-port RAM 128 for program and firmware 2 max 300
words 12 in/12 out none user discretion ProWORX NxT version 2.0 or Concept 2.0 minimum all, V2.0 minimum
References
Description Intelligent ASCII interface with 2 RS232 ports Programming cable for Modbus interface Lenght Reference 140 ESI 062 10 Weight kg (lb) 0.30 (0.66)
3.7 (12)
990 NAA 263 20
0.30 (0.66)
15 (50)
990 NAA 263 50
1.82 (4.0)
140 ESI 062 10 User Guide (including 984 ladder logic ESI loadable)
840 USE 108 00
5/19
Selection guide

ConneXium industrial Ethernet
Product type
Hubs
Technology
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s
Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Interfaces
4 10BASE-T ports
3 10BASE-T ports 2 10BASE-FL ports
4 100BASE-TX ports
Connection Type
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable and redundant fiber optic ring
Twisted pair cable
Type of connector
Shielded RJ45 for 10BaseT
Shielded RJ45 for 10BASE-T BFOC for 10BASE-FL
Shielded RJ45 for 100BaseTX
Terminal block
1 x 5-pin pluggable
Operating voltage
18 to 32 VDC safety extra low voltage
9.6 to 57.6 VDC safety extra low voltage
Power consumption
80 mA typical, 130 mA max at 24 VDC
Range
Twisted pair line length maximum 100 m
Fiber optic maximum 3100 m Twisted pair maximum 100 m
Type of module
499 NEH 104 10
499 NOH 105 10
499 NEH 141 00
Pages
48190/7
0459Q_EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Switches
Transceivers
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s and Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s
Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and 2 100BASE-TX ports
5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and 2 100BASE-FX ports
1 10BASE-T port and 1 10BASE-FL port
1 100BASE-TX port and 1 100BASE-FX port
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable and redundant fiber optic ring
Twisted pair cable and fiber optic Ethernet cable
Shielded RJ45 for 10BaseT/100BaseTX
Shielded RJ45 for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX; SC for 100BASE-FX
Shielded RJ45 for 10BASE-T BFOC for 10BASE-FL
Shielded RJ45 for 100BASE-TX SC for 100BASE-FX
18 to 32 VDC, safety extra low voltage
800 mA maximum at 24 VDC
80 mA typical, 100 mA maximum at 24 VDC
160 mA typical, 190 mA maximum at 24 VDC
Fiber optic maximum 3000 m Twisted pair maximum 100 m
Twisted pair line length 100 m; 62.5/125m fiber, 3100 m (NTR100 10), 3000 m (NTR 101 00)
499 NES 171 00
499 NOS 171 00
499 NTR 100 10
499 NTR 101 00
48190/7
Schneider Electric
0459Q_EN.fm/3

ConneXium Ethernet cabling system
Product type
Optical cables
Cable type
Standard glass fiber optic
Pre-assembled connector type
MT/RJ-SC duplex
MT/RJ-ST duplex
MT/RJ-MT/RJ duplex
Cable lenght(s)
5 m (16.4 ft)
Radiation susceptibility
No radiation along the cable
Agency approvals
Category 5 of cabling standard EIA/TIA-568; class D of IEC 11801/EN50173
Networks link
Operating power
Ports
Type of module
490 NOC 000 05
490 NOT 000 05
490 NOR 000 05
Pages
48190/6
0459Q_EN.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Electrical cables
Bridges
Shielded and foil twisted pair straight-through cable
Shielded and foil twisted pair cross-over cable
Modbus Plus to Ethernet Bridge
Modbus to Ethernet Bridge
RJ45 (two per cable)
2, 5, 12, 40, 80 m 6.5, 16.4, 39.4, 131.2, 262.4 ft
5, 15, 40, 80 m 16.4, 49.2, 131.2, 262.4 ft
UL and CSA (22.1) approval indicated by "U" after part number (example: 490 NTW 000 40U)
UL, CSA, CE
Modbus Plus to Ethernet
Modbus to Ethernet
110/220 VAC, auto sensing
930 VDC range; 12 or 24 VDC, nominal
1 Ethernet 10BASE-T, 10BASE-2, 10BASE-5 port; 1 dual/single cable Modbus Plus port
1 RJ45 port for 10BASE-T cable
490 NTW 000 pp
490 NTC 000 pp
174 CEV 200 30
174 CEV 300 10
48190/7
Schneider Electric
0459Q_EN.fm/5
Presentation

Presentation
As part of its Transparent Factory family of products, Schneider Electric offers a range of industrially hardened network hubs, switches, transceivers, bridges, and cables. These Ethernet-standard communication components enable you to integrate Ethernet solutions from the device level to the control network, and beyond to the corporate intranet. Each ConneXium Industrial Ethernet product is designed with compliance to Ethernet standards, and with third-party compatibility in mind. b ConneXium Hubs connect devices and provide segments to shared communication among PLCs. TF Hubs are low-cost solutions which enable communications with devices, such as Momentum I/O, to Ethernet networks. b ConneXium Switches segment the application in different zones, groups, or cells/ machines. The proper placement of switches can increase network performance by relieving network congestion. TF switches implement SNMP protocol, allowing standard network management tools to monitor and diagnose the network, and thus are a key architectural component for real-time and deterministic network communication. b ConneXium Transceivers provide connections to fiber optic networks in areas of high electromagnetic interference. The use of multiple transceivers enables long distances between process areas. b ConneXium Bridges enable Modbus to Ethernet and Modbus Plus to Ethernet communications, with multiple ports allowing flexibility among network components. b ConneXium Cables connect each automation device to the attached hub, switch, transceiver, or bridge. Cables are available in fiber optic and twisted pair options, with a wide variety of connectors and cable lengths. All Ethernet cabling system components are built to rigorous industrial standards, and are designed to perform in harsh environments. ConneXium Switches and Hubs support a high level of resilience. Their scalable redundant features - from single to double ring structure - make it easy to build the kind of fault-tolerant network that fits the specific requirements of your environment.
Optical redundant network 200 Mbps full duplex
Switch
Switch Transceiver Fiber optic
Switch Hub
Hub
Transceiver Hub Optical loop Hub
Hub
Momentum I/O
Remote location
Characteristics :
pages 48190/3 to 48190/6

Schneider Electric
48190-EN.FM/2
Characteristics

Mechanical construction
Models Operating temperature Relative humidity Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) g (Lb) C (F) 499 NEH 104 10 0 to 60 (32 to 140) 1095% (non-condensing) 40 x 125 x 80 (1.58 x 4.92 x 3.15) 520 (1.2) IP 30 47 x 135 x 111 (1.85 x 5.31 x 4.37) 240 (0.529) IP 20 80 x 140 x 80 (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.15) 900 (2) IP 30 499 NEH 141 00 499 NOH 105 10
Weight Enclosure Agency approvals and compliance
cUL 1950; FM 3810; FM 3611 Class 1, Div. 2; CE, Germanischer Lloyd, IEC 61131-2
Characteristics
Models Technology Interfaces 499 NEH 004 10 Ethernet 10 Mbps 4 10baseT ports with RJ45 shielded connectors 499 NEH 041 00 Ethernet 100 Mbps 4 100baseTX ports with RJ45 shielded connectors 499 NOH 005 10 Ethernet 10 Mbps - 3 10baseT ports with RJ45 shielded connectors - 2 10baseFL ports with BFOC connectors Twisted pair cables or redundant fibre optic ring
Connection type
Twisted pair cable
Terminal block Operating voltage Redundancy Power consumption at 24 VDC Maximum range mA m (ft) VDC
1 x 5-pin, pluggable 18 to 32, safety low voltage Power supply 80 typical, 130 maximum 210 typical, 270 maximum Power supply and optical ring 160 typical, 350 maximum Fiber optic, max 3100 (max 10,000) Twisted pair, max 100 (max 330) 4 max 11 max
Twisted pair line length, max 100 (max 330)
Number of cascaded hubs Number of hubs in a ring Fault indicator LED indicators
4 max
2 max
Power supply failure; permanent fault in hub; faulty link status of TP port; at least one port has auto-partitioned P1, P2 power, DA/STAT 1 to DA/STAT 4: data collision, P1, P2 power, DA/STAT 1 to segmentation, and link status per port DA/STAT 5: data collision, segmentation, and link status per port
References : page 48190/7 Schneider Electric
48190-EN.FM/3

Models Operating temperature Relative humidity Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) g (Lb) C (F) 499 NES 171 00 0 to 50 (32 to 122) 1095% (non-condensing) 105 x 130 x 105 (4.1 x 5.1 x 4.1) 850 (1.87) IP 20 cUL 1950; cUl 508; cUL 1604 Class 1, Div. 2; CE, Germanischer Lloyd, IEC 61131-2 110 x 131 x 111 (4.3 x 5.2 x 4.4) 499 NOS 171 00
Characteristics
Models Technology Interfaces 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 Ethernet 10 Mbit/s and Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded RJ45 connectors RJ45 connectors 2 100BASE-TX ports with RJ45 connectors 2 100BASE-FX ports with SC connectors Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cables and redundant fiber optic ring
Connection type
Terminal block Operating voltage Redundancy VDC
1 x 5-pin, pluggable 18 to 32, safety low voltage Power supply; optical and/or copper ring structure; fast media redundancy (< 0.3s); redundant manager mA m (ft) 800 maximum Twisted pair line length, max 100 (max 330) Fiber optic, max 3100 (max 10,000) Twisted pair, max 100 (max 330)
Power consumption at 24 VDC Maximum range
Number of switches in a ring Number of cascaded switches Fault indicator
Maximum 50 at 100 Mbit/s 2 max Power supply failure; permanent fault in switch; faulty link status of TP port; at least one port has auto-partitioned, self-test error, ring monitoring not possible P1, P2 power, Port 1 to 7 status, Redundancy Manager, and Standby
LED indicators
48190-EN.FM/4
Schneider Electric

Models Operating temperature Relative humidity Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) g (Lb) C (F) 499 NTR 100 10 0 to 60 (32 to 140) 1095% (non-condensing) 40 x 134 x 80 (1.58 x 5.28 x 3.15) 520 (1.2) IP 30 cUL 1950; FM 3810 Class 1, Div. 2; CE, Germanischer Lloyd, IEC 61131-2 47 x 135 x 111 (1.9 x 5.3 x 4.4) 230 (0.51) IP 20 cUL 1950; cUl 508; cUL 1604; Class 1, Div. 2; CE, Germanischer Lloyd, IEC 61131-2 499 NTR 101 00
Characteristics
Models Technology Interfaces 499 NTR 100 10 Ethernet 10 Mbit/s 499 NTR 101 00 Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Connection type Terminal block Operating voltage Redundancy Power consumption at 24 VDC Maximum range mA m (ft) VDC
1 10BASE-T port with shielded RJ45 connector 1 100BASE-TX port with shielded RJ45 1 10BASE-FL port with BFOC connector connector 1 100BASE-FX ports with SC connector Twisted pair cable and fiber optic Ethernet cable 1 x 5-pin, pluggable 18 to 32, safety low voltage Power supply 80 typical, 100 maximum 10BASE-T 100(328) 10BASE-FL 3100 (1070) 11.5 db for 50/125 and 62.5/125 m fiber 160 typical, 190 maximum 10BASE-TX 100(328) 10BASE-FX 3100 (1070)
Link budget LED indicators
8 db for 50/125 um fiber, 11 db for 62.5/125 um fiber P1, P2 power, DA STAT 1 status and DA STAT 2 status
48190-EN.FM/5

Electrical cables
Models Cable type 490 NTW 000 pp Shielded and foil twisted pair straight-through cable m (ft) 2, 5, 12, 40, 80 (6.5,16.4, 39.4,131.2, 262.4) RJ45 (two per cable) UL, CSA 22.1 and NFPA 70 approval indicated by "U" after part number (example: 490 NTW 000 40U); Category 5 of international cabling standard EIA/TIA-568; Class D of IEC 11801 / EN50173; Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH); flame retardant of NFC32 070 #1 (C2) and CEI 322/1 490 NTC 000 pp Shielded and foil twisted pair crossed cord
Available cable length
5, 15, 40, 80 (16.4, 49.2,131.2, 262.4)
Pre-assembled connector type Agency approvals and compliance
Optical cables
Models Pre-assembled connector type Cable type Cable length m (ft) 490 NOC 000 05 MT/RJ-SC duplex Standard glass fiber optic 5 (16.4) No radiation along the cable 490 NOT 000 05 MT/RJ-ST duplex 490 NOR 000 05 MT/RJ-MT/RJ duplex
Radiation susceptibility
Bridges
Models Networks link Operating power Ports 174 CEV 200 30 Modbus Plus to Ethernet 110 / 220 VAC, auto sensing 1 Ethernet 10BASE-T (RJ45), 10BASE-2 (BNC), 10BASE-5 (AUI); 1 dual / single cable Modbus Plus Vertical panel or horizontal shelf mm (in) 122 x 229 x 248 (4.8 x 9 x 9.8) 174 CEV 300 10 Modbus to Ethernet 9 ... 30 VDC range; 12 or 24 VDC, nominal 1 RJ45 port for 10BASE-T cable
Mounting Dimensions W x H x D
DIN rail 35 x 95 x 60 (1.4 x 3.7 x 2.4)
48190-EN.FM/6
Schneider Electric
t References

References
Hubs
Description Ethernet Hub 10 Mbps, 4 10BASE-T ports Ethernet Hub 10 Mbps, 3 10BASE-T ports, 2 10BASE-FL ports Reference 499 NEH 104 10 499 NOH 105 10 499 NEH 141 00 Weight kg (lb) 0.520 (1.2) 0.900 (2) 0.520 (1.2)
499 NEH 104 10
Ethernet Hub 100 Mbps, 4 100BASE-TX ports
Switches
Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbps, 7 100BASE-TX ports Ethernet Switch 10/100 Mbps, 5 100BASE-TX ports, 2 100BASE-FX ports 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 1.450 (3.2) 1.450 (3.2
Transceivers
499 NES 171 00
Ethernet Transceiver 10 Mbps, 1 10BASE-T port, 1 10BASE-FL port Ethernet Transceiver 100 Mbps, 1 100BASE-TX port, 1 100BASE-FX port 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00 0.520 (1.2) 0.520 (1.2)
Bridges
Modbus Plus to Ethernet Bridge Modbus to Ethernet Bridge 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 300 10 4.263 (9.4) 0.500 (1.0)
Cables
499 NTR 100 10
Description Shielded and foil twisted pair cord cable Length m/ft 2/6.5 5/16.4 12/39.4 Reference 490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 80 490 NTC 000 05 490 NTC 000 15 490 NTC 000 40 490 NTC 000 80 490 NOC 000 05 490 NOT 000 05 490 NOR 000 05 Weight kg (lb)
174 CEV 300 10
40/131.2 80/262.4 Shielded and foil twisted pair crossed cord cable 5/16.4 15/49.2
490 NTW 000 pp
40/131.2 80/262.4 Fiber optic cable, MT/RJ-SC duplex connectors Fiber optic cable, MT/RJ-ST connectors 5/16.4 5/16.4 5/16.4
490 NOC 000 0p
Fiber optic cable, MT/RJ-MT/RJ connectors
Ethernet PLC Products

Description Ethernet CPU with Ethernet and Modbus ports Ethernet CPU with Ethernet and I/O bus ports Ethernet Communication Adapter MMS Ethernet CPU for twisted pair cable MMS Ethernet CPU for fiber optic cable TCP/IP Ethernet CPU with I/O scanner TCP/IP Ethernet CPU with Embedded Web Server Ethernet CPU Ethernet CPU with Embedded Web Server Characteristics : pages 48190/3 to 48190/6 Schneider Electric Premium Quantum Platform Momentum Reference 171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 960 20 170 ENT 110 00 140 NOE 511 00 140 NOE 551 00 140 NOE 771 00 140 NOE 771 10 TSX ETY 110 00 TSX ETY 110 WS Weight kg (lb)
48190-EN.FM/7
6 Contents
Concept, ProWORX and OFS softwares
Concept, ProWORX and OFS softwares

b Concept, ProWORX softwares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 6/2 to 6/7 b OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 6/8 and 6/9
Schneider Electric
6/1
Presentation, PLC hardware configuration

Concept
Presentation
Concept is a software configuration and application programming tool for the Quantum automation platform. It is a Windows-based software that can be run on a standard personal computer. The configuration task can be carried out online (with the PC connected to the Quantum CPU) or offline (PC only). Concept supports the configuration by recommending only permissible combinations, thereby preventing misconfiguration. During online operation, the configured hardware is checked immediately for validity, and illegal statements are rejected. When the connection between programming unit (PC) and Quantum CPU is established, the configured values (e.g., from the variables editor) are checked and compared with actual hardware resources. If a mismatch is detected, an error message is issued. Concept editors support five IEC programming languages: b Function block diagram (FBD) b Ladder diagram (LD) b Sequential function chart (SFC) b Instruction list (IL) b Structured text (ST) as well as Modsoft-compatible ladder logic (LL984). IEC 1131-3 compliant data types are also available. With the data type editor, custom data types can be converted to and from the IEC data types. The basic elements of the FBD programming language are functions and function blocks that can be combined to create a logical unit. The same basic elements are used in the LD programming language; additionally, LD provides contact and coil elements. The SFC programming language uses basic step, transition, connection, branch, join and jump elements. The IL and ST text programming languages use instructions, expressions, and key words. The LL984 programming language uses an instruction set and contact and coil elements. You can write your control program in logical segments. A segment can be a functional unit, such as conveyor belt control. Only one programming language is used within a given segment. You build the control program, which the automation device uses to control the process, by combining segments within one program. Within the program, IEC segments (written in FBD, LD, SFC, IL and ST) can be merged. The LL984 segments are always processed as a block by the IEC segments. Concept's sophisticated user interface uses windows and menus for easy navigation. Commands can be selected and executed quickly and easily using a mouse. Context-sensitive help is available at each editing step.
PLC hardware configuration

Variables for linking basic objects within one section are not required by the graphic programming languages (FBD, LD, SFC and LL984) since these links are created by connections. These connections are managed by the system, which eliminates any configuration effort. Other variables, such as variables for data transfers between different sections, are configured with the variables editor. With the data type editor, custom data types can be derived from existing data types.
48251-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Languages

Concept
Concept provides an editor for each programming language. These editors contain custom menus and tool bars. You can select the editor to be used as you create each program segment. In addition to the language editors, Concept provides a data type editor, a variables editor and a reference data editor. Function block diagram (FBD) With the IEC 1131-3 function block diagram language, you can combine elementary functions, elementary function blocks (EFBs) and derived function blocks (all three of which are known as FFBs) with variables in an FBD. FFBs and variables can be commented. Text can be freely placed within the graphic. Many FFBs offer an option for input extensions. Concept provides various block libraries with predefined EFBs for programming an FBD. EFBs are grouped in the libraries according to application types to facilitate the search. In the FBD editor, you can display, modify and load initial values; current values can be displayed. The CLC and CLC_PRO libraries allow you to display animated diagrams of the FFBs and a graph of the current values. For custom function blocks (DFBs), the Concept-DFB editor is used. In this editor, you can create your own function blocks from EFBs or existing DFBs. DFBs created in the FBD editor can be recalled in the LD, IL and ST editors, and DFBs created in the LD, IL and ST editors can be used in the FBD editor.
Ladder diagram (LD) With the IEC 1131-3 ladder diagram language, you can build an LD program with elementary functions, function blocks and derived function blocks (all of which are known as FFBs), along with contacts, coils and variables. FFBs, contacts, coils and variables can be commented. Text can be placed freely within the graphics. Many FFBs offer an option for input extensions. The structure of an LD segment corresponds to that of a current path for relay circuits. On its left side is a left bus bar, which corresponds to the phase (L conductor) of a current path. As with a current path, only the LD objects (contacts, coils) connected to a power supply (i.e., connected to the left bus bar) are processed in LD programming. The right bus bar, which corresponds to the neutral conductor, is not visible. However, all coils and FFB outputs are internally connected to it in order to create a current flow. The same EFB block libraries available for the FBD editor can be used in the LD editor to program a ladder diagram. In the LD editor, inital values can be displayed, modified and loaded; current values can be displayed. For the EFBs in libraries CLC and CLC_PRO, animated diagrams of the FFBs and a graph of the current values can be displayed. For custom function blocks (DFBs), the Concept-DFB editor is used. With this editor, you can create your own function blocks from EFBs or existing DFBs. DFBs created in the LD editor can be recalled in the FBD, IL and ST editors, and DFBs created in the FBD, IL and ST editors can be used in the LD editor.
48251-EN.fm/3
Languages

Concept
Sequential function chart (SFC) With the IEC 1131-3 sequential function chart (SFC) language, you can define a series of SFC objects that comprise a control sequence. Steps, transitions and jumps in the sequence can be commented. You can place text freely within graphics. You can assign any number of actions to every step. A series of monitoring functionse.g., maximum and minimum monitoring timecan be integrated into each step's characteristics. The actions can be assiged an attribute symbol (as required by IEC) to control the action's performance after it has been activatede.g., a variable can be set to remain active after exiting.
Instruction list (IL) With the IEC 1131-3 IL language, you can call entire functions and function blocks conditionally or unconditionally, execute assignments and make conditional and unconditional jumps within a program segment. IL is a text-based language, and standard Windows word processing tools can be used to generate code. The IL editor also provides several word processing commands. Keywords, separators and comments are spell-checked automatically as they are entered. Errors are highlighted in color. For custom function blocks (DFBs), the Concept-DFB editor is used. In this editor, you can create your own function blocks from EFBs or existing DFBs. DFBs created in the IL editor can be recalled in the ST, LD and FBD editors, and DFBs created in the ST, LD and FBD editors can be used in the IL editor.
Structured text (ST) With the IEC 1131-3 ST language, you can call function blocks, exectute functions and assignments and conditionally execute and repeat instructions. The ST programming environment is similar to Pascal. It is a text-based language, and Windows word processing functions can be used to enter code. The ST editor itself also provides several word processing commands. Keywords, separators, and comments are spell-checked automatically as they are entered. Errors are highlighted in color. Custom function blocks (DFBs) created with the ST editor can be called in the IL, LD and FBD editors; DFBs created in the IL, LD and FBD editors can be used in the ST editor.
48251-EN.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Data and variable editors, libraries

Concept
Data type editor The data type editor defines new derived data types. Any elementary data types and derived data types already existing in a project can be used for defining new data types. With derived data types, various block parameters can be transferred as one set. Within the program, this set is divided again into single parameters, processed, then output as either a parameter set or individual parameters. Derived data types are defined in text format, and standard Windows word processing tools can be used. The data type editor also provides several word processing commands. Variables editor The variables editor contains input options for: b The variable type (located variable, unlocated variable, constant) b The symbolic name b The data type b Direct address (explicit, if desired) b Comments b Identification as human-machine interface (HMI) variable for data exchange Reference data editor In online mode, the reference data editor displays, forces and controls variables. The editor contains the following options: b Default values for the variable b Status display for the variable b Various format definitions b The ability to isolate the variable from the process Libraries IEC Library The IEC library contains the EFBs defined in IEC 1131-3 (calculations, counters, timers, etc). Extended Library The extended library contains useful supplements to various libraries. It provides EFBs for mean value creation, maximum value selection, negation, triggering, converting, building a traverse with interpolation of the first order, edge detection and determination of the neutral range for process variables. System Library The system library contains EFBs in support of system functions. It provides EFBs for cycle time detection, utilization of various system clocks, control of SFC sections and system status display. CLC and CLC_PRO Library The CLC library is used for defining process-specific control loops. It contains control, differentiation, integration and polygon graph EFBs. The CLC_PRO library contains the same EFBs as the CLC library along with data structures. Communication Library The communication libraries of built-in function blocks provide easy integration of programs which allow communication between PLCs or HMI devices from within the PLC's application program. Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to share data, or provide data to the HMI device for display to the operator. Diagnostics Library The diagnostics library is used for troubleshooting the control program. It contains EFBs for action, reaction,interlocking, and process prerequisite diagnostics, along with signal monitoring. LIB984 Library The LIB984 library provides common function blocks used in both the 984 ladder logic editor and the IEC languages. This allows for easy transition of portions of application code from the 984LL environment to the IEC environment. Fuzzy Logic Library The fuzzy library contains EFBs for fuzzy logic. Analog I/O Library The ANA_IO library is used to process analog values.
48251-EN.fm/5
General features, references

ProWORX
The ProWORX programming software is a full-featured, Modicon PLC programming software that is compatible with any Windows platform - 3.1/95/98/NT. A few of the new ProWORX features follow: Windows environment The familiar Windows-based programming environment means you spend less time learning how to do things, and more time being productive. ProWORX uses familiar Windows features like user-defined screens, drag-and-drop, cut and paste, search, and global replace. Intuitive Register Editor A powerful analysis tool, the Data Watch Window shows you information from your plant in real-time, or logs it to disk for in-depth historical analysis later on. Easily get the data you need to make informed, effective production decisions. View and edit data in full page display, see trends and track data points against time in a spreadsheet, and monitor any combinations of discretes and analogs. I/O drawing generator Save hours of painstaking effort with ProWORX NxT's I/O Drawing Generator, which automatically creates wiring diagrams for the I/O cards defined in the Traffic Cop. Generate necessary drawings all at once or just one card at a time simply select an address the I/O card uses with the Network Editor, then click the drawing button on the Hardware Back Referencing panel. NxT displays the diagram, and if desired, saves it as an AUTOCAD-compatible .DXF file or prints it Network editor With the Network Editor, ProWORX NxT reduces development time by using the same commands and instructions for every controller. Simply cut, copy, and paste networks from one platform to any other. Real-time network status Find the controller you need fast and simplify network diagnostics with ProWORX NxT's powerful Network Scan feature. Network Scan searches your Modbus or Modbus Plus networks, then identifies and graphically displays each device found and shows its status. Advanced I/O management Ensure that the I/O card you are configuring in the software matches the one on your plant floor with Pro WORX NxT's graphical Traffic Cop. It displays I/O cards on your screen the same way they look in real life, eliminating all confusion. To place a card, just select it from the convenient drop down menu and then drag it into the controller slot you want. To save even more time, the Traffic Cop automatically associates the card's I/O points with with a block of free addresses in your controller. Once configured, manage your I/O with NxT's complete documentation tools, with references for each head, drop, rack, slot and address. And the Traffic Cop's graphical display shows you at a glance that your I/O is healthy.
References Concept software

Description Concept packages Concept S Version 2.5 License type References Weight kg
single-user license
372 SPU 471 01 V25 372 SPU 472 01 V25 372 SPU 474 01 V25 372 SPU 474 11 V25 372 SPU 474 21 V25 372 SPU 474 31 V25 372 SPU 470 01 V25
Concept M Version 2.5 single-user license Concept XL Version 2.5 single-user license three-user license 10-user license network license
Concept EFB Toolkit Version 2.5
48251-EN.fm/6
Schneider Electric

Concept and ProWORX
References (suite)
Concept upgrades Description License type References (1) Weight kg
Concept XL V. 2.2 to Concept XL V.2.5
Concept S/XS to Concept S Version 2.2 Concept M to Concept single-user license M Version 2.2 Modsoft V x.xx to single-user license Concept XL Version 2.2 Concept EFB Toolkit V single-user license x.x to V 2.2
Documentation Description
single-user license three-user license 10-user license network license single-user license
372 ESS 474 01 372 ESS 474 03 372 ESS 474 10 372 ESS 474 00 372 SPU 471 5p V22 p 372 SPU 472 5p V22 p 372 SPU 485 5p V22 p 332 SPU 470 51 V22
Number of volumes 1 3
References (1)
Concept Installation Instructions Concept User Manual
840 USE 492 0p p 840 USE 493 0p p 840 USE 494 0p p 840 USE 496 0p p 840 USE 495 01
Weight kg
13 Concept IEC Block Library Concept 984 LL Block 2 Library Concept EFB Tool User 1 Manual
ProWORX software
Description ProWORX packages ProWORX NxT Online ProWORX NxT Offline/ Online License type References (1) 372 SPU 681 01 NONL 372 SPU 680 01 NDEV 372 SPU 680 01 NSTH 372 SPU 680 01 NSTE 372 SPU 680 01 NSTW 372 SPU 610 01 NLDV 372 SPU 610 01 NLTH 372 SPU 610 01 NLTE 372 SPU 610 01 NLTW 372 SPU 684 01 NXUP 372 SPU 684 01 MSTH 372 SPU 684 01 MSTE 372 SPU 684 01 MSTW 372 SPU 684 01 NXPW 372 SPU 684 01 NPTH 372 SPU 684 01 NPTE 372 SPU 684 01 NPTW Weight kg ProWORX NxT Online/ Offline Development single-user license 372 SPU 610 01 DEV
single-user license single-user license 3-user license 10-user license 20-user license single-user license 3-user license 10-user license 20-user license single-user license 3-user license 10-user license 20-user license
ProWORX NxT Lite Offline/Online
ProWORX Upgrades Modsoft Upgrade to ProWORX NDEV
ProWORX Plus Upgrade single-user license to NxT NDEV 3-user license 10-user license 20-user license
(1) i = 1 in this position indicates english language, 2 indicates german language.
Schneider Electric
48251-EN.fm/7

Programming software ProWORX
ProWORX products
Description ProWORX packages ProWORX NxT 32 User References Weight kg
Server
372 SPU 780 01 PSEV 372 SPU 780 01 PSSV
Offline/Online Client Online Client ProWORX NxT 32 Lite Legacy Product Upgrade to NX32 Offline/Online Client Client
372 SPU 780 01 PDEV 372 SPU 781 01 PONL 372 SPU 710 01 PLDV 372 SPU 784 01 LPUP
Multiuser Incremental Addition ProWORX 32 3 Multi-user Client License 10 Multi-user Client License ProWORX 32 Lite 3 Multi-user Client License 10 Multi-user Client License Legacy Product Upgrade 3 Multi-user Client to NX32 License 10 Multi-user Client License Documentation Description ProWORX NxT Programming Software User Manual ProWORX 32 User Manual
372 SPU 780 01 SEAT
372 SPU 780 01 PSTH
372 SPU 780 01 PSTE
372 SPU 710 01 PLTH
372 SPU 710 01 PLTE
372 SPU 784 01 LPTH
372 SPU 784 01 LPTE
Language
Reference 372 SPU 680 01 NMAN
Weight kg
English French German Spanish
372 SPU 780 01 EMAN 372 SPU 780 01 FMAN 372 SPU 780 01 DMAN 372 SPU 780 01 SMAN
48251-EN.fm/8
Schneider Electric
Presentation, functions

OFS data server software
Presentation
OFS software (OPC Factory Server) uses the OPC (OLE for Process Control) standard which allows data processing applications known as Clients (supervisors, databases, spreadsheets) to access data (I/O, internal variables) in Schneider Electric PLCs (Nano, Micro, Premium, Momentum, Quantum). OFS software is a multi-PLC data server which enables several communication protocols to be used by supplying Client application programs with a set of services for accessing the control system variables. This software is aimed at two types of user in particular : p End users who wish to develop applications on a PC which will need to access PLC data. In this context, it is possible, for example, to create Client applications (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc) with access to a number of PLCs connected to the PC supporting these applications p Suppliers of control system or industrial data processing products (supervision, man-machine interfaces, etc) wishing to develop, within their standard products, their OPC Client application which will be able to access data stored in PLCs via the OPC server The OFS offer is broken down in the following way : p OPC server software receiving requests from an OPC Client and retransmitting them to the PLCs p Two programming interfaces for setting up OPC server software p Database containing PLC variable values which the OFS server must access p Drivers for communication with Modicon Telemecanique PLCs
Setup
OFS software can be integrated in control system architectures such as the one shown below :
1 PC running OFS software including the OPC server 2 PC running the Client application, which accesses the PLC data via OFS 3 Communication networks linking the PC, which supports OFS software, with the PLCs Depending on the type of use, the Client application and OFS software can be located on the same PC or on 2 different PCs 1 and 2 , linked by a TCP/IP Ethernet network4. PL7 software generates PLC variable symbol export files. These export files (.SCY Symbols) should be integrated in the OPC server. Concept variables can be accessed directly in the project (prj.file) of the Concept application. This direct link requires Concept (version 2.1) to be installed on the OFS station 1.
Reference : page 43105/3 43105-EN.FM/2

Schneider Electric
Functions reference
(continued) ,

Setup (continued)
Development of Client applications OFS software has 2 interfaces : p OPC Automation interface Particularly suitable for end users and enables the development of OPC Client applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic under Excel, but also in C++. p OPC Custom interface Used primarily by suppliers of control system or industrial communication products. It enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS software OPC Server. This interface is more suitable for software development experts so that they can integrate the Client application into their standard products. This is the most high-performance interface, in terms of access time to the data stored in the OPC Server.
OFS software services The various OFS software services enable : p Access to the Server in local or remote mode p Access to variables in the form of addresses or symbols p Reading and writing of variables to one or more PLCs present on the communication network connected to the PC supporting the OFS software. These variables can be : - system variables (OPC System Group : PLC status, diagnostics, etc) - internal or I/O variables (OPC User Group) p Use of a notification mechanism which transmits change of state values to the Client. Communication between the OPC Server and the PLC is polling p Definition of dead bands for measurement noise filtering (floating variables)
Communication with PLCs The various variables contained in the PLCs are accessed via Uni-TE and Modbus protocols using the following : p Uni-Telway bus and Fipway, Ethway, Uni-TE networks on TCP/IP as well as ISAway when using a PCX coprocessor p Modbus Plus serial link, Modbus Plus and Modbus networks on TCP/IP The various corresponding communication drivers are integrated in the OFS software (except Modbus Plus driver which is supplied with its PC Modbus Plus card). The link with PL7 or Modsoft variable symbols is created by means of export files for these variables generated by PL7 or Modsoft development software. Concept variables are accessed directly with the Concept application. In addition, the OFS Server dynamically ensures the consistency of data between the Concept databases and OPC Client applications.
Schneider Electric
43105-EN.FM/3
Reference

Reference
The OFS offer comprises : p OPC Server software, compatible with the OPC Data Access 2.0 standard p OPC Server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present) p A tool for configuring the Server on the PC p A tutorial program for setting up applications using the OPC Automation interface in Visual Basic. p A tutorial program for setting up applications using the OPC Custom interface in C++ p Drivers for connection to X-Way and Modbus networks p Online setup documentation OFS software is compatible with Windows 95/98 (with Service Pack 1 and DCOM) or Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack3) operating systems. Supplied on CD-ROM, this software operates autonomously on a PC. Nevertheless, export files for variables generated by PL7 or Modsoft development software need to be present. The direct link with Concept applications requires Concept software (version 2.1) to be installed on the same station.
Multi-PLC data server software Description Function
Target PLC
Reference
Weight kg 0.160
Enables the development of Client applications, accessing PLC data via the OFS Server
Micro/Premium Momentum Quantum
TLX CD OFS 20M
43105-EN.FM/4
Schneider Electric
7 Contents

Operator dialogue terminals selection guide . . . . pages 0372Q/2 and 0372Q/3
p
Architectures, connections to control systems . . . . . pages 36350/2 and 36350/3 Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36331/2 and 36331/3
with alphanumeric and matrix screens
Magelis display with 2-line alphanumeric screen . . . pages 36332/2 and 36336/3 Magelis terminals with alphanumeric screen
with 2 or 4 line display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36337/2 and 36337/3
Magelis display units and terminals with 8 line

matrix screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36351/2and 36351/3
Magelis terminals with graphic screen stations . . . . . pages 36352/2 and 36352/5 Magelis terminals with graphic screen with keypad
or touch-sensitive screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36353/2 and 36353/3
Magelis terminals with graphic screen with

touch-sensitive screenand keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36361/2 and 36361/3
Magelis terminals with Pentium processor . . . . . . . . pages 36363/2 and 36364/3 Magelis graphic stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36354/2 and 36354/3 Connexions to bus and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36362/2 and 36362/3 Development software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36359/2 to 36359/5 Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36358/2 and 36358/3
Schneider Electric
S0202-EN/3
Selection guide
Terminals
Magelis display units and terminals with alphanumeric screen Terminals with alphanumeric screen
Magelis display units and terminals with with matrix screen
Display Type
Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm or Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm
Capacity
2 lines of 20 characters
Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm or Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters Keypad with 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys
Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels) height 5.3 or 10.6 mm 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters Display only or Keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service key or 5 service keys
Data entry
Display only or Keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service key or 5 service keys
Keypad with 8 function keys + 9 service keys or keypad with 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
Memory capacity Application Extension using PCMCIA type II Functions Maximum number of pages
128/256 Kb Flash EPROM
256 Kb Flash EPROM
384 Kb Flash EPROM
384 Kb Flash EPROM
100/200 application pages 128/256 alarm pages 256 printout form pages (1) 40 Alphanumeric
400 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 printout form pages (1) 50
800 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 printout form pages (1)
600 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 printout form pages (1)
Variables per page Representation of variables Recipes Curves Alarm logs Realtime clock Alarm relay Communication Asynchronous serial link Downloadable protocols Buses and networks Printer link
Alphanumeric. bar chart, gauge
Depending on model Access to the PLC realtime clock No
Built-in Yes
Access to the PLC realtime clock No
RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and protocols for the following brands of PLC: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens AS-i with module at 22.5 intervals AS-i with module at 22.5 intervals RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model)
Development software Operating systems Type of terminal
XBT-L1000/L1003/L1004
Magelis
XBT-L1003/L1004 (under
Windows 95 and NT4./) Magelis
XBT-H
36332/3 (1) Depending on model
XBT-P
36336/3
XBT-E
36337/3
XBT-HM
36351/3
Pages
0372Q-fus-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Magelis terminals with graphic screen
Magelis graphic stations for operator dialogue applications with combined processing
Back-lit monochrome LCD (240 x 64 pixels) height 5.3 or 10.6 mm
4 to 8 lines 20 to 40 characters Via keypad 12 function keys 10 service keys 12 numeric keys 4 dynamic function keys
Back-lit monochrome LCD (320 x 240 pixels) or Colour LCD STN with touch-sensitive screen (320 x 240 pixels) with optimum view angle (dep. on model) 5.7"
Back-lit monochrome LCD (640 x 480 pixels) or Back-lit colour TFT LCD (640 x 480 pixels) with optimum view angle (dep. on model) 9.5" (monochrome) (XBT-F02 only) 10.4" (colour) Via touchVia keypad sensitive screen 8, 12 or 16 touch- 12 static function keys sensitive keys 10 dynamic function (XBT-FC) (1) keys 12 service keys 12 alphanumeric keys
Back-lit colour TFT LCD LCD

(640 x 480 pixels)
10.4" (colour)
Via touchsensitive screen 4 touch-sensitive keys (XBT-FC)
Via keypad 10 static function keys 8 dynamic function keys 12 service keys 12 alphanumeric keys
Via keypad 12 static function keys 10 dynamic function keys 14 service keys 15 alphanumeric keys Pointing device
External keypad connection
512 Kb Flash EPROM
8 Mb Flash EPROM (by type II PCMCIA card) 8 Mb or 16 Mb
1.6 Gb (hard disk 8 Mb or 16 Mb
800 application pages

256 alarm pages 256 printout form pages
50 to 720 application, alarm, help and

printout form pages, depending on memory card used (512 alarms max)
30 to 480 application, alarm, help and

printout form pages, depending on memory card used (512 alarms max)
Limited by hard disk capacity (maximum 1024 alarm pages)
(1) 50 Alphanumeric Depending on model Access to the PLC realtime clock No 64 Alphanumeric, bitmap, bar chart, gauge, potentiometer, selector Maximum 125 records with maximum 5000 values 16 Yes Access to the PLC realtime clock Yes 128
Alphanum., bitmap, bar chart, gauge, potentiometer, selector
32 Yes Built-in Yes
RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422

Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and protocols for the following brands of PLC: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens Uni-Telway (2), Modbus AS-i with module at Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway with optional type III PCMCIA card, Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP (depending on model) (4)
22.5 mm intervals RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model)

XBT-L1000/L1003/L1004 XBT-L1003/L1004 (under Windows 95 and NT 4./)
Parallel link
(under Windows 95 and NT 4./) Magelis
Magelis
Windows 95 (3)
XBT-PM027/10 XBT-F01/F03/FC
XBT-F02/F03/FC
TXBT-F025/F027
36351/3 36353/3 36353/3 36354/3 (2) Uni-Telway version V2 for Nano/Micro/Premium PLCs. (3) Depending on version, TXBT-F station is equipped with the Atrium PCX 57 (4) TCP/IP with Modbus protocol for XBT-F. TCP/IP with X-way protocol for TXBT-F.
Schneider Electric
0372Q-fus-EN.fm/3
Architectures, connections to control systems
Architectures, connections to control systems

Magelis operator dialogue terminals communicate with control system equipment :
Point-to-point or multidrop connection with the PLC via serial link
Nano
Quantum
/ / / /
Via serial link. Via fieldbus. In network architectures. By integration of the PLC coprocessor. / By integration into an architecture with TCP/IP network.
Micro
XBT-HM
Modbus
Uni-Telway XBT-P XBT-F
All terminals incorporate an RS 232 C, RS 422/485 asynchronous serial link as standard.. The use of a UNi-TE, Modbus or KS protocol means that communication can be set up easily with Schneider Electric PLCS : Telemecanique, Modicon, April or ALine. Third-party protocols provide connection to PLCs offered by the main market suppliers : / DF1, DH485 for Allen Bradley PLC5/SLC500 PLCs. / SNPX for General Electric Series 90 PLCs. / Sysway for Omron C200 PLCs. / AS511/3964R, MPI/PPI for Siemens Simatic S5/S7 PLCs.
Connection to PLCs via fieldbus
Premium
Fipio
TBX
TBX ATV-28 XBT-F
The addition of a type III PCMCIA communication card to XBT-F and TXBT-F terminals with graphic screen enables connection to various industrial buses : / Fipio Bus. / Modbus Plus Bus. XBT-F/XBT-F terminals with graphic screen use the bus master PLC to provide operator dialogue and interactive control of various devices connected on the bus. Several terminals with graphic screen can be connected on the same bus.
Connection to network architectures
TXBT-F XBT-F
The addition of a type III PCMCIA communication card (or a PC ISA bus card for a TXBT-F graphic station) to XBT-F and TXBT-F terminals with graphic screen means that they can be integrated in single or multi network architectures: / Fipway network. / Modbus Plus network. The following can be connected on the same network : / One terminal with graphic screen, which has a multistation PLC view. / Several terminals, which are totally independent. Each terminal is assigned to controlling specific network stations. TXBT-F graphic stations can be configured on the Intranet network, using the Monitor Client Web Supervision software option, as Client stations of a Monitor PRO supervisor.
Modbus Plus
Premium
Fipio
Micro Quantum
Momentum
XBT-F
ATV-58
50-cor_Ver6.00-EN.fm/2
Schneider Electric
Architectures, connections to control systems (continued)
Integration of the Premium PLC coprocessor in TXBT-F graphic stations TXBT-F027 (includes Atrium PCX 57 coprocessor) Graphic station TXBT-F027 is equipped with an Atrium PCX 57 10 coprocessor on one of its two ISA bus slots. This graphic station solution provides the following as standard :
Premium Extension Fipio Bus X
Premium Extension
/ PLC bus (X bus) for the

connection of Premium PLC distributed I/O racks. / Integrated Fipio bus link. / Slot for type III PCMCIA communication card (serial link, Modbus bus, Fipway or Modbus Plus network, etc.,...).
Momentum
Micro
Third-party equipment
Integration into an architecture with Ethernet TCP/IP network
TXBT-F
Automation platforms provide transparent routing of X-Way and Uni-TE messages from a TCP/IP network to an X-way network and vice versa.
Network manager
/ I/O Scanning / Uni-TE TCP/IP messaging (for
The various services offered are :
Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum + Web server
ATV-58
T-XBT, access via Ethernet TCP/IP X-Way protocol). / Modbus TCP/IP messaging (for XBT-F, access via Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus protocol) / On-board web server access. / SNMP. Please consult our catalogue n AUTC010450125EN.
Premium + Web server
Ethernet
I/O Scanning
Premium
Momentum
XBT-F
Schneider Electric
36350-cor_Ver6.00-EN.fm
General

Magelis display units and terminals with alphanumeric screen Magelis display units and terminals with matrix screen
Presentation
XBT-H XBT-P XBT-E
XBT-H/P/E display units and terminals with alphanumeric screen are used to represent messages and variables. Various keys can be used to modify variables, control the device or browse in a dialogue application. For models which have a printer output, the display units and terminals can also be used to print alarm messages and printout form pages XBT-HM/PM terminals with matrix screen can also be used to display bitmap images and animated bar chart and gauge objects.
XBT-HM XBT-PM
Operation
All Magelis display units and terminals with alphanumeric and matrix screens have the same user interface : function keys, service keys, numeric or alphanumeric keys.
Configuration
Magelis display units and terminals can be configured using the same XBT-L100/ software in a Windows environment. For terminals with alphanumeric screen, XBT-L100/ software uses the concept of pages : each page can be viewed in its entirety. A 2 or 4-line window, depending on the model, simulates what will appear on the product screen. For XBT-HM/PM terminals with matrix screen, XBT-L100G software offers up to 8 lines of 40 characters, and animated bar chart and gauge objects.
Communication
XBT-HM Automate
XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM terminals communicate with PLCs via an integrated point-to-point or multidrop serial link. The communication protocols used are those of Schneider Electric PLCs as well as those of the other main market suppliers. XBT-H/P/HM/PM terminals also communicate on the AS-i bus using a module at 22.5 intervals.
Characteristics : pages 36332/2, 36336/2, 6331_Ver8.00-EN.fm/2
36337/2 and 36351/2
References : pages 36332/3, 36336/3,
36337/3 and 36351/3

Schneider Electric
Functions, description

Magelis display units and terminals with alphanumeric screen Magelis display units and terminals with matrix screen
Functions
XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM display units and terminals have (depending on the model) function keys and service keys on the front panel. Function keys Function keys are defined for the whole application. They can be used for : - accessing a page, setting latching memory bits or toggling memory bits (ON/OFF). Service keys Service keys are the arrow keys and the control keys combined, and are used for modifying the parameters of the control system. The control keys are used to perform the following actions : ENTER Confirm a selection or entry, acknowledge an alarm. MOD Change to the mode for entering pages, passwords, fields or graphic objects. ESC Cancel an entry, suspend or stop a current action. SHIFT Access the second of the dual key functions. MENU Access a menu containing the operating functions. HOME Return to the entry point of the current menu. Example : return to the first page of the application. SYST Access the confidential mode which contains the setup functions. ALARM View the alarms. PRINT Print. The arrow keys are used to : GChange page within a menu. GMove within a page. GSelect the value of a digit. GSelect a value from a list of choices. GIncrement or decrement the value of a variable field, when used with the SHIFT key.
Description
XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM display units and terminals comprise : On the front panel : 1 A communication monitoring indicator lamp. 2 A keypad activity indicator lamp (depending on model). 3 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display. 4 Function keys with indicator lamp and re-usable labels. 5 Service keys with indicator lamps. 6 Twelve numeric keys (for XBT-P02GGGG) Twelve alphanumeric keys (09, +/-, .) associated with 3 alphabetical access keys (AZ) for XBT-E.
1 2
4 5
On the rear : 1 A plug-in terminal block for 6 24 V power supply and a connection for the alarm relay (depending on the model). 2 A 25-way female SUB-D 25 connector for connection to PLCs, FT2100 configuration terminals or PC compatibles . 3 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for the printer connection (depending on the model).
Characteristics : pages 36332/2, 36336/2,

Schneider Electric
36337/2 and 36351/2
36337/3 and 36351/3
Dimensions : page 36358/2 36331_Ver8.00-EN.fm/3
Characteristics

Magelis display units with 2-line alphanumeric screen
Type of display unit
XBT-H0 2 10 (fluorescent)
//
XBT-H811050 (LCD)
XBT-H0 1010 (Back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Degree of protection Vibrations IEC 1131-2, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 CE, UL, CSA 0+ 50 C - 40+ 70 C - 20+ 60 C IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 2 to 11.2 Hz at 1 mm; 11.2 Hz to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis
Mounting and fixing Material Enclosure Keypad, screen protection XBT-H Flush-mounted, fixed with 4 or 6 locking clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on a 1 to 6 mm thick panel) Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) 002010 022010 012 10 811050 No keys 4 function 5 service 5 service keys keys keys + 1 service keys
Keys
001010 No keys
021010 4 function keys
011010 5 service keys
Display unit Fluorescent green matrix characters (5 x 7 pixels) - 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm Voltage LCD (5 x 7 pixels) - 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels) - 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Power supply
$ 24 V not isolated
1830 V 5 % maximum 10 W
$ 24 V not isolated (during configuration) $ 24 V not isolated $ 5 V via Nano/Micro/Premium

PLC terminal port (during operation) 1.5 W 10 W
Voltage limits Ripple Consumption
XBT-H Signalling Memory
002010 022010 012 10 1 LED 6 LEDs 4 LEDs - 128 Kb Flash EPROM, (256 Kb for XBT-H012 10) - 200 application pages approx. (2 lines/page max) - 256 available alarm pages (2 lines/page max) - 256 printout form pages for XBT-H12110
811050 - 128 Kb Flash EPROM - 100 application pages approx. (2 lines/page max) - 128 available alarm pages (2 lines/page max)
001010 021010 011010 1 LED 6 LEDs 4 LEDs - 128 Kb Flash EPROM, (256 Kb for XBT-H011010) - 200 application pages approx. (2 lines/page max) - 256 available alarm pages (2 lines/page max)
Log function Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Downloadable protocol
Possibility of storing alarm pages (XBT-H012110) for print-out RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Multiple (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2) Access to the PLC realtime clock RS 232 C (XBT-H012110)
RS 232 C/RS 485 Uni-Telway (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2)
RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Multiple (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2)
Realtime clock Printer link (asynchronous serial link) Connection Power supply
Serial port Printer port
Plug-in terminal block 3 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector
References : page 36332/3 32-fus_Ver5.01-EN.fm/2
Dimensions, mounting page 36358/2

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis display units with 2-line alphanumeric screen
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)

Downloadable exchange protocol Number of keys Funct. Service Num. Supply voltage V
Language version
Reference
Weight kg
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 24 Multilingual XBT-H002010 0.600
XBT-H02 010 4 1 24 Multilingual XBT-H022010 0.600
24
Multilingual
XBT-H012010
0.600
XBT-H01
//10
With printer port, with log See page 36357/2 5 24 Multilingual XBT-H012110 0.600
Display unit with 2 lines of 20 characters (LCD)

No printer port, no log XBT-H00 010
Uni-Telway See page 36357/2
24 and 5 Multilingual via terminal port on the Nano/Micro/ Premium PLC
XBT-H811050
0.600
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)

No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 24 Multilingual XBT-H001010 0.600
24
Multilingual
XBT-H021010
0.600
24
Multilingual
XBT-H011010
0.600
Separate parts
Description Use Reference Weight kg
Development software
Under Windows 3.1 or 95, for downloading the application and protocols Connection to PLCs, configuration terminals, etc
See page 36355/5
Connecting cables
See page 36357/3
Documentation
Description Format Included in the product XBT-L1003 and XBT-L1004 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.200
Magelis users manual
A5 bound
XBT-X000//
(1) Add the following suffixes EN: English, FR: French, DE: German, ES: Spanish, 1T: Italian.

Schneider Electric
Dimensions, mounting : page 36358/2 36332-fus_Ver5.01-EN.fm
Characteristics

Magelis terminals with 2-line alphanumeric screen
Type of terminal
XBT-P0 2 10 (fluorescent)
//
XBT-P0 1 10 (back-lit LCD)
//
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Degree of protection IEC 1131-2, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 CE, UL, CSA 0+ 50 C - 40+ 70 C IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 - 20+ 60 C
Vibrations
Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 2 to 11.2 Hz at 1 mm; 11.2 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis
Mounting and fixing Material Flush-mounted, fixed with 4 or 6 locking clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on a 1 to 6 mm thick panel) Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) XBT-P012010 8 function keys + 9 service keys XBT-P022 10 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
Enclosure Keypad, screen protection
Keys
XBT-P011010 8 function keys + 9 service keys
XBT-P021 10 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
Electrical specifications
Display unit Fluorescent green matrix characters (5 x 7 pixels), 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm Voltage Voltage limits Ripple Consumption Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Power supply
$ 24 V not isolated
1830 V 5 % maximum 10 W
Operating specifications
Signalling XBT-P012010 17 LEDs
XBT-P022 10 21 LEDs
XBT-P011010 17 LEDs
XBT-P021 10 21 LEDs
Memory
- 256 Kb Flash EPROM - 400 application pages approximately (maximum 25 lines per page) - 256 available alarm pages (maximum 25 lines per page) - 256 printout form pages (XBT-P02 110 only)
Log function Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Downloadable protocol Realtime clock Printer link (asynchronous serial link) Connection Power supply
Possibility of storing alarm pages (XBT-P022110) RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Multiple (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2) Access to the PLC realtime clock RS 232 C (XBT-P022110) Plug-in terminal block 3 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector
Possibility of storing alarm pages (XBT-P021110)
RS 232 C (XBT-P021110)
Dimensions, mounting : page 36358/2

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis terminals with 2-line alphanumeric screen
Terminals with 2-line display of 20 characters (fluorescent)

Downloadable exchange protocol Number of keys Funct. Service Num. Supply voltage V
Language version
Reference
Weight kg
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 8 9 24 Multilingual XBT-P012010 0.800
XBT-P01 010 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-P022010 0.800
With printer port and log See page 36357/2 XBT-P02 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-P022110 0.800
//10
Terminals with 2-line display of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 8 9 24 Multilingual XBT-P011010 0.800
12
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBT-P021010
0.800
With printer port and log See page 36357/2 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-P021110 0.800
Separate parts
Description Development software Use Under Windows 3.1 or 95, for downloading the application and protocols Reference See page 36355/5 Weight kg
Connecting cables
Connection to PLCs, configuration terminals, etc
See page 36357/3
Documentation
Description Format Included in the product XBT-L1003 and XBT-L1004 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.200
Magelis users manual
A5 bound
XBT-X000//
(1) Add the following suffixes EN: English, FR: French, DE: German, ES: Spanish, 1T: Italian. Characteristics: page 36336/2
Schneider Electric
36336-fus_Ver5.00-EN.fm
Characteristics

Magelis terminals with alphanumeric screen with 2 or 4 line display
Type of terminal
XBT-E014 10/XBT-E016 10 (fluorescent)
XBT-E013 10/XBT-E015 10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature Operation Storage Degree of protection Vibrations IEC 1131-2, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 CE, UL, CSA 0+ 50 C - 40+ 70 C IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 2 to 11.2 Hz at 1 mm; 11.2 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis. - 20+ 60 C
Mounting and fixing Material Enclosure Keypad, screen protection Keys Function Service Alphanumeric Flush-mounted, fixed with 4 or 6 locking clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on a 1 to 6 mm thick panel) Polyphenyl oxide, 10% glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG)
24 10 12
Electrical specifications
Display unit Fluorescent green matrix characters (5 x 7 pixels) XBT-E014 10 XBT-E016 10 2 lines of 40 characters, 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm height 5 mm Voltage Voltage limits Ripple Consumption
Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels) XBT-E013 10 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm
XBT-E015 10 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm
Power supply
$ 24 V not isolated
1830 V 5 % maximum 20 W 10 W
Operating specifications
Signalling Memory 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer - 384 Kb Flash EPROM - 800 application pages approximately (maximum 25 lines per page) - 256 available alarm pages (maximum 25 lines per page) - 256 printout form pages (XBT-E01 110 only)
Log function Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Downloadable protocol Realtime clock Printer port (asynchronous serial link) Alarm relay Connection Power supply and alarm relay Serial port Printer port
Possibility of storing alarm pages RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Multiple (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2) Built-in RS 232 C (XBT-E014110/XBT-E016110) 1 N/O contact (min 1 mA/ RS 232 C (XBT-E013110/XBT-E015110)
$ 5 V, max 0.5 A/$ 24 V)
Plug-in terminal block 5 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis terminals with alphanumeric screen with 2 or 4 line display

Downloadable exchange protocol Number of keys Funct. Service Alphanum. Supply Language voltage version V Reference Weight kg
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 XBT-E014 10 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-E014010 1.000
With printer port and log See page 36357/2 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-E014110 1.000

No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-E016010 1.000
XBT-E016 10 See page 36357/2 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-E016110 1.000
With printer port and log

With printer port and log XBT-E013 10
See page 36357/2
24
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBT-E013110
1.000

With printer port and log See page 36357/2 XBT-E015 10 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBT-E015110 1.000
Separate parts
Description Development software Use Under Windows 3.1 or 95, for downloading the application and protocols Connection to PLCs, configuration terminals, etc Reference See page 36355/5 Weight kg
Connecting cables
See page 36357/3
Documentation
Description Format Included in the product Reference (1) Weight kg 0.200
Magelis A5 bound XBT-L1003 XBT-X000// users manual and XBT-L1004 (1) Add the following suffixes EN: English, FR: French, DE: German, ES: Spanish, 1T: Italian.

Schneider Electric
Characteristics

Magelis display units and terminals with 8 line matrix screen
Type of display unit
XBT-HM0 7 10 (back-lit LCD0)
//
XBT-PM027 10
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature IEC 1131-2, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 CE, UL, CSA CE, UL Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T5, CSA Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T5
Operation Storage
0+ 50 C - 20+ 60 C IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 2 to 11.2 Hz at 1 mm; 11.2 Hz to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis
Degree of protection Vibrations
Mounting and fixing Material Enclosure Keypad Screen protection Flush-mounted, fixed with 6 spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on a 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE1) Anti-UV toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Glass, 3 mm thick XBT-HM007010 XBT-HM027010 XBT-HM017 10 No keys 4 function keys 5 service keys + 1 service key
Keys
XBT-PM027 10 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys + 4 dynamic function keys
Display unit Back-lit LCD (240 x 64 pixels) - 8 lines of 40 characters (height 5.3 mm) single height - 4 lines of 20 characters (height 10.6 mm) double height, double width Voltage Voltage limits Ripple Consumption
Power supply
$ 24 V not isolated
1830 V 5 % maximum 15 W
Signalling XBT-HM007010 1 LED XBT-HM027010 6 LEDs
XBT-HM017 10 4 LEDs
XBT-PM027 10 21 LEDs - 512 Kb Flash EPROM - 800 application pages approx. (max. 8 lines per page) - 256 available alarm pages (max. 8 lines per page) - 256 printout form pages (XBT-PM027110 only)
Memory
- 384 Kb Flash EPROM - 600 application pages approx. (max. 8 lines per page) - 256 available alarm pages (max. 8 lines per page) - 256 printout form pages (XBT- HM017110 only)
Log function Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Downloadable protocols
Possibility of storing alarm pages (XBT-HM017110 and XBT-PM027110) for printout RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Multiple (see pages 36331/2 and 36357/2)
Realtime clock Printer link (asynchronous serial link) Connection Power supply
Access to the PLC realtime clock RS 232 C (XBT-HM017110 and XBT-PM027110)
Plug-in terminal block 3 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D 25 connector 9-way male SUB-D 9 connector

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis display units and terminals with 8 line matrix screen
Display units with 8-line matrix screen of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)

Downloadable exchange protocol
802942
Number of keys Funct. Service Num.
Supply voltage. V
Language version
Reference
Weight kg
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2 24 Multilingual XBT-HM007010 0.600
XBT-HM007010 4 1 24 Multilingual XBT-HM027010 0.600
802943
24
Multilingual
XBT-HM017010
0.600
With printer port, with log XBT-HM027010 See page 36357/2 5 24 Multilingual XBT-HM017110 0.600
With printer port, with log Modbus

802944
24
Multilingual
XBT-HM017010A8 (1)
0.600
Terminals with 8-line matrix screen of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)

XBT-HM017 10
Number of keys Supply Funct. Service Num. Dynam. voltage V
Language version
Reference
Weight kg
No printer port, no log See page 36357/2

105080
12
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBT-PM027010
0.600
With printer port, with log XBT-HM017010A8 See page 36357/2 12 10 12 4 24 Multilingual XBT-PM027110 0.600
Separate parts
802945
Description Development software
Use Under Windows 95 or NT 4. , for downloading the application and protocols
Reference
Weight kg
See page 36355/5
XBT-PM027 10 Connecting cables Connection to PLCs, configuration terminals, etc., See page 36357/3
Documentation
Description Magelis users manual Format A5 bound Included with product XBT-L1003 and XBT-L1004 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.200
XBT-X000
//
(1) Application preloaded at the factory for monitoring, diagnostics and adjustment of 1 to 8 ATV28/ATV58. Display unit supplied with XBT-Z908. connecting cable. (2) Add the following suffixes to the reference EN : English, FR : French, DE : German, ES : Spanish, 1T : Italian.

Schneider Electric
General

Magelis terminals with graphic screen Magelis graphic stations
Presentation
Operator dialogue terminals with graphic screen are available with 5.7" or 10.4" monochrome or colour screen, with a keypad, a touch-sensitive screen or a touchsensitive screen and keys. XBT-F graphic screen terminals are specially designed for graphic operator dialogue functions. TXBT-F graphic stations operate under Windows 95, enabling them to access other control system functions.
XBT-F01/F03
XBT-F02/F03
XBT-FC02/04
XBT-FC06/08
TXBT-F02
Operation
All Magelis graphic screen terminals have the same user interface: static and dynamic function keys, service keys, alphanumeric keys, touch-sensitive keys.
Configuration
All Magelis graphic screen terminals can be configured using the same XBT-L100 software in a Windows environment. XBT-L100 software provides graphic screen terminals with a library of animated graphic objects such as bar charts, gauges, selectors, potentiometers and trending curves. A library of bitmap symbols is also available with XBT-L100 software. The variable for animating an object can be selected directly from a list of symbols given by the PL7 or Concept software. The application program for the graphic terminals is stored on a PCMCIA memory card.
XBT-F
Communication
PLC
XBT-F and TXBT-F graphic screen terminals communicate with PLCs via an integrated point-to-point or multidrop serial link, or via a fieldbus with a type III PCMCIA card. The communication protocols are those used by Schneider Electric PLCs as well as those of the other main market suppliers. XBT-F (10.4) and TXBT-F graphic screen terminals can also be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network
PLC
TXBT-F

Schneider Electric
36352_Ver7.00-EN.fm/2
Functions

Functions
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
XBT-F and TXBT-F operator dialogue terminals with graphic screen have the following functions: Display of animated synoptic screens, control, modification of numeric and alphanumeric variables Display of a service line (status and alarm bar) with the current time Dynamic visualisation of operating data (setpoints, measurements, recipes, maintenance messages) and process errors Control via dynamic or static function keys Scaling of analogue variables Realtime and trending curves Alarm log and management of alarm groups Management of help pages, form pages, recipe pages Pages can be called up by the user or by the PLC Three levels of password Printing of form pages, date and time-stamped log and alarms Communication protocol application support in the type II PCMCIA application memory card The role of the function keys is defined using the XBT-L100 software. Modifications cannot be made during operation. Each function key can be associated with an internal bit of the PLC application.
//
Static function keys Static function keys are defined for the whole application. They can be used for: Access to a page Latching memory bits Toggling memory bits (ON/OFF)
/ / /
Static keys can be marked with re-usable labels.
Dynamic function and touch-sensitive keys Dynamic function and touch-sensitive keys are associated with a page. Their role can therefore differ from one page to another. They can perform the following functions: Access to a page Latching memory bits Toggling memory bits (ON/OFF) Access to the modification of a value Direct writing Each dynamic key and touch-sensitive key can be assigned a label or icon illustrating its function. On touch-sensitive terminals, the touch-sensitive zones function in a similar way to the dynamic keys on keypad terminals.
/ / / / /
Service keys Service keys are the arrow keys and the control keys combined, and are used for modifying the parameters of the control system. The control keys are used to perform the following actions: ENTER Confirms a selection or entry, acknowledges an alarm MOD Change to page entry, passwords, field or graphic object mode ESC Cancels an entry, suspends or stops a current action. Displays previous pages in succession. Quits the alarm display SHIFT Gives access to the second of the dual key functions MENU Gives access to a menu containing the operating functions which do not have direct access keys HOME Returns to the entry point of the current menu. Example: return to the first page of the application SYST Gives access to confidential mode which contains password protected implementation functions ALARM View the alarms PRINT Print
/ Change page within a menu / Change fields on a page / Select an object on a page / Move within a page / Select the value of a digit / Select a value from a list of choices / Increment or decrement the value of a variable field, when used with the SHIFT key / Change page (next/previous) using the SHIFT/+1 or
The arrow keys can be used to: SHIFT/-1 keys with graphic stations TXBT-F. Characteristics : page 36353/2 and 36354/2
Schneider Electric
References : page 36353/3 and 36354/3
36352_Ver7.00-EN.fm/3
Description

Front panel of XBT-F01/F02 keypad terminals

XBT-F01/F02 keypad terminals have the following on the front panel: 1 A monochrome or colour screen (5.7" or 9.5" or 10.4" depending on the model). 2 2 x 4 or 2 x 5 (depending on the model) dynamic function keys with indicator lights. 3 A communication monitoring indicator light. 4 A keypad activity indicator light. 5 2 x 5 or 2 x 6 (depending on the model) static function keys with indicator lights and re-usable labels. 6 Twelve service keys with indicator lights. 7 Twelve alphanumeric keys (09, +/-, .) associated with 3 alphabetical access keys (AZ).
Front panel of XBT-F03 touch-sensitive screen terminals

XBT-F03 touch-sensitive screen terminals have the following on the front panel: 1 A touch-sensitive colour screen (5.7" or 10.4" depending on the model). 2 A communication monitoring indicator light. 3 A tactile feedback activity indicator light. 4 An alarm indicator light.
Front panel of XBT-FC touch-sensitive screen terminals

XBT-FC touch-sensitive screen terminals have the following on the front face: 1 A touch-sensitive colour screen (5.7" or 10.4" depending on the model). 2 A communication monitoring indicator light. 3 A tactile feedback activity indicator light. 4 An alarm indicator light. 5 4, 8, 12 or 16 touch-sensitive keys (depending on the model).

Schneider Electric
36352_Ver7.00-EN.fm/4
Description (continued)

Back panel of XBT-F terminals with graphic screen

XBT-F terminals with graphic screen have the following on the back panel: 1 A plug-in screw terminal block for 24 V power supply, and alarm relay connection
2 5
2 A 25-way female SUB-D connector for connection to PLCs. 3 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for printer connection and for transferring applications from an FT2100 terminal or PC compatibles. 1 4 Two slots for PCMCIA card: - one type II for application memory support, - one type III for connection to the communication architecture (bus or network). 5 An RJ 45 connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP network (depending on the model)
Front panel of TXBT-F02 graphic keypad stations

TXBT-F02 graphic keypad stations have the following on the front panel: 1 A 10.4" colour screen. 2 2 x 5 dynamic function keys with indicator lights. 3 A communication monitoring indicator light. 4 A keypad activity indicator light. 5 Twelve static function keys with indicator lights and re-usable labels. 6 Fourteen service keys with indicator lights 7 Fifteen alphanumeric keys (09, +/-, .) associated with 3 alphabetical access keys (AZ). 8 A touch-sensitive pointing device.
Back panel of TXBT-F graphic stations

TXBT-F graphic stations have the following on the back panel: 1 A plug-in screw terminal block for 24 V power supply, and alarm relay connection.
2 A 26-way female SUB-D high density connector for PLC connection, with a T CCX CB 10 cable (length 0.2 m) supplied, fitted with one 26-way male SUB-D connector and one 25-way female SUB-D connector. 3 A 25-way female SUB-D connector for connection of a parallel printer or external CD drive. 4 Two slots for PCMCIA card: - one type II (1), - one type III. 5 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connecting an FT2100 configuration terminal or a PC compatible. 6 An 8-way mini-DIN socket for connecting a PS/2 compatible external keyboard. 7 Two standard IBM PC slots (ISA bus) 2/3 format (depending on model) (1) The operator dialogue application memory can be supported by a PCMCIA type II card (10 Mb maximum) or by the internal hard disk (2.1 Gb). Characteristics : page 36354/2
Schneider Electric
36352_Ver7.00-EN.fm/5
Characteristics

Magelis Terminals with graphic screen with keypad or touch-sensitive screen
Type of terminal
XBT-F011
XBT-F032
XBT-F023
XBT-F024
XBT-F034
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Relative humidity Degree of protection Front panel Rear panel Shock resistance Vibrations Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic interference Electrical interference IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 61000-4-4 level 3, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, UL 508, CSA CE, UL Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A, CSA Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A 0+ 45 C - 20+ 60 C 085 % (without condensation) IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27, semi-sinusoidal pulse 11 ms, 15 gn in the 3 axes Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm; 57 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3, 10 V/m Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4, level 3
Mounting and fixing Material Screen protection Front frame Keypad Enclosure Dynamic keys Static keys Service keys Alphanumeric keys Flush-mounted, fixed with spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) 10 spring clips 8 spring clips 12 spring clips 10 spring clips 3 mm thick glass 1.8 mm thick glass + 3 mm thick glass 1.8 mm thick glass + 0.2 mm thick polyester 0.2 mm thick polyester Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) 8 (with LED) 10 (with LED) 10 (with LED and re-usable 12 (with LED and re-usable labels) labels) 12 12 12 + 3 for alphabetical 12 + 3 for alphabetical access access
Keys
LCD screen Type 5.7" monochrome back-lit with 16 levels of grey 5.7" STN 256 colours, back-lit 9.5" mono- 10.4" TFT with resistive matrix tactile chrome 256 colours feedback (8 x 6 cells) back-lit with 16 levels of grey 640 x 480 pixels 180 150 200 35 20 30 60 10 20 50 30 45 50 30 45 10.4" TFT 256 colours with resistive matrix tactile feedback (13 x 10 cells)
Optimum view angle (degrees) Supply
Definition Luminescence (cd/m2) Vertical top Vertical bottom Vertical right Vertical left Voltage Limits Protection
Consumption
320 x 240 pixels 130 20 20 30 30 24 V not isolated 1830 V, including maximum 5 % ripple, microbreaks 1 ms maximum Against polarity inversion and overloads 35 W
200 30 20 45 45
Signalling Operating system/Processor Dynamic RAM memory Application memory Maximum Dialogue application number of pages Curves Recipes PLC/configuration PC Printer Bus or network Realtime clock Alarm relay Connection Power supply and PLC Printer/configuration PC 1 communication monitoring LED and 1 keypad activity (or tactile feedback activity) LED and 11 LEDs associated with service and alphanumeric keys Magelis/80386 2.5 Mb On type II PCMCIA card : 8 Mb (supplied), or 16 Mb 50 to 450 application, alarm, help, form and recipe 30 to 300 application, alarm, help, form and recipe pages depending on the memory card used pages depending on the memory card used (512 alarms max, 256 form max) (512 alarms max, 256 form max) 16 realtime curves 16 realtime curves Maximum 5000 parameter values in a maximum of 125 recipe records 19200 baud RS 232 C/RS 422/485 isolated serial link, downloadable communication protocols (see page 36352/2 and page 36357/2) RS 232 C serial link Slot for type III PCMCIA type III communication card depending on the model; communication protocols (see page 36357/2) Access to the PLC realtime clock 1 volt-free N/O contact, max 0.5 A / 24 V Plug-in terminal block, 5 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector
Connections
$"

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis Terminals with graphic screen with keypad or touch-sensitive screen
Terminals with keypad

802963
Screen type and size
Supply voltage V
Type III slot for PCMCIA communication card No
Reference
Weight kg
See page 36357/2
Monochrome 5.7"
24
XBT-F011110
1.800
Yes
XBT-F011310
1.800
XBT-F024 10
Monochrome 9.5"
24
No
XBT-F023110
2.700
Yes
XBT-F023310
2.700
Colour 10.4"
24
No
XBT-F024110
2.700
Yes
XBT-F024310
2.700
Terminals with touch-sensitive screen

802964
See page 36357/2
Colour 5.7"
24
No
XBT-F032110
1.600
XBT-F034 10
Yes
XBT-F032310
1.600
Colour 10.4"
24
No
XBT-F034110
2.400
Yes
XBT-F034310
2.400

Schneider Electric
Dimensions : page 36358/3 36353-fus_Ver6.10-EN.fm
Characteristics

Magelis terminals with graphic screen with touch-sensitive screen and keys
Type of terminal
XBT-FC022310
XBT-FC044310
XBT-FC084310
XBT-FC064310
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Relative humidity Degree of protection Front panel Back panel Shock resistance Vibrations Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic interference Electrical interference IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 61000-4-4 level 3, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, UL 508, CSA CE, UL Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A, CSA Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A 0+ 45 C - 20+ 60 C 085 % (without condensation) IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27; semi-sinusoidal pulse 11 ms, 15 gn in the 3 axes Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm; 57 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3, 10 V/m Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4, level 3
Mounting and fixing Flush-mounted, fixed with spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) 8 spring clips 10 spring clips Material Screen protection Front frame Keypad Enclosure 1.8 mm thick glass + 0.2 mm thick polyester Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) 4 in one row 8 in one row 16 in two rows 12 in two columns
Touch-sensitive keys
LCD screen 5.7" STN 256 colours, back-lit with resistive matrix tactile feedback (8 x 4 cells) Definition 320 x 240 pixels Luminescence (cd/m2) 180 Optimum view Vertical top 35 angle Vertical bottom 60 (degrees) Vertical right 50 Vertical left 50 Supply Voltage Limits Protection Type 10.4" TFT 256 colours with resistive matrix tactile feedback (13 x 8 cells) (13 x 6 cells) (9 x 10 cells) 640 x 480 pixels 200 30 20 45 45 200 30 20 45 45 200 30 20 45 45
$ 24 V not isolated
35 W
1830 V, including 5% maximum ripple, microbreaks 1 ms maximum Against polarity inversion and overloads
Consumption
Signalling Operating system/Processor Dynamic RAM memory Application memory Dialogue Maximum application no. of pages 1 communication monitoring LED, 1 keypad activity LED and 1 alarm LED Magelis/80386 2.5 Mb On type II PCMCIA card: 8 Mb (supplied) or 16 Mb For XBT-FC022310 : For XBT-FC044310, XBT-FC084310, XBT-FC064310 : - 50 to 450 application, alarm, help, form and recipe - 30 to 300 application, alarm, help, form and recipe pages depending on the memory card used (max 512 pages depending on the memory card used (max 512 alarms, max. 256 form) alarms, max. 256 form) 16 realtime curves 16 realtime curves Maximum 5000 parameter values in a maximum of 125 recipe records 19200 baud RS 232 C/RS 422/485 isolated serial link, downloadable communication protocols (see page 36352/2 and page 36357/2) RS 232 C serial link Slot for type III PCMCIA communication card, communication protocols (see page 36357/2) Access to the PLC realtime clock 1 volt-free N/O contact, max. 0.5 A / 24 V Plug-in terminal block, 5 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector
Curves Recipes Connections PLC/ Configuration PLC Printer Bus or network
Realtime clock Alarm relay Connection Power supply and alarm relay PLC Printer/configuration PLC
$"

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis terminals with graphic screen with touch-sensitive screen and keys
Terminals with touch-sensitive screen and keys

811955
Screen type and size Colour 5.7"
Supply voltage V
Number of touch-sensitive keys 4
Reference
Weight kg
See page 36357/2
24
XBT-FC022310
1.600
XBT-FC022310
802992
Colour 10.4"
24
XBT-FC044310
2.400
XBT-FC044310
802994
16
XBT-FC084310
2.400
XBT-FC084310
802993
12
XBT-FC064310
2.400
XBT-FC064310

Schneider Electric
Characteristics

Magelis terminals with graphic screen with keypad or with touch-sensitive screen with Pentium processor
Type of terminal
XBT-F024
XBT-F034
Environment
Conforming to standards Operation Storage Relative humidity Degree of protection Front panel Back panel Shock resistance Vibrations Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic interference Electrical interference Approvals Temperature IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 61000-4-4 level 3, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, UL 508, CSA CE, UL Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A, CSA Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A 0+ 45 C - 20+ 60 C 085 % (without condensation) IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27; semi-sinusoidal pulse 11 ms, 15 gn in the 3 axes Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm; 57 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3, 10 V/m Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4, level 3
Mounting and fixing Flush-mounted, fixed with spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) 12 spring clips 10 spring clips 3 mm thick glass Polyphenyl oxide, 10% glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Polyphenyl oxide, 10% glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) 10 (with LED) 12 (with LED and re-usable labels) 12 12 + 3 for alphabetical access 1.8 mm thick glass + 0.2 mm thick polyester
Material
Screen protection Front frame Keypad Enclosure Dynamic keys Static keys Service keys Alphpanumeric keys
Keys
LCD screen Type 10.4" TFT 256 colours 10.4" TFT 256 colours with resistive matrix tactile feedback (13 x 10 cells)
Definition Luminescence (cd/m2) Optimum view Vertical top angle Vertical bottom (degrees) Vertical right Vertical left Supply Voltage Limits Protection Consumption
640 x 480 pixels 250 250 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 24 V not isolated 1830 V, including 5% maximum ripple, microbreaks 1 ms maximum Against polarity inversion and overloads 35 W
Signalling 1 communication monitoring LED and 1 keypad (or tactile feedback) activity monitoring LED and 11 LEDs associated with the service and alphanumeric keys Operating system/Processor Magelis/Pentium Dynamic RAM memory 32 Mb On type II PCMCIA type II card: 8 Mb (supplied) or 16 Mb Application memory Dialogue Maximum no. of pages 30 to 300 application, alarm, help, form and recipe pages depending on the memory card used (max 512 alarms, application max 256 form) Curves 16 realtime curves Recipes Maximum 5000 parameter values in a maximum of 125 recipe records Connections PLC/configuration PC 115200 baud RS 232 C/RS 422/485 isolated serial link, downloadable communication protocols (see page 36352/2 and page 36357/2) RS 232 C serial link Printer Bus or network Slot for type III PCMCIA communication card, communication protocols (see page 36357/2). RJ 45 Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP connector, depending on model Built-in and backed-up Realtime clock Alarm relay 1 volt-free N/O contact, max. 0.5 A / 24 V Connection Power supply and Plug-in terminal block, 5 screw terminal (at intervals of 5.08 mm) alarm relay Max. clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 PLC 25-way female SUB-D connector Printer/configuration 9-way male SUB-D connector PLC
$"

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis terminals with graphic screen with keypad or with touch-sensitive screen with Pentium processor
Terminals with keypad

Downloadable exchange protocol See page 36357/2
802963
Supply voltage V
RJ 45 Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP connector No
Reference
Weight kg
24
XBT-F024510
2.700
XBT-F024 10 Yes XBT-F024610 2.700
Terminals with touch-sensitive screen

802964
Screen type and size
Supply voltage V
Reference
Weight kg
See page 36357/2
Colour 10.4"
24
XBT-F034510
2.400
XBT-F034 10 Yes XBT-F034610 2.400

Schneider Electric
Characteristics

Magelis Terminals with graphic screen with touch-sensitive screen and keys with Pentium processor
Type of terminal
XBT-FC044
XBT-FC084
XBT-FC064
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Relative humidity Degree of protection Front panel Back panel Shock resistance Vibrations Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic interference Electrical interference IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2 level 3, IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 61000-4-4 level 3, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, UL 508, CSA CE, UL Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A, CSA Class 1, Div 2. Group A, B, C, D-T4A 0+ 45 C - 20+ 60 C 085 % (without condensation) IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27; semi-sinusoidal pulse 11 ms, 15 gn in the 3 axes Conforming to IEC 68-2-6; 10 to 57 Hz at 0.075 mm; 57 to 150 Hz 1 g for 3 hours per axis Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3, 10 V/m Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4, level 3
Mounting and fixing Material Flush-mounted, fixed with spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) 10 spring clips 1.8 mm thick glass + 0.2 mm thick polyester Polyphenyl oxide, 10% glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Polyphenyl oxide, 10% glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) 8 on 1 row 16 on 2 rows 12 on 2 columns
Screen protection Front frame Keypad Enclosure
Touch-sensitive keys
LCD screen Type 10.4" TFT 256 colours with resistive matrix tactile feedback (13 x 8 cells) (13 x 6 cells) Definition 640 x 480 pixels Luminescence (cd/m2) 250 250 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 (9 x 10 cells) 250 80 80 80 80
Optimum view Vertical top angle Vertical bottom (degrees) Vertical right Vertical left Supply Voltage Limits Protection
$ 24 V not isolated
35 W
1830 V, including 5% maximum ripple, microbreaks 1 ms maximum Against polarity inversion and overloads
Consumption
Signalling Operating system/Processor Dynamic RAM memory Application memory Dialogue application Maximum no. of pages Curves Recipes PLC/configuration PC Printer Bus or network Realtime clock Alarm relay Connection Power supply and alarm relay PLC Printer/configuration PC 1 communication monitoring LED, 1 tactile feedback activity LED and 1 alarm LED Magelis/Pentium 32 Mb On type II PCMCIA card: 8 Mb (supplied) or 16 Mb 30 to 300 application, alarm, help, form and recipe pages depending on the memory card used (max 512 alarms, max 256 form) 16 realtime curves Maximum 5000 parameter values in a maximum of 125 recipe records 115200 baud RS 232 C/RS 422/485 isolated serial link, downloadable communication protocols (see page 36352/2 and page 36357/2) RS 232 C serial link Slot for type III PCMCIA communication card, communication protocols (see page 36357/2) RJ 45 Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP connector, depending on model Built-in and backed-up 1 volt-free N/O contact, max. 0.5 A / 24 V Plug-in terminal block, 5 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2 25-way female SUB-D connector 9-way male SUB-D connector
Connections
$"

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis Terminals with graphic screen with touch-sensitive screen and keys with Pentium processor
Terminals with touch-sensitive screen and keys

802992
Supply voltage V
Number of touchsensitive keys 8
Reference
Weight kg
See page 36357/2
24
XBT-FC044510
2.400
XBT-FC044/10 Yes XBT-FC044610 2.400
802994
16
No
XBT-FC084510
2.400
XBT-FC084/10
Yes
XBT-FC084610
2.400
802993
12
No
XBT-FC064510
2.400
XBT-FC064/10
Yes
XBT-FC064610
2.400

Schneider Electric
Characteristics

Magelis graphic Stations
Type of graphic screen
T XBT F0245
T XBT F0247
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals Temperature Operation Storage Relative humidity Degree of Front panel protection Rear panel Shock resistance IEC 1131-2, IEC 801-2 level 3, IEC 801-3 and IEC 801-4 level 3, IEC 68-2-6, IEC 68-2-27, UL 508, CSA CE, UL, CSA 0+ 45 C - 20+ 60 C 085 % (without condensation) IP 65, conforming to IEC 529, Nema 4 IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27; semi-sinusoidal pulse 11 ms, 15 gn on the 3 axes
Flush-mounted, fixed with spring clips (supplied) pressure-mounted (on 1.6 to 6 mm thick panel) Mounting and fixing Material Front panel Keypad Rear enclosure Dynamic keys Static keys Service keys Alphanumeric keys 12 spring clips Polyphenyl oxide, 10 % glass fibre (PPO GFN1 SE 1) Anti-UV treated toughened polyester (Autoflex EB AG) Galvanized steel sheet 10 (with LED) 12 (with LED and re-usable labels) 14 15 + 3 for alphabetical access Yes, tactile keypad
Keys
Pointing device
LCD screen Supply Voltage Limits Protection ISA bus extension Consumption Type Definition 10.4" TFT 256 colours, back-lit 640 x 480 pixels
$ 24 V not isolated
1830 V, including 5 % maximum ripple, microbreaks 1 ms maximum Against polarity inversion and overloads Maximum available on 12 V : 1.2 A, on 5 V : 2 A Maximum available on 12 V : 0.65 A, on 5 V : 2 A 80 W 87 W
Signalling Processor Internal hard disk Operating system Dynamic RAM memory Application memory Dialogue application Maximum no. of pages Curves Adjustment OLE server Software extension Supervision Connections PLC Configuration PC Printer External keyboard Bus or network ISA bus cards Realtime clock Alarm relay Connection Power supply and alarm relay PLC Configuration PC Printer External keyboard 1 communication monitoring LED, 1 keypad activity LED and 11 LEDs associated with service and alphanumeric keys 80486 DX5 at 133 MHz 1.6 Gb Windows 95 installed on the hard disk Windows 95 and PL7 Pro installed on the hard disk (1) 32 Mb as standard and up to 64 Mb with extension On hard disk or type II PCMCIA card of 4, 8 or 10 Mb Application, alarm, help, and recipe pages limited by hard disk capacity Maximum 1024 alarm pages 16 realtime curves, 16 trending curves General screens with 4 front corrector panels, supervision and adjustment screens Interface with third-party software (Visual Basic, Excel, etc.) Monitor Web Client via Intranet/Ethernet TCP/IP X-Way RS 232 C/RS 422/485 isolated serial link, downloadable communication protocols (see page 36357/2) RS 232 C serial link, not isolated Parallel link PS/2 compatible link Slot for type II or III PCMCIA communication card, communication protocols (see Schneider Electric software pack page 36355/5) Two 2/3 format slots available One slot equipped with Atrium coprocessor T PCX 57 3512M, one 2/3 format slot available Built-in and backed-up 1 volt-free N/O contact, max 0.5 A / 24 V
$"
Plug-in terminal block, 5 screw terminals (at intervals of 5.08 mm) Max. clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2 High-density 26-way female SUB-D connector and T CCX CB 10 002 cable with 25-way female SUB-D connector (PLC side) 9-way male SUB-D connector 25-way female SUB-D connector 8-way mini-DIN connector (1) PL7 Pro : design and setting-up software.

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis graphic Stations
Graphic stations with keypad

892966
Supply voltage V
Number of ISA bus slots (2/3 format) 2 available
Reference (1) T XBT F024510G
Weight kg 5.500
See page 36355/5
24
1 equipped with Atrium coprocessor T PCX 57 3512M 1 available (2) Spare parts Description XBT-L development software
T XBT F024710G
5.810
T XBT F02/10/
Use Under Windows 95 or NT 4. , for downloading the application and protocols
Reference
/ / /
Weight kg
See page 36355/5
PL7 Pro runtime software Monitor Web Client supervision software extension
Under Windows 95 or NT 4. , Please consult our catalogue for TSX Premium application n AUTCO10450125EN adjustments, diagnostics and operation Under Windows 95 or NT 4. , for using graphic stations as Client stations of a Monitor Pro supervisor Please consult our catalogue n AUTCO10450125EN
Type II PCMCIA memory cards Type III PCMCIA communication cards
Application memory
See page 36357/2
Connection to buses and industrial networks
See page 36357/2 and 36060/3
Dynamic RAM memory extensions
16 Mb 32 Mb
On system card, 1 slot available for memory extension On system card, 1 slot available for memory extension For connecting graphic stations to the TCP/IP Ethernet Serial link, Uni-Telway bus configuration terminal, printer, etc... Labels for function keys
T FTX RAM 516 T FTX RAM 532
0.160 0.160
TCP/IP Ethernet and X-way network connection module Connecting cables
Please consult our catalogue n AUTCO10450125EN See page 36357/3
Sheets of labels
See page 36357/2
Documentation Description
Manual format A5 bound
Included with product T XBT F0
Language
Reference
Users manual for TXBT graphic stations (3)
///10E ///10F
Weight kg 0.500
English
T XBT DM00E
T XBT F0
French
T XBT DM00F
0.500
(1) Cable T CCX CB 10 002 (length 0.2 m, fitted with one 25-way and one 26-way SUB-D connectors) included as standard. Add suffix E for product supplied with an English version of Windows 95 and and English documentation. Add suffix F for product supplied with an French version of Windows 95 and and French documentation. (2) Product supplied with PL7 Pro software. (3) For documentation in German, Spanish or Italian, Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schneider Electric
Presentation of XBT-L1003/L1004 software

XBT-L1003/L1004 development software is used with the whole range of Magelis terminals to create operator dialogue applications designed for controlling automated systems. XBT-L1003/L1004 software runs on PC compatibles equipped with Windows 95 or NT 4./ operating software. Applications created using XBT-L1003/L1004 software are independent of the protocol used; it is possible to use the same operator dialogue application with all the different PLCs offered by the main market suppliers.
Configuration
XBT-L1003/L1004 software is the only configuration software package for the Magelis range.
/ / / / /
It is used to create various types of page easily : Application pages (can be interlinked) Alarm pages Help pages Recipe pages Etc They can contain all sorts of variables and graphic objects, which are either predefined in the XBT-L1003/L1004 software, or created using other applications and then imported (bitmap format, etc). Various properties can be assigned to them : min-max limits, colour, movement, weighting, etc. XBT-L1003/L1004 software can be used to configure the function keys to activate commands on the machine or call application pages. It can also be used on the graphic terminals to import the PL7 or Concept PLC symbols database. Sophisticated diagnostic functions are available on the TXBT-F graphic stations.
Main toolbar
Page Information window
Graphic toolbar Page Tree Structure window
References : page 36359/5 6359_Ver4.00-EN.fm/2

Schneider Electric
XBT-L1003/L1004 software functions

Simulation on PC compatible
XBT-L1003/L1004 software offers the option of controlling all your operator dialogue applications from the design office without the use of graphic terminals and PLCs. The following can be tested using the simulation program and the keyboard on a PC compatible :
/ / / /
Navigation between pages Entry of variables Display of variables Simulation of an alarm
Using the function keys

The operator terminals and graphic stations have two types of function key : static keys and soft keys. 1 Static keys These are defined for the whole application. They may have the following functions : - page access - latching memory bits - toggling memory bits (ON/OFF)
2 Dynamic keys These are associated with one page. Their role can be reassigned or changed from one page to another. They may have the following functions : - page access - latching memory bits - toggling memory bits (ON/OFF) - positioning on a data entry field A label (bitmap image) is assigned to each key which may vary from page to page.
On touch-sensitive terminals, the touch-sensitive zones access the same functions as dynamic keys on keypad terminals.

Schneider Electric
36359_Ver4.00-EN.fm/3
XBT-L1003/L1004 Quantum automation platform software functions (continued) Development software
Screen windows
XBT-L1003/L1004 software is used to design page contents in WYSIWYG format (What You See Is What You Get) : anything created using the software is displayed in exactly the same way on the operator dialogue terminal screen. To assist the designer, the software offers a display unit or a virtual screen depending on the type of terminal.
XBT-H/P
XBT-E
XBT-HM
XBT-F and TXBT-F
Model pages (1)

Model pages, created by the designer, are pages whose graphic format (text, images or static objects) applies to all other pages in the same family. There are three types of model page : / Application / Alarm / Help
Alarm pages
Alarm pages indicate any faults in the process. The advantage of alarm pages lies in their event-triggered display : / During operation - When a fault occurs, it is often the consequence of other faults. The priority levels enable the terminal to display the most important fault, the one presenting the highest risk to the process. - The occurrence of any fault is time and date stamped. / During maintenance operations - The terminal memorises the faults in sequence (log) making it easy to find the cause of the fault.
Help pages and help windows (1)

Help pages and windows can be associated with application or alarm pages. Help windows can be associated with any variable field.
(1) Available with XBT-F and TXBT-F graphic terminals.

Schneider Electric
References

Multilingual software packages designed for PC compatibles (with a minimum of a 486 processor, 66 MHz, 30 Mb free space on the hard disk and 8 Mb RAM memory with Windows 95 operating system or 16 Mb RAM memory with Windows NT 4./ operating system). They are supplied with documentation for alphanumeric and graphic terminals, the XBT-Z915 cable, XBT-Z962 25-way/9-way connection interface and the following Schneider Electric communication protocols : Uni-TE, Fipio, Fipway, Modbus, Jbus, Modbus Plus, KS.
Description
Compatibility
Operating system
Support
Documentation English
Reference
Weight kg 1.500
Magelis XBT-H/P/E/HM Windows 95, CD-ROM configuration (1) XBT-F, T XBT F Windows NT Extented XBT-F, T XBT F Windows 95, CD-ROM function pack (2) Windows NT Communication on buses and networks Type of protocol Compatibility Support AS-i Modbus Plus Fipio/Fipway
XBT-L1003E
Multilingual
T XBT LDIAG CDM
0,500
Reference
Weight kg 0,300 0.110 -
XBT-L1003F
XBT-H/P/HM XBT-F/T XBT F XBT-F/T XBT F
Module at 22.5 intervals Type III PCMCIA Type III PCMCIA
XBT-ZA994 TSX MBP 100 See page 36360/2
Type II PCMCIA memory cards Size Compatibility
Maximum no. of pages XBT-F01 XBT-F02/F03 T XBTF 350 720 230 480
Reference
Weight kg
8 Mb 16 Mb
XBT-F(3)/T XBT F XBT-F/T XBT F
XBT-MEM08 XBT-MEM16 Reference XBT-Z968 XBT-Z9681 XBT-Z918
0.100 0.100 Weight kg 0.180 0.340 0.230
Cables for direct connection of Magelis terminals to PLCs (1) Type of PLC to be Type of Physical link Protocol Length connected connector XBT-MEM0/ Nano, Micro, Premium 8-way female mini-DIN terminal port RS 485 Uni-Telway (V1/V2) 2.5 m 5m RS 485 Uni-Telway (V1/V2) Modbus 2.5 m
Premium with 25-way female TSX SCY 2160/ SUB-D Quantum 9-way male SUB-D
RS 232
2.5 m
XBT-Z9710
0.210
Cables for bus and network connection (1) Type of Tap-off unit Type of connector bus/networks AS-i Uni-Telway XBT-ZA994 TSX SCA 62 15-way femaleSUB-D subscriber sock. TSX P ACC 01 8-way female mini-DIN cable connector -
Length 2.5 m 1.8 m 2.5 m 5m
Reference XBT-Z9702 XBT-Z908 XBT-Z968 XBT-Z9681
Weight) kg 0.200 0.240 0.180 0.340
Fipio/Fipway/Modbus Plus
See pages 36360/3 and 36362/3 Reference
Weight kg
Magelis terminal accessories (1) Description Number of Use sheets Sheets of grey/blue re-usable labels 1
XBT-H02/010 XBL-YH4 0.100 XBT-P01/010 XBL-YP8 0.100 XBT-P02//10 XBL-YP12 0.100 XBT-E XBL-YE24 0.100 XBT-HM XBL-YHM4 0.100 XBT-F01 XBL-YF10 0.100 XBT-F02/TXBT-F02 XBL-YF12 0.100 (1) For other accessories, please consult our catalogue n 086177. (2) This software extension gives access to the following functions: dynamic link between XBT-L1000 and PL7/Concept data bases; remote downloading of an XBT-F function on Uni-Telway, Fipway or Modbus Plus; Diag Viewer function on XBT-F/T XBT F and Premium PLC, see our catalogue n AUTC010450125EN. (3) 8 Mb PCMCIA card supplied with the XBT-F terminal.
Schneider Electric
36359_Ver4.00-EN.fm/5
Connections

Magelis terminals with graphic screen and Magelis graphic stations
Connection to Modbus Plus network
XBT-F TXBT-F 4
5 Modbus Plus 3 2 2 4 5 1
5 Modbus Plus
2
4 5
6 2
Micro
1 2 3 4 5 6
Premium
Quantum
490 NAA 271 0/ : trunk cable. 990 NAD 230 00 : IP 20 T-junction box. AS MBKT 185 : line terminator to be placed at each segment end. TSX MBP 100 : PCMCIA card, Modbus Plus. TSX MBP CE 0/0 : tap-off cable. 990 NAD 211 /0 : tap-off cable.
Cabling system
2 3 3 3 5
4 1
1
1 TSX MBP 100 : Modbus Plus PCMCIA card for type III slot on Micro or Premium PLCs. 2 170 MCI 020/021 : tap-off cable fitted with an RJ 45 type connector at each end (basic T interface). Lengths : 0.25, 0.75, 3 or 10 m. 3 170 XTS 020 00 : IP 20 T-junction, provides tap-off for the Modbus Plus cable (cable equipped with RJ 45 type connector at each end). Has a 9-way SUB-D connector for connection of the equipment. 4 TSX MBP CE 002 : tap-off cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped with a miniature 20-way connector on the PCMCIA side and a 9-way SUB-D type connector on the network side. Can be used as an extension for cable 990 NAD 211 10/30. Length: 0.2 m. 5 170 XTS 021 00 : set of 2 line terminators (impedance matching) for T-junction 170 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each segment end

Schneider Electric
References

Magelis terminals with graphic screen and Magelis graphic stations
Modbus Plus connection cables and accessories

Description
802989
Use XBT-F, TXBT-F
Reference TSX MBP 100
Weight kg 0.110
Modbus Plus PCMCIA card
TSX MBP 100
Modbus Plus T-junction box
IP 20 T-junction box
990 NAD 230 00
0.230
Line terminator (sold in lots of 2)
AS MBKT 185
Connection cables Description Use From Modbus Plus trunk cables Junction box
To Junction box
Length m 30
Reference
Weight kg
490 NAA 271 01
150
490 NAA 271 02
300
490 NAA 271 03
450
490 NAA 271 04
1500
490 NAA 271 06
802990
Tap-off cables
TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA card
990 NAD 230 00 junction box
TSX MBP CE 030
0.340
TSX MBP CE 060
0.530
TSX MBP CE 0/0
TSX MBP 100 Tap-off cable PCMCIA card with 9-way male (miniature SUB-D connector connector) (Sold in lots of 10) Quantum PLC 990 NAD 230 00 junction box
0.2
TSX MBP CE 002
2.4
990 NAD 211 10
0.530
990 NAD 211 30
0.530

Schneider Electric
36362_Ver1.00-EN.fm/3
Display units and terminals XBT-H Cut-out
XBT-P/PM Cut-out
50
12,35 6,2 7
183,8
5,85 6,2 7,1 102 (1) 90,50,4
10
234,5
55,4 8,5
133,3
(1) a
6,2
202 184,50,4
12,5
253 2350,4
XBT-P 152 XBT-PM 155
a (1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min. XBT-E Cut-out
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min. XBT-HM Cut-out
58
19 7 7
264
5,8 7,1 (1)
190,4
30 93,4 5,8
111,3
57,7
5,8
1830,4
182,5
202,5
(1) 99,20,4
20 57,7
12,1
202 190,90,4
13
292 2650,4
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min.
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min.
Characteristics : pages 36332/2, 36336/2, 6358_Ver4.00-EN.fm/2
36337/2 and 36351/2
36337/3 and 36351/3

Schneider Electric
1340,4
89,6
Terminals with graphic screen XBT-F011/10 Cut-out
XBT-F032/10/FC022 Cut-out
6 81 6
208,3
6
85,6
5,75
185,5
5,75
5,75
135,5
2430,4
242,3
265
147
(1)
(1)
5,75
197 186,2 0,4
16,7
220,3 2090,4
XBT-F032 7 XBT-FC022 11
a (1)r : 3.5 max, 2 min. XBT-F023/F024 Cut-out
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min. XBT-F034/FC0/4 Cut-out
5,85 5,85 84
284,3
5,85
5,85 84
(1)
210,3 5,85
284,3
5,85
3090,4
308,3
5,85
a
7 17,85 296 2850,4
296 284,9 0,4
a (1)r : 3.5 max, 2 min. Graphic stations T XBT F0245/F0247 Cut-out
XBT-F034 7
XBT-FC0/4 11
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min.
(2) 158,5 (2) 135,2 102,6 6 (1) 308,70,4 308 332 6 284 6
4,25
296 284,70,4
(1) r : 3.5 max, 2 min. (2) TXBT-F0244 (ISA model) only Characteristics : pages 36353/2, 36361/2 &
Schneider Electric
36354/2
References : pages 36353/3, 36361/3 &
36354/3
36358_Ver4.00-EN.fm/3
210,9 0,4
(1)
222
332
136,2 0,4
8 Contents
Supervision
Supervision
b TC2000 Industrial PCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 8/2 to 8/7 b Monitor Pro multi platform software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 8/8 to 8/25
Schneider Electric
8/1
Presentation, choices
TC2000 Industrial PCs
Presentation
TC2000 industrial PCs are built around a central unit common to all models, which includes the processor, power supply and peripheral devices. The front panel of each model in the range is different. The basic "Node Box PC" computer does not include a screen or a keyboard. The front panels of the other models have a flat screen with either a keyboard and touchscreen, a keyboard on its own, or a touchscreen on its own. TC2000 Industrial PCs can be personalized with other optional hardware and software.
"Node Box PC" Basic Computer The Node Box PC basic computer in the TC2000 range consists of a housing with an Intel Celeron 433 MHz processor, input/output ports, extension card slots, a disk drive and a CD-Rom drive.
Graphics Terminal b A 12" at screen with keyboard and with or without touchscreen. b A 15" at screen with keyboard and with or without touchscreen. b A 15" at screen with touchscreen.
TCC NB
The graphics terminal consists of the central unit (see above) and a front panel which includes an infrared interface enabling the user to download software and data. A choice of four front panels is available from the following subsets: 1 LCD TFT SVGA 12" color screen for maximum display definition of 800 x 600. 2 LCD TFT SVGA 15" color screen for maximum display definition of 1024 x 768. 3 Sealed front panel with 40 programmable, re-writable keys, 31 alphanumeric keys and a checking device.
TCC K2/K5/B2/B5
4 An analog TFT touchscreen.
Accessories and separate elements b b b b Extended RAM memory. PCI 10/100baseT Ethernet Card. LCD TFT 15" External Monitor with video cable. LCD TFT 15" External Monitor with touchscreen and video cable.
Choices
Linking TC2000 Industrial PC and front panel.
TCC T5
"Box PC" Basic Computer Graphics terminal with 12" flat screen and keyboard Graphics terminal with 15" flat screen and keyboard Graphics terminal with 12" flat screen, TFT touchscreen and keyboard Graphics terminal with 15" flat screen, TFT touchscreen and keyboard Graphics terminal with 15" flat screen and TFT touchscreen
TCC NB TCC K2 TCC K5 TCC B2 TCC B5 TCC T5
Architecture: page 8/3
Description: page 8/4
Dimensions, mounting: page 8/7
8/2
Architecture
Architecture
Connections with automated systems Software packs allow TC2000 Industrial PCs to be configured so that they can be easily built in to supervisory applications such as Server or Clients.
TC2000 TC2000 Atrium Server Pack with - Atrium T PCX 57 353M Coprocessor - PL7 Junior/Pro Software - OFS Data Server Software
X Bus Fipio Modbus Plus InterBus-S Altivar Premium Premium
Momentum
Atrium Server The TC2000 industrial PC has an Atrium T PCX 57 353M coprocessor (card format PC bus ISA) and can be personalized using PL7 Junior/Pro software and OFS data Server (1). Adding a PCX card allows a TC2000 Industrial PC to be integrated into network architectures and connected to industrial buses or networks: b Fipio Bus. b X Bus. b Modbus Plus Network. b InterBus-S Bus.
(1) OFS: OPC Factory Server, OPC: OLE for Pprocess Control, OLE: Object Linking and Embedding
Supervisory Application
TC2000 Server Unit - Ethernet Card - Server Monitor Software TC2000 Client Units - TCC ETH01 Ethernet Card - Client Monitor Software TC2000
TC2000 "Box PC"
Ethernet TCP/IP
8
Premium Premium Quantum
Adding a TCP/IP Ethernet card to the TC2000 Industrial PC allows the user to design supervisory applications with a TCP/IP Ethernet network. The application consists of TC2000 industrial PCs and automated system platforms connected to the Ethernet network. Industrial PCs are used in Server or Client units (supervisors or graphics terminals for HMI). Industrial PCs used as Servers have Server Monitor software; those used as Clients have Client Monitor software.
Presentation: page 8/2
8/3
Description
Description
3 1 2 "Node Box PC" TCC NB Basic Computer On the side panel of the Node Box PC TCC NB basic computer is: 1 A 25 pin SUB-D female connector for parallel bi-directional connection. 2 A 25 pin SUB-D male connector for RS232 serial link. 3 A 9 pin SUB-D male connector for RS232 serial link. 4 A 9 pin SUB-D male connector for RS485 serial link. 5 A PS/2 (external mouse) mini-DIN auxiliary connector. 6 A PS/2 mini-DIN auxiliary connector for keyboard. 7 A floppy disk drive. 8 A CD-Rom Drive. 9 Two USB (1)connectors. 10 A 15 pin SUB-D female connector for VGA external video screen. 11 Six standard IBM PC slots (ISA bus and PCI bus).
11 4 5 7 8
10 9 1 2 4 3 6 7
Graphics terminal with TCC B2/B5/K2/K5 keyboard The graphics terminal with keyboard is made up of the components of the "Node Box PC" basic computer described above combined with the following elements: 1 A sealed front panel (NEMA 4/4X/12 and IP 65). 2 An LCD TFT screen, (with or without high-definition touchscreen): - either SVGA 12" for a maximum display definition of 800 x 600, - or SVGA 15" for a maximum display definition of 1024 x 768, 3 PF11 to PF20 Programmable, labelable function keys. 4 Number pad keys. 5 PF1 to PF10 Programmable, labelable function keys. 6 Cursor Keys. 7 Four LEDs, with, from left to right: - power-on indicator, - disk drive access indicator, - serial port activity indicator, - touch screen pressure detection indicator (if applicable). 8 Built-in checking device. 9 IrDA infra-red port (1) for downloading software and data. 10 Function Keys F1 to F20. 11 Keyboard port access plug.
11
10
Graphics terminal with TCC T5 touchscreen 1 2 The graphics terminal is made up of the components of the "Node Box PC" basic computer described above combined with the following elements: 1 A sealed front panel (NEMA 4/4X/12 and IP 65). 2 LCD TFT SVGA 15" screen for maximum display definition of 1024 x 768, with high definition analog touchscreen. 3 Four LEDs, with, from left to right: - power-on indicator, - disk drive access indicator, - serial port activity indicator, - touch screen pressure detection indicator. 4 IrDA infra-red port (1) for downloading software and data.
8
4 3
(1) The USB and infrared ports cannot be operated under Windows NT operating system.
Presentation : page 8/2
8/4
Characteristics
Characteristics
Industrial PC type Type Processor Internal hard disk RAM Memory CD-Rom Drive Floppy disk drive Screen Display TCC NB TCC B2/K2 TCC B5/K5 TCC T5 IBM PC/AT Intel celeron 433 MHz 6.4 G (IDE) 64, extendable to 256 Side access, drive comes as standard, except on TCC K2000A3E000 3 1/2", 1.44 M bytes, side access 12" color LCD TFT 15" color LCD TFT with XGA (1024 x 768 max) with SVGA (800 x 600 active matrix max) active matrix Analog touchpscreen (30 million maneuver Analog Touchscreen cycles) only available for TCC B (30 million maneuver cycles)
Go Mb
Touchscreen
Video Card Keyboard
Built-in Number of keys Checking Device Impermeability Number
64 bit Controller, 2M bytes of RAM, PCI bus 71 Built-in NEMA 4/4X/12
Extension Slots
4 for ISA bus PC compatible cards 1 for ISA bus PC or PCI bus compatible card 1 for PCI bus PC compatible card 1 IrDA (front panel) standard infrared link, not compatible with Windows NT 1 USB link (12 M bits/s), not compatible with Windows NT 1 RS 232/RS 485 serial link (9 pin SUB-D male connectors) 1 RS 232 serial link (25 pin SUB-D male connectors) 1 bi-directional parallel link (25 pin SUB-D female connector) 1 VGA external video screen connection (15 pin SUB-D female connector) 1 PS/2 keyboard 2 PS/2 keyboard connections (front and side 1 PS/2 keyboard connection panels) connection 1 PS/2 auxiliary connection (external mouse) Mb 64, 128, 256 10baseT/100baseTX, uses a PCI bus extension (optional) Windows NT/95, Schneider Electric software aV cV 115...230, 50/60 Hz 19...30 200 maximum 100 Mounting in a cabinet or on 19" EIA rack UL 1950, UL 1604, CSA 22.2 No. 50 and No. 213 Electro-magnetics: EN55022:1994 Class A Immunity: EN5082-2:1995 Safety IEC60950
Input/Output ports
Extended RAM memory Ethernet network card Optional pre-installed software Power Supply
Comsumption
Basic Available for extensions
W W
Installation Certification
Environment
Utilization Temperature Storage Temperature Hygrometry Resistance to Vibration in operation in storage Shock Resistance in operation in storage Altitude in use in storage
C C
0+ 50 - 20+ 60 2080 % 1.5 mm peaks from 5 to 55 Hz 1 gn from 56 to 2000 Hz 1.5 mm peaks from 5 to 55 Hz 2.5 gn from 56 to 2000 Hz
gn gn m m m
15 during 11 ms 30 during 11 ms 0 to 3000 max. 0 to 3000 max. 0 to 12,000 max.
8/5
References
References
TC2000 Industrial PCs have: b An Intel celeron 433 MHz processor. b A 6.4 Go hard disk. b A basic 64 Mb RAM memory, extendable to 256 Mb. b A CD-Rom drive (except TCC K2000A3E000). b A oppy disk drive. b Six (ISA or PCI bus) extension card slots. Power Supply Operating Languag Reference (1) System e TC2000 Node Box PC a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz English French Windows 95 English English TC2000 with 12" screen, touchscreen and keyboard a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz English French Windows 95 English c 24 V Windows NT English French Windows 95 English TC2000 with 15" screen, touchscreen and keyboard a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Windows NT Windows 95 Windows NT English French English English French English Windows NT Windows NT TCC NB011A2E000 TCC NB011A2F000 TCC NB011A3E000 TCC NB021A3E000 (2)
Mass kg
18,740, 18,740 18,740 18,740
TCC NB
p TCC B2011A2E0p0 p TCC B2011A2F0p0 TCC B2011A3E000 TCC B2011D2E000 TCC B2011D2F000 TCC B2011D3E000
19,100 19,100 19,100 19,100 19,100 19,100
c 24 V
Windows 95 TC2000 with 12" screen and keyboard a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Windows NT Windows 95 Windows NT
p TCC B5011A2E0p0 p TCC B5011A2F0p0 TCC B5011A3E000 TCC B5011D2E000 TCC B5011D2F000 TCC B5011D3E000
19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160
c 24 V
TCC B2/B5/K2/K5
Windows 95 TC2000 with 15" screen and keyboard a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Windows NT Windows 95 c 24 V Windows NT
English French French English French English
p TCC K2011A2E0p0 p TCC K2011A2F0p0 TCC K2000A3E000 (3) TCC K2011D2E000 TCC K2011D2F000 TCC K2011D3E000
19,100 19,100 18,900 19,100 19,100 19,100
Windows 95 TC2000 with 15" screen and touchscreen
English French English English English French English
p TCC K5011A2E0p0 p TCC K5011A2F0p0 TCC K5011A3E009 TCC K5021A3E009 (2) TCC K5011D2E000 TCC K5011D2F000 TCC K5011D3E000
19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160 19,160
8
TCC T5
p English TCC T5011A2E0p0 p TCC T5011A2F0p0 French Windows 95 English TCC T5011A3E000 c 24 V Windows NT English TCC T5011D2E000 TCC T5011D2F000 French Windows 95 English TCC T5011D3E000 (1) To order a TC2000 industrial PC with software pack, replace p by the letter Without software pack Machine Control Monitor Pro L (devel./oper. base) and PL7 Pro Machine Monitoring Monitor Pro L (operating base) Supervision Monitor Pro L (development/operating base) Atrium Pro Monitor Pro L (devel./oper. base), PL7 Pro and T PCX 57 353M coprocessor. Atrium Server PL7 Pro, OFS and T PCX 57 353M coprocessor Server Unit Monitor Pro V7 Server base and TCC ETH01 card Client Unit Monitor Pro V7 Client base and TCC ETH01 card (2) 128 Mb RAM memory size. (3) No CD-Rom drive
a 110 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz
Windows NT
18,850 18,850 18,850 18,850 18,850 18,850 0 A B C D G J K
8/6
Accessories and separate elements Designation Specifications RAM memory extension 64 Mb 128 Mb 256 Mb PCI Bus Flat Screen Flat touchscreen Length 3m 7.5 m 15 m Reference TCC RAM64 TCC RAM128 TCC RAM256 TCC ETH01 TCC YMFP5 TCC YMFP5T Reference TCC YCBV10 TCC YCBV25 TCC YCBV50 TCC YCBS10 3m 7.5 m 15 m TCC YCBS25 TCC YCBS50 Mass Mass
10/100baseT Ethernet Card LCD TFT 15" External Monitor (with 3m video cable). Designation Video cable for monitor
Serial cable for touchscreen
Dimensions
TCC NB/B2/B5/K2/K5/T5
482,60
360,70
228,60 247,70
Mounting
442 6,35 27,60 = =
314,20
129,20
8
334,50
100
= 465,10
100
27,60
129,20
8/7
General

Monitor Pro supervision software
Monitor Pro Version 7 is a multi-user real-time SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) software solution for manufacturing and process automation. It allows valuable data to be collected from a wide variety of plant floor devices, and then distributed throughout the entire organization. Monitor Pro is based on a highly reliable, scalable architecture that can function as a standalone MMI as well as an enterprise-wide monitoring and control system. Monitor Pro V7 provides communication protocols for all Schneider Electric devices as standard, in addition to integrating technologies such as DCOM and OPC which enable it to act as both an OPC data Server and a multi-station client on TCP/IP, Intranet and Internet networks. Monitor Pro offers a whole range of new functions which simplify setup and can increase application design productivity.
Composition of the range

Monitor Pro 7 is a true multi-tier SCADA application built exclusively for Microsoft platforms. As a result of this new architecture, Client and Server functionality have been separated. The Server component performs data collection, data processing ,and data logging - all of the operations of a traditional SCADA system. The client provides the user interface for engineering and operational activities. Client systems represent concurrent users on the network and can access any and all Servers on the network. In addition, there are modules that support applications and options which enhance the functions of the base product to include, but are not limited to, integration with databases of both PL7 and Concept and statistical process control. With the release of V7, the concept of Development/Run Time and Run Time systems no longer exist. There are three different Server products, depending on the number of process I/O tags. The functional outline of the various Servers is identical, simplifying the migration of applications from one Server to another. Monitor Pro 7 is available on both Windows NT and Windows 2000 operating systems. Monitor Pro offers: # Server Systems - execution, data processing functions # Client Systems - development and graphical user interface # Server Options - additional functionality to enhance the operation of the base Server # Client Options - additional functionality to enhance the operation of the base Client"
Structure of the range

Basic packages Servers
# 256 I/O Server - enables the execution of a supervision application with 256 process I/O and 1096
internal tag database # 1024 I/O Server - enables the execution of a supervision application with a 1024 process I/O and 16,384 internal tag database # Enterprise Unlimited I/O and tags - enables the execution of a supervision application with an unlimited number of process I/O and internal tag database Clients
# Client graphics V7- implementing Client Builder and Configuration Explorer, as well as maintaining Application Editor, WebClient and Graphic functionality provided in the Client V2. # Client graphics V2- maintains existing functionality V2, and does not support Client Builder or Configuration Explorer. In V7, this functionality has been incorporated into the Configuration Explorer.
Extensions (unless otherwise indicated, all options are Server-based)
# OFS Linker - Using Schneider Automation's OFS, integration of the PL7and Concept databases
with the Monitor Pro database resulting in single tag configuration. # Power SPC - Statistical process control. # CML (Compiled Math and Logic) - Compiled math and logic. # PAK (Program Access Kit) - Kit for developing tasks and additional drivers. # ORACLE interface - Oracle database interface. # SYBASE interface - Sybase database interface. # Third-Party Drivers - Communication with third-party devices. # Enhanced Communication Interface - an I/O translator that provides an interface between ECI drivers and the real-time database. A superset of the IOXlator and the scaling and deadbanding tasks are also included. # Event Time Manager- a flexible tool used for configuring time-based events. # Database Terminal Server - an on-line, real-time browser of the tag database to enhance debugging capabilities. Supports graphics V2 only. # Virtual Real-Time Network - Provides enhanced networking capability similar to FL-LAN and PowerNet, supported in the base system with the advantage of increased responsiveness. # Virtual Real-Time Network Redundancy - Facilitates the creation of redundant Monitor Pro applications. VRN must be installed in order to implement this functionality. # Man-Machine Interface - Client Side Option, providing a number of default parameters and graphic options for developing an application quickly. Supports graphics V2 only.
Functions: pages 8/12 to 8/22 References: pages 8/22 and 8/23
8/8
Architectures

Connection to control systems

Monitor Pro supervision software is an organizer for all Schneider Electric control systems. It can be integrated into communication architectures which bear Modicon, Series A, SY/MAX and Telemecanique brand names. Since Monitor Pro supports several protocols simultaneously, it is suitable for mixed configurations. These connections enable the use of serial links and local area networks for exchanges with the control system level. The Client/Server architecture in Monitor Pro V7 can support both the client and Server functionality running on the same computer or on separate computers, depending on the application requirements.
Telemecanique control systems

Monitor Pro offers Ethway, Fipway and Uni-Telway connections as standard so that it can be integrated into Telemecanique X-Way architectures (TSX and April) as well as the Uni-TE connection on TCP/IP.
Monitor Pro Client Monitor Pro Client
TSX 17 April 5000 Micro Monitor Pro Server Premium
Num TSX/PMX
Modicon control systems

Monitor Pro offers Modbus, Modbus Plus and Modbus TCP/IP connections as standard so that it can be integrated into Modicon control system architectures.
Modbus/Modbus Plus Monitor Pro
Modicon 984 Quantum
Series A control systems

Monitor Pro offers 1 SFB connection as standard so that it can be integrated into Series A control system architectures.
1 SFB Monitor Pro
A120 A250
Square D control systems

Monitor Pro offers SY/MAX and SY/NET connections as standard so that it can be integrated into Square D control system architectures.
SY/NET Monitor Pro
SY/MAX
SY/MAX
Functions: pages 8/12 to 8/22
8/9
Architectures (continued)

Third-party control systems

Monitor Pro is also an open supervision software package. It can be connected to all major control systems on the market and is compatible with numerous serial or network protocols. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. New drivers can be developed using a standard product interface : PAK. This tool can be used to design any driver while respecting the rules for integration within Monitor Pro, thus assuring long useful life of the developments over time.
OPC Client/Server connection (OLE for process control)
Clients (MES, ERP)
Monitor Pro integrates OPC, the multi-Client/Server interface standard, permitting local or remote exchanges in real-time by using COM/DCOM technology. Monitor Pro offers an OPC Client functionality that allows connection to all control systems with an OPC object Server. This is particularly the case for OPC Factory Server (OFS), which enables access to Schneider Electric control systems. Monitor Pro has an additional standardized means of openness : an OPC object Server. This Server gives direct access to the Monitor Pro real-time database. All local or remote applications (MES, ERP, etc.) have an OPC client and therefore have direct access to Monitor Pro real-time objects.
Monitor Pro OPC Server Monitor Pro Server real-time database Monitor Pro OPC client
OPC Factory Server
Control system
Connection and openness to MES (Manufacturing Execution System)
Production management Ethernet TCP/IP
The connectivity of Monitor Pro in the world of MES is due to OLE and ActiveX technology and native databases. SQL, dBase IV, ORACLE and SYBASE native connections, as well as access to ODBC standard databases, provide the highest-performance links. The Power SQL module enhances Monitor Pro and gives two-way access, without any specific configuration, to external databases in read/write (with the possibility of SQL commands). All configuration data and archives are accessible via external databases. SQL V7 now ships with Monitor Pro as the standard tool for database logging.
Monitor Pro
8/10
Architectures (continued)

Distributed architectures
Monitor Pro offers a number of solutions for the distribution of data between supervision stations, providing several operators with access to the same application. TCP/IP data exchanges
Multi-station equal access The Monitor Pro FLLAN function enables several supervision stations to exchange files and data on a TCP/IP network. A Server can also be used on the network for all archive functions or for sharing network resources (printers, databases, etc.).
Monitor Pro
Monitor Pro
PLC
PLC
PLC
Multi-station Client/Server
Shared database
Monitor Pro has an integrated Client/Server multi-station function : PowerNet. This enables an application to be designed where data is shared between several supervision stations. Each station can be declared as a Server and as a Client for the other stations on the network. Alarms and their acknowledgement are distributed between the various stations on the network. Alarms can be acknowledged equally on one or other stations on the network.
Monitor Pro
Monitor Pro
Power Net
TCP/IP
Monitor Pro
Client: operator access distribution and application development

Ethernet/Intranet
Monitor Pro Client
Monitor Pro Server
The client architecture enables secure, distributed, and remote access to the Server via OPC on a TCP/IP network as well as through the Internet. Clients can access and manage multiple applications in the system. Client stations are independent from each other, so local graphics can easily be modified without change to the application residing on the Server or other clients.
TSX 7
Premium Quantum
8/11
Functions

Application design
Using the Client V7 - application development remains unchanged if using the existing environment V2.] A supervision application is developed on a client system using the Client Builder and the Configuration Explorer. Configuration Explorer is used to develop Server side functionality, and the Client Builder is used to develop the graphic interface. Client Builder - Graphic Screen Development Client Builder is an integrated engineering and operational environment that allows for dynamic switching between engineering and test modes to speed application development. Client Builder provides a rich set of tools to decrease application development time:
# # # # # # #
Pan and Zoom Object Oriented Graphics Standard Object Library Alarming, Trending and Data Browsing Interfaces Layering ActiveX Container OPCClient
Object-oriented graphics - The properties of the graphic objects in Monitor Pro 7 have been exposed so that you can programmatically change the properties of an object in a window or of the window itself through VBA scripting. VBA Compatible Scripting - Client Builder uses VBA compatible scripting which allows you to write custom code for your application. You can also create templates. A template is a mimic (graphic screen) containing drawing elements and properties common to other screens. Mimics created using templates inherit the drawing elements and properties of the template. Configuration explorer Configuration Explorer provides an explorer-like hierarchical view for navigating and configuring Monitor Pro Server side functions. The new Windows-based editors will greatly simplify the configuration of Monitor Pro modules. One of the new features of Configuration Explorer is the Tag Explorer. The Tag Explorer shows all tags in the system including those accessible through OPC and supports user defined filters. Tags can be dragged from the Tag Explorer to any of the editors in the system, minimizing typing and increasing engineering productivity. Configuration Explorer supports concurrent application development over a network, allowing a single user to access multiple Monitor Pro Servers, or for multiple users to concurrently configure a single Monitor Pro Server. Monitor Pro 7 also introduces the concept of object-based configuration. Object-based configuration brings about unprecedented levels in productivity when creating applications. Repetition in configuration is completely eliminated; errors are reduced; application development times are reduced; and application maintenance is lessened. Application Objects allow you to build applications using a comprehensive set of predefined objects provided with Monitor Pro 7. These objects model real-world components (for example a pump or circuit breaker), and include the various SCADA functionality's available within the system, such as alarming, data logging and communications. A Monitor Pro application is built simply by dragging the desired objects into the application. When an object is added to an application, it can be configured in two ways. You can enter configuration information (for example alarm limits and I/O points) via an intuitive user interface. Alternatively, configuration information can be loaded from a variety of external data sources including text files, Excel spreadsheets, or any ODBC compliant database. This allows data already available in other places to be re-used. When using data from external sources, many objects can be created with a single action, allowing large application to be created automatically.
8/12
Functions (continued)

Using Visual Basic In Monitor Pro, it is possible to assign an animation to any graphic object (movement, rotation, modification of the size, link with another object, etc.) written in Visual Basic compatible language. Pre-programmed functions (mouse actions, external event, synoptic loading, etc.), are available in the Visual Basic editor, which makes it easier to use this module for making graphic objects behave dynamically.
Security management There are some applications which require security access management. Monitor Pro allows security to be assigned at multiple levels, based on user designation. Access can also be restricted with user login/logout functions. Monitor Pro offers the following security management services:
# # # # #
User class definition tools (32 possible classes) Assignment of access rights to the various user classes Assignment of users to the various classes Security administration Login and Logout of operators, while application is running
When the supervision application is configured, a decision is made either to use the security system offered by Monitor Pro or to rely on the security management system offered by the operating system on the machine (as with Windows NT). The application can also be configured so that it stores all operator interventions on a database. The following actions can be controlled by a password :
# Pressing buttons # Function keys # Text entry.
8/13

Single point tag declaration In order to increase application development productivity, Monitor Pro offers database integration. This function is used to provide information to the Monitor Pro real-time database from the PLC databases without re-entering tags and their attributes. The tool is used to ensure consistency of the PLC and supervisor databases. If modifications are made to the application, either to the PLC or to the supervisor, a consistency test command is used to uncover incon-sistencies between the PLC and supervision databases. This function is available on various types of PLCs: TSX Series 7, Micro/Premium/Quantum and their respective programming tools (PL7-3, PL7, Concept), via Symbol Database Linker or OFS (OPC Factory Server). The supervision real-time database can be created from several PLC databases. The imported tags are prefixed with the name of the PLC station when using symbol database linker. The software workshop and the supervision software can be installed on the same station or on separate stations. Import can be carried out either via an interstation network for exchanging files, or by disk transfer. The single point tag declaration tool is used to optimize communication by selecting the communication tables which will receive the imported PLC tags. A search and filter function for the various types of variable makes it easier to select the tags to import. The tool can also create complete tables in the Monitor Pro database by means of a single command. Tags created using either of these tools are available via the Tag Browser
Starter applications Monitor Pro offers a Starter Application Generator for configuring Schneider Electric communication protocols within the configuration explorer. In addition, the sample StarterApp that is provided with the product provides sample templates and mimics to provide a starting point for application development.
8/14

Application support tools

Diag viewer
The Diag viewer allows alarm information generated by the Diag Function Block within the PLC and stored in the Diag Buffer to be displayed within the SCADA system. The information from the diag function blocks can be both pre-programmed and user-defined. Diag Viewer will allow the same alarm information to be viewed regardless of the view device - SCADA, CCX17, PL7 Pro, Magelis ,etc.- thus providing the operator with a consistent view of the system status.
8/15

Run Time environment The Monitor Pro Run Time environment performs various operations which are grouped into three main areas:
# Data collection # Data processing # Data presentation

The primary aspect of the system is that all of the data is stored in the real time database, and the database therefore represents what is happening from moment to moment during normal operation. The real-time database is central to all tasks that run during run time. The real-time database resides in memory on the Server and acts as both a storage device and an inter-process communication mechanism. All tasks share information in the real-time database by reading from or writing to the real-time database. Data is never passed directly between two tasks. Configuration data directs the specific run time operations of the system. This semi-permanent data created during the development process effectively describes the plant floor equipment and the processes it implements. Lastly, the run time process also performs some operations automatically, such as with alarm logging, where critical values are monitored and alarms generated. In addition, Monitor Pro supports archiving of data from the real-time database to a disk-based, historical database management system on a regular basis. Real-time database
The real-time database stored in the fast access RAM memory is the heart of the Monitor Pro supervision system. It contains all data coming from or going to the process and is available for supervision processing. The size of the database depends on the Monitor Pro Run Time software used. This application image consists of objects defined as symbols, representing binary data, single length words (16 bits), double length words (32 signed bits), floating point values (64 bits) and messages (up to 256 bytes). Each task can access the whole real-time database and uses this means of exchanging data with other tasks. This means of communication reinforces the independence of the various tasks from one another.
Alarms
Math and logic
Real-time database Monitor Pro
Trend chart
Time
All data in the database can be identified in symbolic form, that is by names of objects such as VALVE, PUMP, MOTOR, FAULT, etc. Each change in the state of a variable is monitored, indicated and processed, if required.
8/16

Alarms
Alarms are generated based on any specified data elements in the real-time database. The Alarming function offers the following benefits:
# # # #
Criteria can be based on digital or analog values or messages. User comments can be appended to an alarm and become part of the log. Alarms can be acknowledged individually or as a group. Tag name, message, acknowledge status, time, group, etc., can be displayed in the alarm viewer. # Filter and sorting based on the user criteria. # Alarms can be grouped by user-defined parameters, such as types, area, priority, etc. # Supports parent / child relationship to avoid nuisance alarms.
Timing event and intervals

Event and Interval timing is used to schedule events in terms of absolute date/time, or in terms of time intervals following a previous event. Event and Interval timing is used to define timed events and time intervals that can be used to initiate and control any system function in run time mode. Event and Interval timing links timed events and intervals to real-time database elements used as triggers. There is no limit to the number of events and interval timers that can be defined except the amount of available memory. In addition, event and interval timing also updates global information used by the system such as current date and time, day of week and month, and is stored as reserved elements.
Interpreted or compiled math and logic functions

Monitor Pro can perform various operations of a mathematical or logical nature on a combination of data elements in the real-time database. Each operation is a controlled by a procedure that resembles BASIC, is based on a user-defined variable, and is triggered by changing values in the real time database or by other procedures. Complied mode involves several Monitor Pro utilities and a third party ANSI C-language compiler working together to generate the ANSI C code from the user-created file. Interpreted mode is a subset of complied mode so that when the values of trigger elements associated with one or more procedures change in the real-time database, interpreted mode determines the procedures affected. Every line of the instruction is then interpreted an executed for each triggered change.
8/17

Counting events
Programmable counters provide count per unit of time measurements and event delays. A programmable counter is a group of elements with the values that work together to perform a count. Outputs from programmable counters can be used to provide inputs to other processes or to trigger events.
Trending - standard
Standard trending consists of both real-time and historical trend capabilities. Real-time trending lets you chart data from any database. The frequency to update the chart is configured and the value is displayed on the chart. Historical trending lets you chart data from the relational database historically or in real-time. Both time-based and event-based chart types are available. In addition, the following features can be applied to a chart in run time:
# # # #
Pan Zoom Toggle between real-time and historic data Dynamic change of tag information and presentation on the chart.
Trending - advanced
Historical and real-time trend curves Both types of dynamic and real-time trend chart can be displayed simultaneously in the same window. An unlimited number of elements can be used for each type of curve. Diagrams per window An unlimited number of diagrams and trends can be represented in the same window. Scrolling direction The trend curves can be configured to scroll in four directions, from left to right, from right to left, from top to bottom or from bottom to top. # The X axis can be divided into time intervals or samples. # The Y axis scale can be modified dynamically. Limit values Sixteen limit values can be set for each variable represented by a curve. Colours can be associated with these limits, so that the drawing changes colour each time limit values are exceeded. Interaction between operator and trending The zoom and panoramic functions provide detailed analyses or overviews of all the various curves. A grid can be added and a cross hair (vertical axis moving horizontally) ascertains the coordinates for the points.
8/18

Database interface
The dBase IV, ORACLE, DB2, SYBASE, SQL, and ODBC database functions enable data transfer between the Monitor Pro real-time database and a compatible dBASE IV, ORACLE, DB2, SYBASE, SQL, and ODBC relational database.
Database files
BROWSE
These functions provide the following options :
Read option
# Operation, viewing and editing of relational databases # Addition, deletion and modification of records # Authorisation of data acceptance by other supervision functions. The trending
function can therefore use data stored in a relational database The database Browse read function is used to restore data from databases. Monitor Pro 7 now uses Microsoft SQL as its standard data logging tool.
Real-time database
Recipe management
The recipe management function enables the user to create production recipes, to store them on hard disk and to perform two-way data exchanges of a set of data between the database and the hard disk (production recipe for example). The flexibility in handling data ensures fast, straightforward changes of production settings. Any recipe can be created using non-machine dialogue, internal data and/or data from connected PLCs.
Transfers
Hard disk
Up to 8000 different types of recipe can be defined and each type has an unlimited number of associated files. Up to 8000 database elements can be specified for each type of recipe.
Premium
PMX 7
8/19

Report generator
Any supervision or production monitoring tool should not only record variations and production status, and monitor the application, but also provide a hard copy summary of this data. The report generator is used to print any data in the database in any format selected at the development stage. It is therefore possible, using a form defined by the user, to print up to 2000 types of document with different page layouts. The reports can also be transmitted via the network or stored on disk in ASCII format. Combined with the recipe management function, this function means that it is easy to keep a written record of all new recipes which can be read by any user.
RAPPORT FABRICATION 11H 18 Min
Etat vanne cuve A : ouvert Etat vanne cuve B : ferm Etat vanne cuve C : ferm Etat vanne cuve D ; ouvert Etat vanne cuve E : ferm
Niveau Niveau Niveau Niveau
cuve cuve cuve cuve
A : 1212 B ; 1000 C : 2000 D : 5000
Niveau trmie A : 100 Niveau trmie B : 200
Uploading and downloading programs and data

This function is essential in a flexible manufacturing process for the installation and startup of a production line. The ability to integrate Monitor Pro into the X-Way com-munication structure enables application programs to be uploaded, downloaded and compared on different modular PLCs programmed in PL7-3 and PL7 language. It is also used for uploading, downloading and comparing internal data. The function can be executed either in the foreground with a man-machine interface, or in the background controlled by the application program.
Hard disk
X-Way
Characteristics
# PLCs which can be uploaded : TSX 7/PMX 7 modular PLCs which can be
Premium TSX 7
programmed in PL7-3 language (versions V4 and V5) and Micro and Premium PLCs.
# Number of programs which can be stored : unlimited (only limited by the space
available on the hard disk).
8/20

Uni-TE/Jbus/Modbus/Modbus Plus communication

Connection via asynchronous serial link A Uni-TE or Jbus/Modbus connection via the serial port is included in all standard configurations.
Jbus
Direct connection to the Modbus Plus network requires the AM-SA85 network card and the associated communication drivers : SW-LNET-I95/INT and SW-WVVD-I95/INT. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Uni-Telway
Uni-Telway
Connection to X-Way networks Direct connection to the Ethway network uses the ISA bus network card : TSX ETH PC 101M (2 cards maximum). Similarly, direct connection to the Fipway network uses the ISA bus network card : TSX FPC 10M (2 cards maximum).
Ethway
Connection can also be made on the Premium PLC via the Ethernet TCP/IP network. The supervision station then becomes a station on the network.
Network connection
Several Monitor Pro and/or Monitor 77/2 supervisors can be installed in the same cell. The network connection function provides point to point network services between one or more Monitor systems on TCP/IP networks. This function is used to exchange data between the various databases. In the same way, any Monitor station can use the resources of a Server connected on the network, such as the hard disk (for example : a single disk for storing all the recipes) and printer.
Monitor
Monitor Production management
Ethway
TSX 7
Premium
The main services of the network function are as follows :
Premium
# # # # #
Exchanges between real-time databases : reports, commands, summary data, etc. Use of a Server's resources (hard disk, printer, etc.) File transfer between stations (without Server) File management services (copy, delete, rename directory, type and print) Triggering of any transfer of real-time database elements by any event (alarm, time, math and logic functions, etc.)
These services are available on Ethernet TCP/IP networks. A maximum of 16 Monitor stations can be connected together on the same segment.
8/21
References

Monitor Pro software base packages

The Monitor Pro V7 software base packages consist of 3 CD-Roms which include software functions in three languages (English, French and German) and user manuals (English, French and German). They include paper versions of installation guides, and software registration forms (in English, French and German). The Base Servers include: # Real-time database, # Alarms historical, alarms Server, scaling, hysteresis, math and logic functions # OPC Client, DDE, FLLAN, Powernet, # Data historical (database logger + datapoint logger), Database Browser, database interface dBase IV, ODBC, SQL Server 7.0, # File management, report generator, recipe management, # Timing event and intervals, print spooler, counting events, # Drivers for oommunication port, Adapter services, DigiBoard, # Driver interfaces for Schneider Electric PLCs. All base Servers include the following communication protocols: Modbus Ethernet (include IOXLator), Modicon Modbus Plus and Modbus, Square D Serial/Ethernet SyMax, IOXLator (bit RAPD only for third party development), Schneider OFS (OPC Server). X-Way communication drivers: the set of X-Way drivers for PC is not included in the base Servers Monitor Pro V7. X-Way, Fipway, Ethway, XIP, Uni-Telway and ISAway drivers are available on the CD-Rom (product reference TLX CD DRV 12M). Different versions are included to adapt to different operationg systems, such as Windows 2000 and Windows NT for Monitor Pro.
Description Database Reference Weight kg 1.040 1.040 1.040
Monitor Pro base Servers

Server 256 Server 1024 Server Enterprise 256 I/O and 4096 tags 1024 I/O 16,384 tags Unlimited I/O and tags MP SVR 256 MP SVR 1024 MP SVR ENT
Monitor Pro Clients

Client Development and Run Time, for graphics V7 and V2 for Server 256,1024 or Enterprise (to order with Server 256, 1024 or Enterprise) Client Run Time for graphics V7 and V2 for Server 256, 1024 or Enterprise in run time (to order with Server Enterprise) Client Run Time 1024 for graphics V7 and V2 for Server 256 or 1024 in run time (to order with Server 256 or 1024) MP CAL MP /CAL RT (1) MP /CAL 1024RT (1) 1.040
1.040
1.040
Monitor Pro serveur options

Compiled math and logic MP CML Native ORACLE database interface MP ORC Native SYBASE database interface MP SYB Database access via SQL MP PSQ Virtual real-time network MP VRN Redundant virtual real-time network MP VRR Database access browser MP DBT Advanced communication interface MP ECI Power statistical process control MP SPC Programmer's access kit library (PAK, EDIPAK, CFGPAK) MP PAK (1) To order a site licence for 1 Client, replace / by: none character, for 5 Clients: 5
8/22

Third-party communication protocols

Description Reference Weight kg
Allen-Bradley equipments
All Allen-Bradley protocols (MP ABA, MP ABR, MP ABT, MP ABU, MP ADT and MP AKT Allen-Bradley Async Allen-Bradley Device interface (supports ControlNet, NetDTL, KTDTL, Async, IOXIator). RSLinx 2.00.97.30 software and RSLinx master key included Allen-Bradley Device interface (supports ControlNet NetDTL, KTDTL, Async, IOXIator). Requires RSLinx 2.00.97.30 software (not included) Allen-Bradley Device interface (supports ControlNet, NetDTL, KTDTL, Async, IOXIator). Upgrade to RSLinx 2.00.97.30 software included Allen-Bradley NetDTL Allen-Bradley KTDTL MP DRV AB MP ABA MP ABR
MP ABT
MP ABU
MP ADT MP AKT
Omron equipments
All Omron protocols (MP OMR, MP OMV) Omron Hostlink Omron V600 MP DRV OMR MP OMR MP OMV
Siemens equipments
All Siemens protocols (MP PRO, MP SIR, MP SH5, MPSIE, MP SH7, MP TIW, MP TI4 and MP S7D Siemens H1S5 Siemens H1S5/S7 (includes IOXIator) Siemens S7 TCP/IP Profibus Siemens CP525 Siemens 396R (includes IOXIator) ProfiBus (includes IOXIator) Texas Instruments 305/405 Texas Instruments TIWAY MP DRV SIE MP SH5 MP SH7 MP S7D MP SIE MP SIR MP PRO MP TI4 MP TIW
Other equipements
Bailey DTS Opto Mistic Brick Bristol Babcock Daniels 2500 Eagle signal FL GEM semiconductor interface General Electric Fanuc GEM 80 Eurotherm International Moore ICI Leeds and Northrup Mitsubishi MECOM serial and Ethernet Mitsubishi MECOM serial driver Moore APACS (requires Moore API 4.0 or higher) Opto 22 Optomux Reliance Automate Fisher Controls ROC SECS with GW libraries RS232/serial SECS with GW libraries HSMS/Ethernet MP BNT MP BRK MP BRS MP DAN MP ESG MP FLG MP GEF MP GEM MP IBI MP ICI MP LDN MP MEE MP MES MP MOR MP OPT MP REL MP ROC MP SGS MP SGW
8/23

Configurations under Windows NT operating system
Functional upgrades
Function Upgrade Server 256 I/O to Server 1024 I/O Upgrade Server2 56 I/O to Server Enterprise Upgrade Server 1024 I/O to Serveur Enterprise Upgrade Client Run Time 1024 I/O to Client Run Time Enterprise Upgrade Client Run Time 1024 I/O Client Development and Run Time Upgrade Client Run Time Enterprise to Client Development and Run Time Reference
MP V7UPG S1 MP V7UPG S2 MP V7UPG S3 MP V7UPG C4 MP V7UPG C5 MP V7UPG C6
Weight kg
System integrator and demonstration packages

System integrators package Customer evaluation software Consult your Regional Sales Office
MP C DEMO
1.040
Subscription services
Subscription service programs cover the currently shipping version and one previous major release. With the release of Monitor Pro V7, subscription service programs will cover Monitor Pro V7, Monitor Pro V2./. For any legacy products, such as Modicon FactoryLink ECS or Modicon FactoryLink V4./, an expired subscription service program must be purchased corresponding to the configuration of the original system in order to upgrade to the current shipping version.
Function Reference Weight kg
Subscription services linked to a Monitor Pro V7 order

Subscription service membership for all Server sizes. Includes the support for future evolutions during one year Subscription service membership for all Cliien sizes. Includes the support for future evolutions during one year Subscription service membership for non-Schneider communication protocols. Includes the support for future evolutions during one year Subscription service membership for MP VRN, MP VRR, MP DBT and MP ECI options. Includes the support for future evolutions during one year MP CSP SRV MP CSP CALL MP CSS DRV
MP CSP VAP
Update of upgrades and support for all Server systems from Monitor Pro V2/
Subscription service includes a Server and a Client Builder V7 for customers who have maintained subscription Subscription service includes a Server and a Client Builder V7 for customers whose subscription service has expired Subscription service includes a Server and a Client V2.1 for customers who have maintained subscription version Subscription service includes a Server and a Client V2.1 for customers whose subscription service has expired Subscription service includes a Server and a Client Run Time V7 for customers who have maintained subscription Subscription service includes a Server and a Client Run Time V7 for customers whose subscription service has expired MP CSP CB MP CSP CB EXP MP CSP ECS MP CSP ECS EXP MP CSP RT MP CSP RT EXP
Update of upgrades and support for Client systems from Monitor Pro V2/
Subscription service includes a Client Builder V7 for MP CSP CB CAL customers who have maintained subscription version Subscription service includes a Client V2 for customers who MP CSP ECS CAL have maintained subscription version Subscription service includes a Client Run Time V7 for MP CSP RT CAL customers who have maintained subscription
8/24

Configurations under Windows NT operating system
Hardware and software recommendations

The following guidelines will help you select the "best estimate" of system requirements for your Monitor Pro application. Although it is impossible to define the exact hardware and software requirements for each system due to the flexibility and scalability of Monitor Pro and the other layered software involved, these guidelines provide a baseline for system configuration.
Typical number of clients CPU RAM Hard drive Additional notes
MP SVR 256 Server

1 400 MHz Pentium or faster 128 MB 2 GB or larger Add 2 MB RAM for each additional Client Builder Add 10 MB RAM for each additional Monitor Pro V2
MP SVR 1024 Server

5 600 MHz Pentium or faster 192 MB 2 GB or larger Add 2 MB RAM for each additional Client Builder Add 10 MB RAM for each additional Monitor Pro V2
MP SVR ENT Server (unlimited I/O)

10 or more 750 MHz Pentium or faster for up to 5 clients, Dual for 5-15 clients and Quad for more than 15 clients 256 MB up to 2 GB or larger 15 clients and 320 MB for more than 15 clients Add 2 MB RAM for each additional Client Builder Add 10 MB RAM for each additional Monitor Pro V2 more than one Server is recommended if more than 40 clients are needed
MP CAL Client (for development)

1 500 MHz Pentium or faster 192 MB 1 GB or larger
MP CAL Client (used for View only operator interface terminal))

1 500 MHz Pentium or faster 192 MB 1 GB or larger
Additional requirements
In addition to the general recommendations in the above table, you will need the following hardware on all Monitor Pro 7 clients and Servers: # CD-Rom drive for installation # XVGA monitor and graphics processor (1024 x 768, with at least 65K colors) # Keyboard # Microsoft-compatible mouse or pointing device Likewise, the following software is recommended for all Monitor Pro 7 clients and Servers: # Microsoft NT 4.0, service pack 4 to 6a, or Microsoft Windows 2000 professional operating system # Internet Explorer 4.x or 5.x # TCP/IP network protocol and NTFS file system
Documentation
Documentation in book format is to be ordered separately. This documentation is supplied as standard on CD-Rom with Monitor Pro software packages. Composition User documentation 3 volumes Manual format Reference Weight kg (1) 3.900
228 x 190
MP DOC/
(1) At the end of a reference, add E for English, F for French, G for German. Functions: pages 8/12 to 8/22
8/25
9 Contents
Services
Services
b Automation product certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 9/2 and 9/3 b User documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 9/4 and 9/5 b Schneider Alliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 9/6 to 9/15 b Schneider Electric worldwide, addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 9/16 to 9/19 b Community regulations and protective treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/20
Schneider Electric
9/1

Automation Product Certifications
Product certifications and marine classification authorities

In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced.
Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities.
Key CSA C-Tick UL Key ABS BV DNV GL GOST LR RINA RRS Certification body Canadian Standards Association Australian Communication Authority Underwriters Laboratories Classification authority American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt Lloyd's Register Registro Italiano Navale Register of Shipping Country Canada Australia USA Country USA France Norway Germany C.I.S. United-Kingdom Italy C.I.S.
The table below shows the situation as of the 01.09.2000 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base PLCs. Further information regarding certified modules can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office.
Certifications C-Tick Others Class1 Div 2 Hazardous SIMTARS Australia UL USA locations USA BG Germany AS-i Europe
Normal execution Certified Pending certification CSA Canada ACA Australia
ABE-7 CCX 17 FT2100 Lexium MHD Lexium BPH Micro Momentum Nano Premium Quantum TBX
(3) (4) (1) (2)
TSX/PMX 47 to 107 TXBT-F XBT-F/FC XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM
(5)
(1) TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module (2) TSX SAZ 10 AS-i bus master module and TSX SUP A02/A05 AS-i bus power supplies (3) TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (4) TSX SAY 100 AS-i bus master modules (5) TBX SAP 10 Fipio/AS-i gateway
9/2

Automation Product Certifications
Product certifications and marine classification authorities (continued)

Marine classification authorities
Normal execution Certified Pending certification ABS USA BV France DNV Norway GL Germany GOST CIS LR UnitedKingdom RINA Italy RRS CIS
ABE-7 CCX 17 FT2100 Lexium MHD Lexium BPH Micro Momentum Nano Premium Quantum TBX TSX/PMX 47 to 107 TXBT-F XBT-F/FC XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM
9/3

User documentation References
References
Description Total Automation Documentation CD Quantum Automation Series Documentation Library (contains 840 USE 100 00, 840 USE 101 00 890 USE 100 00, 890 USE 101 00) Motion Single-axis Software System User Guide Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide Language English English Reference TSX CDD MTE10E 840 USE 500 00
English English French German Spanish
GM-MOTN-001 840 USE 100 00 840 USE 100 01 840 USE 100 02 840 USE 100 03 840 USE 104 00 840 USE 104 01 840 USE 105 00 840 USE 106 00 840 USE 106 01 840 USE 106 03 840 USE 108 00 840 USE 109 00 840 USE 110 00
Modbus Plus Network I/O Servicing Planning Guide Motion 140 MSx 101 Single-axis MSB/MSC User Guide 140 CHS 110 Hot Standby User Guide
English French English English French Spanish
140 ESI 062 10 ASCII 2-channel Interface User Guide 140 NOL 911 10 Echelon LON Works User Guide Modbus Plus to Sy/Max Gateway Programmable Bridge Mux User Guide 140 NOE 3x1 Quantum-Sy/MaxEthernet Network Option Module Guide 140 HLI 340 00 High-Speed Interrupt Module User Guide Quantum/Compact Transmit Loadable Function Block User Guide 140 NOE 771 10 Embedded Web Server User Guide 140 EIA 921 00 Quantum AS-i Module User Guide
English English English
English English English English English English
840 USE 111 00 840 USE 112 00 840 USE 113 00 840 USE 116 00 840 USE 117 00 840 USE 443 00
140 EHC 105 High-Speed Counter User Guide
9/4

User documentation References
(continued)
References
Description
(continued) Language English French German Reference 890 USE 100 00 890 USE 100 01 890 USE 100 02 890 USE 101 00 890 USE 101 02 890 USE 102 00 890 USE 104 00 890 USE 112 00 890 USE 116 00 840 USE 419 00 840 USE 419 02 840 USE 101 00 840 USE 101 01 840 USE 101 03 372 SPU 680 01 MAN English French German Spanish 840 USE 492 00 840 USE 492 01 840 USE 492 02 840 USE 492 03 840 USE 493 00 840 USE 493 01 840 USE 493 02 840 USE 493 03 840 USE 494 00 840 USE 494 01 840 USE 494 02 840 USE 494 03 840 USE 495 00 840 USE 496 00 840 USE 496 01 840 USE 496 02 840 USE 496 03 840 USE 468 00 840 USE 468 02
Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide
Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide IBM Host Based Devices User Guide Modicon Terminal Block I/O Modules Hardware Reference Guide Modicon Motion Framework (MMF) Motion "C" Libraries Reference Guide Quantum SERCOS Multi-Axis Motion User Guide 140 NOA 611 00 Interbus Master User Guide Modicon Ladder Logic Block Library User Guide
English German English English English English English German English French Spanish
ProWORX NxT Programming Software User Manual Concept V. 2.5 Software Installation Instructions
Concept V. 2.5 Software User Guide (3 vol.)
Concept V. 2.5 Software IEC Library User Guide (13 vol.)
Concept V. 2.5 Software EFB Tool Kit User Manual Concept V. 2.5 Software - 984 Ladder Logic Block Library User Guide (2 vol.)
English English French German Spanish
140 CRP 811 00 Profibus DP Module User Guide
English German
9/5
Schneider Alliances
Programme overview
The Schneider Alliances partnership programme is an answer to the many customers who are expecting their preferred vendors to provide much more than simple products : complete integrated and validated automation solutions. Schneider Alliances is both an industrial and commercial programme between Schneider and its partners providing hardware or software automation products, system integration or services complementary to the Schneider offer. www.schneideralliances.com The Schneider Alliances partnership programme comprises : p Product vendors : Design and distribute hardware or software automation products complementary to the Schneider offer which are being integrated in Schneider solutions and architectures. This Schneider Alliances product offer includes industrial peripheral equipment, network hardware and software, HMI and supervisory software, application software packages, development and test tools. The design and manufacture of these products may require a transfer of technology from Schneider. Several hundred partner products, compatible with our various technologies, are available in a wide range of applications : industrial peripheral equipment, communication interfaces and software, human-machine interface, supervisory control software, variable speed drives, electro-pneumatic interfaces, etc. Please consult our directories : - Partnership directory, pages 9/7 to 9/9. - Directory of partner products, pages 9/10 to 9/15. p System integrators : Create automation solutions using Schneider products and third-party devices and equipment. They deploy their industry and application expertise to the implementation, installation and management of complete automation projects. Thanks to Schneider Alliances, customers are able to choose the best products on the market with an assurance of full integration within Schneider architectures. They also have access to a network of system integrators specialized in their industry and able to create their automation project in the best conditions of time and cost. The Schneider Alliances partnership network is a win-win association which brings to everyone, product vendor or system integrator, more business and turnover.
Bus X Open program The Bus X Open program is aimed at Schneider Alliances partners who need to expand Premium platform-based solutions by developing specialized application-specic I/O modules (which can be integrated on Bus X in TSX RKY racks like any other module). This offer, which enables a module to be developed within the framework of a Schneider Alliances partnership agreement, comprises : p A development kit (software and documentation) p An industrial kit comprising a set of customizable Bus X hardware cards.
9/6
Partnership directory

Schneider Alliances
Partner products
Automation controller
HMI/Operator panel
Product category Communication interface boards Communication Communicaiton
Miscellaneous sensor
Motion/axis control
Miscellaneous actuator
Miscellaneous
Company
A ABB Industrial Systems ABB Power T&D Co., ABB Robotic ACC Systemes Acuity Imaging, Inc. AFCON Applicom International Arc Informatique Areal Aro ARORA Software ARTEC Systems Asco Joucomatic AspenTech Atlas Copco Automated Mining Systems Automated Solutions, Inc. Automation & Control Technologies, Inc. Automation & Systmes Automation Science, Inc. AVG Automation B Beckwood Services, Inc. Bihl & Wiedemann Bitronics, Inc. BLH Electronics, Inc. C Cape Software Ci Technologies Pty Ltd. CimQuest, Inc.- Products Group Cimtech Codra Commercial Timesharing, Inc. Control Techniques Drives, Inc. ControlSoft, Inc. Curry Controls Company Cutler-Hammer, Inc. CyberLogic Technologies, Inc. Cycle Software, Inc. D Danfoss Electronic Drives Data-Linc Group Delta Computer Systems, Inc. DLRA Projects (Pty) Ltd. Doble Engineering E ELECTRO Industries / Gaugetech Endress + Hauser Escort Memory Systems Etic ExperTune, Inc.
Miscellaneous hardware
HMI/SCADA
Electrical I/O interface
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
Services
software
software
Drive
9/7

Schneider Alliances
Partner products
HMI/Operator panel
Motion/axis control
Miscellaneous
Company
F Festo Fiber Options, Inc. Fisher Rosemount FORTH, Inc. Foxboro Company G Gener Gensym Corporation Georges Renault (GRIN) GSE Systems, Inc. H Hewlett Packard Hilco Technologies, Inc. Hilscher GmbH Hirschmann HMS Fieldbus Systems AB Honeywell Honeywell Industrial Automation I Iconics, Inc. Indramat Industrial Systems Monitoring/AdVoTech Integrated Control Technology Inc. Integrated Industrial Technologies, Inc. Intellution IPAC Technologies, Inc. Itmi Aptor K Kuka M Mac Valves, Inc. MagneTek, Inc. Mauell Corporation MDT Software Mettler-Toledo, Inc. Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc. N Nemasoft, Inc. NexxCorp Information Systems, Inc. Niobrara Research & Development Corp. NovaTech, LLC P Panel-Tec, Inc. Parker ProSoft Technology, Inc. Prosyst
9/8
HMI/SCADA
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
Services
software
software
Drive

Schneider Alliances
Partner products
HMI/Operator panel
Motion/axis control
Miscellaneous
Company
R RACO Manufacturing & Engineering Robicon S SAF Drive Systems Ltd. Schweitzer Engineering Lab., Inc. Sciaky Secheron Ltd. Silicomp Simulation Sciences SISCO, Inc. Sofrel Telecontrol Spectrum Controls, Inc. S-S Technologies Inc. Steeplechase Software SWAC T TA Engineering Co., Inc. Tasnet, Inc. Toshiba TR Electronic TURCK, Inc. W Weed Instrument Westermo Wonderware X Xycom, Inc.
HMI/SCADA
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
Services
software
software
Drive
9/9
Product directory

Schneider Alliances partner products
Company ABB Industrial Systems, Inc. 16250 W. Glendale New Berlin, WI 53151 United States ABB Industrial Systems, Inc. 16250 W. Glendale New Berlin, WI 53151 United States ABB Power T&D Co., Inc. 7036 Snowdrift Road Allentown, PA 18106 United States ABB Robotic 5, chemin de l'Equerre ZI des Bethunes F-95310 Saint Ouen L'Aumne France ACC Systemes 5 rue des aTel.iers-BP 203 F- 60 202 Compiegne Cedex France Acuity Imaging, Inc. 9 Townsend West Nashua, NH 03063 United States AFCON 1014 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, IL 60173 United States Applicom International 43 Rue Mazagran F-76320 Caudebec-les-Elbeufs France Arc Informatique 2 Avenue de la cristallerie F-92310 Svres France Areal 16 Avenue Jean Moulin F-77167 Savigny le Temple France Aro 1 Avenue de Tours F-72500 Chteau du Loir France ARORA Software 1755 East Plumb Lane, Suite 159, Reno, NV 89502 United States ARTEC Systems 5530 NE 33rd Avenue Fort Lauderdale, FL 33308 United States Asco Joucomatic 32 Avenue Albert 1-BP 312 F-92506 Rueil Malmaison France AspenTech 14701 St Marys Lane Houston, TX 77079-2995 United States Atlas Copco En Montillier,4 CH-1303 Penthaz Switzerland Automated Mining Systems 16 Mary Street, Unit 3 Aurora, Ontario L4G 1G2 Canada Automated Solutions, Inc. 1415 Fulton Road, #205 Santa Rosa, CA 95403 United States Automation & Control Technologies, Inc. 11838 Borman Dr., Suite 200 St. Louis, MO 63146-4113 United States Automation & Systmes Domaine de lEtoile Hameau Topaze F-06610 La Gaude France
Tel../Fax/URL Tel. +1 414-785-3416 Fax +1 414-785-0397 URL www.abb.com Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL +1 614-261-2000 +1 614-261-2172 www.abb.com +1 610-395-7333 +1 610-395-1055 www.abb.com/papd
Reference CDI 300 Advant OCS
Category Drive Miscellaneous hardware
Technology Modbus Plus Modbus Plus
ABB DCS 500 Advant OCS
Miscellaneous hardware Miscellaneous hardware
Modbus Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+33 (0)1 34 40 23 49 +33 (0)1 34 40 23 80 www.abb.se/exible
2000, 2000R series product family REL 512/506 REL 356 REL 350/352 PRICOMT S4C Robot controller
Miscellaneous hardware Miscellaneous hardware Miscellaneous hardware Miscellaneous hardware HMI/SCADA Motion/axis control
Modbus Plus Modbus Plus Modbus Plus Modbus Plus Modbus Plus Fipio
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax
+33 (0)3 44 38 66 66 +33 (0)3 44 38 66 67 www.acc.fr +1 603-598-8400 +1 603-598-4684 www.acuityimaging.com +1 847-397-6900 +1 847-397-6987 www.afcon-inc.com +33 (0)2 32 96 04 20 +33 (0)2 32 96 04 21 www.applicom-int.com +33 (0)1 41 14 36 00 +33 (0)1 46 23 86 02 www.arcinfo.com +33 (0)1 60 63 07 52 +33 (0)1 64 41 90 15
CEASAR
HMI/SCADA
Ethway Uni-Tel.way Modbus Modbus Plus
InTel.ligent Visual Sensor (IVS)
P-CIM
HMI/SCADA
PC1000, PCI1000, PC2000, PC4000 and PCI4000
Communication interface boards
PCVUE 32, FRONTVUE, DATAVUE Topkapi
HMI/SCADA
HMI/SCADA
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+33 (0)2 43 44 74 00 +33 (0)2 43 44 74 01 www.aronet.com +1 702-348-1816 +1 702-348-7336 www.arora@sierra.net +1 954-771-9007 +1 954-771-9524 www.artec-systems.com +33 (0)1 47 14 32 00 +33 (0)1 47 08 53 85 www.ascojoucomatic.fr +1 281-584-1000 +1 281-584-4329 www.aspentech.com +41 (0)21 863 63 63 +41 (0)21 863 63 99 www.atlascopco.com/controls +1 905-713-3700 +1 905-713-3708 www.robominer.co +1 707-578-5882 +1 707-579-5756 www.automatedsolutions.com +1 314-993-4080 +1 314-993-7183 www.act/stl.com
Micro 2x16 III welding controller
Ethway Fipway Uni-Tel.way Modbus Plus Modbus Uni-Tel.way Fipway Ethway Modbus, Modbus Plus, Fipway, Ethway, Uni-Tel.way, Symax/Synet, Autres Ethway Fipway Uni-Tel.way Modbus Fipio Uni-Tel.way Modbus Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus
System 816 Dialer2000
HMI/SCADA Communication software
Drivers
Communication software
Modbus Plus
BUSLINK and BUSLINK ISO pneumatic valves
Pneumatic I/O interface
Fipio
SetCim
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Plus
Socapel PAM
Drive
Fipio
Broadband Gateway
Communication hardware
Modbus Plus
ASMBPLUS.OCX ASMBSERIAL
Modbus Plus Modbus
GEMINI
Miscellaneous software
S800, Quantum
Tel. Fax
+33 (0)4 93 07 51 07 +33 (0)4 93 07 52 09
INCOM Software development
Communication interface boards Services
Ethway, Fipway, Uni-Tel.way, Modbus, Modbus Plus Ethway, Fipway, Uni-Tel.way, Modbus, Modbus Plus
9/10
Product directory

Company Automation Science, Inc. 150 Buckskin Drive Weston, MA 02193 United States AVG Automation 343 St. Paul Boulevard Carol Stream, IL 60188 United States Beckwood Services, Inc. P.O. Box 985, 27 Hale Spring Road - Plaistow, NH 03865 United States Bihl & Wiedemann Kaefertaler Str. 164 Mannheim, D-68167 Germany Bitronics Inc. P.O. Box 22290 261 Brodhead Road Lehigh Valley, PA 18002 United States BLH Electronics, Inc. 75 Shawmut Road Canton, MA 02021 United States Cape Software 333 N. Sam Houston Pkwy, Suite 290, Houston, TX 77060 United States Ci Technologies Pty Ltd. Pymble NSW 2088 Australia CimQuest, Inc.- Products Group 518 Kimberton Road, Suite 325 Phoenixville, PA 19460 United States Cimtech 20 rue de lindustrie B-1400 Nivelles Belgium Codra 10 Avenue de Norvge, Narvik F-91953 Courtaboeuf Cedex France Commercial Timesharing, Inc. 2650 South Arlington Road Akron, OH 44319 United States Control Techniques Drives, Inc. 359 Lang Boulevard Grand Island, NY 14072 United States ControlSoft, Inc. 14077 Cedar Avenue, Suite 200 Cleveland, OH 44118 United States Curry Controls Company P.O. Box 5408 1019 Pipkin Road Lakeland, FL 33811 United States Cutler-Hammer, Inc. P.O. Box 6166 173 Heatherdown Drive Westerville, OH 43081 United States CyberLogic Technologies, Inc. 340 East Big Beaver Rd Suite 208 United States Cycle Software, Inc. 130 Prospect Street, Suite 202 Cambridge, MA 02139 United States Danfoss Electronic Drives 2995 Eastrock Drive Rockford, IL 61109 United States
Tel./Fax/URL Tel. +1 508-358-4186 Fax +1 508-358-4186
Reference OMNIRAMA
Category HMI/SCADA
Technology Modbus Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 630-668-3900 +1 630-668-4676 www.AVG.net +1 603-382-3840 +1 603-382-3852 www.beckwood.com +49-621-339-2723 +49-621-339-2239 www.bihl-wiedemann.de +1 610-865-2444 +1 610-865-2743 www.bitronics.com
Resolver Interface-DeviceNet Scanner Module DeviceNet interface
Motion/axis control Communication interface boards
Modbus Plus Quantum
Autres
AS-i/Modbus Plus Gateway 1090/1091
Modbus Plus
MultiComm Power Meter & Power Plex Digital Transducer
Modbus
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 781-821-2000 +1 781-828-1451 www.blh.com +1 281-448-5177 +1 281-448-2607 www.capesoftware.com
LCp-100, LCp-200, DXp-40 Weight indicator controllers
Modbus Modbus Plus
VP Link
Modbus Plus
+ 61 2-9855-1000 + 61 2-9488-9164 www.cit.com.au +1 610-935-8282 +1 610-935-1902 www.cimquest.com
Citect
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Plus
IN-GEAR ActiveX
Modbus Modbus Plus
+32 (0) 67 88 36 66 +32 (0) 67 88 36 88 www.cimview.com +33 (0)1 60 92 34 34 +33 (0)1 60 92 34 35 www.codra.fr
CIMVIEW
HMI/SCADA
Panorama
HMI/SCADA
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 330-644-3059 +1 330-644-8110 www.comtime.com +1 716-773-2321 +1 716-774-8327 www.ctdrives.com +1 216-397-3900 +1 216-381-5001 www.controlsoftinc.com
SA85 for Windows NT/Unix
Ethway Fipway Uni-Telway Modbus Ethway Fipway Uni-Telway Modbus, Modbus Plus Autres Modbus Plus
Unidrive, Mentor II/ Quantum III
Drive
Modbus Plus
INTUNE V4 MANTRA NT
Miscellaneous software Miscellaneous software
Modbus Modbus Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+1 941-646-5781 +1 941-646-3899 www.currycontrols.com
Modpac Plus RF Modem
Modbus Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+1 614-882-3282 +1 614-895-7111 www.cutlerhammer.com
PanelMate 500 AMI 6000
HMI/operator panel HMI/operator panel
Modbus Plus Modbus Plus
+1 248-740-9842 +1 248-740-9821 www.cyberlogictech.com +1 617-576-6900 +1 617-576-6501 www.livedata.com
MBX Driver Remote MBX Driver Virtual MBX Driver MBX Bridge Live Data Live Data Quantum
Communication software Communication software Communication software Communication software Communication software Communication software
Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus, Modbus Plus Quantum
Tel. Fax URL
+1 815-398-2770 +1 815-398-2869 www.danfoss.com
VTL Series 5000
Drive
Modbus Plus
9/11
Product directory

Company Data-Linc Group 2635 151st PL. NE Redmond, WA 98052 United States Delta Computer Systems, Inc. 11719 Northeast 95th Street, Suite D Vancouver, WA 98682 United States DLRA Projects (Pty) Ltd. P.O. Box 483 - 108 Hendrick Verwoerd Dr., Randburg Pinegowrie 2123 South Africa Doble Engineering 85 Walnut Street Watertown, MA 02473 United States ELECTRO Industries/Gaugetech 1800 Shames Drive Westbury, NY 11590 United States Endress + Hauser 3 rue du Rhin F-68330 Huningue France Escort Memory Systems 3 Victor Square Scotts Valley, CA 95066 United States Etic 13, Chemin du Vieux Chne ZIRST 4201 38942 Meylan Cedex France ExperTune, Inc. 4734 Sonseeahray Drive Hubertus, WI 53033 United States Festo 5 Rue Montgoler F-93116 Rosny sous Bois France Fiber Options, Inc. 80 Orville Drive, Suite 102 Bohemia, NY 11716 United States Fisher Rosemount 1 Rue Traversire, Silic 125 F-94523 Rungis Cedex France FORTH, Inc. 111 N. Sepulveda Blvd., Suite 300 Manhattan Beach, CA 90266 United States Foxboro Company 33 Commercial Street Foxboro, MA 02035 United States Gener Z.I de Saint Lambert des Leves BP 163 49414 Saumur cedex France Gensym Corporation 125 Cambridge Park Drive Cambridge, MA 02140 United States Georges Renault (GRIN) 99 Route de Clisson F-44230 Sebastien sur Loire France GSE Systems, Inc. 9189 Red Branch Road Columbia, MD 02145 United States Hewlett Packard 2, avenue du Lac F- 91040 Evry France
Tel./Fax/URL Tel. +1 425-882-2206 Fax +1 425-867-0865 URL www.data-linc.com
Tel. Fax URL
+1 360-254-8688 +1 360-254-5435 www.deltacompsys.com
Reference FDM7000, MDL500 FSK, LCM100 FSK, SRM6000, DLM4000-DL, DLM4000-LL, CCS9000, LLM1 100 Bell 202 FSK, SRM6200E MMC120 00 2 axis MMC188/40/41 4 axis RMC100 2/8 axis
Category Communication hardware
Technology Modbus
Communication hardware Motion/axis control Motion/axis control Motion/axis control
Ethway Quantum S800 Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+27 11-886-4704 +27 11-886-5739 www.dlra.co.za
Adroit
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 617-926-4900 +1 617-926-0528 www.doble.com +1 516-334-0870 +1 516-338-4741 www.electroind.com +33 (0)3 89 69 67 68 +33 (0)3 89 69 48 02 www.endress.com +1 831-438-7000 +1 831-438-5768 www.ems-rd.com +33 (0)4 76 04 20 00 +33 (0)4 76 04 20 01 www.etictelecom.com
INSITE
Modbus Plus
Futura+ Series DWVA 300 DMMS 300+ ZA 674 gateway
Miscellaneous sensor Miscellaneous sensor Miscellaneous sensor Communication hardware
Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus Modbus, Modbus Plus Fipio
CM900 CM1000 CM41/CM42 FT300 concentrator Modem
Communication hardware Communication hardware Communication hardware Communication hardware Communication hardware
Compact S800 Modbus Plus Uni-Telway Modbus Plus, Uni-Telway
+1 414-628-0088 +1 414-628-0087 www.expertune.com +33 (0)1 49 35 23 23 +33 (0)1 49 35 23 33 www.festo.com +1 516-567-8320 +1 516-567-8322 www.beroptions.com +33 (0)1 49 79 73 00 +33 (0)1 49 79 73 99 www.frco.com +1 310-372-8493 +1 310-318-7130 www.forth.com
PID analyser tuner
Modbus
type 02, 03 and 04B (ISO), type 10 (CPV) and 12 (CPA)
Pneumatic I/O interface Pneumatic I/O interface
Fipio Fipio
2291M 2281M
Communication hardware Communication hardware
Modbus Plus Autres
MG-HRT-WF-002-FR Hart / Fipio gateway
Fipio
Express
Modbus Plus
+1 508-543-8750 +1 508-549-4800 www.foxboro.com +33 (0)2 41 83 13 00 +33 (0)2 41 67 19 20 www.gener.fr
Intelligent Automation Series
Modbus Modbus Plus
Modem
Modbus Uni-Telway
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax
+1 617-547-2500 +1 617-547-1962 www.gensym.com +33 (0)2 40 80 20 00 +33 (0)2 40 33 27 07
G2 Real-time Expert System
Modbus Plus
SMA 68000 screwing controller
Uni-Telway
+1 410-772-3500 +1 410-772-3611 www.gses.com +33 (0)1 69 82 60 60 +33 (0)1 69 91 84 32 www.hp.com
SNCC D/3
Modbus Plus S800
Driver HP UX
Ethway
9/12
Product directory

Company Hilco Technologies, Inc. 3300 Rider Trail South Suite 300 Earth City, MO 63045-1338 United States Hilscher GmbH Rheinstrabe 78 Hattersheim, D-65796 Germany Hirschmann PO Box 1649 D-72606 Nrtingen Germany HMS Fieldbus Systems AB Pilefeltsgatan 73 S-302 50 Halmstad Sweden Honeywell Parc Technologique Bt. Mercury BP 87 F-91193 Gif sur Yvette France Honeywell Industrial Automation 16404 N. Black Canyon Highway Phoenix, AZ 85053 United States Iconics, Inc. 100 Foxborough Boulevard Foxborough, MA 02035 United States Indramat Dr Nebel strasse, 2 D-97816 Lohr am Main Germany Industrial Systems Monitoring/AdVoTech 3201 Lorna Road Birmingham, AL 35216 United States Integrated Control Technology Inc. 871 Turnpike Street, Suite 208 North Andover, MA 01845 United States Integrated Industrial Technologies, Inc. 221 Seventh Street, Suite 200 Pittsburgh, PA 15238 United States Intellution 1 Edgewater Drive Norwood, MA 02062 United States IPAC Technologies, Inc. 260 South Campbell Valparaiso, IN 46385 United States Itmi Aptor 61 Chemin du Vieux Chne F-38244 Meylan France Kuka 1 Rue Blaise Pascal F-91380 Chilly Mazarin France Mac Valves, Inc. 30569 Beck Road Wixom, MI 48393-7011 United States MagneTek, Inc. 16555 W Ryerson Road New Berlin, WI 53151 United States Mauell Corporation 31 Old Cabin Hollow Road Dillsburg, PA 17019-8815 United States MDT Software 2520 NorthWinds Parkway Suite 100 Alpharetta GA678/297-1000 United States
Tel./Fax/URL Tel. +1 314-298-9100 Fax +1 314-298-1729 URL www.hilco.com
Reference Monitrol
Category HMI/SCADA
Technology Modbus Plus
+49 6190 9907 0 +49 6190 9907 50 www.hilscher.com +49 7127 14 1479 +49 7127 14 1495 www.hirschmann.com +46 (0)35 168 200 +46 (0)35 168 210 www.hms.se +33 (0)1 60 19 80 00 +33 (0)1 60 19 81 81 www.honeywell.com
KPO 104-MBP, PVK 20-MBP CIF 30-MBP, SCA-MBP
Modbus Plus
OZD FIP
Fipio, Fipway
AnyBus AB64 AnyBus Data Transfer
Communication interface boards Communication interface boards
Fipio Modbus Modbus Plus Fipway
Excel 500
+1 602-313-5000 +1 602-313-4990 www.iac.honeywell.com +1 508-543-8600 +1 508-543-1503 www.iconics.com +49 (0)93 5240 0 +49 (0)93 5240 4885 www.indramat.com +1 205-824-0222 +1 205-824-0291 www.voicemmi.com
SCAN 3000
Modbus Modbus Plus
GENISIS-32
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Plus
MTC 200 CNC
Motion/axis control
Fipway
Voice MMI ISM communicator
HMI/operator panel HMI/operator panel
Modbus, Modbus Plus Modbus
Tel. Fax URL
+1 978-557-5882 +1 978-557-5884 www.ictglobal.com
IBS-802 gateway Interbus-S
Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+1 412-828-1200 +1 412-828-0320 www.i2t-inmotion.com
IFC 020 2-Axis resolver SCM 020/120 Stepper Motor Control Fix Dmacs
Motion/axis control Motion/axis control
Quantum Quantum Compact Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 781-769-8878 +1 781-769-1990 www.intellution.com +1 219-464-7212 +1 219-462-5387 www.ipact.com +33 (0)4 76 41 40 00 +33 (0)4 76 41 28 05 +33 (0)1 69 79 80 00 +33 (0)1 69 79 80 01 www.kuka.com +1 248-624-7700 +1 248-624-0549 www.macvalves.com +1 414-782-0200 +1 414-782-1283 www.magnetek.com +1 717-432-8686 +1 717-432-8688 www.mauell-us.com +1 678-297-1050 +1 678-297-1003 www.mdtsoft.com
HMI/SCADA
IPACT SA85 Device Driver IPACT Communication Library
Communication software Communication software
CIU communicator
Ethway Fipway Fipio
KR C1 robot controller
Motion/axis control
Air Valve Interface
Modbus Plus
GPD 515 GPD333AC
Drive Drive
DI64 Plus 99-61-886 DO128 Plus 99-61-P91N
Electrical I/O interface Electrical I/O interface
Mass Autosave
Modbus Modbus Plus
9/13
Product directory

Company Mettler-Toledo, Inc. 350 West Wilson Bridge Road Worthington, OH 43085 United States Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vermon Hills IL60061 United States Nemasoft, Inc. 124 Washington St., Suite 201 Foxboro, MA 02035 United States NexxCorp Information Systems, Inc. 235 Beatty Avenue Oshawa, Ontario L1H 3B4 Canada Niobrara Research & Development Corp. P.O. Box 3418 2400 Tanyard Road Joplin, MO 64803 United States NovaTech, LLC 13604 West 107th Street Lenexa, KS 66215 United States Panel-Tec, Inc. P.O. Box 23942607 Leeman Ferry Road, Suite 7 Huntsville, AL 35804 United States Parker Rue Henri Becquerel F-27031 Evreux France ProSoft Technology, Inc. 9801 Camino Media, # 105 Bakerseld, CA 93311 United States Prosyst 70 Rue Jean Jaures 59770 - Marly France RACO Manufacturing & Engineering 1400 62nd Street Emeryville, CA 94608 United States Robicon 500 Hunt Valley Drive New Kensington, PA 15068 United States SAF Drive Systems Ltd. 88 Ardelt Avenue Kitchener, Ontario N2C 2C9 Canada Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. 2350 NE Hopkins Court Pullman, WA 99163-5603 United States Sciaky 119 Quai Jules Guesde, BP 43 F-94401 Vitry sur Seine France Secheron Ltd. 14 Avenue de Secheron Geneva 21 Switzerland Silicomp 195 Rue Lavoisier F-38330 Montbonnot St Martin France Simulation Sciences 2500 City West Boulevard Ste. 1200, Houston, TX 77042 United States SISCO, Inc. 6605 19 1/2 Mile Road Sterling Heights, MI 48314-1408 United States
Tel./Fax/URL Tel. +1 614-438-4511 Fax +1 614-438-4770 URL www.mt.com Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax +1 847-478-2000 +1 847-478-0327 www.meau.ea.com +1 508-698-3611 +1 508-698-3782 www.nemasoft.com +1 905-433-7566 +1 905-579-5699
Reference Jaguar Weigh Scale
Category Miscellaneous sensor
Technology Modbus Plus
FR-A500
Drive
Modbus Plus
Paragon 500/550, AutoNet, PowerVIEW
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Modbus Plus
ModLINX
Modbus Modbus Plus
Tel. Fax URL
+1 417-624-8918 +1 417-624-8920 www.niobrara.com
+1 913-451-1880 +1 913-451-2845 www.novatech-llc.com +1 256-534-8132 +1 256-534-4769 www.panel-tec.com
MEB-TCP Bridge PMN Modbus Plus to POWERLOGIC QSPXM Seriplex Master QUCM Universal Communications MUCM-B Modem Micro PLC
Communication hardware Communication hardware Communication interface boards Communication interface boards Communication interface boards Communication interface boards
Modbus Plus Modbus Plus Quantum Quantum Momentum Autres
BG-3500 MD-3000
Communication interface boards Communication interface boards
+33 (0)2 32 23 34 00 +33 (0)2 32 28 98 07 www.parker.com +1 805-664-7208 +1 805-664-7233 www.prosoft-technology.com +33 (0)3 20 90 43 33 +33 (0)3 20 90 43 34 www.prosyst.fr +1 510-658-6713 +1 510-658-3153 www.racoman.com
Valvetronic 164
Fipio
SCANport Communication Adapter 1560-MBP
Modbus Plus
SIMAC
Modbus Plus
Verbatim Gateway
HMI/operator panel
Modbus Plus
+1 724-339-9500 +1 724-339-8100 www.robicon.com +1 519-743-5491 +1 519-743-3610 www.safdrives.com +1 509-332-1890 +1 509-332-6187 www.seline.com
Clean Power, 454, Perfect Harmony
Drive
Modbus Modbus Plus
SAFphire - Programmable Linear Controller
Modbus Modbus Plus Symax/Synet Modbus Plus
SEL-2711
+33 (0)1 45 73 43 00 +33 (0)1 46 82 58 80 www.sciaky.com +41 22 739 4111 +41 22 738 7305 www.secheron.com +33 (0)4 76 41 66 66 +33 (0)4 76 41 66 67 www.silicomp.com +1 713-683-1710 +1 713-683-6613 www.simsci.com +1 810-254-0020 +1 810-254-0053 www.sisconet.com
CPS2000 RL2
Fipio
VMB OZ
Modbus Plus
Software development
Services
Fipio Fipway
AIM AIM\AT
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Modbus Plus
AX-S4 MMS
Modbus Modbus Plus
9/14
Product directory

Company Sofrel Telecontrol 2 rue du Plessis F-35770 Vern sur Seiche France Spectrum Controls, Inc. P.O. Box 5533 2700 Richards Road, Suite 200 Bellevue, WA 98005 United States S-S Technologies Inc. 50 Northland Road Waterloo, Ontario N2V 1N3 Canada Steeplechase Software 1330 Eisenhower Place Ann Arbor, MI 48108 United States SWAC Odenpullach 1 82041 Oberhaching Germany TA Engineering Co., Inc. 1150 Moraga Way Moraga, CA 94556 United States Tasnet, Inc. 5271 102nd Ave. North Pinellas Park, FL 33782 United States Toshiba 13131 West Little York Rd Houston, TX 77041 United States TR Electronic Eglishalde, 6 D-78647 Trossingen Germany TURCK, Inc. 3000 Campus Drive Plymouth, MN 55441 United States Weed Instrument P.O. Box 300 707 Jeffrey Way Round Rock, TX 78680-0300 United States Westermo Teleindustri AB SE-640 40 Stora Sundby Sweeden Wonderware 100 Technology Drive Irvine, CA 92718 United States Xycom, Inc. 750 North Maple Road Saline Michigan MI 48176 United States
Tel./Fax/URL Tel. +33 (0)2 99 04 89 00 Fax +33 (0)2 99 04 89 01
Tel. Fax URL
+1 425-746-9481 +1 425-641-9473 www.spectrumctls.com
Reference SOFREL S50, RTU for technical facilities SOFREL S50 Thermix, RTU for HVAC applications 140 ACI 051 : 32-Ch analog input SOI-260
Category HMI/SCADA HMI/SCADA Electrical I/O interface HMI/operator panel
Technology Uni-Telway Modbus Uni-Telway Modbus Quantum S800
Tel. Fax URL
+1 519-725-5136 +1 519-725-1515 www.sstech.on.ca
Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL Tel. Fax URL
+1 734-975-8100 +1 734-975-8123 www.steeplechase.com +49 89 316 8660 +49 89 316 866 80 www.swac.de +1 925-376-8500 +1 925-376-4977 www.ta-eng.com +1 727-544-1555 +1 727-545-8975 www.tasnet.com +1 713-466-0277 +1 713-466-8773 www.toshiba.com +49 (0) 7425 228 0 +49 (0) 7425 228 33 www.trelectronic.com +1 612-553-7300 +1 612-553-0708 www.turck.com +1 512-434-2844 +1 512-434-2851 www.weed instrument.com
for HVAC applications Universal Communication System Modicon RIO Interface Card QNX 4.X Device Administrator PICS Simulation software X-Link Visual Logic Controller - VLC-PDK
Communication interface boards Communication interface boards Communication software Miscellaneous software Communication software Miscellaneous software
Modbus Modbus S800 Modbus Plus Autres Modbus, Modbus Plus Autres
BTK 16, 32, 64, BT.GDA
HMI/operator panel
Modbus Plus
AIMAX for Windows
HMI/SCADA
Modbus Modbus Plus
Substation Automation and Communication Software Systems
Modbus
G3 Inverter
Drive
Modbus Plus
CE65 absolute rotary encoders LA 68K linear absolute coders
Miscellaneous sensor Miscellaneous sensor
Fipio Fipio
Sensoplex MC
Modbus Plus
Fiber Optic Modem 6000 EoTec
Modbus Modbus Plus S800
+46 16 61200 +46 16 61180 www.westermo.se +1 949-727-3200 +1 949-727-3270 www.wonderware.com +1 734-429-4971 +1 734-429-1010 www.xycom.com
Modem
Modbus Uni-Telway
Intouch
HMI/SCADA
34XX
HMI/operator panel
Ethway Fipway Uni-Telway Modbus Plus Uni-Telway Modbus Modbus Plus
9/15
Schneider Electric worldwide
Up-dated: 23-06-2000
Algeria b Schneider Electric
Bureau de Liaison Algrie 04 rue du Berry El Mouradia - 16070 Alger Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153 Birostrasse 11 1239 Wien Floor 1 - Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box 355 _ 304 Manama Dieweg 3 B - 1180 Brussels Avenida Das Naes Unidas 23223 Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 So Paulo-SP Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov 1407 Sofiav BP12087 - Douala Tel.: +213 269 80 03 / 08 Fax: +213 269 80 02 Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 Fax: +54 1 716 88 77 Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 Fax: +61 296 29 83 40 Tel.: +431 610 540 Fax: +431 610 54 65 Tel.: +97 322 7897 Fax: +97 321 8313 Tel.: +3223737711 Fax: +3223753858 Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34 Tel.: +3592 919 42 Fax: +3592 962 44 39 Tel.: +237 42 69 30 Fax: +237 43 11 94 Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 Fax: +1 416 752 4203 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 Fax: +56 2 444 3097 Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13 Tel.: +57 1 413 80 08 Fax: +57 1 413 90 12 Tel.: +506 232-60-55 Fax: +506 232-04-26 www.schneider-ca.com www.schneider.ca www.schneider-electric.co.cl www.schneider-electric.com.cn www.schneider-electric.be www.schneider-electric.com.br www.schneider-electric.com.ar www.schneider.com.au
Argentina Australia
b Schneider Argentina
b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit

Limited
Austria Bahrain
b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. b Schneider Electric
www.schneider-electric.at
Belgium Brazil
b Schneider Electric nv/sa b Schneider Electric Brasil Ltda.
Bulgaria Cameroon Canada Chile China
b Schneider Electric
www.schneiderelectric.bg
b Schneider Electric SA - Cameroun 16, rue de l'Htel de Ville b Schneider Canada b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. b Schneider Beijing
19, Waterman Avenue M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario Avda. Pdte Eduardo Frei Montalva, 6115-B, Conchali - Santiago Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District - 100004 Beijing Calle 45A #102-45 Santafe de Bogota, Bogota 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana, Pavas, San Jos, Costa Rica C.A. Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR - 10000 Zagreb Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 36- N306-Apto1 Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar - Playa Habana Thmova 13 Praha 8 - 186 00 Baltorpbakken 14 DK-2750 Ballerup Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo Av. de los Shyris y Rio Coca Esq. Edificio Eurocentro Segundo Piso - 6466 Quito 68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo Sinikalliontie 16 02630 Espoo 5, rue Nadar 92500 Rueil Malmaison Gothaer Strae 29 D-40880 Ratingen Private Mail Bag - Kotoa Airport Accra 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia GR - 14564 Kifissia Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Sun Hung Kai Centre, 30 Harbour Road, Wanchai Fehrvri t 108 112 H-1116 Budapest
Colombia Costa Rica
b Schneider de Colombia S.A. b Schneider Centroamrica Ltda.
Cte d'Ivoire Croatia Cuba
b Schneider Electric Afrique de

l'Ouest et Centrale
Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30 Tel.: +385 1 367 100 Fax: +385 1 367 111 Tel.: +53 724 15 59 Fax: +53 724 12 17
b Schneider Electric SA b Schneider Electric
Czech Republic Denmark Dominican Republic
b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o. b Schneider Electric A/S b Schneider Electric
Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49 Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 Fax: +4544 68 5255 Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63 Fax: +1 809 334 66 68
www.schneider-electric.cz www.schneider-electric.dk
Ecuador
b Schneider Ecuador
Tel.: +593 2 25 03 23 Fax: +593 2 43 49 40 Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 Fax: +20 24 01 66 87 Tel.: +358 9 527 000 Fax: +358 9 5270 0376 Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20 Tel.: +49210 240 40 Fax: +492 10 240 49 256 Tel. : +23321 70 10 842/11 687 Fax : +233 21 77 96 22 Tel.: +3016 29 52 00 Fax: +3016 29 52 10 Tel.: +809 334 66 63 Fax: +809 334 66 68 www.schneider-electric.com.gr www.schneider.com.eg www.schneider-electric.fi www.schneider-electric.fr www.schneider-electric.de
Egypt Finland France Germany
b Schneider Electric Egypt b Schneider Electric Oy b Schneider Electric SA b Schneider Electric GmbH b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric AE b Schneider Electric
Ghana Greece Haiti
Hong Kong
b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong)

Ltd
Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21 Fax: +852 28 11 10 29 Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 Fax: +36 1 206 1429 www.schneider-electric.hu
Hungary
b Schneider Electric Hungria

Villamossgi Rt.
9/16
Up-dated: 23-06-2000
India Indonesia b Schneider Electric India Pvt Ltd. b P.T. Schneider Indonesia
D-27 - South Extention Part II 110 049 New Dehli Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR P.O. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran Maynooth Road Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi) SK Bldg, Sendagaya 4-14-4, Sendagaya Shibuya-Ku - 151 Tokyo Power Technics Complex PO Box 46345 - Nairobi Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat Rue Tornia, 4 IIIB, office 203 LV1050 Riga SODECO Square Office Tower Bloc B, 13th Floor Rue de Damas - Beyrouth rue Juozapaviciaus, 11 2600 Vilnus Tel.: +91 116 25 76 58 Fax: +91 116 25 80 80 Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16 Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87 Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 Fax: +353+0 1 6012201 Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 Fax: +39 39 609 1510 Tel.: +81 354 74 44 74 Fax: +81 354 74 44 70 Tel.: +254 2.824.156 Fax: +254 2.824.157 Tel.: +965 240 75 46 Fax: +965 240 75 06 Tel.: +371 750 32 32 Tel.: +371 750 32 34 Fax: +371 732 07 97 Tel.: +961 1.613.006/007 Fax: +96 1.613.008 Tel.: +370 275 31 73 Tel.: +370 275 32 64 Fax: +370 272 19 78 Tel.: +60 37 05 11 50 Fax: +60 37 05 11 70 www.schneiderelectric.com.my www.schneiderelectric.ie www.schneiderelectric.it www.schneiderelectric-in.com www.schneider-electric.co.id
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
b Telemecanique Iran
Ireland Italy
b Schneider Electric Ireland b Schneider Electric S.p.A.
Japan
b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd
www.schneider-electric.co.jp
Kenya Kuwait Latvia
b Schneider East Africa b Schneider Electric Kuwait b Schneider Electric
Lebanon
b Schneider Electric Liban
Lithuania
Malaysia
b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1

Bhd Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park Shah Alam 40150 Selangor Darul Ehsan Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lzarde 97232 Le Lamentin Calz. Rojo Gomez N 1121 Col. Guadalupe del Moral Mxico 09300 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 2003 RV Haarlem 14 Charann Place Avondale P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Auckland Plot 25 Sanni Tola Sonolki Close Off Harold Sodipo Crescent PO Box 12 505 - Ikeja - Lagos Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat 302 Clifton Center Clifton Block J - Karachi 75500 Los Telares n231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 03 1314 Batangas Street Makati City 1234 - Metro-Manila
Martinique
Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00 Fax: +05 96 51 11 26 Tel.: +525 686 30 00 Fax: +525 686 24 09 Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69 Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 Fax: +31 23 512 4100 Tel.: +64 +9 820 1820 Fax: +64 +9 820 1821 Tel.: +234 14 93 63 99 Fax: +234 14 97 45 99 www.schneiderelectric.com.mx www.schneider.co.ma
Mexico
b Groupe Schneider Mexico
Morocco
b Schneider Electric Maroc
Netherlands New Zealand
b Schneider Electric BV b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd
www.schneider-electric.nl
Nigeria
b Merlin Gerin Nigeria Ltd
Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Philippines
b Schneider Electric Norge A/S b Schneider Electric CA b Schneider Electric Pakistan b Schneider Electric Peru S.A.
Tel.: +47 6924 9700 Fax: +47 6925 7871 Tel.: +968 77 163 64 Fax: +968 77 104 49 Tel.: +92 21 586 3561 to 63 Fax: +92 21 586 3564 Tel.: +511 348 44 11 Fax: +511 348 05 23 Tel.: +63 28 44 84 18 Fax: +63 28 16 00 63 Tel.: +48 22 606 25 00 Fax: +48 22 606 11 66 Fax: +48 22 606 11 58 Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 Fax: +351 21 416 5857 Tel.: +97 4424358 Fax: +97 4424358 Tel.: +262 28 14 28 Fax: +262 28 39 37 Tel.: +401 203 06 50 Fax: +401 232 15 98
www.schneider-electric.no
www.schneider-electric.com.pe
b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc
Poland
b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Domaniewska 41

02-672 - Warszawa
www.schneider-electric.pl
Portugal
b Schneider Electric Portugal
Av.do Forte, 3 - Edificio Sucia II, Piso 3-A, CP 2028 Carnaxide 2795 Linda-A-Velha c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484 Doha Immeuble Futura, 190, rue des 2 canons BP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde Bd Ficusului n42 Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 Bucuresti
www.schneiderelectric.pt
Qatar
b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch
Reunion
Romania
www.schneider-electric.ro
9/17
Up-dated: 23-06-2000
Russian Federation b Schneider Electric CEI
80, Leningradsky Prospekt 125178 Moscow Second Industrial City P.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh BP 15952 - Dakar-Fann Quartier Almadies - Dakar #02-17/20 TechPoint Singapore 569059 Borekova 10 SK-821 06 Bratislava Techniski Biro, Dunasjka 106 pp 69 61000 Ljubljana Cnr Bekker & Montrose roads 1685 - Midrand. 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku - 150-037 Seoul Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 08007 Barcelona Djupdalsvgen 17/19 19129 Sollentuna Schermenwaldstrasse 11 Postfach - CH - 3063 Ittigen Shakib Arslan Street Abou Roumaneh PO Box 33876 - Damas 110 Taipei Tel.: +7 502 224 5050 Tel.: +7 502 224 5033 / 5034 Fax: +7 502 224 5220 Tel.: +966 1 265 1515 Fax: +966 1 265 1860 Tel.: +221 820 68 05 Fax: +221 820 58 50 Tel.: +65 484 78 77 Fax: +65 484 78 00 Tel.: +4217 552 40 10/20 Fax: +4217 552 40 00 Tel.: +386 61 168 5007 Fax: +386 61 168 5426 Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 Fax: +27 11 315 8830 Tel.: +82 2 2630 9700 Fax: +82 2 2630 9800 Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 Fax: +34 93 484 3308 Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 Fax: +46 8 623 84 85 Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 Fax: +41 31 917 3355 Tel.: +963 11 333 10 26 Fax: +963 11 331 08 67 Tel.: +886 2 27 33 14 64 Fax: +886 2 27 33 64 10 Tel.: +66 2 261 1899 Fax: +66 2 260 8235 Tel.: +216 1 960 477 Fax: +216 1 960 342 www.schneiderelectric.com.tr www.schneider-electric.com.tw www.schneider-electric.co.th www.schneider-electric.co.za www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/ www.schneider-electric.com.sg
Saudi Arabia Senegal Singapore
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Afrique de

L'Ouest Ltd
b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65
Slovak Republic Slovenia South Africa South Korea
b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol

s.r.o.
www.schneider-electric.sk
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric South Africa

(PTY) Ltd
b Schneider Electric Korea
Spain Sweden Switzerland Syrian Arab Republic
b Schneider Electric Espaa, S.A. b Schneider Electric AB b Schneider Electric (Switzerland)

S.A.
www.schneiderelectric.es www.schneider-electric.se www.schneider-electric.ch
b Schneider Electric Syria
Taiwan, Republic of China Thailand
b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 11F-2, N51, Keelung Road, Sec.2 b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd
20th Floor Richmond Building 75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Bangkok 10110 2045 Les Berges du lac Tunis
Tunisia Turkey Ukraine United Arab Emirates
b Schneider Electric Tunisie b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve

Ticaret A.S.
Ttnc Mehmet Efendi Cad. N:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Kat 1-2 - 81080 Gztepe Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75 Rue Krechtchalik 2 252601 Kiev PO Box 29580 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower - Abu Dhabi Braywick House East Windsor Road - Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 1 DN North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine - IL 60067 Gabriela Pereira 3039 Montevideo Calle 162/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas Me Linh Point Tower 2 Ngo Duc Ke Street, District 1 Ho Chi Minh City Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 Fax: +380 44 462 04 24 Tel.: +9712 6 339444 Fax: +9712 6 316606 Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508 Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 Fax: +1 847 925 7500 Tel.: +59 82 707 2392 Fax: +59 82 709 0713 Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 Fax: +58 2 243 60 09 Tel.: +84 8 829 60 72 Fax: +84 8 829 60 67
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi
United Kingdom
b Schneider Electric Ltd
www.schneider.co.uk
United States
www.squared.com
Uruguay Venezuela
b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A
www.schneider-electric.com.ve
Viet Nam
b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric S.A. Unit 808, 8th Floor
Yugoslavia Zambia
b Schneider Electric A.S. b Schneider Zambia
Nikole Tesle 3 11181 Beograd Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036 - Accra Road PO Box 22792 - Kitwe
Tel.: +381 11 319 15 03 Fax: +381 11 319 15 20 Tel.: +260 222 22 52 Fax: +260 222 83 89
Zimbabwe
Zimbabwe Liaison Office Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180 75A Second Street Fax: +263 4 707 176 (corner Livingstone Avenue) - Harare
9/18
Up-dated: 23-06-2000
For all the other countries, contacts are ensured by the Regional Divisions (see below). Africa & Middle-East Zone Arabic Peninsula Region b Schneider Electric
Second Industrial City P.O. Box 89249 11682 Riyadh Saudi Arabia Sanayi Ve Ticaret A.S. Ttnc Mehmet Efendi Cad. N:110 Kat. 1-2 81080 Gtztepe-Istanbul Turkey 68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 11371 Cairo Egypt 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca Morocco Cnr Bekker & Montrose roads 1685 - Midrand. South Africa D-27 South Extension Part II 110 049 New Dehli India Tel.: +(966) 1 265 15 15 Fax: +(966)1 265 18 60
Middle-East Region
b Schneider Elektrik A.S.
Tel.: +(90) 2163 86 95 70 Fax: +(90) 21 63 86 38 75
www.schneider-electric.com.tr
North-East Africa Region
b Schneider Electric Egypt
Tel.: +(20) 24 01 01 19 Fax: +(20) 24 01 66 87
www.schneider.com.eg
North-West Africa Region
b Schneider Electric Maroc
Tel.: +(212) 299 08 48 57 Fax: +(212) 299 08 67 et 69
www.schneider.co.ma
South Africa Region
b Schneider Electric South Africa

(PTY) Ltd
Tel.: +(27) 11 254 6400 Fax: +(27) 11 315 8830 Tel.: +(91) 116 25 76 58 Fax: +(91) 116 25 80 80
www.schneider-electric.co.za
South Asia Region
b Schneider Electric India Pvt Ltd.
www.schneiderelectric.in.com
Asian Zone Great China b Schneider Beijing

Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd, Chaoyang District 100004 Beijing China 460 Alexandra Road #15-01 PSA building 119963 Singapore Tel.: +(86) 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +(86) 10 65 90 00 13 www.schneider-electric.com.cn
South-East Asia
b Schneider South East Asia (HQ)

Pte Ltd.
Tel.: +(65) 270 23 66 Fax: +(65) 273 46 10
European Zone ECE-CIS Countries b Schneider Electric CEI

80, Leningradsky Prospekt 125178 Moscou Russia Baltorpbakken 14 DK - 2750 Ballerup Denmark Fallerovo Setaliste 22 10000 Zagreb Croatia Tel.: +(7) 502 224 5050, 5033 and 5034 Fax: +(7) 502 224 5220 Tel.: +(45) 44 73 7888 Fax: +(45) 44 68 5255 Tel.: +(385) 1 367 100 Fax: +(385) 1 367 111 www.schneider-electric.dk
Nordic countries
b Schneider Electric A/S
East Adriatic countries
b Schneider Electric SA
North-America Zone b Schneider Electric

North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine IL 60067 USA Tel.: +(1) 847 397 2600 Fax: +(1) 847 925 7500 www.squared.com
South America & Caribbean Zone b Schneider Electric Emp. Partic.

Head Office Zone Avenida Brigadeiro Faria Lima 1478 15 A 01451-913 So Paulo-SP Brazil Tel.: +(55) 11 816 45 00 Fax: +(55) 11 813 09 43 Fax: Fax: www.schneider.com.br
Pacific Zone b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2, Solent Circuit

Limited Norwest Business Park NSW 2153 Baulkham Hill Australia Tel.: +(61) 298 51 28 00 Fax: +(61) 296 29 83 10 www.schneider.com.au
Subsidiaries and partners b NUM SA

21, avenue Marchal Foch - BP 68 95101 Argenteuil Cedex France Breslauer Strae 7 77933 Lahr Allemagne Industriestr. 12 D-82194 Grbenzell Allemagne Tel. : +33 (0)1 34 23 66 66 Fax : +33 (0)1 34 23 67 82 Tel. : +49 (0)78 21 946 02 Fax : +49 (0)78 21 946 220 Tel. : +49 (0)8142-503 0 Fax : +49 (0)8142-503 190 www.num.com
b SIG Positec Automation GmbH
www.sig-positec.de
b Phytron Electronik GmbH
www.phytron.com
9/19
Community regulations and protective treatment
Community regulations
European Directives The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states. European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union. Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, to withdraw any conflicting regulations. The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned, only set objectives, called general requirements. The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to his equipment. As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to his product. e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant. The significance of e marking b e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certies that his product conforms to the relevant European Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the European Union. b e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation.
For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use, and only a guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure a high level of quality. One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular :
b The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC : e marking under the terms of this Directive could not be applied before 1 January 1995 and is compulsory as of 1 January 1997. b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC : e marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1 January 1996.
Protective treatment of equipment

Premium and Quantum PLCs meet the requirements of TC treatment (1). For installations in industrial production workshops or in an environment which corresponds to TH treatment (2), Premium PLCs should be enclosed in casings with a minimum of IP 54 protection as prescribed by standards IEC 664 and NF C 20 040. Premium and Quantum PLCs are supplied with an IP 20 protection index. They can therefore be installed without enclosure in locations with restricted access which do not exceed pollution degree 2 (control room which does not contain a machine or dustproducing activity).
(1) TC treatment : all climate treatment. (2) TH treatment : treatment for hot and humid environments.
Copyright Schneider Automation 2001. All rights reserved. No part of this work may be translated and/or reproduced or copied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information retrieval system. All software quoted in this document is the property of Schneider Automation, or a third party which has granted rights to Schneider Automation. The supply of such software confers a non-exclusive licence on the recipient to use such software solely for the purpose for which it was supplied. Any copying of such software, etc. (except solely for the purpose of producing back-up and security copies) is totally forbidden. All products, hardware, software and services shown in this document are subject to modification and change without notice. Any descriptions or specifications given herein shall not be capable as being interpreted as part of or a condition of any contract relative to such product, software or service. Concept, Lexium, Modbus, Mosbus Plus, Monitor, Uni-Telway, Uni-TE are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation. Magelis, Modicon, NUM, Telefast, Telemecanique, XBT are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. All other products and brands quoted in this document are registered trademarks of their respective holders.
9/20
www.schneiderautomation.com
Schneider Electric Industries SA
Printed in US
*A U T C 1 0 1 3 5 2 1 2 6 E N*
October 2001

28 PLC Quantum

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

28 PLC Quantum

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

<< Back

Quantum automation platform

Building a New Electric World

Modicon Telemecanique Quantum PLC platform

Quantum Automation platform Backplanes pages 1/8 and 1/9

Selection guide pages 1/2 and1/3

Selection guide pages 1/2 and 1/3

Selection guide pages 1/14 and 1/15

Quantum CPUs pages 1/10 to 1/13

Power supply pages 1/16 to 1/19

Discrete I/O pages 2/12 to 2/39

Application specific modules

Selection guide pages 3/2 and 3/3

Selection guide pages 3/20 and 3/21

Analog I/O modules pages 3/4 to 3/19

Intrinsically safe I/O modules pages 3/22 to 3/33

I/O architectures, hot standby solution and Momentum I/O

I/O architectures pages 4/2 to 4/19

Hot standby solution pages 4/20 to 4/23

Momentum I/O pages 4/28 to 4/67

Ethernet cable system pages 5/24 to 5/29

Operator dialogue terminals

Selection guide pages 7/2 and 7/3

Magelis display units and terminals pages 7/6 and 7/15

Quantum Automation Platform

Quantum Automation Platform

Power supply selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1/14 and 1/15

Quantum Automation Platform

On-board communication ports

1 Modbus 1 Modbus Plus

On-board math coprocessor On-board processor clock speed

Intel 186 20 MHz

0.31.4 ms/ K ladder logic instructions

Maximum number of option interfaces supported

256 K bytes 256 K bytes 8 K bytes 10 K None

512 K bytes 256 K bytes 16 K bytes 10 K None

140 CPU 113 02

140 CPU 113 03

2 Modbus 1 Modbus Plus

Intel 486 DX 80 MHz

Intel 586 DX 133 MHz

0.1 ... 0.5 ms/K ladder logic instructions

0.09 ... 0.45 ms/K ladder logic instructions

2 M bytes 1 M bytes 64 Kbytes 57 K 96 Kbytes

4 M bytes 1 M bytes 64 K bytes 57 K 96 Kbytes

140 CPU 434 12A

140 CPU 534 14A

Quantum automation platform

Quantum automation platform

984 Ladder Logic

Quantum automation platform

1/ module typical, 2 /module for the MMS modules

80 1000, 10 V/m 2, shield-to-ground

Shock Flammability Free fall

UL 508 CSA 22.2-142 Factory Mutual, Class I, Div 2 CE

Optional conformal coating Quantum automation platform

Salt mist (non-operating)

Temperature cycling (operating)

Temperature cycling (operating)

Quantum automation platform

Quantum automation platform

140 XCP 402 00